JP2021062304A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To enhance interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a display screen for displaying an image, and can execute a variation straddle performance as a performance having continuity from the last of a current variation to the first of a next variation in the next variation when a pattern that is varying on the display screen is established and stopped. The variation straddle performance includes a performance for executing a specific performance in the next variation so as to continue after establishment and stop when a pattern varying on the display screen is established and stopped in a specific mode. In the meantime, when a pattern varying on the display screen stops tentatively in a specific mode, the specific performance can be executed in the variation so as to continue after the tentative stop.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 87

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

Conventionally, there is known a game machine capable of performing a display effect using a display device when a game ball wins a prize at the start port (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

In such a game machine, it is possible to perform a display effect using a character image, a pattern, or the like.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-202930 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-198339 Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-182376

However, even with the above-mentioned game machines, there is still room for improvement in the technology for improving the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the above-mentioned problems, and can be realized as the following application example. It should be noted that the reference numerals and supplementary explanations in parentheses in this column indicate the correspondence with the embodiments described later in order to assist the understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention in any way. ..

[Application example 1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images
When the fluctuating symbol is fixedly stopped on the display screen, it is possible to execute a fluctuation straddling effect which is an effect having continuity from the end of the current variation to the beginning of the next variation in the next variation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 2]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 1.
The variable straddling effect includes an effect of executing a specific effect in the next variation so as to be continuous with the fixed stop when the fluctuating symbol on the display screen is fixedly stopped in a specific mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 3]
The gaming machine described in Application Example 2
When the fluctuating symbol on the display screen is temporarily stopped in the specific mode, the specific effect can be executed in the fluctuation so as to be continuous with the temporary stop.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 4]
The gaming machine according to any one of application examples 1 to 3.
The fluctuation straddling effect includes a hold continuation effect that takes over the hold change of the change icon in the next change when the change icon displayed in the change area is on hold.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 5]
The gaming machine according to the application example 4.
In the hold continuation effect, when the change icon is held and changed to the first hold mode, the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area in the next change, and the change icon is moved to the change area. When becomes, the first holding mode is set, or the second holding mode is expected to shift to an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first holding mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Application example 6]
The gaming machine according to the application example 5.
When the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area, the change icon of the previous change remains in the change area, and the hold icon becomes the change icon of the previous change. Perform a colliding effect,
A game machine characterized by that.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a front view of a game machine. It is an enlarged view of the display. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the main control board side of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of the sub-control board side of a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the main ROM and the main RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating a sub ROM and a sub RAM. It is a figure for demonstrating various random numbers used in a game machine. It is a figure for demonstrating the determination tables T1 to T4. It is explanatory drawing of the jackpot type determination table T5. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the variation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. It is explanatory drawing of the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. It is explanatory drawing of the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. It is explanatory drawing of the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. It is a flowchart of a main control main process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing on the main side. It is a flowchart of a start port sensor detection process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart of the preliminary determination process. FIG. 1 is a flowchart of a preliminary determination process. It is a flowchart of a normal operation process. It is a flowchart of special operation processing. It is a flowchart of a special symbol standby process. It is a flowchart of a jackpot determination process. It is a 1st flowchart of a variation pattern selection process. It is a 2nd flowchart of the variation pattern selection process. It is a flowchart of the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart of a special symbol determination process. It is a flowchart of a game state management process. It is a flowchart of a game state reset process. It is a flowchart of special electric accessory processing. It is a flowchart of V opening / closing member operation processing. It is a flowchart of a game state setting process. It is a flowchart of V area sensor detection processing. It is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing. It is a flowchart which shows the sub-control main process. It is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart of the received command analysis process. It is a flowchart of a look-ahead effect determination process. It is a figure for demonstrating the structure of the pre-determination information storage area. It is explanatory drawing of the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. It is a flowchart of the variation effect start processing. It is explanatory drawing of the core production pattern determination table T52. It is explanatory drawing of the chance up production pattern determination table T53. It is a flowchart of the process during the variation production. It is a flowchart of a display control process. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the movement mode of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the 1st movable accessory 14. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the 2nd aspect of the 2nd movable accessory 15. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the 2nd aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. It is explanatory drawing which illustrated the display effect of the sub-display screen 64. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol duplication movement effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol duplication movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol duplication movement effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol sequential variation effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol sequential variation effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol sequential variation effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern special production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern special production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern special effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern alignment effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern alignment effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern alignment effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporary stop symbol movement effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporary stop symbol movement effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the temporary stop symbol movement effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation display effect A through a transparent area. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation display effect B through a transparent area. It is a figure for demonstrating the variation display effect C through a transparent area. It is a figure for demonstrating the rhythmical winning notification effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the rhythmical winning notification effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the rhythmical winning notification effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern competition production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern competition production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the decorative pattern competition production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the logo movement contact effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the logo movement contact effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the logo movement contact effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol count continuous effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol count continuous effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the symbol count continuous effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect pseudo-continuous production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect pseudo-continuous production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the specific aspect pseudo-continuous production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation straddling continuous production A. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation straddling continuous production B. It is a figure for demonstrating the fluctuation straddling continuous production C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon interlocking effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon interlocking effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold icon interlocking effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the special hold change effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the special hold change effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the special hold change effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold expectation degree effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold expectation degree effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the hold expectation degree effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means operation state notification effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means operation state notification effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating operation means operation state notification effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the load application effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the load application effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the load application effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state continuation suggestion effect A. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state continuation suggestion effect B. It is a figure for demonstrating the game state continuation suggestion effect C. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect A during a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect B during a game. It is a figure for demonstrating the mode change effect C during a game. It is a figure for demonstrating group notice production A. It is a figure for demonstrating group notice production B. It is a figure for demonstrating group notice effect C.

<First Embodiment>
1. 1. Structure of Game Machine FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1 as an embodiment of the present invention. In the following, the left-right direction of the game machine 1 will be described so as to match the left-right direction seen by the player facing the game machine 1. Further, the front direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the game machine 1 toward the player, and the rear direction of the game machine 1 will be described as a direction from the player toward the game machine 1.

The gaming machine 1 is a pachinko gaming machine that launches a game ball based on a player's firing operation, and when the game ball wins a prize in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. is there. The game machine 1 includes a game machine frame 50 and a game board 2, and the game board 2 is attached to the inside of the game machine frame 50. The game machine frame 50 includes a front frame (front frame portion) 53, an outer frame (base frame portion) forming an outer shell portion of the game machine, and an inner frame to which the game board 2 is attached inside the outer frame. I have. The front frame (front frame portion) 53 is a vertically rectangular unit arranged on the front side of the outer frame and the inner frame, and has a handle 60, a ball striking plate (upper plate) 61, and a surplus ball tray (lower plate). ) 62, the effect button 63, the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U), the sword member 65, the frame lamp 66, the speaker 67, and the like. It includes a frame movable body 69 and. An opening is formed in the center of the front frame 53, and the game area 3 of the game board 2 can be visually recognized through the opening.

The handle 60 is arranged at the lower end on the right side of the front frame 53, and launches the game ball with a firing intensity according to the rotation angle. On the right side and the left side of the handle 60, a movable frame movable body 69 (also referred to as a frame movable accessory 69), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The frame movable body 69 is configured so that two members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60 can be moved in the left-right direction. Each of the two members is formed of a flexible flat plate-like member, and is configured such that the main surface approaches or moves away from the handle 60. Normally, the frame movable body 69 is stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60 on the left side and the right side of the handle 60, and moves (advances) so as to approach each other from the retracted position toward the handle 60. ), And can stand still at the position where it touches the handle 60. When the frame movable body 69 is in the advanced position, the frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60.

The hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61 is provided below the front frame 53 and stores game balls. The surplus ball receiving plate (lower plate) 62 is arranged below the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and stores game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hitting ball supply plate 61. The effect button 63 is an operation unit arranged in the vicinity of the hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 61, and is operated (pressed) by the player at the time of the effect executed as the game progresses. A vibration motor is arranged inside the effect button 63, and the button itself is configured to vibrate up, down, left, and right according to the effect and the like. The sword member 65 is an operation unit that imitates the shape of a sword, and can be pushed downward by the player during a production or the like that is executed as the game progresses. The sword member 65 is configured to be able to perform a first operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 downward and a second operation of pushing the entire sword member 65 upward. The sub display screen 64 is a screen of the liquid crystal display device, and includes a right sub display screen 64R, a left sub display screen 64L, and an upper sub display screen 64U. The right sub display screen 64R is provided on the right side of the front frame 53, the left sub display screen 64L is provided on the left side of the front frame 53, and the upper sub display screen 64U is provided on the upper side of the front frame 53. The right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L are arranged at a paired position via the game board 2. The upper sub display screen 64U is arranged above the game board 2. The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U are arranged so as to surround the opening of the front frame 53. The sub-display screen 64 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The frame lamp 66 includes a right frame lamp and a left frame lamp, and is arranged above the front frame 53 to produce light emission during a game or the like. The right frame lamp is an oblique linear light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the right sub display screen 64R. The left frame lamp is an oblique linear light emitting unit arranged between the upper sub display screen 64U and the left sub display screen 64L. The speakers 67 are arranged on the upper left and upper right of the front frame 53 to produce sound during a game or the like.

The game board 2 includes a game area 3, a rail member 4, a board lamp 5, an image display device 7, a first board movable body 14, a second board movable body 15, and a fixed winning device (navel) 19. , Ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22, gate (through chucker) 28, first big winning device (first attacker) 31, second big winning device (second attacker) 36, big winning opening open It includes a starting port 17, a general winning port 27 (ordinary winning port 27), an out port 16, and indicators 40.

The game area 3 is an area in which the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 flows down, and a plurality of game nails for guiding the game ball are projected. The rail member 4 is arranged at the left end of the game area 3 and guides the game ball launched by the operation of the handle 60 toward the upper side of the game area 3. The board lamp 5 is arranged on the back side of the game area 3, and irradiates light from the back side of the game area 3. Here, a part of the panel lamp 5 is connected to the right frame lamp and the left frame lamp, and is configured so that the form and light emission are continuous.

The image display device 7 is provided near the center of the game area 3 and includes a display screen 7a. The image display device 7 may be a liquid crystal display device, or may be another image display device such as an organic EL display device, a plasma display, a projector, or a dot matrix. The display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has an effect symbol display area in which the effect symbols (decorative symbols) 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed (also referred to as variable display), and a hold image display in which the hold images 9A and 9B are displayed. It has an area and a reserved digested image display area (the reserved display area) on which the reserved digested image 9C is displayed. The hold images 9A and 9B are images representing hold, and are also referred to as hold icons 9A and 9B. The hold digestion image 9C is an image representing the hold, and is also referred to as the hold image 9C, the hold icon 9C, the change icon 9C, and the change icon 9C. The hold icon 9C may also be simply referred to as a hold icon.

The effect symbol display area includes three symbol display areas of "left", "middle", and "right". The left effect symbol (left decorative symbol) 8L is displayed in the symbol display area on the left. A medium effect symbol (intermediate decorative symbol) 8C is displayed in the symbol display area inside. The right effect symbol (right decorative symbol) 8R is displayed in the symbol display area on the right. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are composed of a plurality of symbols representing numbers from "1" to "9", for example. The variable display of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which will be described later. The image display device 7 has the first special symbol and the first special symbol displayed by the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, depending on the combination of the effect symbols displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas. The result of the variable display of the second special symbol (big hit lottery result) can be displayed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player.

For example, when a big hit is won, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed with doublet such as "777". If it is out of alignment, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed at a random number such as "637". This makes it easier for the player to grasp the progress of the game. The player can grasp the jackpot lottery result by the first special symbol display 41a, the second special symbol display 41b, and the image display device 7. The position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. Further, the variation display of the effect symbol may be a mode of scrolling in the vertical direction or another mode. What kind of combination of effect symbols is stopped and displayed according to each lottery result is not limited to the above, and can be arbitrarily set. Hereinafter, the effect of displaying the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is also referred to as "variable effect of the effect symbol", "variable effect of the decorative symbol", or simply "variable effect" and "variable display". In the variation effect of the decorative symbol, the effect in the period from the start of the variation of the special symbol to the stop (also referred to as the special symbol variation period) is counted as one variation effect (one cycle of variation effect). Therefore, even if the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped during the period from the start of the change of the special symbol to the stop, the effect of the temporary stop is included in the variation effect of the decorative symbol.

The image display device 7 can display on the display screen 7a a jackpot effect performed in parallel with the jackpot game (an example of a special game), a demo effect for waiting for customers, and the like, in addition to the effect symbol variation effect. In the effect symbol variation effect, in addition to the effect symbol, an effect image such as a background image or a character image may be displayed. Further, the image display device 7 can indicate that the special symbol is changing or the lottery result of the special symbol in addition to the effect symbol (fourth symbol, not shown). May be displayed on the display screen 7a. The identification display (fourth symbol) may be displayed by a light emitter such as an LED provided in the game area 3.

The reserved image display area displays a first reserved display area for displaying the reserved image 9A according to the number of stored images of the first special figure reserved, which will be described later, and a reserved image 9B according to the number of stored images for the second special figure reserved, which will be described later. Includes a second hold display area. By displaying the reserved images 9A and 9B, the number of stored first special figure hold displayed on the first special figure hold indicator 43a, which will be described later, and the second special figure hold displayed on the second special figure hold indicator 43b. The number of memories of can be displayed to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. The reserved digestion image display area includes a reserved digestion display area for displaying the reserved digestion image 9C. The hold digestion image 9C corresponds to the effect symbols (effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R) currently changing on the display screen 7a or the display screen 7b, and depending on the display of the hold digestion image 9C, the first special symbol hold or the first special symbol is reserved. 2 It is possible to display to the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special figure hold is digested (“digestion of the special figure hold” described later).

On the left side of the image display device 7, a movable first board movable body 14 (also referred to as a first movable accessory 14), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The first movable accessory 14 is configured such that a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front (front surface) of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7, and moves (advances) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a to display the display screen 7a. It can stand still at any advance position in front of. The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, and covers a part of the image display device 7 from the upper side to the lower side at the advanced position.

On the upper side of the image display device 7, a movable second board movable body 15 (also referred to as a second movable accessory 15), which is a movable so-called gimmick, is provided. The second movable accessory 15 is configured such that a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO" can be moved in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position.

A stage portion 11 is formed in the lower portion of the image display device 7. The stage portion 11 has a shape capable of guiding a game ball rolling on the upper surface of the stage portion 11 to the first starting port 20, which will be described later. A warp portion 12 is provided at the lower left of the image display device 7. The warp portion 12 includes an inlet portion into which the game ball flows in and an outlet portion in which the game ball flows out, and the game ball flowing in from the entrance portion is discharged from the outlet portion to the stage portion 11.

The fixed winning device (navel) 19 is arranged below the image display device 7 in the game area 3, and the first starting opening (first starting winning opening, first winning ball) in which the ease of entering the game ball does not always change. It is provided with a port (fixed start port) 20. The winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for the lottery (big hit lottery) of the first special symbol. In other words, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 is an opportunity for acquiring a jackpot random number or the like and determining a jackpot.

The ordinary variable winning device (electric chew) 22 is arranged below the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and includes a second starting opening (second starting winning opening, second entry opening, variable starting opening) 21. ing. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 21 is an opportunity for the second special symbol lottery (big hit lottery). The electric chew 22 is provided with a movable member 23 in front of the second starting port 21, and the second starting port 21 is opened and closed by the operation of the movable member 23. The movable member 23 is driven by an electric chew solenoid 24 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state. The electric chew 22 only needs to be easier to enter the second starting port 21 when the movable member 23 is in the open state than when it is in the closed state, and the second starting port 21 is required when the movable member 23 is in the closed state. It may be possible to enter the ball.

The gate (through chucker) 28 is arranged above the first big winning device (first attacker) 31 in the game area 3, and is configured so that the game ball can pass through. The passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for a normal symbol lottery to decide whether or not to open the electric chew 22. In other words, the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 is an opportunity for acquiring a normal symbol random number (hit random number) and determining a hit.

Here, the "special symbol lottery" means that when a game ball wins a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, a random number for determining a special symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is predetermined. A process of determining whether or not a jackpot is a big hit by comparing it with a value corresponding to the "big hit". The lottery result of this "big hit" is not immediately notified to the player, but the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 41a or the second special symbol display 41b, which will be described later, and a predetermined variation is displayed. When the time has passed, the special symbol corresponding to the lottery result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), and the player is notified of the lottery result. In the image display device 7, a symbol matching game is played in which the effect symbol is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol, and the symbol matching game more effectively notifies the player of the lottery result of the big hit.

Further, in the "ordinary symbol lottery", when the game ball passes through the gate 28, a random number for determining the ordinary symbol is acquired, and the acquired random number is compared with a value corresponding to a predetermined "hit". By doing so, it refers to a process of determining whether or not a hit is made. Regarding the lottery result of this ordinary symbol, the lottery result is not immediately notified when the game ball passes through the gate 28, and the ordinary symbol display 42, which will be described later, displays the variation of the ordinary symbol and determines the predetermined variation. When the time has passed, the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is confirmed (lit or turned off), and the player is notified of the lottery result.

The first big winning device (first attacker, first special variable winning device) 31 is arranged on the upper right side of the first starting opening 20 in the game area 3, and is arranged with the first big winning opening (first special winning opening) 30. , V region 39, non-V region 70, and V opening / closing member 71. The first large winning opening 30 includes an opening / closing member (first special winning opening opening / closing member) 32 that allows or hinders the acceptance of game balls by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 32 is driven by the first large winning opening solenoid 33 (FIG. 3). A game ball can enter the first large winning opening 30 when the opening / closing member 32 is in the open state.

The first large winning device 31 internally includes a V region (specific region) 39, a V region sensor 39a (FIG. 3), a non-V region (non-specific region) 70, and a non-V region sensor 70a (FIG. 3). The first large winning opening sensor 30a (FIG. 3), the V opening / closing member 71, and the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 (FIG. 3) are provided. The V region (specific region) 39 and the non-V region (non-specific region) 70 are configured as regions inside the first prize winning device 31 through which a game ball that has passed through the first prize opening 30 can pass. .. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is arranged upstream of the V region 39 and the non-V region 70, and detects the winning of the game ball into the first large winning opening 30. The V region sensor 39a is arranged in the V region 39 and detects the passage of the game ball into the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is arranged in the non-V region 70 and detects the passage of the game ball into the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member 71 distributes the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71. The V opening / closing member 71 is configured to rotate (clockwise and counterclockwise with respect to the game board 2), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the V opening / closing member 71 rotates counterclockwise from the origin position to rotate the game ball. It is in the first state (rotational state) of distributing to the V region 39, and is in the second state (stopped state) of distributing the game ball to the non-V area 70 located at the origin when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized. .. The V opening / closing member 71 is not limited to the rotational movement, and may have a function of distributing the game ball that has passed through the first winning opening 30 to either the V region 39 or the non-V region 70. It may be configured to move in the left-right direction with respect to the game board 2. That is, when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is energized, the game ball is distributed to the V region 39 (first state), and when the V opening / closing member solenoid 73 is not energized, the game ball is distributed to the non-V region 70. (Second state) may be configured. In the game machine 1, the passage of the game ball into the V region 39 triggers the transition to the high probability state described later. That is, the V region 39 is a probability variation operation port. On the other hand, the non-V region 70 is not a probabilistic operating port. The first prize-winning device 31 of the present embodiment further includes a first prize-winning device discharge sensor (not shown) that counts the number of game balls discharged from the first prize-winning device 31. The first large winning device discharge sensor is provided at a point where the V region 39 and the non-V region 70 meet downstream, and counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V region sensor 39a or the non-V region sensor 70a.

The second big winning device (second attacker, second special variable winning device) 36 is arranged on the upper right side of the first big winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the second big winning opening (second special winning opening) 35. It has. The second large winning opening 35 includes an opening / closing member (second special winning opening opening / closing member, movable member) 37 that hinders or allows acceptance of a game ball by a swing-type opening / closing operation. The opening / closing member 37 is driven by the second large winning opening solenoid 38 (FIG. 3). The second large winning opening 35 allows a game ball to enter when the opening / closing member 37 is in the open state.

The large winning opening opening opening 17 is arranged above the first large winning opening 30 in the game area 3, and the first large winning opening 30 is opened when the game ball passes through. However, the game machine 1 does not have to include the large winning opening opening opening 17.

The general winning opening 27 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3. The out port 16 is provided in the lower part of the game area 3, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is discharged to the outside of the game area 3. The indicators 40 are arranged near the center on the right side of the game board 2. Details of the indicators 40 will be described later. The general winning opening 29 is located at the lower right of the game area 3 and adjacent to the right side of the first large winning opening 30.

The game area 3 includes a left game area 3A on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and a right game area 3B on the right side. The method of firing the game ball so that the game ball flows down in the left game area 3A is called "left-handed hit". On the other hand, a method of launching a game ball so that the game ball flows down in the right game area 3B is called "right-handed". In the game machine 1, it is possible to aim for a prize in the first starting port 20 by hitting left. On the other hand, it is configured so that it is possible to pass through the gate 28 by hitting right, and to win a prize in the second starting opening 21, the first big winning opening 30, and the second big winning opening 35.

FIG. 2 is an enlarged view of the display devices 40. The indicators 40 include a first special symbol indicator 41a, a second special symbol indicator 41b, a normal symbol indicator 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, and a second special symbol hold indicator 43b. , The general figure hold indicator 44, and the like. The first special symbol display 41a variably displays the first special symbol. The second special symbol display 41b variably displays the second special symbol. The normal symbol display 42 variably displays the normal symbol. The first special figure hold indicator 43a displays the number of stored operations of the first special symbol display 41a (first special figure hold). The second special figure hold indicator 43b displays the number of stored operations of the second special symbol display 41b (second special figure hold). The normal figure hold indicator 44 displays the number of stored operation hold (normal figure hold) of the normal symbol display 42. The variable display of the first special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The variable display of the second special symbol is performed when the game ball is won in the second starting port 21. Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are also collectively referred to as "special symbol". Further, the first special symbol display 41a and the second special symbol display 41b are also collectively referred to as "special symbol display 41". Further, the first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special figure holding indicator 43b are also collectively referred to as "special figure holding indicator 43".

The special symbol display 41 displays a special symbol (identification information) in a variable manner (variable display) and then stops and displays a lottery based on winning a prize in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 (lottery per special symbol). , Big hit lottery) results will be notified. The stop-displayed special symbol (stop symbol, special symbol derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one special symbol selected from a plurality of types of special symbols by a special symbol lottery. If the stop symbol is a special symbol (big hit symbol) in a predetermined jackpot stop mode, the first jackpot 30 will have an open pattern according to the type of jackpot symbol (type of winning jackpot) displayed as a stop. Alternatively, a special game (big hit game) that opens the second big winning opening 35 is performed. The opening pattern of the large winning openings (first large winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) in the special game will be described later.

The special symbol display 41 is composed of eight LEDs arranged side by side, and displays a special symbol according to the result of a lottery per special symbol depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, if you win a jackpot (one of the multiple types of jackpots described below), you will see "○○ ●● ○○ ●●" (○: lit, ●: off) from the left, 1 and 2. , The 5th and 6th LEDs are lit to display the jackpot symbol. If there is a loss, a lost pattern such as "●●●●●●● ○" is displayed, in which only the LED on the far right is lit. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a lost symbol. Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol is variablely displayed (variable display) over a predetermined variable time. In the variable display mode, for example, each LED may be turned on so that light repeatedly flows from left to right. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when a game ball is won (winning) in the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21, the value (numerical information) of various random numbers such as the jackpot random number acquired for the winning is , It is temporarily stored in the special figure reservation storage area 85 (FIG. 5). Specifically, if the winning is to the first starting port 20, it is stored in the first special figure holding storage area 85a (FIG. 5) as the first special figure holding, and if the winning is to the second starting port 21. , It is stored in the second special figure reservation storage area 85b (FIG. 5) as the second special figure reservation. There is an upper limit to the number of special figure reservations that can be stored in each special figure reservation storage area 85, and the upper limit value in the present embodiment is the upper limit value for both the first special figure reservation storage area 85a and the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, respectively. There are four. The special figure hold stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is digested when the special symbol can be variably displayed based on the special figure hold. "Digestion of special figure hold" means to determine a jackpot random number or the like corresponding to the special figure hold and execute variable display of a special symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the special symbol based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 20 or the second starting port 21 cannot be performed immediately after the winning, that is, the variable display of the special symbol is executed. Even if a prize is won during the middle or special game, the right to the jackpot lottery for the prize can be reserved up to a predetermined number. The number of special figure hold indicators is displayed on the special figure hold indicator 43. The first special figure holding indicator 43a and the second special drawing holding indicator 43b are each composed of, for example, four LEDs. Each special figure hold indicator 43 displays the number of special figure hold by turning on the LED as many as the number of special figure hold.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed when the game ball passes through the gate 28. The normal symbol display 42 notifies the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 by displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner (variable display) and then stopping the display. The normal symbol that is stopped and displayed (normal symbol, normal symbol that is derived and displayed as a display result of variable display) is one ordinary symbol selected from a plurality of types of ordinary symbols by the ordinary symbol lottery. When the normal symbol is a predetermined specific normal symbol (ordinary symbol in a predetermined stop mode, that is, a normal hit symbol), an auxiliary game in which the second start port 21 is opened in an opening pattern according to the current gaming state. Is done. The opening pattern of the second starting port 21 will be described later.

The ordinary symbol display 42 is composed of two LEDs, and displays ordinary symbols according to the result of the ordinary symbol lottery depending on the lighting mode thereof. For example, when the lottery result is a win, a normal hit symbol in which both LEDs are lit is displayed, such as "○○" (○: on, ●: off). If the lottery result is lost, a normal lost symbol such as "● ○" in which only the right LED is lit is displayed. A mode in which all the LEDs are turned off may be adopted as a normal loss pattern. Before the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, the normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner over a predetermined fluctuation time. In the variable display mode, for example, both LEDs may be turned on alternately. The mode of the variable display is not limited to the above mode as long as each LED is not stopped and displayed (lighting display in a specific mode), and any lighting mode can be used. For example, in the variable display mode, all the LEDs may blink at the same time.

In the game machine 1, when the game ball passes through the gate 28, the value of the normal symbol random number (hit random number) acquired for the passage is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86 (FIG. 5) as the normal symbol hold. It will be memorized once. There is an upper limit to the number of normal figure reservations that can be stored in the normal figure reservation storage area 86, and the upper limit value in this embodiment is four. The normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area 86 is digested when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the normal figure hold becomes possible. The digestion of the normal symbol hold means to determine the normal symbol random number (hit random number) corresponding to the normal symbol hold and execute the variable display of the normal symbol to show the determination result. Therefore, in the game machine 1, when the variable display of the normal symbol based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 28 cannot be performed immediately after the passage, that is, the prize is won during the execution of the variable display of the normal symbol or the execution of the auxiliary game. Even if there is, the right of ordinary symbol lottery for passing the predetermined number can be reserved up to the predetermined number. The number of the normal figure hold is displayed on the normal figure hold indicator 44. The normal figure hold indicator 44 is composed of, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of normal figure hold by turning on the LEDs as many as the number of the normal figure hold.

2. Electrical configuration of the game machine The electrical configuration of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 and 4. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the main control board side of the game machine 1. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration on the sub-control board side of the game machine 1. The game machine 1 includes a main control board 80 (FIG. 3), a sub control board 90 (FIG. 4), an image control board 100 (FIG. 4), a lamp control board 107 (FIG. 4), and a voice control board 106 (FIG. 4). FIG. 4) and a payout control board 110 (FIG. 3) are provided. The main control board 80 is a game control board that controls game profits such as a jackpot lottery and a transition of a game state, and constitutes a main control unit. The sub-control board 90 is an effect control board that controls the effect to be executed as the game progresses, and constitutes a sub-control unit together with the image control board 100, the lamp control board 107, and the voice control board 106. The sub control unit can be configured as long as it includes at least the sub control board 90.

The main control board 80 includes a game control microcomputer 81 and an input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the main control board 80, and controls the progress of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a main ROM 83 that stores a program for controlling the progress of the game, a main RAM 84 that is used as a work memory, and a main CPU 82 that executes a program stored in the main ROM 83. Includes. The details of the data stored in the main ROM 83 and the details of the storage area provided in the main RAM 84 will be described later. The main ROM 83 may be configured as an external ROM. The game control microcomputer 81 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 87. The input / output circuit 87 may be built in the game control microcomputer 81.

Various sensors and solenoids are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87 and the relay board 88. The main control board 80 inputs signals output from each sensor and outputs signals to each solenoid. The sensors connected via the relay board 88 include a large winning opening opening start sensor 17a, a first starting opening sensor 20a, a second starting opening sensor 21a, a gate sensor 28a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, and a first Examples thereof include two major winning opening sensors 35a, a V region sensor 39a, a non-V region sensor 70a, and ordinary winning opening sensors 27a and 29a. Examples of the solenoids connected via the relay board 88 include an electric chew solenoid 24, a first special winning opening solenoid 33, a second special winning opening solenoid 38, and a V opening / closing member solenoid 73. The large winning opening open start opening sensor 17a is provided inside the large winning opening open start opening 17, and detects a game ball that has entered the large winning opening open start opening 17. The first start port sensor 20a is provided inside the first start port 20, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first start port 20. The second start port sensor 21a is provided inside the second start port 21, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second start port 21. The gate sensor 28a is provided inside the gate 28 and detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 28. The first large winning opening sensor 30a is provided inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the first large winning opening 30. The second large winning opening sensor 35a is provided inside the second large winning opening 35, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the second large winning opening 35. The V region sensor 39a is provided in the V region 39 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the V region 39. The non-V region sensor 70a is provided in the non-V region 70 inside the first large winning opening 30, and detects a game ball that has passed through the non-V region 70. The ordinary winning opening sensor 27a is provided inside the ordinary winning opening 27, and detects a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary winning opening 27. The normal winning opening sensor 29a detects a game ball that has passed through the inside of the normal winning opening 29. The electric chew solenoid 24 drives the movable member 23 of the electric chew 22. The first prize-winning port solenoid 33 drives the opening / closing member 32 of the first prize-winning device 31. The second prize-winning port solenoid 38 drives the opening / closing member 37 of the second prize-winning device 36. The V opening / closing member solenoid 73 drives the V opening / closing member 71 of the first prize-winning device 31.

The indicators 40 are connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The game control microcomputer 81 includes a first special symbol display 41a, a second special symbol display 41b, a normal symbol display 42, a first special symbol hold indicator 43a, a second special symbol hold indicator 43b, and a normal symbol display. Display control for the display 44 is performed.

The payout control board 110 is connected to the main control board 80 via the input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the payout control board 110, and receives signals from the payout control board 110 for payout monitoring. The prize ball payout device 120, the ball rental ball payout device 130, and the card unit 135 are connected to the payout control board 110, and the launch device 112 is connected via the launch control circuit 111. The prize ball payout device 120 pays out the prize balls. The payout control board 110 drives the prize ball motor 121 of the prize ball payout device 120 to pay out the prize balls based on the signal from the game control microcomputer 81. The prize balls to be paid out are detected by the prize ball sensor 122 for counting. The ball rental payout device 130 pays out the ball rental. The payout control board 110 drives the ball lending motor 131 of the ball lending device 130 to pay out the ball lending based on the signal from the card unit 135 connected to the game machine 1. The ball lending to be paid out is detected by the ball lending sensor 132 for counting. The card unit 135 is arranged adjacent to the game machine 1 and outputs information regarding ball lending based on information such as an inserted prepaid card. The launcher 112 includes a handle 60 (FIG. 1), a launch motor 113, a touch switch 114, and a launch volume 115. When the player operates the handle 60, the launcher 112 detects the contact of the handle 60 with the touch switch 114 and detects the amount of rotation of the handle 60 with the launch volume 115. Then, the launch motor 113 is driven so that the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the magnitude of the detection signal of the launch volume 115.

A sub control board 90 (FIG. 4) is connected to the main control board 80 via an input / output circuit 87. The main control board 80 transmits various commands to the sub control board 90. The connection between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90 is a unidirectional communication connection capable of only transmitting a signal from the main control board 80 to the sub control board 90. That is, a unidirectional circuit (for example, a circuit using a diode) (not shown) as a communication direction regulating means is interposed between the main control board 80 and the sub control board 90.

The sub-control board 90 includes an effect control microcomputer 91 and an input / output circuit 95. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the sub control board 90, and controls the effect of the game of the game machine 1 according to a program. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a sub ROM 93 that stores a program or the like for controlling the effect as the game progresses, a sub RAM 94 that is used as a work memory, and a sub that executes a program stored in the sub ROM 93. The CPU 92 and the like are included. The details of the data stored in the sub ROM 93 and the details of the storage area provided in the sub RAM 94 will be described later. The sub ROM 93 may be configured as an external ROM. The effect control microcomputer 91 transmits / receives data to / from another board or the like via an input / output circuit (I / O port unit) 95. The input / output circuit 95 may be built in the effect control microcomputer 91. The image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are connected to the sub control board 90 via the input / output circuit 95.

The image control board 100 includes an image control microcomputer 101, an input circuit 105a, and an output circuit 105b. The image control microcomputer 101 is a one-chip microcomputer mounted on the image control board 100, and controls the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 according to a program. The image control microcomputer 101 includes a CPU 102, a ROM 103, and a RAM 104. In addition to the program for performing display control, the ROM 103 contains still image data and moving image data displayed on the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64, specifically, characters, items, figures, characters, numbers and symbols. Etc. (including production symbols) and image data such as background images are stored. The RAM 104 is used as a memory for expanding image data. The CPU 102 executes the program stored in the ROM 103. The effect control microcomputer 91 causes the image control microcomputer 101 to control the display of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The image control microcomputer 101 reads image data from the ROM 103 based on a command from the effect control microcomputer 91, and performs display control based on the read image data.

A speaker 67 is connected to the voice control board 106, and the effect control microcomputer 91 receives voice, music, and sound effects from the speaker 67 via the voice control board 106 based on a command received from the main control board 80. Etc. are output. Acoustic data such as voice output from the speaker 67 is stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90. The voice control board 106 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be made to execute voice control based on a command. Further, the voice control board 106 may mount a ROM, or may store acoustic data in the ROM. Further, the speaker 67 may be connected to the image control board 100, and the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 may execute voice control. Further, the acoustic data may be stored in the ROM 103 of the image control board 100.

The frame lamp 66, the board lamp 5, the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 are connected to the lamp control board 107, and control these. .. The effect control microcomputer 91 controls the lighting of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 via the lamp control board 107 based on the command received from the main control board 80. That is, the effect control microcomputer 91 creates light emission pattern data (data that determines lighting / extinguishing, emission color, etc., also referred to as lamp data) that determines the light emission mode of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5. The light emission of lamps such as the frame lamp 66 and the panel lamp 5 is controlled according to the data. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 of the sub control board 90 is used to create the light emission pattern data. The effect control microcomputer 91 operates the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 based on the command received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 creates operation pattern data (drive data) that determines the operation modes of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69, and follows the operation pattern data. It controls the operations of the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69. The data stored in the sub ROM 93 is used to create the operation pattern data. The lamp control board 107 may be equipped with a CPU, and the CPU may be used to perform command-based lamp lighting control and operation control of the movable accessories 14 and 15. In this case, the lamp control board 107 may mount a ROM, and the ROM may store data related to a light emission pattern and an operation pattern.

An effect button detection switch 63a and a select button detection switch 68a are connected to the relay board 108. The effect button detection switch 63a detects that the effect button 63 (FIG. 1) has been pressed. When the effect button 63 is pressed, a switch signal is output from the effect button detection switch 63a to the sub control board 90 via the relay board 108. Further, a vibration motor is attached to the effect button detection switch 63a, which can be driven in response to a signal from the relay board 108 to vibrate the effect button 63. The select button detection switch 68a detects that the select button 68 has been pressed. In addition, a sword member detection switch for detecting that the sword member 65 has been investigated is also connected to the relay board 108.

3. 3. Data structure of the game machine The data structure of the game machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. FIG. 5A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the main ROM 83. FIG. 5B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the main RAM 84. FIG. 6A is a diagram for explaining a table stored in the sub ROM 93. FIG. 6B is a diagram for explaining a storage area provided in the sub RAM 94.

The main ROM 83 (FIG. 5 (A)) includes a jackpot determination table T1, a reach determination table T2, a normal symbol hit determination table T3, a normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, a jackpot type determination table T5, and a variation pattern. The determination table T6, the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7, the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8, and the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 are stored. These determination tables are referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) executed by the game control microcomputer 81. The specific contents of each determination table will be described later.

The main RAM 84 (FIG. 5B) includes a command set area 84a, a flag set area 84b, a counter set area 84c, a special operation status set area 84d, a special figure hold storage area 85, and a normal figure hold storage. A region 86 is provided. The command set area 84a is an area (output buffer) in which commands output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side are set in the main control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball count command, and the like. A fluctuation start command, a fluctuation stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, etc. are set. The flag set area 84b is an area in which a flag indicating the state of the game machine or the game state is set in the main control main process (described later), and is a jackpot flag, a jackpot end flag, a first winning flag, a second winning flag, and the like. The ceiling flag, V flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc. are set. The counter set area 84c is an area in which a counter used in the main control main process (described later) is set, and a random number counter, a round counter, a ceiling counter, a probability variation counter, a time reduction counter, and the like are set. The special operation status set area 84d is an area in which the status in the special operation process described later is set. The special figure reservation storage area 85 includes a first special figure reservation storage area 85a in which the first special figure reservation is stored and a second special figure reservation storage area 85b in which the second special figure reservation is stored. In the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, a random number value group (holding information) such as a random number per special symbol corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the first special figure reservation is stored. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area for storage are provided. In the second special figure reservation storage area 85b, the first random value group (holding information) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the second special figure reservation is stored. A storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided. The normal figure hold storage area 86 stores a random number value group (hold information) such as a normal symbol random number (per random number) corresponding to the first, second, third, and fourth pieces of the normal figure hold. A first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area are provided for the purpose. In addition to the above area, the main RAM 84 is set with a hit type set buffer in which special figure stop symbol data is set, and drive data for driving the movable accessories 14, 15 and the frame movable body 600. A drive data buffer or the like is provided. The information stored in the main RAM 84 is not cleared even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on, and is maintained as it is. That is, the status of the above commands, flags, counters, status information, and hold information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. On the other hand, the information stored in the main RAM 84 is reset by the ram clear of the game machine 1. When reset, the ceiling flag is set to "ON" and the other flags are set to "OFF" as the initial state of the flag. Further, as the initial state of the counter, "500" is set in the ceiling counter, and "0" is set in the other counters.

The sub ROM 93 (FIG. 6A) stores a look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51, a core effect pattern determination table T52, a chance-up effect pattern determination table T53, and a stop symbol pattern determination table T54. .. These determination tables are referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91 in the sub-control main process (described later) executed by the effect control microcomputer 91. The specific contents of each decision table will be described later.

The sub-RAM 94 (FIG. 6B) is provided with a command storage area 94a, an effect command set area 94b, a pre-determination information storage area 94c, and a counter set area 94d. The command storage area 94a is an area (input buffer) in which commands input from the main control unit side are stored in the sub-control main process (described later), and is a pre-judgment command, a hold ball number command, a fluctuation start command, and a fluctuation. A stop command, an opening command, a round designation command, an ending command, a game state designation command, a V passage command, a customer waiting wait command, and the like are stored. The effect command set area 94b is an area in which commands output from the sub control board 90 to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, the lamp control board 107, and the relay board 108 are set in the sub control main process (described later) (described later). Output buffer), and a variable effect start command, a variable effect pre-end command, a variable effect end command, an opening effect start command, a round effect start command, an ending effect start command, and the like are set. The pre-determination information storage area 94c stores pre-determination information in the sub-control main process (described later). The counter set area 94d is an area in which a counter used in the sub-control main process (described later) is set, and is a random number counter, a first special figure hold effect counter, a second special figure hold effect counter, and a normal figure hold effect counter. , Ceiling effect counter, evening effect counter, probability change effect counter, time saving effect counter, etc. are set. Of the information stored in the sub RAM 94, except for the evening-over effect counter, the information is not cleared and is maintained as it is even when the power of the game machine 1 is turned off and on. That is, the state of the above command, the counter other than the evening effect counter, and the pre-judgment information does not change even when the power is turned off and on, and the information is maintained. The evening-over effect counter is reset by turning the power of the game machine 1 off and on, and 0 is set as the initial state. The information stored in the sub RAM 94 is reset by the ram clear of the game machine 1. When reset, 500 is set in the ceiling effect counter and 0 is set in the other counters as the initial state of the counter.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining various random numbers used in the game machine 1. FIG. 7A shows a random number acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 on the main control unit side, and FIG. 7B shows a random number acquired by the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub control unit side. There is. The game control microcomputer 81 acquires a "big hit random number", a "big hit type random number", a "reach random number", a "variable pattern random number", and a "normal symbol random number (hit random number)" at a timing described later. It is configured as follows. The "big hit random number" is a random number used in a lottery (big hit determination) for whether or not it is a big hit, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 65535. The "big hit type random number" is a random number used for the lottery (big hit type determination) of the winning jackpot type, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "reach random number" is a random number used to determine whether or not to generate reach in the effect symbol variation effect indicating the result when the jackpot determination is lost, and is a value in the range of 0 to 127. Take. Reach is a state in which there is only one effect symbol that is variablely displayed among a plurality of effect symbols (decorative symbols), and it depends on which symbol the variable display effect symbol is stopped and displayed. It is a state (for example, a state of "7 ↓ 7") in which a combination of production symbols indicating a big hit is won. The effect symbol that is stopped and displayed in the reach state may be displayed as if it is shaking in the display screen 7a. The “variation pattern random number” is a random number used to determine a fluctuation pattern including a fluctuation time, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "ordinary symbol random number (winning random number)" is used for a lottery (ordinary symbol lottery) as to whether or not to perform an auxiliary game for opening the electric chew 22. The normal symbol random number takes a value in the range of 0 to 255. The "big hit random number", "big hit type random number", "reach random number", and "variable pattern random number" are acquired based on the entry into the starting port (first starting port 20 or second starting port 21). The random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the first starting port 20 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage area 85a, and the random number value group acquired based on the ball entering the second starting port 21 is stored. The second special figure is stored in the reserved storage area 85b. The "ordinary symbol random number (hit random number)" is acquired based on the passage of the gate 28. The acquired ordinary symbol random value is stored in the normal symbol hold storage area 86.

The effect control microcomputer 91 is configured to acquire a “look-ahead effect random number” and a “chance-up random number” at a timing described later. The “look-ahead effect random number” is a random number used to determine the look-ahead effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "chance-up random number" is a random number used to determine the chance-up effect at the time of the variable effect, and takes a value in the range of 0 to 127. The "look-ahead effect random number" is acquired based on the output of the pre-determination command from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value group is stored in the sub RAM 94. The "chance-up random number" is acquired based on the fact that the fluctuation start command is output from the main control unit side to the sub control unit side. The acquired random number value is stored in the sub RAM 94.

FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining the determination tables T1 to T4. FIG. 8A shows a diagram for explaining the jackpot determination table T1, FIG. 8B shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2, and FIG. 8C shows a diagram for explaining the reach determination table T2. Is shown a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol hit determination table T3, and FIG. 8D shows a diagram for explaining the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table T4.

The jackpot determination table T1 determines whether the jackpot random number value (any of 0 to 65535) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "big hit" or "loss". It is a table referred to for judgment. In FIG. 8A, when the jackpot random number value is “0 to 164” in the “normal probability state”, it is determined as “big hit” and the jackpot random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 164” (165 to 65535). ) ”, It is shown that it is judged as“ lost ”. Further, in the "high probability state", when the jackpot random number value is "0 to 649", it is determined as "big hit", and when the jackpot random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 649 (650 to 65535)". Is shown to be determined to be "missing". The contents of the "normal probability state" and the "high probability state" will be described later.

In the reach determination table T2, the reach random number value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "with reach" or "without reach". It is a table referred to for determining whether or not. In FIG. 8B, when the reach random number value is “0 to 13” in the “non-time saving state”, it is determined that there is “reach”, and the reach random number value is a numerical value other than “0 to 13” (14 to 13). In the case of "127)", it is shown that it is determined as "no reach". Further, in the "time saving state", when the reach random number value is "0 to 5", it is determined that there is "reach", and when the reach random number value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 5 (6 to 127)". Is shown to be determined as "no reach". The contents of the "time saving state" and the "non-time saving state" will be described later. In the reach determination table T2, the time-saving state is less likely to reach when lost than the non-time-saving state. This is to speed up the digestion speed of the special figure hold by selecting more non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time in the time saving state.

In the normal symbol hit determination table T3, the normal symbol random value (any of 0 to 255) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later) corresponds to "hit" or "miss". It is a table that is referred to to determine whether to do so. In FIG. 8C, when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 2" in the "non-time saving state", it is determined as "hit" and the normal symbol random value is a numerical value other than "0 to 2 (3). In the case of "~ 255)", it is shown that it is determined to be "missing". Further, in the "time saving state", when the normal symbol random value is "0 to 254", it is determined as "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is "a numerical value other than 0 to 254 (255)", it is determined. , It is shown that it is judged as "missing".

In the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4, the game control microcomputer 81 determines how many seconds the normal symbol variation time is in the main control main process (described later) according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state). The table referenced to do so. In FIG. 8D, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds" in the "non-time reduction state", and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" in the "time reduction state". Is shown.

FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining the jackpot type determination table T5. The jackpot type determination table T5 shows the "big hit type" and the "special symbol" according to the jackpot type random value (any of 0 to 127) acquired by the game control microcomputer 81 in the main control main process (described later). It is a table referred to for determining "type". In FIG. 9, when the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is won, if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 24", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the special figure The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) of 1 is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "25 to 49", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV scheduled passage jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 2". When the jackpot type random value is "50 to 55", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 3". When the jackpot type random value is "56 to 67", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 4". When the jackpot type random value is "68 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". On the other hand, when winning in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2), if the jackpot type random value is "0 to 82", the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV planned passing jackpot", and the jackpot type is determined to be "16RV passing jackpot". The stop symbol (special symbol stop symbol) is determined to be "big hit symbol 1". When the jackpot type random value is "83 to 127", the jackpot type is determined to be "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", and the special symbol stop symbol is determined to be "big hit symbol 5". By referring to the jackpot type determination table T5, the "special symbol stop symbol data" corresponding to the special symbol stop symbol, the "opening (OP) command", the "round designation command", and the "ending (ED)" of the special game "Command" can also be specified. About the specific contents of "16RV planned jackpot", "16R (real 15R) V scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" It will be described later.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the non-time saving state. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 in the time saving state. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 is a table referred to by the game control microcomputer 81 for determining the fluctuation pattern according to the fluctuation pattern random value (0 to 127) acquired in the main control main process (described later). .. In FIG. 10, for example, the first starting port 20 is won in a non-time saving state, the jackpot determination table T1 determines "missing", the reach determination table T2 determines "with reach", and the number of reserved balls is "1". ~ 2 ”, and when the fluctuation pattern random value is“ 0 to 60 ”, it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be“ P7 ”. In FIG. 11, for example, the second starting port 21 is won in a time-saving state, and the jackpot determination table T1 determines that the jackpot is "big hit", and the jackpot type determination table T5 determines that the jackpot is "16 RV passing jackpot". When is "0 to 10", it is shown that the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "P61". As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, if the fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation time is also determined. In addition, when it becomes a reach, it is also determined whether the reach becomes a normal reach or a super reach (SP reach). Super reach is a reach effect that has a longer fluctuation time after reach than normal reach. Here, five types of super reach (SP1, SP2, SP3, SP4, SP5) having different fluctuation times are set. In SP1 to 3, it is executed progressively through normal reach. The difference between SP1 to SP5 may be, for example, the presence or absence of a pseudo-ream.

FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7. The electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 according to the game state (non-time saving state or time saving state) in the main control main process (described later). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 12A, the opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is determined to be the “opening pattern 11” in the “non-time saving state”, and the opening pattern is determined to be the “opening pattern 12” in the “time saving state”. Is shown. FIG. 12B shows the contents of the opening pattern 11 and the opening pattern 12. In the opening pattern 11, the electric chew 22 is opened once, with an opening time of 0.2 seconds. In the opening pattern 12, the electric chew 22 is opened three times, each opening time is 2.0 seconds, and the interval (opening interval) is 1.0 second. However, the opening of the electric chew 22 is closed even if the opening time remains when a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of winnings, maximum of 10).

FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8. In the game control microcomputer 81, in the main control main process (described later), the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 has the first large winning opening 30 and the second large winning opening according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). It is a table referred to for determining the opening pattern of 35. In FIG. 13A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the first special winning opening 30 and the second special winning opening 35 is “opening pattern 21”. When the special symbol stop symbol data is "14H", "15H", and "22H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 22", and when the special symbol stop symbol data is "13H", the open pattern is released. It is shown that the pattern is determined to be "open pattern 23". FIG. 13B shows the contents of the opening pattern 21, the opening pattern 22, and the opening pattern 23. In the opening pattern 21, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and once at the 14th and 16th rounds. The second big winning opening 35 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds will be opened (long opening). In the opening pattern 22, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) once in the 1st to 13th rounds, and once in the 14th and 16th rounds, the opening time is set. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 15th round, the first big winning opening 30 is opened once for 0.1 seconds and the opening time is 0.1 seconds (short opening). .. In the opening pattern 23, the first large winning opening 30 with an opening time of 29.5 seconds is opened (long opening) at the 1st to 13th and 15th rounds, and the opening time is 1 at the 14th round. The second big winning opening 35 is opened for 0.1 seconds (short opening), and at the 16th round, the second big winning opening 35 is opened once and the opening time is 29.5 seconds (long opening). .. However, the opening of the 1st prize opening 30 and the 2nd prize opening 35 is possible even if the opening time remains if a predetermined number of game balls have been won (specified number of prizes, maximum 9). It will be closed.

FIG. 14 is a diagram for explaining the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9. The V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 is used by the game control microcomputer 81 to determine the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the main control main process (described later) according to the special figure stop symbol data (FIG. 9). This is the referenced table. In FIG. 14A, when the special figure stop symbol data is “11H”, “12H”, or “21H”, the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is determined to be “opening pattern 31”, and the special drawing stop symbol is determined. When the data is "13H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 32", and when the special figure stop symbol data is "14H", the open pattern is determined to be "open pattern 33", and the special symbol stop symbol data is When it is "15H" or "22H", it is shown that the opening pattern is determined to be "opening pattern 34". FIG. 14B shows the contents of the opening pattern 31, the opening pattern 32, the opening pattern 33, and the opening pattern 34. In the opening pattern 31, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 8th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 10th and 12th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 32, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the 8th and 10th rounds, when the first prize is won in the first large winning opening 30, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and when the second prize is won, the opening time is opened. The V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened for a maximum of 31.5 seconds. In the opening pattern 33, at the 2nd and 6th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened, and the second winning is given. When the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time with a maximum opening time of 31.5 seconds. At the 4th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 with an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. In the opening pattern 34, at the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds, when the first winning opening 30 receives the first winning, the V opening / closing member 71 having an opening time of 0.1 seconds is short-opened. ..
Open the door.

4. Explanation of jackpots, etc. In the game machine 1, there are "big hits" and "losses" as a result of the jackpot lottery (special symbol lottery). In the case of "big hit", the "big hit symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. At the time of "missing", the "missing symbol" is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 41. If you win the jackpot, the jackpot game (the first jackpot 30 and the second jackpot 35) will be opened with an opening pattern according to the type of special symbol (the type of jackpot) that is stopped and displayed. Is executed. The jackpot game is an example of a special game. The jackpot game includes multiple round games (unit open game), an opening (OP) before the first round game starts, and an ending (ED) after the final round game ends. There is. Each round game starts with the end of the opening or the end of the previous round game and ends with the start of the next round game. The closing time (interval time) of the winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing.

There are multiple types of jackpots. The types of jackpots are as shown in FIG. Here, there are roughly two types of jackpots: "V-passing planned jackpot" and "V-non-passing scheduled jackpot". The "V-passing scheduled jackpot" operates the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the V-opening / closing member 71 in an opening pattern (V-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. It's a big hit. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 11H to 14H and 21H correspond to the "V-passing scheduled jackpot (probability variation jackpot)". The combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 21: opening pattern 31), (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 33). ) Or (Open pattern 23: Open pattern 32), the game ball can pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game. The "V non-passing scheduled jackpot (normal jackpot)" is an opening pattern (V non-passing scheduled opening pattern) in which the game ball cannot pass through the V region 39 during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing member 32, the opening / closing member 37, and the opening / closing member 37 It is a big hit that operates the V opening / closing member 71. Here, the jackpots of the special figure stop symbol data of 15H and 22H correspond to the "V non-passing scheduled jackpot". When the combination of the opening pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37 shown in FIG. 13 and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 shown in FIG. 14 is (opening pattern 22: opening pattern 34), the V region is in the jackpot game. It becomes impossible for the game ball to pass through 39. As described above, the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing pattern 22 of the opening / closing member 37 also serve as a V-passing scheduled opening pattern and a V-non-passing scheduled opening pattern.

The "V-passing jackpot" includes "16RV-passing jackpot", "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot", and "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot". The actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

Although the total number of rounds of the "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot" is 16R, the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "16R (substantial 15R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32), and it is possible to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30.

The "V non-passing planned jackpot" is the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" of the opening pattern 22 in which the total number of rounds is 16R but the actual total number of rounds is 13. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R, 4R, 6R, 8R, 10R and 12R, although the V opening / closing member 71 is opened, the opening is a short opening (FIG. 14: opening pattern 34), and the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 It is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through.

As is clear from the above explanation, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (real 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are the first big winning opening 30 and the second big winning opening 35 ( The opening / closing pattern of the opening / closing member 32 and the opening / closing member 37) is the same (opening pattern 22), and only the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 is different (opening pattern 34 and opening pattern 33). As will be described later, the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" are such that the time-saving game (100 times in this example) is performed after the jackpot game is completed. It has become. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", it is almost impossible for the game ball to pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is It becomes a low accuracy time saving state (low accuracy high base state). On the other hand, the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" makes it possible for the game ball to easily pass through the V region 39 in the first jackpot 30, and the gaming state after the jackpot is highly accurate. It becomes a time saving state (high accuracy and high base state). From this, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish between "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" and "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot", and the gaming state after the jackpot is low. It becomes difficult to determine whether the time saving state (low accuracy high base state) or the high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state) is reached. In addition, after the end of the time-saving game, the game state becomes the low probability low base state (normal state) in the "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", and the game state in the "16R (substantially 13R) V scheduled passing jackpot". However, it looks like a high-accuracy low-base state in the normal state. That is, in the "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot", when the game ball passes through the V area 39 in the first big winning opening 30, when the time saving state after the jackpot game ends, the gaming state is changed. It is a latent state (latent probability changing state) that the probability is high even though it is a high probability low base state, and it is difficult for the player to discriminate this latent probability changing state. That is, "16R (real 13R) V non-passing planned jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot", "16R (real 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot" big hit Low probability after the game (low accuracy) High base state) and "16R (actual 13R) V non-passing jackpot" jackpot After the game, high accuracy time saving state (high accuracy high base state), and "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passing jackpot" time saving end The later low-accuracy low-base state and the high-accuracy low-base state after the end of the time reduction of "16R (substantially 13R) V passing planned jackpot" are performed in a mode that is difficult for the player to distinguish.

Further, as shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot distribution rate in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is 68/128 (about 53%) for the V-passing jackpot and 60 / for the V-non-passing jackpot. It is 128 (about 47%). On the other hand, the distribution rate of jackpots in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 83/128 (about 64.8%) for V-passing jackpots and 45/128 (about 64.8%) for V-non-passing jackpots. 35.2%). In this way, in the game machine 1, the big hit is performed by winning the game ball in the second starting port 21 rather than the big hit lottery (lottery of the first special symbol) in which the game ball is won in the first starting port 20. The lottery (lottery of the second special symbol) is set to be more advantageous to the player.

5. Description of the game state The game state of the game machine 1 will be described. The game control microcomputer 81 can execute "probability fluctuation control" and "variation time reduction control" for the special symbol displayed on the special symbol display 41 and the ordinary symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display 42, respectively. Is. Here, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the probability fluctuation with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is called a "high probability state (high probability state, probability fluctuation state, probability variation state)", and the probability fluctuation The uncontrolled state is simply called a "normal probability state (non-high probability state, low probability state, normal state)". The game control microcomputer 81 uses a jackpot determination table (FIG. 8 (A)) in which the number of jackpot random numbers determined to be jackpots is larger in the high probability state than in the normal probability state as the probability fluctuation control of the special symbol. A high-probability state is realized by making a jackpot judgment. Therefore, the high probability state has a higher probability of a jackpot than the normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol display 41 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the special symbol becomes a jackpot symbol increases.

Further, the state in which the game control microcomputer 81 controls the fluctuation time reduction with respect to the special symbol of the special symbol display 41 is referred to as a "time reduction state", and the state in which the fluctuation time reduction control is not performed is simply a "non-time reduction state". That is. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the special symbol (the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the derivation display of the display result) is shorter than that in the non-time-saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 uses a variation pattern determination table T6 (FIGS. 10 and 11) in which a variation pattern having a short variation time is selected more often than in a non-time reduction state when the time is shortened. Determine the fluctuation pattern used. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the fluctuation time reduction control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, the special symbol is variable as compared with the case where the fluctuation time reduction control is not executed. It becomes easier to select a short fluctuation time as the fluctuation time of the display. As a result, in the time-saving state, the pace of digestion of the special figure hold becomes faster, and an effective prize (a prize that can be memorized as the special figure hold) to the starting port is likely to occur. As a result, it is possible to aim for a big hit under the smooth progress of the game. The game control microcomputer 81 may simultaneously execute the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41, or may execute only one of them.

The game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42 in synchronization with the fluctuation time shortening control for the special symbol of the special symbol display 41. That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control and the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol in the time saving state, and does not execute in the non-time saving state. In the game control microcomputer 81, as the probability fluctuation control of the normal symbol, the number of the normal symbol random values (win random value) determined to be hit is larger in the time saving state than in the non-time saving state. A hit determination (determination of a normal symbol) is performed using FIG. 8C). Therefore, in the time saving state, the hit probability is higher than in the normal symbol normal probability state. That is, when the game control microcomputer 81 executes the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 42 is used as compared with the case where the probability fluctuation control is not executed. The probability that the display result (stop symbol) of the variable display of the normal symbol will be the winning symbol is high. In the time-saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shorter than in the non-time-saving state. Here, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is 30 seconds in the non-time saving state, but is 1 second in the time saving state (FIG. 8 (D)). Further, in the time saving state, the opening time of the electric chew 22 in the auxiliary game is longer than in the non-time saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the open time extension control for the electric chew 22. In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of times the electric chew 22 is opened in the auxiliary game is larger than in the non-time-saving state (FIG. 12). That is, the game control microcomputer 81 executes the opening count increase control for the electric chew 22. Under the situation where the game control microcomputer 81 executes probability fluctuation control and fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, and opening time extension control and opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. Compared with the case where these controls are not executed, the electric chew 22 is opened more frequently, and the game ball is more frequently won in the second starting port 21. As a result, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of launched balls, becomes high. Therefore, the state in which these controls are executed is called a "high base state", and the state in which these controls are not executed is called a "low base state". In the high base state, you can aim for a big hit without significantly reducing the number of game balls you have. The high base state is a state in which so-called electric support control (control for supporting winning of the second starting port 21 by the electric chew 22) is being executed. The high base state (electric support control state) does not have to execute all the above controls. That is, among the probability fluctuation control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the fluctuation time shortening control for the normal symbol of the normal symbol display 42, the opening time extension control for the electric chew 22, and the opening number increase control for the electric chew 22. By executing one or more controls, it is sufficient that the electric chew 22 is more easily released than when the control is not executed. Further, the high base state (electric support control state) may be controlled independently without being accompanied by the time saving state.

In the game machine 1, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the jackpot scheduled to pass V is a high probability state, a time saving state, and a high base state if the passage to the V region 39 is made during the jackpot game. .. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "high accuracy high base state" or a "high accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpots in which the game state after the jackpot game becomes a high-accuracy high-base state are "16RV scheduled jackpot", "16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot", and " 16R (actually 13R) V will pass the jackpot. " For "16RV passing jackpot" and "16R (actually 15R) V passing jackpot", in the high accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot game is executed. Ends with. In the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot", the high-accuracy high-base state (latent probability change) is the high-accuracy low-base state (latent probability change) in which the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times) after the jackpot game. It ends when it becomes a state) or when the next big hit (next big hit) is won and the big hit game is executed. In addition, the gaming state after the jackpot game by winning the V non-passing scheduled jackpot is a normal probability state (non-high probability) unless the V region 39 is passed during the jackpot game (almost never done). It is a state (that is, a low-probability state), a short-time state, and a high-base state. This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low accuracy high base state" and a "low accuracy time saving state". Specifically, among the jackpot types shown in FIG. 9, the jackpot in which the gaming state after the jackpot game becomes a low-accuracy high-base state is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled jackpot". In this jackpot, in the low accuracy high base state, after the jackpot game, the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (here, 100 times), or the next jackpot (next jackpot) is won and the jackpot is won. It ends when the game is executed. When the game machine 1 is played for the first time, the game state after the power is turned on is a normal probability state, a non-time saving state, and a low base state (non-electric support control state). This gaming state is particularly referred to as a "low probability low base state". The low probability low base state may be referred to as a "normal gaming state" or a "low probability non-time saving state (simply also referred to as a non-time saving state)". In addition, the state in which the special game (big hit game) is being executed may be referred to as a "special game state (big hit game state)". Further, a state controlled by at least one of a high probability state and a high base state may be referred to as a "specific gaming state".

In a high base state such as a high accuracy high base state or a low accuracy high base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the right game area 3B (FIG. 1) by right-handed striking. This is because the electric support control makes it easier to open the electric chew 22 than in the low base state, and it is easier to win the second starting port 21 than to win the first starting port 20. is there. For this reason, in the high base state, the game ball is passed through the gate 28, which triggers the normal symbol lottery, and the game ball is hit right to the second starting port 21 to win a prize. As a result, it is possible to obtain a large number of starting prizes (winning to the starting port) rather than hitting left. In addition, in the game machine 1, the game is played by right-handed even during the big hit game. On the other hand, in the low base state, it is more advantageous to allow the game ball to enter the left game area 3A (FIG. 1) by hitting the left side. Since the electric support control is not executed, it is difficult to open the electric chew 22 as compared with the high base state, and it is easier to win the first starting port 20 than to win the second starting port 21. This is because it has become. For this reason, in the low base state, a left-handed strike is performed in order to win a game ball in the first starting port 20. This allows you to get a lot of starting prizes rather than hitting right.

6. Operation of Game Control Microcomputer 81 The operation of the game control microcomputer 81 provided on the main control board 80 (FIG. 3) will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 34. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the game control microcomputer 81 are provided in the main RAM 84. The game control microcomputer 81 corresponds to the hit / miss determination means (FIG. 23) and the hit / miss pre-determination means (FIGS. 18 and 19).

[Main control main processing]
FIG. 15 is a flowchart of the main control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the game control microcomputer 81 reads a program for executing the main control main process from the main ROM 83. In the main control main process, the game control microcomputer 81 first makes initial settings (step S001). In the initial setting, for example, the main CPU 82 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "1", that is, "ON" for the ceiling flag, and "0", that is, "OFF" for the other flags. The initial value of the status is "1". The initial value of the counter is "500" for the ceiling counter and "0" for the other counters. The initial setting is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the initial setting, the game control microcomputer 81 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S002), and performs the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process (step S003). In this normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 uses various random number counter values (big hit random number value, jackpot type random number value, reach random number value, variable pattern random number value) shown in FIG. 7 (A). , Ordinary symbol random number value) is added by 1 and updated. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, each random number may be a so-called hardware random number generated by using a known random number generation circuit including a counter IC or the like.

After the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S004). While the interrupt is enabled, the main timer interrupt process (step S005) can be executed. The main timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the main CPU 82 in a predetermined cycle (for example, a 4 msec cycle). That is, the main timer interrupt process is executed every predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec cycle). Then, from the end of the main timer interrupt process to the start of the next main timer interrupt process, various counter value update processes by the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process are repeatedly executed. .. If an interrupt pulse is input to the main CPU 82 in the interrupt disabled state, the main timer interrupt process is not started immediately, but is started after the interrupt is enabled.

[Main timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 16 is a flowchart of the main timer interrupt process (FIG. 15: step S005). In the main-side timer interrupt processing, the game control microcomputer 81 first performs random number update processing (step S101). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 updates various random number counter values shown in FIG. 7A. This random number update process is the same as the normal symbol / special symbol main random number update process performed in the main control main process (FIG. 15) described above. That is, the update processing of various random number counter values is performed during the execution period of the main timer interrupt processing and other periods (the period from the end of the main timer interrupt processing to the start of the next main timer interrupt processing). It is done in both.

After the random number update process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs an input process (step S102). In the input process, the game control microcomputer 81 reads the detection signals detected by various sensors attached to the game machine 1, and outputs the payout data for paying out the prize balls according to the type of the winning opening to the main RAM 84. Set in the buffer. The various sensors include, for example, a first starting port sensor 20a, a second starting port sensor 21a, a first large winning opening sensor 30a, a second large winning opening sensor 35a, a normal winning opening sensor 27a, and a normal winning opening sensor 29a (FIG. 3).

After the input processing, the game control microcomputer 81 includes a start port sensor detection process (step S103), a normal operation process (step S104), a special operation process (step S105), a V area sensor detection process (step S106), and a holding ball. The number processing (step S107) is executed in order. Details of these processes will be described later. After the reserved ball number processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs output processing (step S108). In the output process, the game control microcomputer 81 outputs the command or the like set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 to the sub control board 90 in each of the above processes. After the output processing, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing (step S109). In other processing, for example, the second special figure holding indicator 43b is controlled to a display mode showing the number based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls described later, and the first special figure is based on the number of special figure 1 reserved balls. The hold indicator 43a is controlled in a display mode indicating the number.

[Starting port sensor detection process]
FIG. 17 is a flowchart of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S103). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the gate 28 (step S201). This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the gate sensor 28a. If the game ball has not passed through the gate 28 (step S201: NO), the process skips to step S205. When the game ball passes through the gate 28 (step S201: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of normally symbol reserved balls is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S202). The number of ordinary symbol hold balls is the number of normal symbol hold balls, and more specifically, the value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of normal symbol hold balls. If the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "4" (step S202: YES), the process skips to step S205. When the number of normal symbol reserved balls is "3" or less (step S202: NO), after adding "1" to the number of normal symbol reserved balls (step S203), the normal symbol random number acquisition process is performed (step S204). Here, the game control microcomputer 81 acquires the value of the normal symbol random number counter (FIG. 7: the value of the label-TRND-H), and uses the acquired random number value as the first to first of the normal symbol reserved storage area 86 of the main RAM 84. Of the fourth storage area, it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls of the normal symbol.

In step S205, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second starting port 21. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the second start port sensor 21a. If the game ball has not won a prize in the second starting port 21 (step S205: NO), the process skips to step S210. When the game ball wins a prize (step S205: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4 (upper limit value)” (step S206). The special figure 2 reserved ball number is the number of the second special figure reserved, and more specifically, it is the value of the counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of the second special figure reserved. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is “4” (step S206: YES), the process skips to step S210. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "3" or less (step S206: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 (step S207), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 2 is performed (step). S208). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter (Fig. 7: label-TRND-A value), the value of the jackpot type random number counter (Fig. 7: the value of label-TRND-AS), and the value of the reach random number counter (Fig. 7: label). -TRND-RC value) and fluctuation pattern random number counter value (FIG. 7: label-TRND-T1 value) are acquired. The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 among the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the second special figure reserved storage area 85b for the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 18) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 pre-determination process (step S209). Special Figure 2 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

In step S210, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the first starting port 20. This determination is made based on whether or not the game ball is detected by the first start port sensor 20a. When the game ball has not won a prize in the first starting port 20 (step S210: NO), this process ends. When a game ball wins in the first starting port 20 (step S210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "4 (upper limit value)" (step S210: YES). Step S211). The number of special figure 1 hold balls is the number of first special figure hold, and more specifically, it is a value of a counter provided in the main RAM 84 for counting the number of first special figure hold. If the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is “4” (step S211: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "3" or less (step S211: NO), after adding "1" to the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 (step S212), the random number acquisition process related to the special figure 1 is performed (step). S213). Here, the value of the jackpot random number counter, the value of the jackpot type random number counter, the value of the reach random number counter, and the value of the fluctuation pattern random number counter are acquired in the same manner as in the above-mentioned special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (step S208). The game control microcomputer 81 stores the acquired random number value group in the storage area corresponding to the current number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 among the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a. The game control microcomputer 81 temporarily puts the acquired random number value group in a buffer (predetermination buffer) different from the first special figure reservation storage area 85a for the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 19) described later. To memorize (retain). After the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 pre-determination process (step S214). Special Figure 1 Details of the pre-judgment process will be described later.

[Special Figure 2 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 18 is a flowchart of the special figure 2 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S209). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S301). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S301: NO), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is OFF, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is ON, the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S302). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To do. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 uses the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) to be referred to and the jackpot random number value to predetermine whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot. Here, since the game control microcomputer 81 is in the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the table for the high probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “649”) in the jackpot determination table T1. Refer to it to determine in advance whether it is a big hit or not. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "649", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". In this embodiment, the jackpot determination table T1 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later is used for the preliminary determination, but as another embodiment, the preliminary determination is different from the jackpot determination table T1. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot determination table of.

If the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "missing" (step S304: NO), the process is skipped to step S306. On the other hand, when the result of the jackpot pre-determination is "big hit" (step S304: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the jackpot type pre-determination (step S305). In the jackpot type pre-determination, the game control microcomputer 81 first uses the jackpot type random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). To get. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs pre-determination of the jackpot type based on the acquired jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). Here, regardless of whether the jackpot type random value is "0" to "127", it is preliminarily determined as "16RV planned passing jackpot". In this embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the jackpot type determination table T5 used in the jackpot determination process (FIG. 23) described later, but as another embodiment, the pre-judgment is different from the jackpot type determination table T5. Pre-judgment may be performed using the jackpot type determination table for determination.

In step S306, the game control microcomputer 81 predetermines the fluctuation pattern. Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has a variation pattern random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 2 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S208). And get the reach random number value. Next, since the time reduction state (the time reduction flag is ON) here, the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the variation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) for the time reduction state, and the jackpot pre-determination result in step S304, Reach Presence / absence pre-determination result obtained from random value and fluctuation pattern The fluctuation pattern is specified from the random value. In the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 of FIG. 11, the fluctuation pattern selected may differ depending on the difference in the number of reserved balls. Here, it is assumed that all fluctuation patterns that may be selected due to the difference in the number of reserved balls are selected. For example, when the loss with reach is pre-determined from the jackpot pre-judgment result and the reach presence / absence pre-judgment result and the fluctuation pattern random value is "60", the game control microcomputer 81 has the number of reserved balls "1-2". , The variation pattern "P64" is selected, and if the number of reserved balls is "3-4", the variation pattern "P68" is selected. In the present embodiment, the pre-judgment is performed using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 used in the variation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25) described later, but as another embodiment, the variation pattern determination table T6 The preliminary determination may be performed using a variation pattern determination table for prior determination different from the above.

In step S307, the game control microcomputer 81 creates a pre-determination command. The pre-judgment command includes a jackpot pre-judgment result (in the case of a hit, a jackpot type pre-judgment result), and a fluctuation pattern pre-judgment result. The game control microcomputer 81 sets the created pre-determination command in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S308), and ends this process.

[Special Figure 1 Pre-judgment processing]
FIG. 19 is a flowchart of the special figure 1 pre-determination process (FIG. 17: step S214). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S401). Contrary to the above-mentioned special figure 2 pre-determination process, when the probability change flag is ON (step S401: YES), this process ends. That is, when the probability change flag is ON, the preliminary determination is not performed. On the other hand, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot pre-determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step). S402). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first acquires a jackpot random number value as a determination value temporarily stored in the pre-determination buffer by the special figure 1 related random number acquisition process (FIG. 17: step S213). To do. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) is set here, the game control microcomputer 81 is included in the jackpot determination table T1 for the normal probability state (the jackpot determination value is “0” to “164”. ”) To determine in advance whether or not it is a big hit. That is, when the jackpot random number value is "0" to "164", it is preliminarily determined as "big hit", and when it is any other value, it is preliminarily determined as "missing". For the jackpot pre-determination, a jackpot determination table for pre-determination different from the jackpot determination table T1 may be used. Hereinafter, the processing of steps S404 to S408 is the same as the processing of steps S304 to S308 of the above-mentioned special figure 2 predetermination processing (FIG. 18), and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Normal operation processing]
FIG. 20 is a flowchart of a normal operation process (FIG. 16: step S104). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501). When the electric chew 22 is in operation (step S501: YES), the process proceeds to step S520. When the electric chew 22 is not in operation (step S501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the normal symbol is changing (step S502). If the normal symbol is changing (step S502: YES), the process skips to step S508. When the normal symbol is not changing (step S502: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0" (step S503). When the number of reserved balls is "0" (step S503: YES), this process ends. When the number of reserved balls is 1 or more (step S503: NO), the number of normal symbol reserved balls is decremented by 1 (step S504). Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 28 while the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is "0", the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol is once set to "1" in step S203 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17). After that, the hold is digested in this step S504, and the number of hold balls of the normal symbol immediately becomes "0". This also applies to the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. That is, in step S207 and step S212 of the start port sensor detection process (FIG. 17), the number of reserved special symbols is once set to "1", and then steps S1404 and step in the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) described later. In S1410, the hold is exhausted and the number of hold balls of the special symbol becomes "0". Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a hit determination with reference to the normal symbol hit determination table T3 (FIG. 8 (C)) (step S505). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first has an ordinary symbol random value (corresponding to the first storage area of the normal figure hold storage area 86) as a determination value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the normal figure hold). Hit random value) is read. Then, the normal symbol random value, the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and the normal symbol hit determination table T3 are used to determine whether or not it is a hit. For example, in the non-time saving state, when the normal symbol random value is "0" to "2", it is determined to be "hit", and when the normal symbol random value is not, it is determined to be "missing". (See FIG. 8 (C)).

Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a variation pattern with reference to the normal symbol variation pattern determination table T4 (FIG. 8D) (step S506). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the normal symbol change pattern determination table T4 to change the normal symbol. Select the fluctuation time of the normal symbol as a pattern. Here, in the non-time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "30 seconds", and in the time saving state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined to be "1 second" (see FIG. 8 (D)). .. The game control microcomputer 81 starts the fluctuation display of the normal symbol by setting the selected normal symbol fluctuation pattern (step S507).

In step S508, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the normal symbol has elapsed and the game has ended. The fluctuation time of the normal symbol is the fluctuation time selected in step S506 (see FIG. 8D). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S508: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. That is, the variable display of the normal symbol is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S508: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 stops the fluctuation display (step S509), and if the hit determination (step S505) described above is "missing", the fluctuation display is stopped. (Step S510: NO), this process is completed. On the other hand, in the case of "hit" in the above-mentioned hit determination (step S510: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the electric chew opening pattern (step S511). The opening pattern of the electric chew 22 is selected with reference to the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 (FIG. 12A). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the game state (whether or not it is in the time saving state), and uses the game state determination result and the electric chew opening pattern determination table T7 to open the electric chew 22. Select. Here, the "opening pattern 11" is selected in the non-time saving state, and the "opening pattern 12" is selected in the time saving state. After selecting the opening pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 starts the electric chew operation so as to follow the selected opening pattern (step S512), and ends this process.

In step S501 described above, when the electric chew 22 is operating (step S501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the electric chew 22 reaches the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 6), or the operating time of the electric chew 22 elapses and the electric chew 22 is closed. One of the things that has been reached is satisfied. The operating time of the electric chew 22 is an operating time corresponding to the opening pattern selected in step S511. When the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is not satisfied (step S520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the electric chew 22 is satisfied (step S520: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the electric chew 22 and stops its operation (step S521), and this process is performed. To finish.

[Special operation processing]
FIG. 21 is a flowchart of the special operation process (FIG. 16: step S105). Here, the processing related to the special symbol display 41 and the big prize device (the first big prize device 31 and the second big prize device 36) is divided into four stages, and each stage is divided into four stages, each of which is "1" of "special operation status". Called "2", "3", "4". When the "special operation status" is "1" (step S1301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs a special symbol standby process (step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, jackpot determination, fluctuation pattern selection, and the like are executed. When the "special operation status" is "2" (step S1301: NO, step S1303: YES), the special symbol changing process is performed (step S1304). In the special symbol change processing, the output of the change stop command is executed after the change time elapses. When the "special operation status" is "3" (step S1301, S1303: NO, step S1305: YES), the special symbol determination process is performed (step S1306). In the special symbol confirmation process, the output of the opening command or the like is executed at the time of a big hit. When the "special operation status" is "4" (steps S1301, S1303, S1305: NO), special electric accessory processing is performed (step S1308). In the special electric accessory processing, a jackpot game is executed. Details of each of the above processes will be described later. The special operation status is "1" by default.

[Special symbol standby processing]
FIG. 22 is a flowchart of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 21: step S1302). In the special symbol standby process, the game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is “0” (step S1401). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), that is, in the second special figure reserved storage area 85b, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the second starting port 21 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1407. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1401: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and the variation pattern selection process (step S1403). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 2 is decremented by one (step S1404). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the storage location of the hold information (various random values) stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the second special figure hold storage area 85b to the side read from the current position. Along with shifting by one, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the second special figure hold storage area 85b is cleared (step S1405). For example, when the hold information is stored in the first to third storage areas, the hold information stored in the third storage area is cleared, and the hold information is stored in the first to fourth storage areas. If so, the hold information stored in the fourth storage area is cleared. By the above steps, the second special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9B (the leftmost reserved image 9B of the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is displayed. It shifts to the reserved digested image display area side and is displayed as the reserved digested image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9B (the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9B from the left among the four reserved images 9B) corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b are on the left side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one second special figure hold has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step S1406). In the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2". The fluctuation start command (special figure 2 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1402) and a fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 2 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1403) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1401, when the number of reserved balls in special figure 2 is "0" (step S1401: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the number of reserved balls in special figure 1 is "0" (step S1401: YES). Step S1407). When the number of reserved balls in the special figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), that is, in the first special figure reserved storage area 85a, the random number value group acquired due to the winning of the first starting port 20 If there is no memory, the process proceeds to step S1413. When the number of reserved balls is "1" or more (step S1407: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 executes a jackpot determination process (step S1408) and a variation pattern selection process (step S1409). Details of these processes will be described later. After the variation pattern selection process, the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is decremented by one (step S1410). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 shifts the storage location of various random number values stored in the first to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reservation storage area 85a by one to the side read from the current position. At the same time, the hold information stored in the place farthest from the read side in the first special figure hold storage area 85a is cleared (step S1411). By the above steps, the first special figure hold is digested in the order in which it was held. In this case, on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the reserved image 9A (the rightmost reserved image 9A among the four reserved images 9A) corresponding to the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is displayed. It shifts to the hold digestion image display area side and is displayed as the hold digestion image 9C. Further, the reserved images 9A corresponding to the second to fourth storage areas of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a (of the four reserved images 9A, the second, third, and fourth reserved images 9A from the left) are on the right side, respectively. Shift by one (Fig. 1). As a result, the player can recognize that one of the first special figure reservations has been exhausted. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 performs the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step S1412). In the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, the fluctuation start command is set in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84, the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is started, and the fluctuation time timer is set. The fluctuation time timer is set with a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern selection process. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "2" (step S1406). The fluctuation start command (special figure 1 fluctuation start command) set in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process includes information related to the special figure stop symbol data set in the jackpot determination process (step S1408) and the fluctuation pattern selection process (special figure 1 fluctuation start command). Information about the fluctuation pattern set in step S1409) (including information about the fluctuation time) is included.

In step S1407, when the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is "0" (step S1407: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is a standby screen (step S1407). S1413). The standby screen is a demo screen for waiting for customers. The game control microcomputer 81 may be determined by, for example, ON / OFF of the demo screen display flag for waiting for customers. If the screen is on standby (step S1413: YES), this process ends. If it is not the standby screen (step S1413: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the customer waiting standby command for displaying the standby scene in the command set area 84a of the main RAM 84 after the elapse of the predetermined standby time. (Step S1414), this process is completed. As described above, according to the special symbol standby process of the present embodiment, the variable display of the special symbol based on the first special symbol hold is executed only when the second special symbol hold is "0". That is, the digestion of the second special figure hold is executed in preference to the digestion of the first special figure hold. Further, according to the jackpot type determination table T5 of the present embodiment, the lottery based on the second special figure hold is more profitable for the player than the lottery based on the first special figure hold (the jackpot scheduled to pass V). It is easier to win.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 23 is a flowchart of the jackpot determination process (FIG. 22: steps S1402 and S1408). Since the processing flow of the jackpot determination process (step S1402) of the special figure 2 and the jackpot determination process (step S1408) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the jackpot determination process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S1501). When the probability change flag is ON (step S1501: YES), the jackpot determination is performed with reference to the high probability state table in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1502). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out a jackpot random number value as a determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot random number value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot by using the jackpot determination table T1 to be referred to and the jackpot random number value. Here, since the high probability state (probability change flag is ON), whether or not the jackpot is a big hit is determined based on the table for the high probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "649") in the jackpot determination table T1. judge.

In step S1501, when the probability change flag is OFF (step S1501: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 makes a jackpot determination by referring to the table for the normal probability state in the jackpot determination table T1 (FIG. 8) (step S1501: NO). Step S1504). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot random number value by the same method as in step S1502. Next, since the normal probability state (probability change flag is OFF) here, is it a big hit based on the table for the normal probability state (the jackpot judgment value is "0" to "164") in the jackpot determination table T1? Judge whether or not.

When the result of the jackpot determination is "big hit" (steps S1503, S1505: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the jackpot flag (step S1506) and determines the jackpot type (step S1507). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the jackpot type random value as the determination value. For example, in the jackpot determination process of the special figure 2, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the second special figure reserved storage area 85b is read out. In the jackpot determination process of the special figure 1, the jackpot type random value stored in the first storage area of the first special figure reserved storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the jackpot type based on the read jackpot type random value and the jackpot type determination table T5 (FIG. 9). After determining the jackpot type, the special symbol stop symbol data (FIG. 9) corresponding to the specified jackpot type is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in step S1503 or step S1505, when the result of the jackpot determination is "missing", the special symbol stop symbol data (01H) corresponding to the losing symbol is set in the jackpot type buffer provided in the main RAM 84 (step S1520). , End this process.

[Variation pattern selection process]
24 and 25 are flowcharts of the variation pattern selection process (FIG. 22: steps S1403 and S1409). Since the processing flow of the variation pattern selection process (step S1403) of the special figure 2 and the variation pattern selection process (step S1409) of the special figure 1 are the same, they will be described together. In the variation pattern selection process, first, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the game state is the time saving state (step S1600). Whether or not the time saving state is determined is determined by whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time is shortened (step S1600: YES), the process proceeds to step S1612. When the time is not shortened (step S1600: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607. When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot is special figure 2 (step S1603). When the jackpot is the special figure 2 (step S1603: YES), the jackpot type is always the jackpot scheduled to pass through V, so the process is skipped to step S1605. When the jackpot is special figure 1 (step S1603: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604), and the jackpot type determination is set in the main RAM 84. It is performed based on the special figure stop symbol data.

When the jackpot type is a jackpot scheduled to pass through V (step S1604: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 fluctuates with reference to the table for the jackpot scheduled to pass V in the non-time saving state V passage in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). A pattern is selected (step S1605). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the fluctuation pattern random value as the determination value. For example, in the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first item of the second special figure reservation) of the second special figure reservation storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the variation pattern random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 selects a fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 and the fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as a table for the non-time-saving state V-passing planned jackpot, the portion of the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time-saving state shown in FIG. 10 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (in Special Figure 1, the fluctuation pattern is "P1". "To" P3 ", and in the special figure 2, the fluctuation pattern is referred to" P21 "to" P23 ") (address is set). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P1" to "P3" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P21" to "P23" is selected in Special Figure 2.

When the jackpot type is V non-passing scheduled jackpot (step S1604: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 refers to the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot table in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected (step S1606). Here, as a table for the non-time saving state V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion (“P4” to “P6”) corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. Part) is referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P4" to "P6" is selected as the variation pattern.

In step S1602, when the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1602: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 first reads out the reach random number value as the determination value. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 2, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the second special figure hold) of the second special figure hold storage area 85b is read out. In the variation pattern selection process of the special figure 1, the reach random value stored in the first storage area (corresponding to the first one of the first special figure hold) of the first special figure hold storage area 85a is read out. Next, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the presence or absence of reach using the reach determination table T2 (FIG. 8B) and the reach random number value. Here, since it is in the non-time saving state, the reach is set based on the non-time saving state table (the part where the reach determination value (reach establishment random number value) is “0” to “13”) in the reach determination table T2. Determine the presence or absence.

When the reach random number value is the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: YES), that is, in the case of loss with reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss with reach (step S1608). Here, as the table for the loss with reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss with reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. 10 (the fluctuation pattern is "P7" to "P7" in the special figure 1). The portion of "P14" and the portion of the variation pattern "P24" to "P31" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P7” to “P14” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P24” to “P31” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Since the fluctuation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, the function of shortening fluctuation according to the number of reserved balls works. That is, in both Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2, when the number of reserved balls is "3" to "4", the fluctuation time is longer than when the number of reserved balls is "1" to "2". More short fluctuation patterns are selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls is large, the digestion speed of the special figure reservation can be increased.

When the reach random number value is not the reach establishment random number value (step S1607: NO), that is, in the case of loss without reach, the game control microcomputer 81 is in the non-time saving state in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10). The fluctuation pattern is selected with reference to the table for loss without reach (step S1609). Here, as a table for loss without reach in the non-time saving state, the portion corresponding to the loss without reach in the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 for the non-time saving state shown in FIG. The portion of "P16" and the portion of the variation pattern "P32" to "P33" in the special figure 2) are referred to. In the special figure 1, one of “P15” and “P16” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 1. In the special figure 2, one of “P32” and “P33” is selected as the fluctuation pattern from the read fluctuation pattern random value and the current number of reserved balls (1 to 4) in the special figure 2. Here, too, the variation pattern selected changes depending on the number of reserved balls, so that the function of shortening variation according to the number of reserved balls works.

When it is determined in step S1600 that the game state is the time saving state, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (FIG. 25: step S1612). Hereinafter, the processing of steps S1613 to S1619 is the same as the processing of steps S1603 to S1609 described above except for the following points, and thus the description thereof will be omitted. The difference between the processes of steps S1613 to S1619 and the processes of steps S1603 to S1609 is that in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 referred to is described in steps S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609. Different from. Specifically, in S1605, S1606, S1608, and S1609, the fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 10) for the non-time saving state is referred to, whereas in steps S1615, S1616, S1618, and S1619, the time saving state is used. The fluctuation pattern determination table T6 (FIG. 11) of the above is referred to. For example, in the case of step S1615, that is, when the jackpot type is the V-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V-passing scheduled jackpot (variation pattern in special figure 1). Refers to the part of "P41" to "P43", and the part of the variation pattern "P61" to "P63" in the special figure 2). From the read variation pattern random value, any one of "P41" to "P43" is selected as the variation pattern in Special Figure 1, and any one of "P61" to "P63" is selected in Special Figure 2. Further, for example, in the case of step S1616, that is, when the jackpot type is the V non-passing scheduled jackpot, the portion of the variation pattern determination table T6 for the time saving state shown in FIG. 11 corresponding to the V non-passing scheduled jackpot (“P44”). (Parts of "P46") are referred to. From the read variation pattern random value, one of "P44" to "P46" is selected as the variation pattern.

After selecting the variation pattern as described above, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the selected variation pattern (step S1630) and ends this process. The set fluctuation pattern information is included in the fluctuation start command and transmitted to the sub-control board 90 in the output process (FIG. 16: step S108). As a result, the variable display of the special symbol is started.

[Processing during special symbol change]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart of the special symbol changing process (FIG. 21: step S1304). First, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the special symbol variation time has elapsed and the game has ended (step S1701). The fluctuation time of the special symbol is a fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern selection process (FIGS. 24 and 25). If the fluctuation time has not ended (step S1701: NO), this process ends. That is, the variation display of the special symbol started in step S1406 or S1412 of the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) is continued. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time has ended (step S1701: YES), the fluctuation stop command is set (step S1702), and the special operation status is set to "3" (step S1703). In addition, the game control microcomputer 81 performs other processing associated with the suspension of fluctuation (step S1704). For example, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a process of stopping the variable display of the special symbol at a symbol corresponding to the set special symbol stop symbol data. After that, the game control microcomputer 81 finishes this process.

[Special symbol confirmation process]
FIG. 27 is a flowchart of the special symbol determination process (FIG. 21: step S1306). The game control microcomputer 81 first performs a game state management process (step S1801). The game state management process is a process for managing the number of STs and the number of time reductions, and the contents will be described later. After the game state management process, it is determined whether or not the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802). When the jackpot flag is OFF (step S1802: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the special operation status to "1" (step S1808), and ends this process. As a result, the jackpot game is not started, the process shifts to the special symbol standby process (FIG. 22) again, and the jackpot determination for the next hold is executed.

When the jackpot flag is ON (step S1802: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the jackpot and the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member according to the type of winning jackpot (step S1803). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the large winning opening from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the large winning opening opening pattern determination table T8 (FIG. 13), and determines the opening pattern of the determined opening opening. set. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", "opening pattern 21" is set as the opening pattern of the large winning opening. Further, the game control microcomputer 81 determines the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 from the special figure stop symbol data with reference to the V opening / closing member opening pattern determination table T9 (FIG. 14), and sets the determined opening pattern. .. For example, when the special figure stop symbol data is "11H", the "opening pattern 31" is set as the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71. Set the value of the round counter together with the set of the opening pattern of the big winning opening and the V opening / closing member to the number of rounds according to the type of winning big hit. The round counter counts the number of unit opening games (round games) executed during the jackpot game. Here, "16" is set in the round counter (FIG. 13 (B)).

After setting the open pattern, the game control microcomputer 81 performs a game state reset process (step S1804). The game state reset process is a process for resetting (returning to OFF) the probability change flag and the time saving flag, and the contents will be described later. After the game state reset process, in order to start the jackpot game, the jackpot opening command is set (step S1805), and the opening is started (step S1806). After that, the special operation status is set to "4" (step S1807), and this process is completed.

[Game status management process]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart of the game state management process (FIG. 27: step S1801). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2001). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2001: NO), the process skips to step S2010. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2001: YES), the value of the probability change counter is decremented by 1 (step S2002). The probability variation counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the high probability state. Here, "100" is set in the probability variation counter at the time of transition to the high probability state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the probability variation counter by one (step S2003). If the value of the probability variation counter is not "0" (step S2003: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability change counter is "0" (step S2003: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2004).

In step S2005, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2005: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2005: YES), the value of the time saving counter is decremented by 1 (step S2006). The time reduction counter counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed during the time reduction state. Here, "100" is set in the time saving counter at the time of transition to the time saving state. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the time reduction counter by one (step S2007). If the value of the time reduction counter is not "0" (step S2007: NO), the process skips to step S2009. When the value of the time saving counter is "0" (step S2007: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2008).

In step S2009, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state specification command contains information about the set current game state (whether the ceiling flag is ON, ceiling counter value, probability change state, probability change counter value, time reduction state, time reduction counter value, etc.). include.

In step S2010, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2010: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2010: YES), the value of the ceiling counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011). The ceiling counter is for counting the specified number of rotations until the b time reduction (play time) is reached, and counts the number of fluctuations of the special symbol executed when the ceiling flag is ON (during the low probability state). .. Here, when the ceiling flag is set to ON, "500" as the specified rotation speed is set in the ceiling counter. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the value of the counter has become "0" as a result of decrementing the ceiling counter by one (step S2012). That is, it is determined whether or not the specified number of revolutions has elapsed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached. If the value of the ceiling counter is not "0" (step S2012: NO), the process skips to step S2005. When the value of the probability variation counter is "0" (step S2012: YES), the time saving flag is switched to ON (step S2013), and "700" is set in the time saving counter as the number of times of time saving (number of times given). Then, the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2015). After that, the process of step S2009 is executed.

[Game state reset process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart of the game state reset process (FIG. 27: step S1804). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the probability change flag is ON (step S2101). When the probability change flag is OFF (step S2101: NO), the process skips to step S2103. When the probability change flag is ON (step S2101: YES), the probability change flag is switched to OFF (step S2102). In step S2103, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the time saving flag is ON. When the time saving flag is OFF (step S2103: NO), the process skips to 2105. When the time saving flag is ON (step S2103: YES), the time saving flag is switched to OFF (step S2104). In step S2105, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the ceiling flag is ON. When the ceiling flag is OFF (step S2105: NO), this process ends. When the ceiling flag is ON (step S2105: YES), the ceiling flag is switched to OFF (step S2106). That is, during the execution of the jackpot game, the ceiling flag is turned off in the non-high probability state and the non-time saving state. Since the game machine 1 is always in the low base state in the non-time saving state, it is in the low base state during the execution of the jackpot game.

[Special electric accessory processing]
FIG. 30 is a flowchart of the special electric accessory processing (FIG. 21: step S1308). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200). The "big hit end flag" is a flag indicating that all the big winning devices (first big winning device 31 and second big winning device 36) based on the opening pattern have been opened in the big hit game being executed. When the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the process proceeds to step S2230. When the jackpot end flag is OFF (step S2200: NO), the V opening / closing member operation process for operating the V opening / closing member 71 is performed (step S2201). The V opening / closing member 71 of the present embodiment is configured to operate when a predetermined number of game balls win a prize in the first large winning opening 30, and in the V opening / closing member operation processing, it corresponds to the V opening / closing member opening pattern T9. The V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a predetermined period when the predetermined number of game balls are won. The details of the V opening / closing member operation processing will be described later. After the V opening / closing member operation processing, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the large winning openings (first special winning opening 30 and second large winning opening 35) are open (step S2202). If it is open (step S2202: YES), the process proceeds to step S2210.

When the big winning opening is not open (step S2202: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203). The time to open the big prize opening is, for example, when the opening time of the big hit has passed and the opening time in the first round game is reached, or when the opening of the big winning opening is temporarily closed after opening, the big winning opening is opened again. This includes the time when the interval time (closing time) up to is elapsed and the time to start opening again is reached. If it is not the time to open the big winning opening (step S2203: NO), the process proceeds to step S2220.

When it is time (timing) to open the big winning opening (step S2203: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 performs the big winning opening opening process (step S2207). Specifically, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the big winning opening (first big winning opening 30 or second big winning opening 35) according to the opening pattern (FIG. 13) according to the type of big hit. After the large winning opening opening process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets a round designation command (step S2208). The round designation command includes information on the number of rounds of the jackpot game being executed, and the game control microcomputer 81 sets the round designation command in the output buffer of the main RAM 84. In this embodiment, the large winning openings are not opened a plurality of times during one round game. However, as another embodiment, when the large winning openings are opened a plurality of times during one round game, the game control microcomputer 81 opens the large winning openings during one round. It may be determined whether or not it is the first opening, and the round designation command may be set only in the case of the first opening. After setting the round specification command, this process ends.

In step S2202 described above, when the large winning opening is open (step S2202: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied (step S2210). The closing condition here is that the number of winnings in the big winning opening in the round game has reached the specified maximum number of winnings (for example, 9 per round), or the time to close the big winning opening has been reached. That (that is, a predetermined opening time (FIG. 13) has elapsed since the opening of the large winning opening) is satisfied. Then, if the closing condition of the big winning opening is not satisfied (step S2210: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied (step S2210: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 closes (closes) the big winning opening (step S2211).

In step S2203 described above, if it is not the time (timing) to open the big winning opening, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2220). Here, one round ends after a predetermined time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed after the big winning opening is closed. This is because, as described above, the closing time (interval time) of the large winning opening between round games is included in the open round game before the closing. The game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. If the round game is not completed (step S2220: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

When the round game is completed (step S2220: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 sets the value of the round counter to 1 decrement (step S2221), and whether or not the value of the round counter is "0". A determination is made (step S2226). If the value of the round counter is not "0" (step S2226: NO), that is, if the specified number of round games has not yet been exhausted, this process ends in order to start the next round game. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter is "0", the jackpot ending command is set (step S2227) and the jackpot ending is started (step S2228) as the jackpot ending process for ending the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, the ending time (for example, 18 seconds) when the game ball passes through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V planned passage jackpot" is "16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing scheduled" The length is the same as the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "big hit". As a result, even if the player has passed the game ball to the V region 39 in the "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled pass jackpot", the "16R (substantial 13R) V non-passage scheduled jackpot" It can be recognized that the game ball did not pass through the V region 39. It should be noted that the ending time when the game ball does not pass through the V region 39 in the "16R (substantially 13R) V-passing jackpot" is also the same length as these. After the start of the jackpot ending, the jackpot end flag is set to ON (step S2229) to end this process.

In step S2200 described above, when the jackpot end flag is ON (step S2200: YES), the final round has ended, so that the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the jackpot ending time has elapsed. (Step S2230). If the ending time has not elapsed (step S2230: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process. On the other hand, when the ending time has elapsed (step S2230: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns off the jackpot end flag (step S2231), turns off the jackpot flag (step S2232), and sets the special operation status. Is set to "1" (step S2233). As a result, in the next special operation process, the special symbol standby process (step S1302) is executed again. After that, the game state setting process (step S2234) described later is executed to finish this process.

[V opening / closing member operation processing]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 30: step S2201). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the current round game (the round) is an open round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501). Here, the second round, the fourth round, the sixth round, the eighth round, the tenth round, and the twelfth round correspond to the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71. When the values of the round counters of the game control microcomputer 81 are "15", "13", "11", "9", "7", and "5", it can be determined that the round is open. If it is not an opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: NO), this process ends. This is because it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71 in the round.

In the case of the opening round of the V opening / closing member 71 (step S2501: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the first winning flag is ON (step S2502). The "first winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first big winning opening 30 has won the first ball in the round. When the first winning flag is ON (step S2502: YES), the process proceeds to step S2520. When the first winning flag is OFF (step S2502: NO), it is determined whether or not the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503). If the winning of the first ball is not detected (step S2503: NO), this process ends. This is because there is no prize in the first large winning opening 30 in the round, and it is not necessary to operate the V opening / closing member 71.

When the winning of the first ball is detected (step S2503: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V opening / closing member 71 and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2504). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is short-opened regardless of whether the V opening / closing member 71 is "short opening" or "long opening". This is because sometimes a short release (0.1 seconds in this case) is executed. In the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71, the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is very short, so that the first game ball that has won the first large winning opening 30 does not pass through the V region 39. It is configured to pass through the V region 70. In the V valid period setting process, a few seconds during the opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and after the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 are set as the V valid period during which the detection of the game ball by the V region sensor 39a is valid. Here, the game control microcomputer 81 short-opens the V-opening / closing member 71 (here, 0.1 seconds) according to the opening pattern of the V-opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), and the V-opening / closing member 71 is being opened. And set the V validity period to 1 second after closing. The game control microcomputer 81 sets a period other than the V valid period (including when the jackpot game is not executed) as a V invalid period in which the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is determined to be invalid. Here, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is valid" means turning on the V flag based on the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a (V area sensor detection described later). Processing (see FIG. 33). Further, "determining that the detection of the game ball by the V area sensor 39a is invalid" means that the V flag is not turned on even if the game ball is detected by the V area sensor 39a. The reason why the V effective period includes several seconds (ball brushing period) after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed is that there is a physical distance between the V opening / closing member 71 and the V area sensor 39a. This is a consideration of the period until the game ball that has entered the V region 39 side immediately before the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 is detected by the V region sensor 39a. That is, here, the V flag is turned on only when the V passage (passage of the game ball to the V region 39) is detected during the V valid period, and the V flag is set when the V passage outside the V valid period (V invalid period) is detected. It is not turned on. When the V flag is ON, the probability variation flag is ON, that is, the game state after the big hit game is set to the high probability state (see the game state setting process (FIG. 32) described later). By doing so, the V flag is turned on based on the passage of V due to fraudulent activity, and the high probability state is not set. After the short opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag to ON (step S2505), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2502, when the first winning flag is ON, that is, when the first ball has already been won (step S2502: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the second winning flag is ON. (Step S2520). The "second winning flag" is a flag indicating that the first large winning opening 30 has won a second ball when the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 of the round is long opening. When the second winning flag is ON (step S2520: YES), the process proceeds to step S2540. When the second winning flag is OFF (step S2520: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 in the round is long opening (step S2521). If it is not a long open (step S2521: NO), that is, if it is a short open, the process proceeds to step S2540. On the other hand, in the case of long opening (step S2521: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522). If the winning of the second ball is not detected (step S2522: NO), the process proceeds to step S2540.

When the winning of the second ball is detected (step S2522: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 opens the V opening / closing member 71 for a long time and performs the V validity period setting process (step S2523). In the opening pattern of the V opening / closing member 71 (FIG. 14 (B)), the V opening / closing member 71 is opened for a long time. ) Is executed. Here, since the maximum round game time is 31.5 seconds (maximum opening time of the large winning opening 29.5 seconds + interval closing time 2 seconds), generally, the second ball is won. The time from time to the end of the round will be less than 31.5 seconds. As will be described later, since the V opening / closing member 71 is forcibly closed at the end of the round, the opening time of the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 is shorter than 31.5 seconds. However, since the opening time of the V opening / closing member 71 is relatively long in the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71, at least a part of the second and subsequent game balls that have won the first large winning opening 30 has the V region 39. It is configured to pass through. In the V valid period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the V valid period while the V opening / closing member 71 is open, and sets the V invalid period together with the closing of the V opening / closing member 71 at the end of the round. After the long opening of the V opening / closing member 71 and the V validity period setting process, the game control microcomputer 81 switches the second winning flag to ON (step S2524), and proceeds to step S2540.

In step S2540, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the V opening / closing member 71 is open. When the V opening / closing member 71 is open (step S2540: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2550). As described above, the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed depending on whether or not a predetermined interval time (here, 2 seconds) has elapsed since the large winning opening was closed. Make a judgment.

When the round game is completed (step S2550: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2551), V opening / closing member closing process, and V invalid period. Perform the setting process (step S2552). Here, at the end of the round game, the game control microcomputer 81 forcibly closes the V opening / closing member 71, and after a few seconds (here, 1 second) have elapsed after the V opening / closing member 71 is closed, the V invalid period is set. Set and finish this process.

When the round game is not completed (step S2550: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71 is satisfied (step S2560). As the closing condition of the V opening / closing member 71, for example, in the case of short opening, a predetermined period (for example, 0.1 second) has elapsed after the opening of the V opening / closing member 71. When the closing condition is satisfied (step S2560: YES), the V opening / closing member closing process and the V invalid period setting process are performed (step S2552), and this process is completed. If the closing condition is not satisfied (step S2560: NO), the V opening / closing member 71 is in the open state, and the present process is completed while the V valid period is continued.

In step S2540, when the game control microcomputer 81 determines that the V opening / closing member 71 is closed (step S2540: NO), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not the round game is completed (step S2571). When the round is completed (step S2571: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 switches the first winning flag and the second winning flag to OFF (step S2572), and ends this process. If the round is not completed (step S2571: NO), this process ends as it is.

[Game status setting process]
FIG. 32 is a flowchart of the game state setting process (FIG. 30: step S2234). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the V flag is ON (step S2301). When the V flag is OFF (step S2301: NO), the time saving flag is turned ON (step S2302), and "100" is set in the time saving counter (step S2303). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "non-high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a low probability high base). This low-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

On the other hand, in step S2301, when the V flag is ON (step S2301: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the probability change flag (step S2304), sets "100" in the probability change counter (step S2305), and The V flag is turned off (step S2306). Further, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the time saving flag (step S2307) and sets "100" in the time saving counter (step S2308). As a result, the game state after the big hit game this time becomes a "high probability state", a "time saving state", and a "high base state" (that is, a high probability high base). This high-accuracy high-base state ends when either the condition that the variable display of the special symbol is performed 100 times or that the next big hit is won is satisfied.

In step S2310, the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the ceiling flag, and the ceiling counter is set to "500" as the specified rotation speed until the b time reduction (play time) is reached (step S2311). As a result, after the big hit game, when the probability change flag is OFF, the b time is shortened (play time) when the probability change flag is turned off 500 times. In step S2309, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the game state designation command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84, and ends this process. The game state designation command includes information on the set game state (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag, ceiling counter).

[V area sensor detection process]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart of the V region sensor detection process (FIG. 16: step S106). The game control microcomputer 81 first determines whether or not the game ball has been detected by the V region sensor 39a (step S2601). If the V-region sensor 39a does not detect the game ball (step S2601: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, if there is detection (step S2601: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 determines whether or not it is in the V valid period (step S2602). The V valid period is a period set by the V valid period setting process (steps S2504 and S2523) of the V opening / closing member operation process (FIG. 31). The V validity period is set to a few seconds (ball brush period) when the V opening / closing member 71 is opened or closed during the 2nd, 4th, 6th, 8th, 10th, and 12th rounds. Will be done. If it is not during the V valid period (step S2602: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the V valid period is in effect (step S2602: YES), the game control microcomputer 81 turns on the V flag (step S2603), sets the V passage command (step S2604), and ends this process. ..

[Holded ball number processing]
FIG. 34 is a flowchart of the reserved ball number processing (FIG. 16: step S107). First, the game control microcomputer 81 reads out the number of special figure 1 reserved balls, the number of special figure 2 reserved balls, and the number of ordinary symbol reserved balls stored in the main RAM 84 (step S2701). Next, the game control microcomputer 81 sets the hold ball number command in the command set area (output buffer) 84a of the main RAM 84 (step S2702). The hold ball number command is a command for notifying the sub-control board 90 of the hold ball number, and includes information on the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number. .. After setting the hold ball number command, the game control microcomputer 81 ends this process.

7. Operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 The operation of the effect control microcomputer 91 provided on the sub-control board 90 (FIG. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 45. Counters, flags, statuses, buffers, etc. that appear in the operation description of the effect control microcomputer 91 are provided in the sub RAM 94.

[Sub-control main processing]
FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the sub-control main process. When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on, the effect control microcomputer 91 reads a program for executing the sub control main process from the sub ROM 93. In the sub-control main process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first performs the CPU initialization process (step S4000). In the CPU initialization process, for example, the sub CPU 92 is set, various flags, statuses, counters, and the like are reset. The initial value of the flag is "0", that is, "OFF", the initial value of the status is "1", and the initial value of the counter is "0". The CPU initialization process is executed only once after the power is turned on, and is not executed after that.

After the CPU initialization process, the effect control microcomputer 91 prohibits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4015) and performs the random number update process (step S4020). In this random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 adds 1 to the random number counter value shown in FIG. 7B and updates it. When each random number counter value reaches the set upper limit value, it returns to "0" and is added again. The initial value of each random number counter may be a value other than "0" or may be randomly changed. Further, the random value may be added by 2 or more in addition to being added by 1. Each random number may be a so-called hardware random number.

After the random number update process, the effect control microcomputer 91 permits the interrupt of the interrupt process (step S4025). While the interrupt is enabled, the sub-timer interrupt process (step S4035) can be executed. The sub-side timer interrupt process is executed based on an interrupt pulse that is repeatedly input to the sub CPU 92 at a predetermined cycle. That is, the sub-side timer interrupt processing is executed at predetermined intervals. Then, the random number update process is repeatedly executed from the end of the sub-side timer interrupt process to the start of the next sub-side timer interrupt process.

[Sub-timer interrupt processing]
FIG. 36 is a flowchart of the sub-side timer interrupt process (FIG. 35: step S4035). The effect control microcomputer 91 first performs a reception command analysis process (step S4300). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later. After the reception command analysis process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a variable effect process (step S4305). The variation effect processing is a process for setting a command before the end of variation at a specific timing during the variation effect to execute the specific display effect on the display screen 7a, and the details will be described later. After the variable effect processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a switch process (step S4310). In the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the display contents of the display screen 7a based on the switch data (edge data and level data) output based on the detection signal from the effect button detection switch 63a. .. After the switch processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a command transmission processing (step S4315). In the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 inputs various commands set in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the subRAM 94 in the received command analysis process or the like to the image control board 100, the voice control board 106, and the lamp control board 107. , Is transmitted to the relay board 108. The image control board 100 that has received various commands uses the image display device 7 to execute a display effect according to the received commands. Further, the voice control board 106 that has received various commands executes a voice effect that outputs voice from the speaker 67 in response to the received commands. The lamp control board 107 that has received various commands executes a lamp effect that controls light emission of the panel lamp 5 and the frame lamp 66 in response to the received commands. After the command transmission process, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processes (step S4320), and ends this process. In other processing, for example, random number update processing and the like are performed.

[Received command analysis processing]
FIG. 37 is a flowchart of the received command analysis process (FIG. 36: step S4300). The effect control microcomputer 91 first determines whether or not a pre-determination command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4415). When receiving (step S4415: YES), the look-ahead effect determination process is performed (step S4420). The “look-ahead effect determination process” is a process for determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect and the look-ahead effect pattern when the look-ahead effect is executed. The details of the look-ahead effect determination process will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4415: NO), the pre-reading effect determination process described above is skipped. The look-ahead effect is an effect that suggests that the hold information newly stored in the special figure hold storage area 85 is likely to include a jackpot, and is executed during the variable effect.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the hold ball number command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4445). When receiving (step S4445: YES), hold display processing is performed (step S4450). In the hold display process, the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 is provided based on the information regarding the special figure 1 hold ball number, the special figure 2 hold ball number, and the normal symbol hold ball number included in the hold ball number command. The values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter are updated. As a result, information on the number of reserved balls can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 has a hold image 9A displayed on the display screen 7a based on the values of the first special figure hold effect counter, the second special figure hold effect counter, and the normal figure hold effect counter. Update 9B. On the other hand, when the hold ball number command has not been received (step S4445: NO), the above-mentioned hold display process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation start command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4455). When receiving (step S4455: YES), the variation effect start process is performed (step S4460). The "variation effect start process" is a process of selecting a variation effect pattern (content) to be executed during the special symbol variation. The details of the variable effect start processing will be described later. On the other hand, if it has not been received (step S4455: NO), the above-mentioned variation effect start process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a fluctuation stop command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4465). When receiving (step S4465: YES), the variation effect end processing is performed (step S4470). The "variation effect end process" is a process for stopping the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. In the variation effect end processing, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets a counter or the like based on the analysis result of the variation stop command, and sets a variation effect end command for ending the variation effect. As a result, the decorative symbol corresponding to the changing special figure 1 or special figure 2 is stopped and displayed. In addition, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a pre-determination information shift process (FIG. 39), which will be described later. If the fluctuation stop command has not been received (step S4465: NO), the above-mentioned fluctuation effect end processing is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an opening command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4475). When receiving (step S4475: YES), the opening effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4480). The "opening effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an opening effect pattern (content) to be executed at the start of a special game (big hit game). In the opening effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the opening command, and sets the information related to the special figure stop symbol data included in the opening command and set at the time of the jackpot winning determination in the sub RAM 94. Then, the effect pattern of the opening effect set in advance corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and the opening effect start command for starting the selected opening effect is set in the effect command set area of the sub RAM 94. Set to 94b. When the opening effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs a predetermined opening effect image to the ROM 103. Is read from, and is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. If the opening command has not been received in step S4475 (step S4475: NO), the above-mentioned opening effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not a round designation command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4485). When receiving (step S4485: YES), the round effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4490). The "round effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an open game effect pattern (content) to be executed during the opening of the big winning opening or during the interval between openings in the special game (big hit game). In the round effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the round designation command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data and the information regarding the number of rounds included in the round designation command in the sub RAM 94. To do. Then, a preset round effect effect pattern is selected according to the hit type and the number of rounds indicated by the special figure stop symbol data, and a round effect start command for starting the selected round effect is produced by the sub RAM 94. Set in the command set area 94b. When the round effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined round effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the round designation command has not been received in step S4485 (step S4485: NO), the above-mentioned round effect pattern determination process is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not an ending command has been received from the main control board 80 (step S4495). When receiving (step S4495: YES), the ending effect pattern determination process is performed (step S4500). The "ending effect pattern determination process" is a process of selecting an ending effect pattern (content) to be executed during the ending of a special game (big hit game or small hit game). In the ending effect pattern determination process, the effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the ending command, and sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the ending command in the sub RAM 94. Then, an ending effect pattern corresponding to the hit type indicated by the special figure stop symbol data is selected, and an ending effect start command for starting the selected ending effect is set in the output buffer of the sub RAM 94. When the ending effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b is transmitted to the image control board 100, the CPU 102 reads a predetermined ending effect image from the ROM 103 and displays it on the display screen 7a. If the ending command has not been received (step S4495: NO), the ending effect pattern determination process described above is skipped.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs other processing (step S4535). In other processing, for example, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the game state designation command, the information regarding the game state included in the game state designation command (time reduction flag, time reduction counter, probability change flag, probability change counter, ceiling flag) , Ceiling counter, etc.) is held in the sub RAM 94. Specifically, the values of the time saving effect counter, the probability variation effect counter, and the ceiling effect counter provided in the counter set area 94d of the sub RAM 94 are updated based on the information included in the game state designation command. For example, the remaining number of fluctuations during the time reduction (the number of games) is set in the time reduction effect counter, the remaining number of fluctuations during the probability change is set in the probability variation effect counter, and the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling is set in the ceiling effect counter. As a result, information on the number of time reductions, the number of probability changes, and the number of ceilings can be held not only on the main control board 80 side but also on the sub control board 90 side. Further, when the effect control microcomputer 91 receives the V-passing command, the sub-RAM 94 holds the V-passing information. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs processing based on commands other than the above (customer waiting standby command, RAM clear notification command, etc.), and ends this processing.

[Look-ahead effect determination process]
FIG. 38 is a flowchart of the look-ahead effect determination process (FIG. 37: step S4420). First, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a preliminary determination information rewriting process (step S4601). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 includes a jackpot pre-determination result (big hit determination information), a jackpot type pre-determination result (big hit type information), and a variation included in the pre-determination command received from the main control board 80. The pattern pre-determination result (variation pattern information) is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c.

FIG. 39 is a diagram for explaining the configuration of the predetermined information storage area 94c. In the pre-determination information storage area 94c, in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot determination information, jackpot type information, and fluctuation pattern information, pre-reading effect pattern information is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern information is information indicating the content of the look-ahead effect executed during the variable effect, and is selected in step S4604 described later. In FIG. 39 (A), the jackpot determination information “loss” and the fluctuation pattern information “P72” and “P73” are the first to third as the preliminary determination results corresponding to the first to third items on hold in FIG. The state in which the pre-determination result corresponding to the fluctuation is stored in the storage area is shown. In FIG. 39 (B), there is a prize in Special FIG. 2 from the state of FIG. The state stored in the corresponding fourth storage area is shown. Here, as the preliminary determination information, the jackpot determination information "big hit", the jackpot type information "21H", and the fluctuation pattern information "P61" are stored. In addition, "Pattern A" is used as pre-reading effect pattern information for each of the first to fourth storage areas corresponding to the first to fourth storage areas on hold in Special Figure 2 and the areas corresponding to the fluctuation. "Is set. FIG. 39 (C) shows a state in which the change is completed and the pre-determination information shift process is executed from the state of FIG. 39 (B). Specifically, the pre-determination information stored in the first storage area shifts to the relevant area, the pre-determination information stored in the second to fourth storage areas shifts to the first to third storage areas, and the first 4 The pre-determination information of the storage area is cleared. The pre-determination information shift process is executed in the variation effect end process (FIG. 37: step S4470).

Returning to FIG. 38, the effect control microcomputer 91 subsequently determines whether or not the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored in any of the relevant area and the first to fourth storage areas of the pre-determination information storage area 94c. If the look-ahead effect pattern information is stored (step S4602: YES), this process ends. That is, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is stored in any of the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c and the first to fourth storage areas, the pre-reading effect pattern information is not newly selected and stored. On the other hand, when the pre-reading effect pattern information is not stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4602: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 receives a pre-determination result included in the pre-determination command as a “big hit”. Alternatively, it is determined whether or not there is a “loss with reach” (step S4603). Whether or not it is a "big hit" or a "loss with reach" can be determined, for example, by the fluctuation pattern pre-determination result (fluctuation pattern information). When the pre-determination result included in the received pre-determination command is "loss without reach" (step S4603: NO), the effect control microcomputer 91 ends this process. This is because there is no need to perform a look-ahead effect. On the other hand, when the pre-judgment result included in the received pre-judgment command is "big hit" or "loss with reach" (step S4603: YES), the pre-reading effect execution determination for determining whether or not to execute the pre-reading effect, Then, the look-ahead effect pattern is selected (step S4604). Specifically, the effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the counter value of the look-ahead effect random number, and refers to the acquired random number value and the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51 stored in the sub ROM 93 to perform the look-ahead effect. Determine whether or not to perform the look-ahead effect, and determine the look-ahead effect pattern when performing the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 40 is a diagram for explaining the look-ahead effect pattern determination table T51. In FIG. 40, when the pre-judgment result is “big hit” and the look-ahead effect random value is “0 to 55”, the look-ahead effect is “none”, and when the look-ahead effect random value is “56 to 67”, the look-ahead effect is as a look-ahead effect. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "68 to 127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. If the pre-judgment result is "loss with reach" and the look-ahead effect random value is "0 to 107", the look-ahead effect is "none", and if the look-ahead effect random value is "108 to 114", the look-ahead effect is used. When "Pattern A" is selected and the look-ahead effect random value is "115-127", "Pattern B" is selected as the look-ahead effect. The type and content of the look-ahead effect pattern and the range of the selected random value can be arbitrarily set.

Returning to FIG. 38, when it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is to be executed (step S4605: YES), the selected look-ahead effect pattern is stored in the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4606). Here, when the pre-reading effect pattern is stored in the pre-judgment information storage area 94c, not only the storage area corresponding to the received pre-determination command but also the storage area before the corresponding storage area among the first to fourth storage areas is stored. The look-ahead effect pattern is also stored in the area and the area. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39 (B), not only the "pattern A" is set in the fourth storage area corresponding to the received predetermination command, but also the first to third storage areas and the area concerned. Also set "Pattern A". As a result, the look-ahead effect pattern A is also executed in the variation effect (variation effect corresponding to the area and the first to third storage areas) that is executed before the variation effect corresponding to the fourth storage area is executed. .. Whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed in the variable effect corresponding to the area depends on the progress of the variable effect. That is, in the variable effect, if the timing for executing the look-ahead effect has already passed, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but if it is before the timing for executing the look-ahead effect, it is executed at that timing. This will be described later. If it is determined in step S4604 that the look-ahead effect is not executed (step S4605: NO), the process ends.

[Variation production start processing]
FIG. 41 is a flowchart of the variation effect start process (FIG. 37: step S4460). The effect control microcomputer 91 first analyzes the fluctuation start command (step S5000). Here, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the information regarding the special figure stop symbol data included in the fluctuation start command and the information regarding the fluctuation pattern in the sub RAM 94. The set information includes game state information indicating the current game state, symbol information indicating a symbol as a determination result of the hit determination process of special figure 1 or special figure 2, and the like. The game state information and the symbol information acquired here can be appropriately referred to by the effect control microcomputer 91.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a core effect pattern determination process (step S5010). The basic effect pattern determination process is a basic configuration of a variable effect (for example, display and switching of a background image in the image display device 7, display of a predetermined character and its operation, output of a melody or sound effect using a speaker 67). , Lamp lighting control, etc.). The variable effect is completed by superimposing additional effects such as chance-up effect and look-ahead effect on this core effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines the core effect pattern with reference to the core effect pattern determination table T52 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a core effect pattern determination table T52. In FIG. 42, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing a normal reach effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP1 effect, a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP2 effect, and a plurality of types of core effect patterns for performing SP3 effect. There are multiple types of core production patterns that perform a reachless loss production. The type of the core production pattern can be set arbitrarily. Here, for example, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P1", the core effect pattern for performing the SP1 effect is selected. Further, when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is "P72", the core effect pattern for performing the reachless loss effect is selected.

Returning to FIG. 41, after determining the basic effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the chance-up effect pattern determination process (step S5015). The chance-up effect pattern determination process is a process for determining an additional effect to be superimposed on the variable effect. The effect control microcomputer 91 acquires the value of the counter of the chance-up random number, and determines the chance-up effect pattern by referring to the acquired random number value and the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 stored in the sub ROM 93.

FIG. 43 is a diagram for explaining the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53. Here, only the portion of the chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 that determines the variation effect pattern of the special figure 1 in the non-time saving state is shown. That is, FIG. 43 shows a chance-up effect pattern executed when the fluctuation pattern included in the fluctuation start command is “P1” to “P16”. The chance-up effect pattern determination table T53 determines the chance-up effect pattern to be executed when the fluctuation patterns are "P21" to "P33", "P41" to "P56", "61" to "73". It may or may not be equipped.

In FIG. 43, as chance-up effect patterns, "2-NO", "2-SP1", "2-SP2", "2-SP3", "3-NO", "3-SP1", "3-SP2", "3-SP3", and " 4-NO, "4-SP1", "4-SP2", "4-SP3", and "ANO" are set. These chance production patterns correspond to various chance-up effects described later.

After returning to FIG. 41 and determining the chance-up effect pattern, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs the count effect pattern determination process (step S5016). Here, the count effect pattern determination process is performed on the number of remaining fluctuations (number of games) at the time of probability change, the number of remaining fluctuations during a short time, the number of remaining fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, the number of fluctuations from when the power is turned on, and after the jackpot game. This is a process for displaying the number of fluctuations and the like on the display screen 7a. At the time of probability change, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability change remaining number of times on the display screen 7a based on the value of the probability change effect counter. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the probability variation remaining number based on the value of the time reduction effect counter at the time of time reduction.

Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 can execute various effects from the value of the ceiling effect counter and the value of the evening effect counter. The ceiling effect counter stores the remaining number of fluctuations until reaching the ceiling, and the evening effect counter records the number of fluctuations from the time the power is turned on. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 can set the number of fluctuations from the time when the power is turned on by incrementing the evening effect counter every time a variation effect end command is received from the main control board 80. The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 (for example, TH2 = 200) or less when the value of the effect counter is TH1 (for example, TH1 = 10). When the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH2 or less, a predetermined chance image is displayed. If the value of the ceiling effect counter is larger than TH2, the chance image is not displayed. As a result, the player who sees the chance image can recognize that the game machine 1 has taken over the number of games of the previous day and the ram clear has not been performed. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the evening effect counter is TH3 (for example, TH3 = 50). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may erase the display or chance image representing the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the effect counter is TH4 (for example, TH4 = 100). Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 may display the value of the ceiling effect counter again when the value of the evening effect counter is TH5 (for example, TH5 = 200). As described above, the effect control microcomputer 91 may determine whether or not to display the value of the ceiling effect counter based on the value of the evening effect counter, or based on the value of the ceiling effect counter. May be good. For example, the effect control microcomputer 91 displays the value of the ceiling effect counter when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH6 (for example, TH6 = 100), and the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH7 (for example, TH7 = 70). At this time, the display of the value of the ceiling effect counter may be turned off, and when the value of the ceiling effect counter is TH8 (for example, TH8 = 50), the value of the ceiling effect counter may be displayed again.

After the count effect pattern determination process, the combination of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to be stopped and displayed may be determined with reference to the effect control microcomputer 91, the random number value, and the stop symbol pattern determination table T54. From these, what kind of production is performed as a variable production is determined.

The effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect start command in the effect command set area 94b (output buffer) of the sub RAM 94 so that the variation effect based on the variation effect pattern determined in steps S501 to S5016 is realized ( Step S5020). When the variation effect start command set in the effect command set area 94b of the subRAM 94 is transmitted to the image control board 100 in the command transmission process (FIG. 36: step S4315), the CPU 102 of the image control board 100 outputs the variation effect image. It is read from the ROM 103 and displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7.

Subsequently, the effect control microcomputer 91 sets the variation effect timer (step S5030), and ends this process. The variation effect timer is set with a variation time (FIG. 42) corresponding to the variation pattern variation pattern included in the variation start command. For example, when the fluctuation pattern is "P1", "40 seconds" is set in the fluctuation effect timer.

[Processing during variable production]
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the variable effect processing (FIG. 36: step S4305). The effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not the variation effect is in progress (step S4701). Whether or not the variation effect is in progress can be determined by, for example, whether or not the variation effect timer is set to zero. If the variation effect is not in progress (step SS4701: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when the fluctuation effect is being produced (step SS4701: YES), the effect control microcomputer 91 determines whether or not it is the timing to set the command before the end of the variation in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4702). The pre-variation command is a command that the effect control microcomputer 91 notifies the image control board 100 and the like that it is a specific timing during the variation effect, and when the image control board 100 receives the pre-variation command. , The production content is switched and a specific image is displayed according to the information contained in the command before the end of fluctuation.

If it is not the timing to set the command before the end of fluctuation (step S4702: NO), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is the timing to set the command before the end of the fluctuation (step S4702: YES), it is determined whether or not there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area of the pre-determination information storage area 94c (step S4703). When there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: YES), a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4704). On the other hand, when there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area (step S4703: NO), a pre-variation command that does not include the look-ahead effect pattern information is set in the effect command set area 94b of the sub RAM 94 (step S4705). As a result, when there is pre-reading effect pattern information in the area, a pre-variation command including the pre-reading effect pattern information is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation effect. Then, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the look-ahead effect of displaying the look-ahead effect image on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. On the other hand, even if there is no look-ahead effect pattern information in the area, the pre-variation command is transmitted to the image control board 100 2 seconds before the end of the variation. Here, when the advance notice image is already displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the image control microcomputer 101 starts the advance notice fade effect for fading the advance notice image.

9. Movement of the movable body and display effect of the sub display screen 64 Using FIGS. 46 to 50, the movement of the board movable body (first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15) and the frame movable body (frame movable accessory 15) are used. The operation of 69) and the display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U) will be described. The effect control microcomputer 91 is a drive control for operating the first movable accessory 14, the second movable accessory 15, and the frame movable accessory 69 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on. To do. Further, the effect control microcomputer 91 performs a display effect of displaying a specific image on the sub display screen 64 during the game effect (display effect) or in the initial operation when the power is turned on.

FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a moving mode of the first movable accessory 14. FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the first movable accessory 14. The first movable accessory 14 is a vertically long rod-shaped member, the upper end of which is located near the upper end of the image display device 7, and the lower end of which is located near the lower end of the image display device 7. The upper end and the lower end of the first movable accessory 14 are difficult to see, and the vicinity of the central portion is visible in front (front) of the image display device 7. As shown in FIG. 1, the first movable accessory 14 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first aspect). At the retracted position, only a part of the first movable accessory 14 may be stored so that the rest can be seen, or the whole of the first movable accessory 14 may be stored so that it is difficult to see. As shown in FIG. 46, the first movable accessory 14 is configured to be movable in the left-right direction in front of the image display device 7. It is configured to move (advance) from the retracted position toward the right end of the display screen 7a and move in the left-right direction on the front surface of the display screen 7a. In addition, it can be stationary at an arbitrary advance position in front of the display screen 7a. The movement mode of the first movable accessory 14 can be arbitrarily set. Further, as shown in FIG. 47, the first movable accessory 14 can move to the right end of the display screen 7a and stand still at that position (second aspect). The first movable accessory 14 may have a decorative portion formed at least in a part thereof, or may have a transparency.

FIG. 48 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is provided with a rectangular decorative portion described as "OARO", and is configured to be movable up and down. As shown in FIG. 1, the second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). At this time, a part of the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of FIG. 1 toward the center of the display screen 7a and stand still at the advance position (deployment position) shown in FIG. 48 (second aspect). .. In this second aspect, the decorative portion is stopped in front (front surface) of the image display device 7 so as to cover the vicinity of the center of the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 can move (retract) upward from the advance position shown in FIG. 48 to the retracted position shown in FIG. 1, and can be stationary there.

FIG. 49 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a second aspect of the frame movable accessory 69. The frame movable accessory 69 is composed of a pair of flat plate-shaped members arranged on the left and right sides of the handle 60, and each of them is configured to be movable in the left-right direction. The two members are made of flexible members, and one main surface of each member is configured to approach or move away from the handle 60. As shown in FIG. 1, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 are normally stationary at the retracted positions (home positions) away from the handle 60 on the left side and the right side of the handle 60 (first aspect). .. As shown in FIG. 49, the two members of the frame movable accessory 69 move (advance) from the retracted position toward the handle 60, that is, move so as to approach each other, and move to the handle 60, respectively. It can stand still at the touching position (second aspect). The frame movable accessory 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60 when in the advanced position. The frame movable accessory 69 can move the two members in a direction away from each other so as to change from the second aspect to the first aspect.

FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display effect of the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). The right sub display screen 64R, the left sub display screen 64L, and the upper sub display screen 64U can display images independently. In addition, it is possible to perform an effect linked with the image of the display screen 7a.

10. Production example, effect example, modification example, embodiment example of this embodiment Each production example (display production example, accessory movable production example) of this embodiment will be described below. In addition, an example of effect, an example of modification, and an example of mode for the effect example will also be described. As described above, the effect described below is based on various information (big hit determination information, big hit type information, fluctuation pattern information, advance determination information, etc.) transmitted from the game control microcomputer 81, and the effect control microcomputer 91 ( This is an effect realized by the image control microcomputer 101). The following display effect example is executed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. In addition, the hold display (hold icon) may be omitted in the display effect example.

The symbol duplication movement effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 51 to 53. This symbol duplication movement effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol duplication movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Design duplication movement production A]
FIG. 51 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect A. In the symbol duplication movement effect, after one of the set of decorative symbols is stopped during the special symbol change, another symbol is duplicated and appears from the stopped symbol, and the other symbol appears toward the stop position of the other symbol. It is a moving production. In the symbol duplication movement effect A, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a while the special symbol is changing. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the display screen 7a. It shall be stopped and displayed in the second area A2 of. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the left decorative symbol 8L, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The second region A2 of the screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the right decorative symbol 8R. Further, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state of the game (low accuracy and low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is framed in from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first region A1.

As shown in FIG. 51 (B), the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "3" which is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, the effect of duplicating the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L to the "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (C), in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. FIG. 51 (C) shows a state in which "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R passes through the third region A3 while moving to the right toward the second region A2. “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R maintains a translucent state while moving to the right.

As shown in FIG. 51 (D), the “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R moving to the right does not stop in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2, and passes through the display screen. Frame out from 7a. As a result, it is notified that the right decorative symbol 8R is not stopped and displayed at this "3".

A new right decorative symbol 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "4" different from the previous symbol "3" appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, the effect of replicating the right decorative symbol 8R one after another from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is executed. In other words, a variation effect is executed in which the right decorative symbol 8R is generated from the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 and moves one after another to the right.

As shown in FIG. 51 (E), in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the “4” of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. FIG. 51 (E) shows a state in which “4” of the right decorative symbol 8R passes through the third region A3 while moving to the right toward the second region A2. “4” of the right decorative symbol 8R maintains a translucent state while moving to the right.

On the other hand, a new right decorative symbol 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "5" different from the previous symbol "4" appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, the effect that the right decorative symbol 8R is duplicated one after another from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is executed, and the right decorative symbol 8R is generated from the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 and is on the right. A variable effect that moves one after another in a direction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (F), "4" of the right decorative symbol 8R moving to the right does not stop in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2, and passes through the display screen. Frame out from 7a. As a result, it is notified that the right decorative symbol 8R is not stopped and displayed at this “4”. The “5” of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a moves to the right toward the second region A2 of the display screen 7a. FIG. 51 (F) shows a state in which “5” of the right decorative symbol 8R passes through the third region A3 while moving to the right toward the second region A2.

On the other hand, a new right decorative symbol 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "3" different from the previous symbol "5" appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, the effect that the right decorative symbol 8R is duplicated one after another from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is executed, and the right decorative symbol 8R is generated from the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 and is on the right. A variable effect that moves one after another in a direction is executed. Further, in this way, the right decorative symbol 8R appearing from the left decorative symbol 8L does not appear in the order of the preset numbers such as "3", "4", "5", and "6", and the order of the numbers is random. May appear in.

As shown in FIG. 51 (G), the “5” of the right decorative symbol 8R moving to the right does not stop in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second area A2, and passes through the display screen. Frame out from 7a. As a result, it is notified that the right decorative symbol 8R is not stopped and displayed at this “5”. The "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a moves to the right toward the second region A2 of the display screen 7a. FIG. 51 (G) shows a state in which “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R passes through the third region A3 while moving to the right toward the second region A2.

On the other hand, a new right decorative symbol 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "6" different from the previous symbol "3" appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, the effect that the right decorative symbol 8R is duplicated one after another from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is executed, and the right decorative symbol 8R is generated from the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 and is on the right. A variable effect that moves one after another in a direction is executed. Further, as described above, the right decorative symbols 8R appearing from the left decorative symbol 8L may appear in the order of random numbers.

As shown in FIG. 51 (H), "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R moving to the right stops at the second region A2 of the display screen 7a. As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at "3", and it is notified that it is in the reach state. The “6” of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a moves to the right toward the second region A2 of the display screen 7a. FIG. 51 (H) shows a state in which “6” of the right decorative symbol 8R passes through the third region A3 while moving to the right toward the second region A2.

On the other hand, a new right decorative symbol 8R appears from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "2" different from the previous symbol "6" appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, the effect that the right decorative symbol 8R is duplicated one after another from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is executed, and the right decorative symbol 8R is generated from the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 and is on the right. A variable effect that moves one after another in a direction is executed. Further, as described above, the right decorative symbols 8R appearing from the left decorative symbol 8L may appear in the order of random numbers.

As shown in FIG. 51 (I), "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R is fixedly stopped in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a, and "6" of the right decorative symbol 8R moving to the right. Does not stop at the second region A2 of the display screen 7a, passes through the second region A2, and frames out from the display screen 7a. Similarly, the "2" of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a moves to the right toward the second region A2 of the display screen 7a. , Passes through the second region A2 and frames out from the display screen 7a.

As shown in FIG. 51 (J), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears from the left decorative symbol 8L which is stopped and displayed in the first region A1. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of "3" which is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, the effect of duplicating the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L to the "3" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (K), in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a, the “3” of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the third region A3 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. Here, "3" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C passes through the third region A3 while moving to the right, and further passes through the second region A2 to be framed out. The "3" of the intermediate decorative symbol 8R maintains a translucent state while moving to the right.

On the other hand, a new intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L which is stopped and displayed in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of "4" different from the previous symbol "3" appears in a semi-transparent state. In this way, here, the effect of replicating the intermediate decorative symbol 8C one after another from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is executed, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is generated from the left decorative symbol 8L of the first region A1 and is on the right. A variable effect that moves one after another in a direction is executed.

As shown in FIG. 51 (L), in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a, the “4” of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the third region A3 of the display screen 7a. It moves to the right and stops at the third region A3. As a result, it is notified that the intermediate decorative symbol 8C has been confirmed and stopped at "4". Further, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a confirmed stop with a loss of "343", and the result of success or failure is notified. When "3" stops at the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the jackpot of "333" is notified.

[Design duplication movement effect B]
FIG. 52 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect B. In the symbol duplication movement effect, after one of the set of decorative symbols is stopped during the special symbol change, another symbol is duplicated and appears from the stopped symbol, and the other symbol appears toward the stop position of the other symbol. It is a moving production. In the symbol duplication movement effect B, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a while the special symbol is changing. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the display screen 7a. It shall be stopped and displayed in the second area A2 of. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the left decorative symbol 8L, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The second region A2 of the screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the right decorative symbol 8R. Further, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state of the game (low accuracy and low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. 52 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is framed in from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first region A1.

As shown in FIG. 52 (B), the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "3" which is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, the effect of duplicating the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L to the "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (C), in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. As shown in FIGS. 52 (C) to 52 (E), the symbol (number) of the right decorative symbol 8R changes from "3" to another symbol (number) while rotating horizontally. Here, the design (number) changes each time it is rotated horizontally. The right decorative symbol 8R changes the symbol in the order of "3", "2", "1" ... While rotating laterally, passes through the third region A3, and moves to the second region A2. That is, the right decorative symbol 8R moves to the right while changing the symbol. The right decorative symbol 8R changes from translucent to a normal color when it starts moving to the right, and maintains a normal color state while rotating (fluctuation) laterally.

As shown in FIG. 52 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R moving to the right while rotating (fluctuation) laterally stops at the second region A2 of the display screen 7a. The right decorative symbol 8R stops at (the number) of the symbol displayed when stopped in the second area A2. Here, it stops at "3". As a result, the right decorative symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at "3", and it is notified that it is in the reach state.

As shown in FIG. 52 (G), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears from the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of "3" which is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, the effect of duplicating the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L to the "3" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is executed.

As shown in FIG. 52 (H), in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a, the “3” of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the third region A3 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. As shown in FIGS. 52 (H) to 52 (I), the symbol (number) of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C changes from "3" to another symbol (number) while rotating horizontally. Here, the design (number) changes each time it is rotated horizontally. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C randomly changes the symbol to "3", "8", "5", ... While rotating laterally, and moves to the third region A3. That is, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves to the right while changing the symbol. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C starts moving to the right, it changes from translucent to a normal color, and maintains a normal color state while rotating (fluctuation) laterally.

As shown in FIG. 52 (J), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moving to the right while rotating (fluctuation) laterally stops at the third region A3 of the display screen 7a. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops at the symbol (number) displayed when it is stopped in the third area A3. Here, it is stopped at "5". As a result, it is notified that the intermediate decorative symbol 8C has been confirmed and stopped at "5". Further, when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is confirmed and stopped, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed as a confirmed stop with a loss of "353", and the result of success or failure is notified. When "3" stops at the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the jackpot of "333" is notified.

52 (K) to 52 (L) are modified examples of FIGS. 52 (C) to 52 (E). In FIGS. 52 (C) to 52 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is assumed to change the symbol (number) from "3" to another symbol (number) while rotating horizontally. However, the variation mode of the right decorative symbol 8R is not limited to the above. In FIGS. 52 (K) to 52 (L), the right decorative symbol 8R fluctuates in the vertical direction while moving to the right. Such an embodiment may be used.

[Design duplication movement production C]
FIG. 53 is a diagram for explaining the symbol duplication movement effect C. In the symbol duplication movement effect, after one of the set of decorative symbols is stopped during the special symbol change, another symbol is duplicated and appears from the stopped symbol, and the other symbol appears toward the stop position of the other symbol. It is a moving production. In the symbol duplication movement effect C, first, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed on the display screen 7a while the special symbol is changing. The variable display here includes not only a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are visually recognizable when they are moving at high speed, but also a display in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are invisible due to high-speed movement.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed in the display screen 7a. It shall be stopped and displayed in the second area A2 of. In other words, the first area A1 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the left decorative symbol 8L, and the third area A3 of the display screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The second region A2 of the screen 7a is the stop position after the change of the right decorative symbol 8R. Further, here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed in the normal state of the game (low accuracy and low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

After the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, as shown in FIG. 53 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a. Here, "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L is framed in from above the display screen 7a, moves downward, and is stopped and displayed in the first region A1.

As shown in FIG. 53 (B), the right decorative symbol 8R appears from the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped and displayed in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R of "3" which is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, the effect of duplicating the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L to the "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R is executed.

As shown in FIG. 53 (C), in the first area A1 of the display screen 7a, the “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the second area A2 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. FIG. 53C shows a state in which “3” of the right decorative symbol 8R passes through the third region A3 while moving to the right toward the second region A2. When the right decorative symbol 8R "3" starts moving to the right, it changes from translucent to a normal color, and moves while maintaining the normal color state.

As shown in FIG. 53 (D), "3" of the right decorative symbol 8R moving to the right stops at the second region A2 of the display screen 7a. When the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped in the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed so as to overlap the stopped right decorative symbol 8R. The button image BTN is an image that imitates the outer shape of the effect button 63, and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 53 (E), the button image BTN disappears and the right decorative symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at "3", and FIGS. 53 (J) to (K). As shown in the above, the button image BTN may disappear and the right decorative symbol 8R may rotate horizontally, and the confirmation may be stopped at a symbol (number) other than "3". FIGS. 53 (J) to 53 (K) show a state in which the right decorative symbol 8R is rotated horizontally and is fixedly stopped at “4”. In FIG. 53 (E), the right decorative symbol 8R is fixedly stopped at “3”, and it is notified that the right decorative symbol 8R is in the reach state.

After FIG. 53 (E) or FIG. 53 (K), as shown in FIG. 53 (F), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appears from the left decorative symbol 8L which is stopped and displayed in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a. .. Specifically, from "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C of "3" which is the same symbol as the left decorative symbol 8L appears in a semi-transparent state. That is, here, the effect of duplicating the "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L to the "3" of the middle decorative symbol 8C is executed.

As shown in FIG. 53 (G), in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a, the “3” of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the “3” of the left decorative symbol 8L is in the third region A3 of the display screen 7a. Move to the right. When the "3" of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C starts moving to the right, it changes from translucent to a normal color, and moves while maintaining the normal color state.

As shown in FIG. 53 (H), the “3” of the moving intermediate decorative symbol 8C stops at the third region A3 of the display screen 7a. When the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped in the third region A3, the button image BTN is displayed so as to overlap the stopped intermediate decorative symbol 8C. The button image BTN is an image that imitates the outer shape of the effect button 63, and prompts the player to operate (press) the effect button 63.

When the player operates the effect button 63, as shown in FIG. 53 (I), the button image BTN disappears and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at “3”, and as shown in FIG. 53 (L). , The button image BTN disappears and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C rotates horizontally, and may stop at a symbol (number) other than "3". In FIG. 53 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is fixedly stopped at "3", and a big hit is notified. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 53 (L), when the button image BTN disappears and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C rotates laterally and stops at a symbol (number) other than "3", the loss is notified.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the symbol duplication movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, which is one of the set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, is in the first region A1 of the display screen 7a. After the first effect of stopping and as shown in FIGS. 51 (F) to 51 (H), the right decorative symbol 8R appears and is displayed from the left decorative symbol 8L stopped in the first region A1. A second effect of moving toward the second area A2 of the screen 7a and stopping at the second area A2 of the display screen 7a can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51 (L), after the second effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 8 is stopped in the third area A3 of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped. And, the right or wrong can be notified by the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 52 and 53.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 52 and 53, in the second effect, the right decorative symbol 8R is the same as the left decorative symbol 8L that is stopped when it appears from the left decorative symbol 8L. It represents a design. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 51, in the second effect, a plurality of right decorative symbols 8R appear consecutively from the left decorative symbol 8L and move toward the second region A2, respectively. One stops at the second region A2 and the rest passes through the second region A2. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, when the right decorative symbol 8R appearing from the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the second region A2 in the second effect, the button image BTN is displayed and the game is played. When a person operates the effect button 63, the symbol may be the same as when the right decorative symbol 8R appears, or the symbol may be changed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, in the second effect, the right decorative symbol 8R changes the symbol when it appears from the left decorative symbol 8L and moves toward the second region A2. Move while letting. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the symbol duplication movement effect.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol duplication movement effect A, it is assumed that the symbols (numbers) of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the left decorative symbol 8L do not change after duplication. However, after duplication, the design (number) may change and be displayed in a variable manner while moving to the right.
In the symbol duplication movement effects B and C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the left decorative symbol 8L are assumed to be the same symbols (numbers) as the left decorative symbol 8L. However, the duplicated right decorative symbol 8R and middle decorative symbol 8C may be different symbols (numbers) from the left decorative symbol 8L. For example, "3" of the left decorative symbol 8L may appear to "4" of the right decorative symbol 8R.

[Modification 2]
In the symbol duplication movement effects B and C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are duplicated one by one from the left decorative symbol 8L, and the duplicated right decorative symbol 8R and one intermediate decorative symbol 8C are always duplicated. It was decided to stop at the second region A2 and the third region A3, respectively. However, a plurality of right decorative symbols 8R and middle decorative symbols 8C may be duplicated from the left decorative symbol 8L as in the symbol duplication movement effect A. For example, in the symbol duplication movement effect B, a plurality of right decorative symbols 8R appear consecutively from the left decorative symbol 8L, each of which moves to the right while rotating horizontally, one stops in the second region A2, and the rest. May pass through the second region A2 and frame out. The same applies to the intermediate decorative pattern 8C.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol duplication movement effects A and C, the symbols (numbers) of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C duplicated from the left decorative symbol 8L did not change while moving to the right, but the symbol duplication movement effect. As in B, the symbol (number) may change while moving to the right.

[Modification example 4]
In the symbol duplication movement effects A to C, it is assumed that the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are duplicated (appeared) from the left decorative symbol 8L. However, other symbols may be duplicated from other than the left decorative symbol 8L. For example, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L may be duplicated from the right decorative symbol 8R, or the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R may be duplicated from the intermediate decorative symbol 8C.

[Modification 5]
In the symbol duplication movement effects A to C, the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C may be moved while maintaining translucency while moving to the right, or the color, shape, and size may change. You may.

[Modification 6]
In the symbol duplication movement effects A and B, similarly to the symbol duplication movement effect C, when the right decorative symbol 8R appearing from the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the second area A2, the button image BTN is displayed, and when operated, the symbol ( The effect of changing the number) may be performed. The same applies when the intermediate decorative symbol 8C appearing from the left decorative symbol 8L reaches the third region A3.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result.
A first effect in which the first symbol, which is one of the set of decorative symbols, stops in the first region of the display means, and
After the first effect, a second symbol appears from the first symbol stopped in the first region and moves toward the second region of the display means, and the second symbol of the display means. A second effect that stops in the area of
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A1-1.
After the second effect, the third symbol stops in the third region of the display means, and the first symbol, the second symbol, and the third symbol, which are stopped, are used to determine whether or not the third symbol is correct. To inform,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A1-1 or the aspect A1-2.
In the second effect, the second symbol represents the same symbol as the first symbol that is stopped when it appears from the first symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
In the second effect, a plurality of the second symbols appear consecutively from the first symbol, each move toward the second region, and one stops in the second region. And the rest passes through the second region,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
One of the plurality of types of images is an operation means image that imitates the appearance of the operation means.
In the second effect, when the second symbol appearing from the first symbol reaches the second region, the operation means image is displayed.
When the player operates the operating means, the symbol may be the same as when the second symbol appears, or the symbol may be changed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A1-1 to A1-3.
In the second effect, when the second symbol appears from the first symbol and moves toward the second region, the second symbol moves while changing the symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the symbol sequential variation effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 to 56. This pattern sequential variation effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol sequential variation effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). Further, the corresponding acoustic data is read from the ROM 103 and the sound is output from the speaker 67.

[Sequentially changing design A]
FIG. 54 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect A. In the symbol sequential variation effect, a set of decorative symbols is displayed as the previous stop symbol during the special symbol variation, and one of the symbols is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining symbols are maintained in the stopped state at the previous stop symbol. After that, the remaining symbols start to change in sequence. In the symbol sequential variation effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a change icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Has been done.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 54A and 54B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special symbol changes. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the stop display of "356" is continued for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) without changing the display position.

After the lapse of a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 54 (C), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the stopped display "5" moves downward without changing the color or shape and is framed out, and from above, other symbols (numbers) are framed in. The production that does not come is executed. The variable display here is a display in which the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, a state in which the symbol cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the variable display cannot be visually recognized. Also includes. Here, it is assumed that the variable display cannot be visually recognized. The remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) maintain the stop display without changing the display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the right decorative symbol 8R moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the right decorative symbol 8R, "6", which was stopped and displayed, moves downward without changing the color or shape and is framed out, and from above, other symbols (numbers) are framed in. The production that does not come is executed. The variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R is also invisible. The remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) maintain the stop display without changing the display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the left decorative symbol 8L moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the left decorative symbol 8L, "3", which was stopped and displayed, moves downward without changing the color or shape and is framed out, and from above, other symbols (numbers) are framed in. The production that does not come is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also invisible. As a result, the variable display of all decorative symbols becomes invisible.

As described above, here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started to be variablely displayed in the order of the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, the order in which the changing decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped is the reverse order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol 8C. In general, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. Even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start to change in order, the right decorative symbol 8R always starts moving before the left decorative symbol 8L is framed out. In the present embodiment, when the first symbol is framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

As shown in FIG. 54 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in the stop display mode of "689" from the state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to the variable display. This can surprise the player. As shown in FIGS. 54 (F) and 54 (G), the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the stop display of "689" is continued for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) without changing the display position.

After the lapse of a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 54 (H), the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the right decorative symbol 8R moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the right decorative symbol 8R, "9", which was stopped and displayed, moves downward without changing the color or shape and is framed out, and from above, other symbols (numbers) are framed in. The production that does not come is executed. The variable display here is a display in which the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, a state in which the symbol cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the variable display cannot be visually recognized. Also includes. Here, it is assumed that the variable display cannot be visually recognized. The remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and middle decorative symbol 8C) maintain the stop display without changing the display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (I), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves downward and is framed out. Here, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is framed out by moving the "8" that was stopped and displayed downward without changing the color or shape, and the other symbols (numbers) are framed in from above. The production that does not come is executed. The variable display of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is also invisible. The remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) maintain the stop display without changing the display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 54 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the left decorative symbol 8L moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the left decorative symbol 8L, "6", which was stopped and displayed, moves downward without changing the color or shape and is framed out, and from above, other symbols (numbers) are framed in. The production that does not come is executed. The variable display of the left decorative pattern 8L is also invisible. As a result, the variable display of all decorative symbols becomes invisible.

Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started to be variablely displayed in the order of the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order of the symbols at which the fluctuation starts is reversed from that of the general one. Further, in general, even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start to change in order, the right decorative symbol is always placed before the left decorative symbol 8L is framed out. 8R starts moving. In the present embodiment, when the first symbol is framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R change changes with each change, the player cannot predict which symbol will disappear, and the variation effect can be enjoyed. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the first symbol is framed out and the remaining symbols maintain the stop display, the timing at which the second symbol is framed out and the remaining symbols maintain the stop display, the last 1 The timing at which the two stopped and displayed symbols are framed out is executed at a constant rhythm. Here, it is executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 at the start of fluctuation of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first symbol is framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each symbol is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, if a short sound is generated at the fluctuation start timing of each symbol, the sound is rhythmically generated three times, so that the player's attention can be further attracted.

As shown in FIG. 54 (K), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in the stop display mode of "234" from the state in which they cannot be visually recognized due to the variable display. This can surprise the player. As shown in FIGS. 54 (K) and 54 (L), the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the stop display of "234" is continued for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) without changing the display position.

[Sequentially changing design B]
FIG. 55 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect B. In the symbol sequential variation effect, a set of decorative symbols is displayed as the previous stop symbol during the special symbol variation, and one of the symbols is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining symbols are maintained in the stopped state at the previous stop symbol. After that, the remaining symbols start to change in sequence. In the symbol sequential variation effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 55 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a change icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Has been done.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 55 (A) and 55 (B), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special figure changes. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continue to be stopped and displayed as "356" for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) while moving upward. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move in a direction (upward) different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

After the lapse of a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 55 (C), the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the right decorative symbol 8R moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the right decorative symbol 8R, "6", which was stopped and displayed, stopped moving upward and moved downward to frame out without changing the color or shape, and other symbols (numbers) were displayed from above. The production that comes in the frame is executed. The variable display here includes a display in which the state in which the right decorative symbol 8R is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, and a display in which the symbol cannot be visually recognized. Here, it is assumed that the state in which the symbols having different numbers move at high speed from the upper side to the lower side can be visually recognized. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. The remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and middle decorative symbol 8C) maintain the movement and stop display in a direction (upward) different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (D), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves downward and is framed out. Here, as for the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, "5", which has been stopped and displayed, stops moving upward and moves downward to frame out without changing the color or shape, and other symbols (numbers) are displayed from above. The production that comes in the frame is executed. As for the variable display of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, it is assumed that the state in which the symbols having different numbers move at high speed from the upper side to the lower side can be visually recognized. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. The remaining decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) maintains the movement and stop display in a direction (upward) different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the left decorative symbol 8L moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the left decorative symbol 8L, "3", which was stopped and displayed, stopped moving upward and moved downward to frame out without changing the color or shape, and other symbols (numbers) were displayed from above. The production that comes in the frame is executed. As for the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the symbols having different numbers move at high speed from the upper side to the lower side. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. As a result, all the decorative symbols can be visually recognized in the variable display.

As described above, here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started to be variablely displayed in the order of the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order of the symbols at which the fluctuation starts is reversed from that of the general one. Further, in general, even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start to change in order, the right decorative symbol is always placed before the left decorative symbol 8L is framed out. 8R starts moving. In the present embodiment, when the first symbol is framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

After the fluctuation for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 55 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "9". The left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C continue to be displayed in a variable manner. After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (G), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed. Here, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "8". The variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L is continued. After that, as shown in FIG. 55 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "6". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the variable display state to the stopped display state at "689".

As shown in FIGS. 55 (H) and 55 (I), the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to stop and display "689" for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) while moving downward. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the fluctuation direction (downward) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

After the lapse of a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 55 (J), the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are displayed in a variable manner at the same time. When the variable display is started, the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C move downward and frame out. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are framed out by greatly increasing the speed of downward movement without changing the color or shape of "89", which was displayed as a stop, and other symbols (from above). The effect that the number) is framed in is executed. It should be noted that the variable display here means that a state in which symbols having different numbers move at high speed from above to below can be visually recognized. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. The remaining decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) maintains the movement and stop display in the same direction (downward) as the fluctuation direction (downward) of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 55 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the left decorative symbol 8L moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the left decorative symbol 8L, "6", which was stopped and displayed, greatly increases the speed of downward movement without changing the color or shape, and frames out, and from above, other symbols (numbers) are in the frame. The in-coming production is executed. As for the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the symbols having different numbers move at high speed from the upper side to the lower side. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. As a result, all the decorative symbols can be visually recognized in the variable display.

Here, as for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is subsequently variablely displayed. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, after a plurality of symbols change at the same time, one symbol starts to change. Further, in general, even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start to change in order, the right decorative symbol is always placed before the left decorative symbol 8L is framed out. 8R starts moving. In the present embodiment, when the two symbols are framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the changing mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changes for each change, the player cannot predict which symbol will disappear, and the variation effect can be enjoyed. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which each symbol is framed out by the start of fluctuation is executed with a constant rhythm. Here, it is executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 at the start of fluctuation of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As described above, in the present embodiment, when some of the symbols are framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each symbol is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, if a short sound is generated at the fluctuation start timing of each symbol, the sound is generated rhythmically, so that the player's attention can be further attracted.

As shown in FIG. 55 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in the stop display mode of "234" from the variable display state. This can surprise the player. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the stop display of "234" is continued for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) without changing the display position.

[Sequential fluctuation effect C]
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the symbol sequential variation effect C. In the symbol sequential variation effect, a set of decorative symbols is displayed as the previous stop symbol during the special symbol variation, and one of the symbols is displayed in a variable manner, while the remaining symbols are maintained in the stopped state at the previous stop symbol. After that, the remaining symbols start to change in sequence. In the symbol sequential variation effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 56 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, a hold icon 9A, and a change icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Has been done.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have a round shape (spherical shape).

As shown in FIGS. 56A and 56B, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed at "356" after the special symbol changes. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R continue to be stopped and displayed as "356" for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) while moving upward. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move in a direction (upward) different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

After the lapse of a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the right decorative symbol 8R moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the right decorative symbol 8R, "6", which was stopped and displayed, stopped moving upward and moved downward to frame out without changing the color or shape, and other symbols (numbers) were displayed from above. The production that comes in the frame is executed. The variable display here includes a display in which the state in which the right decorative symbol 8R is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, and a display in which the symbol cannot be visually recognized. Here, it is assumed that the state in which the symbols having different numbers move at high speed from the upper side to the lower side can be visually recognized. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. The remaining decorative symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and middle decorative symbol 8C) maintain the movement and stop display in a direction (upward) different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the right decorative symbol 8R.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (D), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves downward and is framed out. Here, as for the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, "5", which has been stopped and displayed, stops moving upward and moves downward to frame out without changing the color or shape, and other symbols (numbers) are displayed from above. The production that does not come in the frame is executed. The variable display of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C is invisible. That is, here, the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are configured so that the mode of variable display is different. The remaining decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) maintains the movement and stop display in a direction (upward) different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the left decorative symbol 8L moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the left decorative symbol 8L, "3", which was stopped and displayed, stopped moving upward and moved downward to frame out without changing the color or shape, and other symbols (numbers) were displayed from above. The production that comes in the frame is executed. Similar to the variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L shall be able to visually recognize the state in which the symbols having different numbers move at high speed from the upper side to the lower side. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. As a result, all the decorative patterns are displayed in a variable manner.

As described above, here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are started to be variablely displayed in the order of the right decorative symbol 8R, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the left decorative symbol 8L. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, the order of the symbols at which the fluctuation starts is reversed from that of the general one. Further, in general, even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start to change in order, the right decorative symbol is always placed before the left decorative symbol 8L is framed out. 8R starts moving. In the present embodiment, when the first symbol is framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest. Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are configured so as to have different modes of variable display. As a result, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

After the fluctuation for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 56 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are subjected to the effect of changing the mode of the variable display. Specifically, the right decorative symbol 8R and the left decorative symbol 8L are switched from a state in which the variable display is visible to a state in which the variable display is not visible, and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is switched from a state in which the variable display is not visible to a state in which the variable display is visible. As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of the variable display changes during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. Here, the mode of the variable display is different for each symbol and changes randomly with the passage of time. As a result, the variable display is not monotonous, and the player can be entertained.

After the change for a predetermined period, as shown in FIG. 56 (G), the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are stopped and displayed at the same time. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "9", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "8". The variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L is continued. After that, as shown in FIG. 56 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the symbol (number) of "6". As a result, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from the variable display state to the stopped display state at "689".

As shown in FIG. 56 (H), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are displayed at the same position for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) after the stop display without changing the position, and then, in FIG. 56 (I). As shown in the above, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R continue to display the stop display of "689" while moving downward. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R move in the same direction (downward) as the fluctuation direction (downward) of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. As a result, it is notified that the pseudo-ream is started.

After the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R move downward for a predetermined period, the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are re-variably displayed at the same time as shown in FIG. 56 (J). When the variable display is started, the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C move downward and frame out. Here, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are framed out by greatly increasing the speed of downward movement without changing the color or shape of "89", which was displayed as a stop, and other symbols (from above). The effect that the number) does not come in the frame is executed. The variable display here is a display in which the state in which the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is moving at high speed can be visually recognized, a state in which the symbol cannot be visually recognized, and a state in which the variable display cannot be visually recognized. Also includes. Here, it is assumed that the variable display cannot be visually recognized. The remaining decorative symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) maintains the movement and stop display in the same direction (downward) as the fluctuation direction (downward) of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C.

Next, as shown in FIG. 56 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L is displayed in a variable manner. When the variable display is started, the left decorative symbol 8L moves downward and is framed out. Here, in the left decorative symbol 8L, "6", which was stopped and displayed, greatly increases the speed of downward movement without changing the color or shape, and frames out, and from above, other symbols (numbers) are in the frame. The in-coming production is executed. As for the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is possible to visually recognize the state in which the symbols having different numbers move at high speed from the upper side to the lower side. It should be noted that the symbol (number) may not be visible, and only the vertical line due to the symbol moving from above to below at high speed may be visible. The variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C changes in the same manner as the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L in accordance with the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L. That is, the variable display of the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C is changed from the invisible state to the visible state as in the left decorative symbol 8L. As a result, all the decorative symbols can be visually recognized in the variable display.

Here, as for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the right decorative symbol 8R and the middle decorative symbol 8C are variablely displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is subsequently variablely displayed. Generally, when the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to change, they all start to change at the same time, or in the order of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. In this embodiment, after a plurality of symbols change at the same time, one symbol starts to change. Further, in general, even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R start to change in order, the right decorative symbol is always placed before the left decorative symbol 8L is framed out. 8R starts moving. In the present embodiment, when the two symbols are framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. By doing so, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the changing mode of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R changes for each change, the player cannot predict which symbol will disappear, and the variation effect can be enjoyed. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which each symbol is framed out by the start of fluctuation is executed with a constant rhythm. Here, it is executed at equal intervals. Sound is output from the speaker 67 in accordance with this rhythm. That is, a short sound is output from the speaker 67 at the start of fluctuation of each of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. As described above, in the present embodiment, when some of the symbols are framed out, the remaining symbols maintain the stop display. Therefore, the fluctuation start interval of each symbol is larger than the general fluctuation start interval. Therefore, if a short sound is generated at the fluctuation start timing of each symbol, the sound is generated rhythmically, so that the player's attention can be further attracted.

As shown in FIG. 56 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed after the special symbol changes. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear all at once in the stop display mode of "234" from the variable display state. This can surprise the player. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is digested (disappears) in accordance with the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Then, the rightmost hold icon 9A among the hold icons 9A lined up starts moving toward the variable icon display area where the variable icon 9C is displayed. The remaining hold icon 9A shifts. Then, the next special figure change is started. After the next special figure change is started, the stop display of "234" is continued for the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) without changing the display position.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the pattern sequential variation effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed, and the first effect and, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), the first effect. After the next variation of the special symbol variation in which the effect is executed is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R stopped and displayed with the same symbol "356" as the symbol displayed stopped in the first effect are displayed. 2 and as shown in FIG. 54 (C), after the second effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which is one of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, is displayed in a variable manner, and the remaining symbols ( A third effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R) maintain the stop display can be executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (D), one of the symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that maintains the stop display after the third effect. The right decorative symbol 8R is further varied and displayed, and the remaining symbol (left decorative symbol 8L) can perform the fourth effect of maintaining the stop display. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (E), after the fourth effect, the remaining symbols (left decorative symbol 8L) that maintain the stop display are further varied and displayed. Can be performed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 54 (H) to 54 (J), a set of decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R includes a left decorative symbol 8L, a middle decorative symbol 8C, and a right decorative symbol. 8R is included. In the third effect, the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed in a variable manner, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the left decorative symbol 8L maintain the stop display, and in the fourth effect, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is further displayed. Is displayed in a variable manner, the left decorative symbol 8L maintains the stop display, and in the fifth effect, the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed in a variable manner. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, in the second effect, the third effect, the fourth effect, and the fifth effect, one symbol that is stopped and displayed is variablely displayed. When switching to, the corresponding sound is output from the speaker 67. According to this configuration, the player can be visually and audibly entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 55 and 56.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in the second effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed are the first, which is different from the fluctuation direction (downward) of the symbols. The remaining symbols (left decorative symbol 8L and right decorative symbol 8R) that move in the direction of (upward) and maintain the stop display in the third effect move in the first direction (upward). Is continuing. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the pattern sequential variation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the symbol sequential variation effects A to C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are assumed to be continuously displayed even if the next variation starts after the stop display is performed. However, it may be configured so that it disappears once at the start of the fluctuation and the previous stop symbol is displayed again during the fluctuation.

[Modification 2]
In the symbol sequential variation effects A to C, the order of the variation start of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R was random. However, the order in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate may be predetermined.

[Modification 3]
In the symbol sequential variation effects A to C, it is assumed that a short sound is produced at the start of the variation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R. Each short sound may have a different timbre or a different length. In addition, a long sound may be produced and the sounds may overlap.

[Modification example 4]
In the symbol sequential variation effects B and C, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed after the start of the special symbol variation are assumed to move upward, but the moving direction can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may move to the right, to the left, or diagonally.

[Modification 5]
In the symbol sequential variation effect A, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R stopped and displayed after the special symbol variation starts are not moved. However, it may be moved in the same manner as the symbol sequential variation effects B and C.

[Modification 6]
In the symbol sequential variation effects B and C, the symbol in which the variation display can be visually recognized may be in a mode in which the variation display cannot be visually recognized.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A2-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result.
The first effect that the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and
After the next variation of the special symbol variation in which the first effect is executed is started, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed with the same symbol as the symbol displayed stopped in the first effect is displayed. The second production and
After the second effect, a third effect in which one of the set of decorative symbols is variably displayed and the remaining symbols maintain the stop display can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect A2-1.
After the third effect, one of the symbols maintaining the stop display is further varied and displayed, and the remaining symbols can execute the fourth effect of maintaining the stop display.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-2.
After the fourth effect, the fifth effect in which the remaining symbols maintaining the stop display are further varied and displayed can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-3.
The set of decorative symbols includes a left decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a right decorative symbol.
In the third effect, the right decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the intermediate decorative symbol and the left decorative symbol maintain the stop display.
In the fourth effect, the intermediate decorative symbol is further displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol maintains the stop display.
In the fifth effect, the left decorative pattern is further varied and displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A2-3 or the aspect A2-4 is further described.
Equipped with a sound output means to output sound
In the second effect, the third effect, the fourth effect, and the fifth effect, when one symbol that is stopped and displayed is switched to the variable display, the sound output means corresponds to it. Sound is output,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect A2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A2-1 to A2-5.
In the second effect, the set of decorative symbols stopped and displayed moves in a first direction different from the direction in which the symbols fluctuate.
In the third effect, the remaining symbols maintaining the stop display continue to move in the first direction.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative design special effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59. This decorative symbol special effect is executed during a variable effect of the special symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol special effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Decorative design special production A]
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special effect A. The decorative symbol special effect A is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol special effect, as shown in FIG. 57 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the hold icon XC1, the hold icon XC2, the hold icon XD1, the hold icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed. The character CRA moves around on the display screen 7a.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three frames arranged side by side in succession, and the decorative symbol XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative symbol XA is composed of a first decorative symbol XA1, a second decorative symbol XA2, and a third decorative symbol XA3. In the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the first decorative symbol XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative symbol XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative symbol XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a miss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes two frames arranged side by side in succession, and the decorative symbol XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative symbol XB is composed of a fourth decorative symbol XB1 and a fifth decorative symbol XB2. In the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 is displayed in the left frame, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 is displayed in the right frame. The fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a miss.

The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed vertically in the immediate vicinity on the right side of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. To. The hold icon XC1 corresponds to the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed vertically in the immediate vicinity on the left side of the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, that is, are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The hold icon XD1 corresponds to the hold icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of hold icons XC1 is two, the number of hold icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in a circle, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in a diamond shape.
In the example of FIG. 57, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, that is, the number of holds is four.

Further, the first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, and the second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. On these reach lines, a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol is formed, respectively.

In the decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol XA in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA and the decorative symbol XB in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB are being varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (B), the decorative symbol stop effect 1 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 1, the first decorative symbol XA1 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57B, the first decorative symbol XA1 having the identifier "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol XA2, the third decorative symbol XA3, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect 2 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 2, the second decorative symbol XA2 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57 (C), the second decorative symbol XA2 having the identifier "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative symbol XA3, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (D), the decorative symbol stop effect 3 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 3, the third decorative symbol XA3 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 57 (D), the third decorative symbol XA3 having the identifier "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing. At this time, on the first reach line LN1, the out-of-order symbols of "1", "7", and "5" are displayed by the decorative symbol XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (E), the decorative symbol stop effect 4 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 4, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 of the decorative symbol XB are stopped and displayed at the same time. In the example of FIG. 57 (E), the fourth decorative symbol XB1 having the identifier "1" and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 having the identifier "7" are stopped and displayed. At this time, on the second reach line LN2, the out-of-order symbols "1" and "7" are displayed by the decorative symbol XB. It should be noted that the first decorative symbol XA1 of the decorative symbol XA and the fourth decorative symbol XB1 of the decorative symbol XB always stop at the decorative symbol having the same identifier, and the second decorative symbol XA2 of the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol are always used. The fifth decorative symbol XB2 of XB is configured to stop at a decorative symbol having the same identifier.

[Decorative design special production B]
FIG. 58 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special effect B. The decorative symbol special effect B is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol special effect B, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the hold icon XC1, the hold icon XC2, the hold icon XD1, the hold icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three frames arranged side by side in succession, and the decorative symbol XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative symbol XA is composed of a first decorative symbol XA1, a second decorative symbol XA2, and a third decorative symbol XA3. In the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the first decorative symbol XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative symbol XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative symbol XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a miss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes three frames arranged side by side in succession, and the decorative symbol XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative symbol XB is composed of a fourth decorative symbol XB1, a fifth decorative symbol XB2, and a sixth decorative symbol XB3. In the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative symbol XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The fourth decorative symbol XB1, the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a miss.

The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed vertically in the immediate vicinity on the right side of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. To. The hold icon XC1 corresponds to the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed vertically in the immediate vicinity on the left side of the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, that is, are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The hold icon XD1 corresponds to the hold icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of hold icons XC1 is two, the number of hold icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in a circle, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in a diamond shape.
In the example of FIG. 58, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, that is, the number of holds is four.

Further, the first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, and the second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. On these reach lines, a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol is formed, respectively.

In the decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol XA in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA and the decorative symbol XB in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB are being varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (B), the decorative symbol stop effect 1 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 1, the first decorative symbol XA1 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58 (B), the first decorative symbol XA1 having the identifier "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol XA2, the third decorative symbol XA3, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect 2 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 2, the second decorative symbol XA2 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58 (C), the second decorative symbol XA2 having the identifier "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative symbol XA3, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (D), the decorative symbol stop effect 3 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 3, the third decorative symbol XA3 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 58 (D), the third decorative symbol XA3 having the identifier "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing. At this time, on the first reach line LN1, the out-of-order symbols of "1", "7", and "5" are displayed by the decorative symbol XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58 (E), the decorative symbol stop effect 4 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 4, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 of the decorative symbol XB are stopped and displayed at the same time. In the example of FIG. 58 (E), the fourth decorative symbol XB1 having the identifier "1", the fifth decorative symbol XB2 having the identifier "7", and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 having the identifier "5" are stopped and displayed. Has been done. At this time, on the second reach line LN2, the out-of-order symbols of "1", "7", and "5" are displayed by the decorative symbol XB. It should be noted that the first decorative symbol XA1 of the decorative symbol XA and the fourth decorative symbol XB1 of the decorative symbol XB always stop at the decorative symbol having the same identifier, and the second decorative symbol XA2 of the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol are always used. The fifth decorative symbol XB2 of XB stops at the decorative symbol having the same identifier, and the third decorative symbol XA3 of the decorative symbol XA and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 of the decorative symbol XB are decorative symbols having the same identifier. It is configured to stop. That is, the mode of stopping the identifier is the same for the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB.

[Decorative design special production C]
FIG. 59 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol special effect C. The decorative symbol special effect C is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol special effect C, as shown in FIG. 59 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the hold icon XC1, the hold icon XC2, the hold icon XD1, the hold icon XD2, and the character CRA is displayed.

The first decorative symbol group display area XAA includes three frames arranged side by side in succession, and the decorative symbol XA is displayed in each frame. The decorative symbol XA is composed of a first decorative symbol XA1, a second decorative symbol XA2, and a third decorative symbol XA3. In the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, the first decorative symbol XA1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the second decorative symbol XA2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the third decorative symbol XA3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a miss.

The second decorative symbol group display area XBB includes three frames arranged vertically in succession, and the decorative symbol XB is displayed in each frame. The decorative symbol XB is composed of a fourth decorative symbol XB1, a fifth decorative symbol XB2, and a sixth decorative symbol XB3. In the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, the fourth decorative symbol XB1 is displayed in the leftmost frame, the fifth decorative symbol XB2 is displayed in the middle frame, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 is displayed in the rightmost frame. Is displayed. The fourth decorative symbol XB1, the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 each include a number as an identifier that can identify a jackpot or a miss.

The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed vertically in the immediate vicinity on the right side of the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, that is, the hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in association with the decorative symbol XA. To. The hold icon XC1 corresponds to the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon XC2 corresponds to the variable icon 9C.

The hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed horizontally near the lower side of the second decorative symbol group display area XBB, that is, are displayed in association with the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. The hold icon XD1 corresponds to the hold icon XC1, and the variable icon XD2 corresponds to the variable icon XC2. That is, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 represent the same number of holds. For example, when the number of hold icons XC1 is two, the number of hold icons XD1 is also two. The hold icon XC1 and the variable icon XC2 are displayed in a circle, and the hold icon XD1 and the variable icon XD2 are displayed in a diamond shape.
In the example of FIG. 59, four hold icons XC1 and four hold icons XD1 are displayed, that is, the number of holds is four.

Further, the first reach line LN1 is formed in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA, and the second reach line LN2 is formed in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB. On these reach lines, a jackpot symbol or a missed symbol is formed, respectively.

In the decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbol XA in the first decorative symbol group display area XAA and the decorative symbol XB in the second decorative symbol group display area XBB are being varied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), the decorative symbol stop effect 1 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 1, the first decorative symbol XA1 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59 (B), the first decorative symbol XA1 having the identifier "1" is stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol XA2, the third decorative symbol XA3, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), the decorative symbol stop effect 2 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 2, the second decorative symbol XA2 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59 (C), the second decorative symbol XA2 having the identifier "7" is stopped and displayed. The third decorative symbol XA3, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), the decorative symbol stop effect 3 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 3, the third decorative symbol XA3 of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed. In the example of FIG. 59 (D), the third decorative symbol XA3 having the identifier "5" is stopped and displayed. The fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 are changing. At this time, on the first reach line LN1, the out-of-order symbols of "1", "7", and "5" are displayed by the decorative symbol XA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), the decorative symbol stop effect 4 is performed. In the decorative symbol stop effect 4, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 of the decorative symbol XB are stopped and displayed at the same time. In the example of FIG. 59 (E), the fourth decorative symbol XB1 having the identifier "1", the fifth decorative symbol XB2 having the identifier "7", and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 having the identifier "5" are stopped and displayed. Has been done. At this time, on the second reach line LN2, the out-of-order symbols of "1", "7", and "5" are displayed by the decorative symbol XB. It should be noted that the first decorative symbol XA1 of the decorative symbol XA and the fourth decorative symbol XB1 of the decorative symbol XB always stop at the decorative symbol having the same identifier, and the second decorative symbol XA2 of the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol are always used. The fifth decorative symbol XB2 of XB stops at the decorative symbol having the same identifier, and the third decorative symbol XA3 of the decorative symbol XA and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 of the decorative symbol XB are decorative symbols having the same identifier. It is configured to stop. That is, the mode of stopping the identifier is the same for the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB.

[Modification example]
In the above decorative symbol special effect, the hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 have a corresponding relationship, and the number of holds is indicated by the number of hold icons, but the number is not limited to this, and the hold icon XC1 and / or hold. The icon XD1 may represent the number of hold icons by a method other than the number of hold icons (for example, a number).

In the above decorative symbol special effect, the hold icon XC1 is circular and the hold icon XD1 is rhombic, that is, the mode of the hold icon is different, but the mode is not limited to this, and the same mode may be used. For example, the hold icon XD1 may be circular. The hold icon XC1 and the hold icon XD1 may be different in shape, color, color, and the like.

In the above decorative symbol special effect, in the decorative symbol stop effects 1 to 3, each decorative symbol (first decorative symbol XA1, second decorative symbol XA2, third decorative symbol XA3) of the decorative symbol XA is stopped and displayed with a time lag. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and each decorative symbol of the decorative symbol XA may be stopped and displayed at the same time. After the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol XA are stopped at the same time, the decorative symbols of the decorative symbol XB are stopped at the same time. In this way, the stop effect in which each decorative symbol of the decorative symbol XA is stopped at the same time and then each decorative symbol of the decorative symbol XB is stopped at the same time is also called a decorative symbol special simultaneous stop effect.
In a predetermined situation, the decorative symbol special effect may be performed to perform the decorative symbol stop display effect, and in a situation different from the predetermined situation, the decorative symbol special simultaneous stop effect may be performed. For example, when the game state is the normal game state, the above-mentioned decorative symbol special effect is performed to perform the stop display effect of the decorative symbol, and when the game state is the time-saving game state or the probabilistic game state, the decorative symbol special effect is performed. The simultaneous stop effect may be performed.

[Effect example]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effect, the decorative symbol stop effect 3 indicating whether it is a big hit or a miss is performed by stopping the decorative symbol XA including the decorative symbols XA1, XA2, XA3, and then the decoration. By stopping the decorative symbol XB including the symbols XB1 and XB2, the decorative symbol stop effect 4 indicating whether it is a big hit or the miss is performed, and when the decorative symbol XA in the decorative symbol stop effect 3 represents a big hit, the decorative symbol stop effect 4 The decorative symbol XB in the above also represents a big hit, and when the decorative symbol XA represents a miss, the decorative symbol XB is also configured to represent a miss. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit by using two decorative symbols, the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB, and further, the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB are Since the same lottery result is notified to each player, the lottery result can be emphasized to the player without confusing the player, and the game is more than the case where the lottery result is displayed only by the decorative symbol XA (or the decorative symbol XB). It is possible to increase the interest of the person in the lottery result. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effect, the decorative symbol XA has the first decorative symbol XA1, the second decorative symbol XA2, and the third decorative symbol XA3, and the decorative symbol XA3 in the decorative symbol stop effect 3 When XA is stopped, the first decorative symbol XA1 is stopped, then the second decorative symbol XA2 is stopped, and then the third decorative symbol XA3 is stopped. According to this configuration, the lottery result of whether or not it is a big hit can be gradually disclosed to the player by using the decorative symbol XA, and the expectation for the lottery result can be increased. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effect A, the decorative symbol XB has the fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the decorative symbol XB is stopped in the decorative symbol stop effect 4. The 4th decorative symbol XB1 and the 5th decorative symbol XB2 are stopped at the same time. According to this configuration, unlike the decorative symbol XA, the decorative symbol XB stops the fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 at the same time, so that the expectation gradually increases by stopping the decorative symbol XA. It can be raised to the climax by stopping the decorative pattern XB at the same time. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effects B and C, the decorative symbol XB has a sixth decorative symbol XB3 in addition to the fourth decorative symbol XB1 and the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and is a decorative symbol. When the decorative symbol XB is stopped in the stop effect 4, the fourth decorative symbol XB1, the fifth decorative symbol XB2, and the sixth decorative symbol XB3 are stopped at the same time. According to this configuration, it is possible to increase the peak of expectation due to the simultaneous stop of the decorative symbol XB, and as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the decorative symbol special effects B and C, the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol included in the decorative symbol XB have identifiers (for example, numbers), respectively, and the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol In XB, it is possible to suggest a big hit or a miss by combining the identifiers of a plurality of decorative symbols, and the first decorative symbol XA1 in the decorative symbol XA and the fourth decorative symbol XB1 in the decorative symbol XB are the same. It is composed of identifiers, and the second decorative symbol XA2 in the decorative symbol XA and the fifth decorative symbol XB2 in the decorative symbol XB are composed of the same identifier, and the third decorative symbol XA3 of the decorative symbol XA and the sixth decorative symbol of the decorative symbol XB. It is composed of the same identifier as XB3. According to this configuration, since the decorative symbols corresponding to the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB have the same identifier, the decorative symbol XA and the decorative symbol XB can represent the same jackpot mode or missed mode, and the decorative symbol XA1 By different the stop timings of the decorative symbol XB and the decorative symbol XB, it is possible to provide the fun of notifying the same jackpot mode or missed mode by a time difference. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XA-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect that indicates whether it is a big hit or a miss by stopping the first symbol including a plurality of decorative symbols.
The second display effect is a display effect that indicates whether it is a big hit or a miss by stopping the second symbol, which is a second symbol different from the first symbol and includes a plurality of decorative symbols.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, and when the first symbol in the first display effect represents a jackpot, the second display effect is performed. The second symbol in the display effect also represents a big hit, and when the first symbol represents a miss, the second symbol also represents a miss.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-1.
The first symbol has the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the third decorative symbol.
In the combination effect, when the first symbol is stopped in the first display effect, the first decorative symbol is stopped, then the second decorative symbol is stopped, and then the first decorative symbol is stopped. 3 decorative patterns stop,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-2.
The second symbol has a fourth decorative symbol and a fifth decorative symbol.
In the combination effect, when the second symbol is stopped in the second display effect, the fourth decorative symbol and the fifth decorative symbol are stopped at the same time.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-3.
The second symbol further has a sixth decorative symbol.
In the combination effect, when the second symbol is stopped in the second display effect, the fourth decorative symbol, the fifth decorative symbol, and the sixth decorative symbol are stopped at the same time.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XA-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XA-4.
The first symbol and the decorative symbol included in the second symbol each have an identifier and have an identifier.
In the first symbol and the second symbol, it is possible to suggest a big hit or a miss by a combination of identifiers of a plurality of decorative symbols.
The first decorative symbol in the first symbol and the fourth decorative symbol in the second symbol are composed of the same identifier, and the second decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol in the first symbol are configured. The fifth decorative symbol in the above symbol is composed of the same identifier, and the third decorative symbol of the first symbol and the sixth decorative symbol of the second symbol are composed of the same identifier.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative symbol alignment effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. This decorative symbol alignment effect is executed during a special symbol variation effect. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol alignment effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Decorative pattern alignment production A]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol alignment effect A. The decorative symbol alignment effect A is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol alignment effect A, as shown in FIG. 60 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of a plurality of decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R here are a group of decorative symbols, respectively. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big hit or a miss. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the decorative symbols having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which the decorative symbol with the same identifier is stopped and displayed is also called a doublet symbol. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet symbol, it becomes an outlier symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (B), the left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect is performed. In this left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect, on the display screen 7a, a plurality of decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L are arranged in an area from the center of the screen to the left, and a plurality of decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R are arranged in an area from the center of the screen to the right. To. The decorative symbols 8L are arranged so that five decorative symbols from the numbers "4" to the numbers "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter, also referred to as the first order). Further, the decorative symbols 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative symbols are lined up slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) from the front side and overlap each other. The decorative symbol 8R is arranged so that five decorative symbols from the number "1" to the number "5" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter, also referred to as the second order). Further, the decorative symbols 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative symbols are arranged from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap each other. The first order and the second order are permutations, but the starting identifiers (numbers) are different.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (C), the decorative symbol selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 1, a ally character CRA appears between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, on the display screen 7a, the ally character CRA has the decorative symbol "6" in the middle of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L and the number "6" in the middle of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R. It is located between the decorative design of "3". The selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are square frames, respectively, and their positions are manipulated by the ally character CRA. The ally character CRA randomly arranges the selection frame XB1 for the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L so that one of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L fits within the frame. In addition, the ally character CRA randomly arranges the selection frame XB2 for the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R so that one of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R fits within the frame. Do it. As a result, the ally character CRA randomly selects one of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L using the selection frame XB1, and decorates one of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R. It expresses how the symbols are randomly selected using the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (D), the decorative symbol selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA stops for a predetermined time with the decorative symbol having the same number "4" selected by the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the number "4" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative symbol of the number "4" selected in the selection frame XB2, and the button image BTNX and the ally. The character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used as a chance-up, and the characters "super hot" are displayed. The ally character CRA makes various movements to liven up the production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 60 (F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, doublet states are created using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to form a jackpot symbol.

[Decorative pattern alignment production B]
FIG. 61 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol alignment effect B. The decorative symbol alignment effect B is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol alignment effect B, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of a plurality of decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R here are a group of decorative symbols, respectively. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big hit or a miss. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the decorative symbols having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which the decorative symbol with the same identifier is stopped and displayed is also called a doublet symbol. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet symbol, it becomes an outlier symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), the left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect is performed. In this left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect, on the display screen 7a, a plurality of decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L are arranged in an area from the center of the screen to the left, and a plurality of decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R are arranged in an area from the center of the screen to the right. To. The decorative symbols 8L are arranged so that five decorative symbols from the numbers "4" to the numbers "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter, also referred to as the first order). Further, the decorative symbols 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative symbols are lined up slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) from the front side and overlap each other. The decorative symbol 8R is arranged so that five decorative symbols from the number "4" to the number "8" are arranged in descending order of the numbers (hereinafter, also referred to as a third order). Further, the decorative symbols 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative symbols are arranged from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap each other. The first order is a permutation and the third order is a permutation. The first order and the third order have different starting identifiers (numbers).

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), the decorative symbol selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 1, a ally character CRA appears between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, the ally character CRA is between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol of the number "4" in the foreground of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L and It appears between the decorative symbol of the number "8" in the foreground of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R, and then moves to the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a). The ally character CRA is the decoration of the frontmost number "4" of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L and the frontmost number "8" of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R. When it appears between the symbols, the selection frame XB1 selects the decorative symbol with the number "4" in the foreground of the decorative symbol 8L, and the selection frame XB2 is the number "8" in the foreground of the decorative symbol 8R. Select a decorative pattern for. Then, as the ally character CRA moves to the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a), the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 select a decorative symbol at a position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of FIG. 61 (C), since the ally character CRA is located between the decorative symbol of the number "5" in the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol of the number "7" in the decorative symbol 8R, the selection frame XB1 represents a state in which the decorative symbol of the number "5" in the decorative symbol 8L is selected, and the selection frame XB2 represents a state in which the decorative symbol of the number "7" in the decorative symbol 8R is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (D), the decorative symbol selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA moves, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 stop for a predetermined time with the decorative symbol having the same number "6" selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the number "6" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative symbol of the number "6" selected in the selection frame XB2, and the button image BTNX and the ally. The character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used as a chance-up, and the characters "super hot" are displayed. The ally character CRA makes various movements to liven up the production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 61 (F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, doublet states are created using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to form a jackpot symbol.

[Decorative pattern alignment production C]
FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol alignment effect C. The decorative symbol alignment effect C is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol alignment effect C, as shown in FIG. 62 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of a plurality of decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R here are a group of decorative symbols, respectively. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big hit or a miss. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the decorative symbols having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which the decorative symbol with the same identifier is stopped and displayed is also called a doublet symbol. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet symbol, it becomes an outlier symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (B), the left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect is performed. In this left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect, on the display screen 7a, a plurality of decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L are arranged in an area from the center of the screen to the left, and a plurality of decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R are arranged in an area from the center of the screen to the right. To. The decorative symbols 8L are arranged so that the five decorative symbols of the numbers "4", "5", "5", "5", and "8" are arranged in ascending order of numbers (hereinafter, also referred to as the fourth order). Further, the decorative symbols 8L are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative symbols are lined up slightly to the right depth side (right rear side) from the front side and overlap each other. The decorative symbols 8R are arranged so that the five decorative symbols of the numbers "4", "5", "5", "5", and "8" are arranged in descending order of the numbers (hereinafter, also referred to as the fifth order). Further, the decorative symbols 8R are three-dimensionally arranged so that the five decorative symbols are arranged from the front side to the right depth side (right rear side) and overlap each other. As described above, in the arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L and the decorative symbols 8R, there are sections in which the same numbers are continuously arranged.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (C), the decorative symbol selection effect 1 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 1, a ally character CRA appears between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are displayed. In this case, the ally character CRA is between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R on the display screen 7a, and the decorative symbol of the number "4" in the foreground of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L and It appears between the decorative symbol of the number "8" in the foreground of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R, and then moves to the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a). The ally character CRA is the decoration of the frontmost number "4" of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8L and the frontmost number "8" of the five decorative symbols of the decorative symbol 8R. When it appears between the symbols, the selection frame XB1 selects the decorative symbol with the number "4" in the foreground of the decorative symbol 8L, and the selection frame XB2 is the number "8" in the foreground of the decorative symbol 8R. Select a decorative pattern for. Then, as the ally character CRA moves to the depth side (from bottom to top on the display screen 7a), the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 select a decorative symbol at a position corresponding to the ally character CRA. In the example of FIG. 62 (C), since the ally character CRA is located between the decorative symbol of the number "5" in the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol of the number "5" in the decorative symbol 8R, the selection frame XB1 represents a state in which the decorative symbol of the number "5" in the decorative symbol 8L is selected, and the selection frame XB2 represents a state in which the decorative symbol of the number "5" in the decorative symbol 8R is selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (D), the decorative symbol selection effect 2 is performed. In this decorative symbol selection effect 2, the ally character CRA moves, and the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 stop for a predetermined time with the decorative symbols having the same number "5" selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (E), a reach effect is performed. In this reach effect, a reach state is formed by the decorative symbol of the number "5" selected in the selection frame XB1 and the decorative symbol of the number "5" selected in the selection frame XB2, and the button image BTNX and the ally. The character CRA is displayed. The button image BTNX is used as a chance-up, and the characters "super hot" are displayed. The ally character CRA makes various movements to liven up the production. As described above, in the decorative symbol selection effect of the decorative symbol alignment effect C, the decorative symbols selected in the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 are more likely to have the same number than the decorative symbol selection effect of the decorative symbol alignment effect B, that is, , The configuration is such that it is easy to reach. This functions as a chance-up, and the decorative symbol alignment effect C has a higher expectation of a big hit than the decorative symbol alignment effect B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), a jackpot notification effect is performed. In this jackpot notification effect, doublet states are created using decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R to form a jackpot symbol.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned decorative symbol alignment effects B and C, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 also move as the ally character CRA moves, and the decorative symbol to be selected changes, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead of the CRA, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 may also move as the predetermined object or the predetermined image moves, and the decorative pattern to be selected may change.
Further, in the decorative symbol alignment effects B and C, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, but is not limited to this, and moves so as to overlap the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. It may be moved behind the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, or may be moved beside the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R. In this case as well, the selection frame XB1 and the selection frame XB2 move with the movement of the ally character CRA.

In the decorative symbol alignment effect, the arrangement of the decorative symbols 8L and the decorative symbols 8R in the left and right decorative symbol arrangement effects may be random in the arrangement of numbers. Further, in the left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect, the number of each decorative symbol of the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R is not five, but may be, for example, six or more. Further, in the left and right decorative symbol arrangement effect, when the decorative symbols 8L and the decorative symbols 8R are all decorative symbols having the same number, it may be a premier effect, that is, a jackpot confirmation effect that always hits a jackpot.

In the decorative symbol alignment effects B and C, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and in the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stops is selected by the selection frame XB1. In the selected decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA stopped is selected by the selection frame XB2, and when the selected decorative symbols have the same number, the reach state is set. Not limited to this, the ally character CRA moves between the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol 8R, and in the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol at a position different from the position where the ally character CRA stops is selected by the selection frame XB1. In the decorative symbol 8L, the decorative symbol corresponding to the position where the ally character CRA has stopped may be selected by the selection frame XB2, and the reach state may be set when the selected decorative symbols have the same number.

[Effect example]
In the game machine 1, in the decorative symbol alignment effect, a decorative symbol 8L having a plurality of decorative symbols and a decorative symbol 8R having a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged on the left and right decorative symbols 8L, and then the decorative symbol 8L is performed. The decorative symbol selection effects 1 and 2 for simultaneously selecting the predetermined decorative symbol and the predetermined decorative symbol in the decorative symbol 8R are performed. According to this configuration, the two decorative symbols are arranged so as to be visible, and a predetermined decorative symbol is selected from each of them at the same time, so that the process of reaching the reach can be visually attracted to the player. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 1, in the decorative symbol alignment effect, when the decorative symbol selected from the decorative symbol 8L and the decorative symbol selected from the decorative symbol 8R in the decorative symbol selection effects 1 and 2 are the same (in other words, the same). If it has an identifier), it will be in the reach state. According to this configuration, the reach state can be visually attracted to the player, and the expectation for the jackpot for the reach production can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 1, in the decorative symbol alignment effect A, the decorative symbols 8L in the decorative symbol selection effects 1 and 2 are arranged in order from the decorative symbol having the identifier "4" to the decorative symbol "8". The decorative symbols 8R are arranged in the first order, and the decorative symbols 8R are arranged in the second order in which the decorative symbols from the decorative symbol having the identifier "1" to the decorative symbol "5" are arranged in order. According to this configuration, a predetermined decorative symbol is selected at the same time from two decorative symbol groups in which the order of the decorative symbols is different, so that the process until reaching is more visually appealing to the player. it can. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 1, in the decorative symbol alignment effect B, the decorative symbols 8L in the decorative symbol selection effects 1 and 2 are arranged in order from the decorative symbol having the identifier "4" to the decorative symbol "8". The decorative symbols 8R are arranged in the first order, and the decorative symbols 8R are arranged in the third order in which the decorative symbols from the decorative symbol having the identifier "8" to the decorative symbol "4" are arranged in order. According to this configuration, a predetermined decorative symbol is selected at the same time from two decorative symbol groups in which the order of the decorative symbols is reversed, so that the process until reaching is more visually appealing to the player. be able to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine 1, in the decorative symbol alignment effect, the decorative symbols 8L and the decorative symbols 8R are arranged from the front side to the depth direction of the display screen 7a, respectively, in the left and right decorative symbol arrangement effects. According to this configuration, two decorative symbol groups (decorative symbol 8L, decorative symbol 8R) can be three-dimensionally expressed, and the decorative symbol alignment effect can be acrobaticly attracted. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XB-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect in which a first decorative symbol group having a plurality of decorative symbols and a second decorative symbol group having a plurality of decorative symbols are arranged.
The second display effect is a display effect that simultaneously selects the decorative symbol in the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbol in the second decorative symbol group.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-1.
In the second display effect, when the decorative symbol selected from the first decorative symbol group and the decorative symbol selected from the second decorative symbol group are the same, the reach state is reached.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-2.
In the first display effect, the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group are arranged and arranged in the first order, and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group are different from the first order. Arranged and arranged in a different second order,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-3.
In the first display effect, the decorative symbols of the first decorative symbol group are arranged and arranged in the first order, and the decorative symbols of the second decorative symbol group are arranged in the first order. Are arranged and arranged in the second order, which is the reverse order.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XB-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XB-4.
In the first display effect, the first decorative symbol group and the second decorative symbol group are arranged from the front side to the depth direction of the display means, respectively.
A game machine characterized by that.

The temporary stop symbol movement effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. This temporary stop symbol movement effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the temporary stop symbol movement effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to read the corresponding image data. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The temporary stop symbol movement effect C will be described assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect A]
FIG. 63 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 63 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the fluctuation, but at least at the start of the fluctuation and when the fluctuation is stopped, the movement display (variation display) is performed in a specific direction. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. The left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect symbol 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, in particular, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol. Further, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (C), the symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Here, it is shown that the “1” symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the “2” symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed in the lower right direction. Further, here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol, which are new symbols different from the temporarily stopped "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R, are framed on the display device 7a. I'm in. The framed-in "5" symbol and "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the same direction as the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol in the direction indicated by the arrow Z.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 63 (D) to (F), the frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and the frame-in effect symbols are moved and displayed to frame out.

FIG. 63 (D) shows a state in which a part of the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R, the “1” symbol and the “2” symbol, is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and is framed out. .. At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z.

In FIG. 63 (E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. As a result, it was shown that a part of the "6" symbol was out of frame. Further, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbol "4" and "9" are framed in, and similarly, they move in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Is displayed.

In FIG. 63 (F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are completely out of frame, and the new symbols "4" and "9" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Has been done. Here, it is shown that a part of the "9" symbol is out of frame. After this, the "9" symbol is followed by the "4" symbol framed out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach forming effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. The fluctuation direction in this case is the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 63 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect B]
FIG. 64 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the fluctuation, but at least at the start of the fluctuation and when the fluctuation is stopped, the movement display (variation display) is performed in a specific direction. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. The left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect symbol 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, in particular, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “NEXT” symbol. The "NEXT" symbol is a pseudo-ream symbol that announces the execution of the pseudo-ream effect. Further, the hold icon 9A and the fluctuation icon 9C displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (C), the symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Here, it is shown that the “1” symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the “NEXT” symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed in the lower right direction. Further, here, the temporarily stopped "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol, which are new symbols different from the "NEXT" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R, are framed on the display device 7a. I'm in. The framed-in "5" symbol and "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the same direction as the "1" symbol and the "NEXT" symbol in the direction indicated by the arrow Z.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 64 (D) to 64 (F), the frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and the frame-in effect symbols are moved and displayed to frame out.

FIG. 64 (D) shows a state in which a part of the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R, the “1” symbol and the “NEXT” symbol, are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z and framed out. .. At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z.

In FIG. 64 (E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. As a result, it was shown that a part of the "6" symbol was out of frame. Further, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbol "NEXT" large symbol is framed in, and similarly, it is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. This "NEXT" large symbol is a horizontally long symbol composed of an image different from the temporarily stopped "NEXT" symbol. The "NEXT" large symbol is also a pseudo-ream symbol that announces the execution of the pseudo-ream effect.

In FIG. 64 (F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are framed out, and the new symbol "NEXT" large symbol is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Here, it is shown that a part of the "NEXT" large symbol is out of frame. After this, the "NEXT" large symbol will be completely out of frame.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the revariation effect is executed. The re-variation effect is an effect in which the temporarily stopped effect symbol starts to change again, and is included in the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fluctuating at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Although the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the fluctuation, they are displayed (variable display) in a specific direction at least when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops.

Next, as shown in FIG. 64 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

Although it was decided that the re-variation effect is executed as shown in FIG. 64 (G), the effect is continued assuming that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R have already re-variated after the frame-out effect. There can be a pseudo-continuous production like this. In this case, as shown in FIG. 63 (G), the reach formation effect may be executed after the frame-out effect without executing the revariation effect.

[Temporary stop symbol movement effect C]
FIG. 65 is a diagram for explaining the temporary stop symbol movement effect C. Here, it is assumed that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.
First, as shown in FIG. 65 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, on the display screen 7a, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be hidden after the start of the fluctuation, but at least at the start of the fluctuation and when the fluctuation is stopped, the movement display (variation display) is performed in a specific direction. On the display screen 7b, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. The left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect symbol 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, in particular, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R fluctuate in the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y and stop. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol. Further, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C displayed on the display screen 7b at the start of the change are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (C), the symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L and 8R in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, that is, in a direction different from the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y. Here, the "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R are moved and displayed in the lower right direction, a part of the "1" symbol is framed out, and the "2" symbol is It is displayed across the display screens 7a and 7b. That is, the "2" symbol is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in to another display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, a part of the "2" symbol is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Further, here, the "5" symbol and the "6" symbol, which are new symbols different from the temporarily stopped "1" symbol of the left effect symbol 8L and the "2" symbol of the right effect symbol 8R, are framed in. .. The framed-in "5" symbol and "6" symbol are moved and displayed in the same direction as the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol in the direction indicated by the arrow Z.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 65 (D) to 65 (F), the frame-out effect is executed. In the frame-out effect, the effect symbols 8L, 8R, and the frame-in effect symbols are moved and displayed to frame out.

In FIG. 65 (D), the temporarily stopped effect symbol 8L, the “1” symbol, is framed out, the “2” symbol is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z, and a part of the “2” symbol is framed out. ing. At this time, the new symbols "5" and "6" are also moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z.

In FIG. 65 (E), the new symbols "5" and "6" are further moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. As a result, a part of the "5" symbol and a part of the "6" symbol are framed out. In particular, a part of the "6" symbol is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, a part of the "6" symbol is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Further, following the new symbols "5" and "6", another new symbol "4" and "9" are framed in, and similarly, they move in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Is displayed.

In FIG. 65 (F), the new symbols "5" and "6" are completely out of frame, and the new symbols "4" and "9" are moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. Has been done. Here, a part of the "4" symbol and a part of the "9" symbol are framed out. In particular, a part of the "9" symbol is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Also on the display screen 7b, a part of the "9" symbol is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. After this, the "4" and "9" symbols are completely framed out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (G), the reach formation effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The reach forming effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. The fluctuation direction in this case is the specific direction indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 65 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7b. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the temporary stop symbol movement effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the effect symbols 8L, 8R of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are temporarily stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8R are different from the fluctuation direction (specific direction indicated by the arrow Y). It is moved and displayed in the direction indicated by the arrow Z (FIGS. 63 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 64 (C) (D) (E) (F), FIG. 65 (C) (D) ( E) (F)). According to this configuration, since the effect symbols 8L and 8R temporarily stopped in a direction different from the fluctuation direction (specific direction) move, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

The fluctuation start effect (FIG. 63 (A), FIG. 64 (A), FIG. 65 (A)), the symbol temporary stop effect (FIG. 63 (B), FIG. 64 (B), FIG. 65 (B)), reach. The formation effect (FIG. 63 (G), FIG. 65 (G)) and the re-variation effect (FIG. 64 (G)) correspond to the "design variation effect", and the symbol movement effect (FIG. 63 (C), FIG. 64 (FIG. 64) C), FIG. 65 (C)), frame-out effect (FIGS. 63 (D) to (F), FIGS. 64 (D) to (F), FIG. Corresponds to.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, new symbols (“5” symbol, “6” symbol, “4” symbol, “9” symbol, “NEXT” large, which are different from the effect symbols 8L and 8R which are temporary stop symbols. The symbol) is framed into the display screen 7a (FIGS. 63 (C) (E), 64 (C) (E), 65 (C) (E)). According to this configuration, a new symbol other than the temporary stop symbol is framed in, so that the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a new symbol ("5" symbol, "6" symbol, "4" symbol, "9" symbol, "NEXT" large symbol) is framed in the display screen 7a and then temporarily stopped. It is moved and displayed in the same direction as the symbol (direction indicated by the arrow Z) (FIGS. 63 (C) to (F), FIGS. 64 (C) to (F), and FIGS. 65 (C) to (F)). According to this configuration, the new frame-in symbol is also moved and displayed in the same direction as the temporarily stopped symbol, so that the movement display becomes powerful and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the temporary stop symbols 8L and 8R, and the new symbols ("5" symbol, "6" symbol, "4" symbol, "9" symbol, "NEXT" large symbol ) Is moved and displayed, and then framed out from the display screens 7a (7b) (FIGS. 64 (D) to (F), 64 (D) to (F), 65 (D) to (F)). .. According to this configuration, since the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol disappear from the screen after the movement display, for example, the movement display at high speed produces a powerful effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the temporary stop symbol "2" symbol, a part of the new symbol "6" symbol, and a part of the "9" symbol are framed out from the display screen 7a. , Framed in the display screen 7b (FIGS. 65 (C) (E) (F)). According to this configuration, the movement effect of the symbol becomes more powerful by the effect of straddling the display screens 7a and 7b, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a part of the "2" symbol framed in the display screen 7b, a part of the new symbol "6" symbol, and a part of the "9" symbol are also displayed on the display screen 7b. It is displayed by moving in the direction indicated by the arrow Z. According to this configuration, the movement effect of the symbol across the display screens 7a and 7b becomes more powerful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol that announces the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect as the effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and moved and displayed (FIGS. 64 (B) to (D)). In addition, as a new symbol, the "NEXT" large symbol that announces the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is moved and displayed and framed out (FIGS. 64 (E) and 64 (F)). According to this configuration, for example, the advance notice of the execution of the pseudo-continuous production becomes powerful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 8]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the "NEXT" symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) as the temporary stop symbol is moved and displayed and framed out (FIGS. 64 (B) to (D)), the "NEXT" symbol as a new symbol is displayed. A large symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is moved and displayed, framed in and framed out (FIGS. 64 (E) and 64 (F)). According to this configuration, since the "NEXT" large symbol is framed in after the "NEXT" symbol is framed out, the notice of the pseudo-continuous production becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the temporary stop symbol movement effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "NEXT" symbol and the "NEXT" large symbol are used as symbols for notifying the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect, but for example, the "NEXT" large symbol is used as a symbol for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect has been executed. Can be considered. Specifically, instead of executing the re-variation effect of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R (the effect that the temporarily stopped effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change again), the "NEXT" large symbol is framed in to frame. It's like letting it go out.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the configuration including the display screens 7a and 7b is mentioned, but the configuration may include three or more display screens. In this case, if the three display screens are arranged on a straight line and the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are moved in the arrangement direction of the display screens, the movement display of the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol becomes powerful. , The interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has been described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the same effect may be performed using the sub display screen 64. By using the sub-display screen 64, the movement display of the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol becomes more powerful, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed in a direction different from the fluctuation direction (direction indicated by arrow Y) (direction indicated by arrow Z). It was. In this respect, the effect symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in motion are not particularly limited. For example, the left effect symbol 8L and the middle effect symbol 8C may be temporarily stopped and displayed in motion, or the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped and displayed in motion. Alternatively, all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped and moved.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the direction in which the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol are moved and displayed is the lower right direction (direction indicated by the arrow Z) of the display screen 7a (7b). On the other hand, the direction of the movement display is not particularly limited. For example, when the fluctuation direction is the vertical direction, the movement display may be performed in the horizontal direction.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are moved and displayed in the same direction (the direction indicated by the arrow Z). On the other hand, the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol may be moved and displayed in different directions.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol are moved and displayed at the same speed. On the other hand, the temporarily stopped symbol and the new symbol may be moved and displayed at different speeds.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A5-1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images
A gaming machine capable of executing a symbol variation effect in which a plurality of symbol sequences fluctuate in a specific direction on the display screen.
After the symbols in the predetermined row of the plurality of symbol rows are temporarily stopped, the symbol movement display effect in which the temporarily stopped symbols, which are the symbols in the temporarily stopped predetermined row, are moved and displayed in a direction different from the specific direction is executed. It is possible,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-1.
In the symbol movement display effect, a new symbol different from the temporarily stopped symbol is framed into the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-2.
In the symbol movement display effect, after the new symbol is framed in the display screen, the new symbol is moved and displayed in the same direction as the temporarily stopped symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-4]
A game machine according to aspect A5-2 or aspect A5-3.
The temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are framed out from the display screen after being moved and displayed on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-4.
The temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are framed out from the display screen and then framed in to a separate display screen different from the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A5-5.
The temporary stop symbol and the new symbol are moved and displayed on the separate display screen after being framed in the separate display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A5-1 to A5-6.
At least one of the temporary stop symbol and the new symbol includes a pseudo-continuous symbol related to execution of the pseudo-continuous effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A5-8]
The gaming machine according to aspect A5-7.
After the pseudo-continuous symbol as the temporary stop symbol is framed out from the display screen, the pseudo-continuous symbol as the new symbol is framed in to the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the variable display effects A to C through the transparent region will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. In FIGS. 66 to 68, the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawing. It should be noted that when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are activated, a plurality of decorative symbols are varied and produced as compared with the case where the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated. It suggests to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that a hit will occur after the end of (variable display) (that is, after a plurality of decorative symbols are stopped and displayed), and the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable When a plurality of decorative symbols 15 are aligned on the same symbol and activated during the temporary stop display, a plurality of accessory 15s are present as compared with the case where the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated. It is suggested to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that the profit will be given to the player among the types of. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15.

The variable display effect through the transparent area is performed by the image display device 7 before the variable display (variable display) of the plurality of decorative symbols is started and then ended (stopped) (that is, during the variable display of the decorative symbol). The display screen 7a is dimmed so that a part of at least one decorative symbol or a part of each of at least two decorative symbols among the plurality of decorative symbols can be visually recognized together with the background image through a transparent region having a predetermined shape. It is possible to execute the variable display effect. In other words, other areas except the transparent area having a predetermined shape are darkened, and only through this transparent area, at least a part of the decorative pattern (a part of one decorative pattern or two decorations) being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of making each part of the design visible. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a variation display effect through the transparent area, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to obtain an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a variation display effect through the transparent region, the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 is provided. The position and light emission mode of the The variable display effect through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead effects, and whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. Is decided by lottery.

Examples of various background images for the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern include background images such as city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or moving images. Here, the background image is an underground image of a moving image.

Here, first, the variable display effect A through the transparent area will be described, and then the variable display effect B through the transparent area and the variable display effect C through the transparent area will be described in order.

[Variable display effect A through transparent area]
First, the variation display effect A through the transparent region will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining the variation display effect A through the transparent region. The variation display effect A through the transparent area is the image display device 7 before the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of decorative symbols is started and then ended (stop display) (that is, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol). It is possible to perform a variable display effect in which the display screen 7a is darkened so that at least a part of at least one decorative symbol among the plurality of decorative symbols can be visually recognized together with the background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. is there. In other words, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, other areas other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape are darkened, and only through this transparent area, a part of at least one decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of making the image visible.

The variation display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the image "right-handed" is not changed at all and can be visually recognized. If the image of "right-handed" is annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of time or until the number of fluctuations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), after the image "right-handed" is continuously displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is called "right-handed". The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (playing time) can be mentioned.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. Visibility is not impaired. Further, even if a transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variable area (the content displayed in the sub-variable area is opaque and small). The display mode of the left decorative symbol, the display mode of the opaque small medium-decorative symbol, and the display mode of the opaque small right decorative symbol) are not changed at all and can be visually recognized. The background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region has an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium-decorative symbol, and the like. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be visually recognized at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 66 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold. The variation icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 66B) corresponding to is the variation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd can be visually recognized without any change. You can do it.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only four stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the variable display effect A through the transparent region. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the number of colors of the number of the first special figure reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 ( The blue number) and the color of the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (red number)) can be visually recognized without any change.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 will be briefly described. The second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape and has a character figure (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ") Is three-dimensionally formed, and has a character area 15a on which a character figure is formed and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of multicolor light emission that cause the character region 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a rectangular region 15b that emits light in a predetermined light emission mode. A plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multiple colors and a decorative substrate (not shown) on which the LEDs are mounted on the surface side are housed. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the surface side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED mounting surface. On the back surface side of the decorative substrate (the surface opposite to the front surface side of the decorative substrate), a dedicated LED drive IC (not shown) for controlling the gradation of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown). ), Resistor (not shown), capacitor (not shown), connector (not shown) are mounted. LED drive ICs, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mounted electronic components, which are soldered to the back side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the back surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED non-mounting surface. The LED drive IC is controlled by the control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are gradation-lit (lighting, blinking, gradation) and emit light to emit light. The 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and the rectangular region 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

The second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a in the normal state (first aspect), and is stationary at the retracted position (home position). From the state, it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and can stand still at the advance position (deployment position) (second aspect). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the operation of the second movable accessory 15 starts from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can be suggested to the player that the expectation of hitting is high. When the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or is advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 66 (A), when the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left The decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed accordingly. It is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect), and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. When the power to the gaming machine 1 which is a pachinko gaming machine is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is turned on. Is lit in white. In other words, in the second movable accessory 15, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. ..

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in white. As shown in 66 (B), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the variation display effect A through the transparent area is started, and the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. It changes from a brightly displayed state to a gradually darkened state, and is colorless with a plane shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific area in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, a variable area of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C). The display mode is such that the transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, gradually appears. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brilliance of a predetermined color at the boundary line HRc is clearly shining from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect A through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is movable. While the character area 15a of the accessory 15 is maintained in the state of being lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in blue. .. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light.

Further, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the image is gradually darkened, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern as the background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. In other words, when the variable display effect A through the transparent region is started, the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a is darkened. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), when the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is displayed inside the transparent region HR. In addition to being visible through the region HRa, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in front of the background image THG1 at high speed can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Further, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which fluctuates at high speed, decelerates from the translucent state in this predetermined period. A part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be visually recognized (here, the central part and the upper part can be gradually visually recognized from the lower part of the number "2", and the number The lower part of the number "3" following "2" can be visually recognized).

Even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes dark as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. It can be visually recognized without occurring, it can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and the game ball to the first starting port 20 can be visually recognized. There is no change in the color of the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball (blue number) and the color of the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 (red number). It can be visually recognized without occurring, and it can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the image called "right-handed". As described above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "right-handed" is arranged so as to be on the foremost side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. Variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbol, number of first special figure hold based on entry of game ball into first start port 20, second This is because the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21, the image of "right-handed" is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is darkened as a background image as a background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the blue brilliance at the boundary line HRc becomes an indistinctly shining display mode from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The state is maintained, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is such that the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. It is blue, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

From the darkened state of the display screen 7a, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and at the same time, in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C) When the displayed transparent area HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative symbols 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), middle Decorative design 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), right decorative design 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") Has already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (F), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is returned to the state of being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "3", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "1", and then. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display). When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first aspect) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue from the state of being lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character region 15a and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (G), when the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is used as the background image. In the state where (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable accessory 15 character area 15a is maintained in the state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in the state of being lit in blue. , The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, the two hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is gradually displayed darker than the brightly displayed state. Along with the change to, the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific area near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L), gradually becomes. It becomes the display mode that appears. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from that of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 66 (C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brilliance of a predetermined color at the boundary line HRc is clearly shining from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light.

Further, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the image is gradually darkened, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern as the background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. In other words, the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a is darkened.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (I), when the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is moved to the inside of the transparent region HR. The left decorative symbol 8L, which fluctuates in front of the background image THG1 at high speed, can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Further, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a lit state, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a lit state, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the fast-changing left decorative symbol 8L decelerates from the translucent state in this predetermined period. A part of the left decorative symbol 8L that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be visually recognized (here, the central part and the upper part can be gradually visually recognized from the lower part of the number "2", and the number The lower part of the number "3" following "2" can be visually recognized).

Even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes dark as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, as described above, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. It is possible to visually recognize without any change to, and it is possible to visually recognize without any change to the display mode of the small decorative pattern. The color of the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 (blue number) and the color of the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 (red number) It is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the image, and it is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the display mode of the image called "right-handed". As described above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "right-handed" is arranged so as to be on the foremost side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. Variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbol, number of first special figure hold based on entry of game ball into first start port 20, second This is because the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21, the image of "right-handed" is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is darkened as a background image as a background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed near the center of the left side of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red brilliance at the boundary line HRc becomes an indistinctly shining display mode from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. The state is maintained, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is such that the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. It is red, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light is continued.

From the darkened state of the display screen 7a, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and the display screen 7a is closer to the center of the left side (that is, the variable region of the left decorative pattern 8L). ), The transparent area HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, and all the left decorative symbols 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"). , Medium decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9"), Right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") ”) Has already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 66 (K), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is returned to the state of being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "1", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "2", and then. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display). When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first aspect) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in red from the state of being lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character region 15a and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state. As a result, the variation display effect A through the transparent region performed across the two variation displays shown in FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K) is completed.

The variable display effect A through the transparent area is completed, and then, as shown in FIG. 66 (L), the variable display position 9Cd is moved to the variable display position 9Bd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd. When the movement is started, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started while the rectangular region 15b is maintained in the state of being lit in white. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the second hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position. As a result, one hold icon is in stock.

When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started, and then the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, they are removed and decorated. While the variation effect (variation display) of the symbol ends, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped and stopped, it becomes a hit. The variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is completed, and then the big hit game (big hit effect) is started.

As described above, in the variation display effect A through the transparent region, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), and in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E). A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66 (H) to 66 (J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary of the transparent region HR. The display mode was such that the line HRc shines in red and emits light. This is expected in the variable display effect A through the transparent region, in which the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape as a transparent closed specific region, is in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because it is preset so that the degree is high. As a result, as the variation display effect A progresses through the transparent region, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can be changed from a circular shape to a triangular shape, and the player can be given a feeling of expectation for hitting. , It is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Further, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is hit in the order of white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color) and rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit rich)). The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is highly expected and preset and has the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is also blue, red, green, purple, and yellow (gold color). ) And the rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit rich)), the hit expectation is high and preset. As a result, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can be changed from blue to red as the variable display effect A progresses through the transparent region, and the player can be given a feeling of expectation for hitting. It is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by fluctuations in the design.

Further, in the variation display effect A through the transparent region, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), and in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E), it is transparent. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a closed specific region, and is maintained in a stationary state (first aspect) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b in the second movable accessory 15 is lit. In), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (). The display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b in the second movable accessory 15 maintained in the first aspect) is lit. In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first aspect) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the rectangular area in the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which 15b is lit, the second movable accessory 15 does not start moving even if the second movable accessory 15 has not started moving. It is possible to give the player a hit expectation degree corresponding to (corresponding to) the hit expectation degree given to the operation of the player, and it is possible to contribute to giving a sense of expectation to the variable display.

Further, in the variation display effect A through the transparent region, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), and in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E), it is transparent. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a closed specific region, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, a variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C), whereas FIG. 66 In FIGS. (H) to 66 (J), the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific area, is closer to the center of the left side of the display screen 7a (that is, a left decorative pattern). It appeared in the fluctuation region of 8L). This is because the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect A through the transparent area during the effect, so that the variable display effect A through the transparent area is executed. The position where the transparent region HR appears is also determined to be a random position. Therefore, there is no relationship between the position where the transparent region HR appears and the hit expectation. However, in the present embodiment, since the position where the transparent region HR appears can be set to a random position, it is possible to find the degree of expectation for the position where the transparent region HR appears based on the player's own idea. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Further, when the power to the gaming machine 1 which is a pachinko gaming machine is turned on, as described above, as a normal state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. The rectangular region 15b of 15 is lit in white. In the variation display effect A through the transparent region, although the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), the second variation display is performed in FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (F). The rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the white lighting state to the blue lighting state, and then the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the blue lighting state to the original white lighting state. In FIGS. 66 (G) to 66 (K), which are the next fluctuations, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a white lighting state to a red lighting state, and then the second movable accessory 15. The rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the state of being lit in red to the state of being lit in white. The variable display effect A through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead effects, and whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. It is decided by lottery. That is, in reality, the variable display effect A through the transparent area is performed across the two variable displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K) by only one lottery, so that it is as if the decorative design. For each variation, the variation display effect A can be performed through the transparent area as if it was determined by a lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91. As a result, the player can be made to think that there are a plurality of variations for the variable display effect A through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variation display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E), first, as a transparent closed specific region, a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape. Although the transparent region HR has appeared, it may have a planar shape and a triangular shape, or it may have a planar shape and a quadrangular shape, and FIGS. 66 (B) to FIG. At 66 (K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining the planar shape and the circular shape.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIG. 66 (C), first, in FIG. 66 (C), the transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The color was changed from blue, but for example, it may be changed from one of red, green, and purple, or from FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E) or In FIGS. 66 (H) to 66 (J), first, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is changed from blue to another color a plurality of times. It may be changed (for example, it changes as blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.), or it is transparent in FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K). While maintaining the color of the region HR as yellow (gold) or rainbow (rainbow color (big hit rich)), the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a transparent closed specific region, can be changed (for example, circular shape, etc.). Triangular, quadrangular and star-shaped, circular, triangular and quadrangular, circular and triangular, triangular, quadrangular and star-shaped, triangular and quadrangular, etc.) , Maintaining the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a transparent closed specific region (for example, maintaining a circular shape, maintaining a triangular shape, maintaining a square shape, maintaining a star shape, etc.) You may.

Further, in the variation display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, although the variation display effect A straddles the two variation displays shown in FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), it is performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect. Instead, it is determined by lottery whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect A through the transparent region during the effect. However, the variable display effect A through the transparent area can be performed as one of the look-ahead effects. In this case, since the variation display effect A through the transparent area is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), it is placed on the second hold display position 9Bd in FIG. 66 (A). When the shape and color of the hold icon 9B as the look-ahead result for the placed hold icon 9B is actually set to the blue spherical hold icon 9B as the look-ahead result, it matches the expectation of the blue spherical hold icon 9B (corresponds). By performing the variation display effect A through the transparent area that straddles the two variation displays shown in FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K) as the effect, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd is displayed. , It can be a white spherical hold icon 9B.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are placed in the sub-variable region provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It was a variable production (variable display). However, the player misunderstands that the numbers by the small left decorative design, the small medium decorative design, and the small right decorative design are the countdown started by the variable display effect A through the transparent area, and the countdown hits the numbers. Since the player may expect that a highly expected effect is subsequently executed, the sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R to be compact. The left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be varied and produced (variable display).

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number of the second starting port 21 are reached. The number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the entry of the game ball was arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and was always displayed. However, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The player misunderstands that (red number) is a countdown started by the variable display effect A through the transparent area, and the player expects that the effect with high expectation is subsequently executed by this countdown. Because there is a risk, the number of 1st special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 and the 2nd special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 The number of holds (red numbers) may be arranged on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R so as to always be displayed.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E), a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region. When the transparent region HR, which is the above, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. Further, in FIGS. 66 (H) to 66 (J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is closer to the center of the left side of the display screen 7a ( That is, when it appeared in the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L), the transparent region HR was fixed without moving or rotating at this position. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR may be repeatedly moved up and down (up and down vibration) or repeatedly left and right (left and right vibration) around the position where the transparent region HR appears. ), A display mode in which the display mode is repeatedly rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode in which these are combined. By doing so, since the area that can be visually recognized through the transparent area HR changes, the variation of the effect by the transparent area HR can be increased, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the decorative pattern with respect to the variable effect (variable display). be able to.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, for example, in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E), colorless and transparent having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The transparent area HR, which is a large area, appeared in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of the colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region, the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is set as a transparent region HR which is a planar shape and a colorless and transparent region. May be good. In other words, the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R gradually change from a bright state to a dark state, the display screen 7a becomes dark, and finally only the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes bright. By maintaining the background image, the background image and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that variablely displays the front of the background image may be visible only through the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. By doing so, since the variation of the transparent region HR can be increased, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the variable display effect A through the transparent region.

Further, in the variation display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), and in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E). Is a display mode in which a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66 (H) to 66 (J), a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the transparent region HR appears. The boundary line HRc of the above was displayed in a display mode in which it shines in red and emits light. This is because in the variable display effect A through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent closed specific region, is expected to hit in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area appearing as a transparent closed specific area in the shape of a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, and a star, the silhouette of the character 1, the silhouette of the character 2, and the character 3 The silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the order of the silhouette of the character 4 and the silhouette of the character 4. The contour portion of the silhouette of each character is the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR described above, the inner region of the silhouette of each character is the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR described above, and the outer region of the contour portion of the silhouette of each character is described above. It becomes the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the silhouette of the character 1, the silhouette of the character 2, the silhouette of the character 3, and the silhouette of the character 4 are set in advance so that the hit expectation is high. Also, instead of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area appearing as a transparent closed specific area in the shape of a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, and a star, the posture of the silhouette of a single specific character ( The pose) may appear so as to gradually change. For example, it is possible to make silhouettes of a series of movements until a specific character holds a sword appear in order. In this case, the silhouette of a series of movements until the specific character holds the sword is preset so that the degree of expectation increases as the character progresses.

Further, in the variation display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 66 (B) to 66 (K), and in FIGS. 66 (C) to 66 (E). Is a display mode in which a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 66 (H) to 66 (J), a transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the transparent region HR appears. The boundary line HRc of the above was displayed in a display mode in which it shines in red and emits light. This is because in the variable display effect A through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent closed specific region, is expected to hit in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region appearing as a transparent closed specific region in the shape of a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, and a star, the countdown may be performed by a numerical image. The contour portion of the numerical image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR described above, the inner region of the numerical image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR described above, and the outer region of the contour portion of the numerical image becomes the outer region of the transparent region HR described above. It becomes the region HRb. In this case, the number "3" image, the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image are counted down in this order by the number image, and the number "3" image, When the countdown by the number image progresses in the order of the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)", the hit expectation is set in advance.

Further, in the variable display effect A through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 66 (D) and 66 (I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR is darkened. It was a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image) which is a background image. However, in FIGS. 66 (D) and 66 (I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR is switched (changed) from the background image before being darkened to another background image. It may be. By doing so, the background image can be switched before and after FIG. 66 (D) and FIG. 66 (I), that is, by switching the background image in the fluctuation, the background image switched due to the fluctuation and the winning result can be switched. It is possible to discover relationships (laws) with the player's body and contribute to suppressing the decline in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any of the above-mentioned city image, forest image, sea image, seabed image, and underground image, or in the variable display effect A through the transparent area. It is also possible to switch (change) to one image from a plurality of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3 .... In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3 ... may be set in advance with high expectation of hitting in the order of dedicated background images A1, A2, A3 ... ..

[Variable display effect B through transparent area]
Next, the variation display effect B through the transparent region will be described with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining the variation display effect B through the transparent region. The variation display effect B through the transparent area is the image display device 7 before the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of decorative symbols is started and then ended (stop display) (that is, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol). It is possible to perform a variable display effect in which the display screen 7a is dimmed so that at least a part of at least two decorative symbols among the plurality of decorative symbols can be visually recognized together with the background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. is there. In other words, in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, other areas other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape are darkened, and only through this transparent area, a part of at least two decorative symbols being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of making the image visible.

The variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the image "right-handed" is not changed at all and can be visually recognized. If the image of "right-handed" is annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of time or until the number of fluctuations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), after the image "right-handed" is continuously displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is called "right-handed". The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (playing time) can be mentioned.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. Visibility is not impaired. Further, even if a transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variable area (the content displayed in the sub-variable area is opaque and small). The display mode of the left decorative symbol, the display mode of the opaque small medium-decorative symbol, and the display mode of the opaque small right decorative symbol) are not changed at all and can be visually recognized. The background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region has an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium-decorative symbol, and the like. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be visually recognized at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 67 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold, are described. The variation icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 67B) corresponding to the variation icon 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd can be visually recognized without any change. You can do it.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only four stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the variable display effect B through the transparent region. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the number of colors of the number of the first special figure reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 ( The blue number) and the color of the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (red number)) can be visually recognized without any change.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 will be briefly described. The second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape and has a character figure (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ") Is three-dimensionally formed, and has a character area 15a on which a character figure is formed and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of multicolor light emission that cause the character region 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a rectangular region 15b that emits light in a predetermined light emission mode. A plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multiple colors and a decorative substrate (not shown) on which the LEDs are mounted on the surface side are housed. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the surface side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED mounting surface. On the back surface side of the decorative substrate (the surface opposite to the front surface side of the decorative substrate), a dedicated LED drive IC (not shown) for controlling the gradation of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown). ), Resistor (not shown), capacitor (not shown), connector (not shown) are mounted. LED drive ICs, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mounted electronic components, which are soldered to the back side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the back surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED non-mounting surface. The LED drive IC is controlled by the control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are gradation-lit (lighting, blinking, gradation) and emit light to emit light. The 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and the rectangular region 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

The second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a in the normal state (first aspect), and is stationary at the retracted position (home position). From the state, it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and can stand still at the advance position (deployment position) (second aspect). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the operation of the second movable accessory 15 starts from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can be suggested to the player that the expectation of hitting is high. When the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or is advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 67 (A), when the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left The decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed accordingly. It is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect), and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. When the power to the gaming machine 1 which is a pachinko gaming machine is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is turned on. Is lit in white. In other words, in the second movable accessory 15, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. ..

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in white. As shown in 67 (B), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (C), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the variation display effect B through the transparent area is started, and the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. The display changes from a bright state to a gradually darker state, and a range extending from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to a little to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape, gradually appears as a transparent closed specific region (a range straddling the variable region of The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brilliance of a predetermined color at the boundary line HRc is clearly shining from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect B through the transparent area is started, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is movable. While the character area 15a of the accessory 15 is maintained in the state of being lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in blue. .. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light.

Further, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the image is gradually darkened, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern as the background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. In other words, when the variable display effect B through the transparent region is started, the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a is darkened. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (D), when the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is moved to the inside of the transparent region HR. The left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which fluctuate in front of the background image THG1 at high speed, can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. Become. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The right decorative symbols 8R that fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1 cannot be visually recognized. Further, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate during this predetermined period. A part of the left decorative pattern 8L that changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and decelerates (here, the central part and the upper part can be gradually visually recognized from the lower part of the number "1", and the number "1" The lower part of the number "2" following the number "1" can be visually recognized) and a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized (here, the central part gradually from the lower part of the number "2"). Then, the upper part can be visually recognized, and the lower part of the number "3" following the number "2" can be visually recognized).

Even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes dark as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. It can be visually recognized without occurring, it can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and the game ball to the first starting port 20 can be visually recognized. There is no change in the color of the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball (blue number) and the color of the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 (red number). It can be visually recognized without occurring, and it can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the image called "right-handed". As described above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "right-handed" is arranged so as to be on the foremost side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. Variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbol, number of first special figure hold based on entry of game ball into first start port 20, second This is because the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21, the image of "right-handed" is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is darkened as a background image as a background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and the range extending from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the fluctuation region of the left decorative symbol 8L). The transparent region HR displayed in the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the blue brilliance at the boundary line HRc becomes an indistinctly shining display mode from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The state is maintained, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is such that the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. It is blue, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

From the darkened state of the display screen 7a, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a. When the transparent region HR displayed in the range over the range (that is, the range straddling the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left Decorative design 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), medium decorative design 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2") , Right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") has already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (F), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is returned to the state of being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "3", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "1", and then. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display). When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first aspect) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue from the state of being lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character region 15a and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), when the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is used as the background image. In the state where (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable accessory 15 character area 15a is maintained in the yellow lighting state, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in the blue lighting state. , The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, the two hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (H), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is gradually displayed darker than the brightly displayed state. The color changes to and is transparently closed in the range from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to the slightly left side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range straddling the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). As a specific region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape, gradually appears. The shape of the transparent region HR here is the same as that of the transparent region HR shown in FIG. 67 (C) (that is, it is the same as that of the transparent region HR shown in FIG. 67 (C). There is). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brilliance of a predetermined color at the boundary line HRc is clearly shining from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light.

Further, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the image is gradually darkened, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern as the background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. In other words, the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a is darkened.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (I), when the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is displayed inside the transparent region HR. A state in which the medium decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R that fluctuate in front of the background image THG1 at high speed can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. Become. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbols 8L that fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1 cannot be visually recognized. Further, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a lit state, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a lit state, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the medium decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate during this predetermined period. A part of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C that changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again and decelerates (here, the central part and the upper part can be gradually visually recognized from the lower part of the number "9", and the number " The lower part of the number "1" following the number 9 can be seen) and a part of the right decorative symbol 8R can be seen (here, from the lower part of the number "1" to the central part and gradually The upper part can be visually recognized, and the lower part of the number "2" following the number "1" can be visually recognized).

Even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes dark as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, as described above, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. It is possible to visually recognize without any change to, and it is possible to visually recognize without any change to the display mode of the small decorative pattern. The color of the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 (blue number) and the color of the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 (red number) It is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the image, and it is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the display mode of the image called "right-handed". As described above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "right-handed" is arranged so as to be on the foremost side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. Variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbol, number of first special figure hold based on entry of game ball into first start port 20, second This is because the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21, the image of "right-handed" is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (J), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is darkened as a background image as a background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and the range extending from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the fluctuation region of the right decorative symbol 8R) The transparent region HR displayed in the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red brilliance at the boundary line HRc becomes an indistinctly shining display mode from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. The state is maintained, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is such that the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. It is red, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light is continued.

From the darkened state of the display screen 7a, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to the slightly right side of the center of the display screen 7a. When the transparent region HR displayed in the range over the range (that is, the range straddling the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left Decorative design 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), medium decorative design 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") , Right decorative symbol 8R (here, number "1" and number "2" following the number "1") has already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 67 (K), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is returned to the state of being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "1", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "2", and then. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display). When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first aspect) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in red from the state of being lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character region 15a and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state. As a result, the variation display effect B through the transparent region performed across the two variation displays shown in FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K) is completed.

The variable display effect B through the transparent area ends, and then, as shown in FIG. 67 (L), the variable display position 9Cd is moved to the variable display position 9Bd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd. When the movement is started, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started while the rectangular region 15b is maintained in the state of being lit in white. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the second hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position. As a result, one hold icon is in stock.

When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started, and then the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, they are removed and decorated. While the variation effect (variation display) of the symbol ends, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped and stopped, it becomes a hit. The variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is completed, and then the big hit game (big hit effect) is started.

As described above, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), and in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E). A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. On the other hand, in FIGS. 67 (H) to 67 (J), the transparent region HR (FIG. 67 (FIG. 67)) is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region. (C) to the same as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 67 (E)) appeared, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shined in red and emitted light. This is because in the variable display effect B through the transparent region, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold) and rainbow color (normal lighting color). The hit expectation is set in the order of rainbow color (big hit rich)), and the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is also blue. , Red, green, purple, yellow (gold color) and rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit rich)) in that order, the hit expectation is high and preset. As a result, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can be changed from blue to red by the progress of the variable display effect B through the transparent region, and the player can be given a feeling of expectation for hitting. It is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by fluctuations in the design.

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), and in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E), it is transparent. The transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a flat shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a closed specific area, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to a little to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the left decorative pattern). It appeared in the fluctuating region of 8L and the fluctuating region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C), whereas in FIGS. 67 (H) to 67 (J), it has a planar shape as a transparent closed specific region. The transparent region HR (same as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E)), which is a colorless and transparent region having a horizontally long rectangular shape, is displayed from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a. It appeared in a range extending slightly to the left of the center of 7a (that is, a range straddling the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). This is because the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 determines by lottery whether or not to execute the variable display effect B through the transparent area during the effect, so that the variable display effect B through the transparent area is executed. The position where the transparent region HR appears is also determined to be a random position. Therefore, there is no relationship between the position where the transparent region HR appears and the hit expectation. However, in the present embodiment, since the position where the transparent region HR appears can be set to a random position, it is possible to find the degree of expectation for the position where the transparent region HR appears based on the player's own idea. Therefore, in this respect as well, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), and in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E), it is transparent. The transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area having a flat shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a closed specific area, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to a little to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the left decorative pattern). A second movable combination that appears in the fluctuating area of 8L and the fluctuating area of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C) and is maintained in a stationary state (first aspect) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the object 15 is lit, and is transparent in FIGS. 67 (H) to 67 (J). The display screen is a transparent region HR (same as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E)), which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a closed specific region. Appears in a range extending from the vicinity of the center of the right side of 7a to a little to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, a range straddling the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C), and retracts the upper side of the display screen 7a. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is shining in red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b in the second movable accessory 15 maintained in a stationary state (first aspect) at the position (home position) is lit. It was a display mode that emits light. In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first aspect) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the rectangular area in the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which 15b is lit, the second movable accessory 15 does not start moving even if the second movable accessory 15 has not started moving. It is possible to give the player a hit expectation degree corresponding to (corresponding to) the hit expectation degree given to the operation of the player, and it is possible to contribute to giving a sense of expectation to the variable display.

Further, when the power to the gaming machine 1 which is a pachinko gaming machine is turned on, as described above, as a normal state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. The rectangular region 15b of 15 is lit in white. In the variation display effect B through the transparent region, although the variation display effect B straddles the two variation displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), the second variation display is performed in FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (F). The rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the white lighting state to the blue lighting state, and then the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the blue lighting state to the original white lighting state. In FIGS. 67 (G) to 67 (K), which is the next variation, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state in which the rectangular region 15b is lit in white to a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is lit in red, and then the second movement. The rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 changes from the state of being lit in red to the state of being lit in white. The variable display effect B through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead effects, and whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. It is decided by lottery. That is, in reality, the variable display effect B through the transparent area is performed across the two variable displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K) by only one lottery, so that it is as if the decorative design. For each variation, the variation display effect B can be performed through the transparent area as if it was determined by a lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91. As a result, the player can be made to think that there are a plurality of variations for the variable display effect B through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E), colorless and transparent having a plane shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The transparent area HR, which is a clear area, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to a little to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range straddling the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). On the other hand, in FIGS. 67 (H) to 67 (J), the transparent region HR (transparent region HR), which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The range from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to a little to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the fluctuation region of the right decorative symbol 8R) is the same as the transparent area HR appearing in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E). And the range that straddles the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). However, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is a range straddling the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R. You may try to. In this case, the left side of the transparent area HR protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the transparent area HR protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a, but the transparent area HR is one closed area (specific area). ) Can be expressed.

Further, in the variable display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIG. 67 (C), first, as a transparent closed specific region, a transparent region which is a plane shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape is a colorless transparent region. The color of HR was changed from blue, but for example, it may be changed from one of red, green, and purple, and FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E). ) Or in FIGS. 67 (H) to 67 (J), first, the color of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape as a transparent closed specific region and a horizontally long rectangular shape, is changed from blue to another. The color may be changed only a plurality of times (for example, blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.), or FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K). ), The color of the transparent region HR may be maintained in yellow (gold color) or rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit rich)).

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, although the variation display effect B straddles the two variation displays shown in FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), it is performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect. Instead, it is determined by lottery whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the variation display effect B through the transparent region during the effect. However, the variable display effect B through the transparent area can be performed as one of the look-ahead effects. In this case, since the variation display effect B through the transparent area is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), it is placed on the second hold display position 9Bd in FIG. 67 (A). When the shape and color of the hold icon 9B as the look-ahead result for the placed hold icon 9B is actually set to the blue spherical hold icon 9B as the look-ahead result, it matches (corresponds to) the expectation of the blue spherical hold icon 9B. By performing the variation display effect B through the transparent area that straddles the two variation displays shown in FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K) as the effect, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd is displayed. , It can be a white spherical hold icon 9B.

Further, in the variable display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are placed in the sub-variable region provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It was a variable production (variable display). However, the player misunderstands that the numbers of the small left decorative design, the small medium decorative design, and the small right decorative design are the countdown started by the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and the countdown hits the numbers. Since the player may expect that a highly expected effect is subsequently executed, the sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R to be compact. The left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be varied and produced (variable display).

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number of the second starting port 21 are reached. The number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the entry of the game ball was arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and was always displayed. However, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The player misunderstands (red number) as a countdown started by the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and the player expects that the effect with high expectation is subsequently executed by this countdown. Because there is a risk, the number of 1st special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 and the 2nd special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 The number of holds (red numbers) may be arranged on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R so as to always be displayed.

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E), colorless and transparent having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The transparent area HR, which is a transparent area, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to a little to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range straddling the variable area of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). When it appeared, the transparent region HR was fixed at this position without moving or rotating. Further, in FIGS. 67 (H) to 67 (J), the transparent region HR (FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (J)) is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The range (same as the transparent area HR appearing in FIG. 67 (E)) extends from the vicinity of the center of the right side of the display screen 7a to a little to the left of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the right decorative symbol 8R and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). When it appeared in the range that straddles the fluctuating region), the transparent region HR was fixed without moving or rotating at this position. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR may be repeatedly moved up and down (up and down vibration) or repeatedly left and right (left and right vibration) around the position where the transparent region HR appears. ), A display mode in which the display mode is repeatedly rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode in which these are combined. By doing so, since the area that can be visually recognized through the transparent area HR changes, the variation of the effect by the transparent area HR can be increased, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the decorative pattern with respect to the variable effect (variable display). be able to.

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, for example, in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E), the transparent closed specific region has a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape. The range in which the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, extends from the vicinity of the center of the left side of the display screen 7a to a little to the right of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the range straddling the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). ) Appeared. However, instead of the colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, the range straddling the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is a plane. It may be a transparent region HR which has a shape and is a colorless and transparent region. In other words, the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the display screen 7a is darkened, and finally the range straddling the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the middle decorative symbol 8C. By maintaining only the bright state, the background image and the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decoration that variablely display the front of the background image only through the range straddling the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the middle decorative symbol 8C. The symbol 8C may be visible. By doing so, since the variation of the transparent region HR can be increased, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the variable display effect B through the transparent region.

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), and in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E). The transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, appeared at different positions. However, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, may appear at a single predetermined position. As a single predetermined position, a position where a part of the left decorative symbol 8L and a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C can be visually recognized (that is, a variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and a variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C). (Position that straddles), a position where a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and a part of the left decorative symbol 8L can be visually recognized (that is, a range that straddles the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R). At a position where a part of the left decorative symbol 8L and a part of the right decorative symbol 8R can be visually recognized (that is, at a position that straddles the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R). Therefore, the left side of the transparent area HR protrudes from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the right side of the transparent area HR protrudes from the right side of the display screen 7a. The position that becomes the area) can be mentioned.

Further, in the variation display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the variation display is performed across the two variation displays of FIGS. 67 (B) to 67 (K), and in FIGS. 67 (C) to 67 (E). Is a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a horizontally long rectangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, appearing at different positions, and is transparent having the same shape and size commonly used. Region HR was appearing. However, each variation display may be changed to another different shape (for example, a triangular shape, a quadrangular shape, a star shape), or may be counted down by a numerical image. The contour portion of the other shape becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR described above, the inner region of the other shape becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR described above, and the outer region of the contour portion of the other shape becomes the transparent region described above. It becomes the outer region HRb of HR. In this case, as the change to another shape progresses (for example, when the shape changes in the order of a horizontally long rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a quadrangular shape, and a star shape), the hit expectation is set in advance. Further, the contour portion of the numerical image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR described above, the inner region of the numerical image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR described above, and the outer region of the contour portion of the numerical image becomes the transparent region HR described above. It becomes the outer region HRb of. In this case, the number "3" image, the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image are counted down in this order by the number image, and the number "3" image, When the countdown by the number image progresses in the order of the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)", the hit expectation is set in advance.

Further, in the variable display effect B through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 67 (D) and 67 (I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR is darkened. It was a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image) which is a background image. However, in FIGS. 67 (D) and 67 (I), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR is switched (changed) from the background image before being darkened to another background image. It may be. By doing so, the background image can be switched before and after FIGS. 67 (D) and 67 (I), that is, by switching the background image in the fluctuation, the background image switched due to the fluctuation and the winning result can be switched. It is possible to discover relationships (laws) with the player's body and contribute to suppressing the decline in interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any of the above-mentioned city image, forest image, sea image, seabed image, and underground image, or in the variable display effect B through the transparent area. It is also possible to switch (change) to one image from a plurality of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3 .... In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3 ... may be set in advance with high expectation of hitting in the order of dedicated background images B1, B2, B3 ... ..

[Variable display effect C through transparent area]
Next, the variation display effect C through the transparent region will be described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining the variation display effect C through the transparent region. The variation display effect C through the transparent area is the image display device 7 before the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of decorative symbols is started and then ended (stop display) (that is, during the variation effect of the decorative symbol). It is possible to perform a variable display effect in which the display screen 7a is darkened so that at least a part of at least one decorative symbol among the plurality of decorative symbols can be visually recognized together with the background image through a transparent area having a predetermined shape. is there. In other words, in the variable display effect C through the transparent area, other areas other than the transparent area having a predetermined shape are darkened, and only through this transparent area, a part of at least one decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner together with the background image. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of making the image visible.

The variation display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the image "right-handed" is not changed at all and can be visually recognized. If the image of "right-handed" is annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of time or until the number of fluctuations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), after the image "right-handed" is continuously displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is called "right-handed". The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (playing time) can be mentioned.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. Visibility is not impaired. Further, even if a transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the sub-variable area (the content displayed in the sub-variable area is opaque and small). The display mode of the left decorative symbol, the display mode of the opaque small medium-decorative symbol, and the display mode of the opaque small right decorative symbol) are not changed at all and can be visually recognized. The background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region has an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium-decorative symbol, and the like. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variation area cannot be visually recognized at all.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 68 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold, are described. The variation icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 68B) corresponding to the variation icon 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd can be visually recognized without any change. You can do it.

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only four stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 thereafter.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the variable display effect C through the transparent region. Further, even if the transparent area described later appears and the display screen 7a is darkened, the display mode of these numbers (the number of colors of the number of the first special figure reserved based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 ( The blue number) and the color of the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 (red number)) can be visually recognized without any change.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 will be briefly described. The second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape and has a character figure (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ") Is three-dimensionally formed, and has a character area 15a on which a character figure is formed and a rectangular area 15b excluding the character area 15a. Inside the second movable accessory 15, a plurality of first full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of multicolor light emission that cause the character region 15a to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode, and a rectangular region 15b that emits light in a predetermined light emission mode. A plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown) capable of emitting multiple colors and a decorative substrate (not shown) on which the LEDs are mounted on the surface side are housed. The plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are surface-mounted electronic components, and are soldered to the surface side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED mounting surface. On the back surface side of the decorative substrate (the surface opposite to the front surface side of the decorative substrate), a dedicated LED drive IC (not shown) for controlling the gradation of the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs (not shown). ), Resistor (not shown), capacitor (not shown), connector (not shown) are mounted. LED drive ICs, resistors, capacitors, and connectors are also surface-mounted electronic components, which are soldered to the back side of the decorative substrate. In other words, the back surface side of the decorative substrate is the LED non-mounting surface. The LED drive IC is controlled by the control signal from the lamp control board 107, and the plurality of first full-color LEDs and the plurality of second full-color LEDs are gradation-lit (lighting, blinking, gradation) and emit light to emit light. The 15a can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode, and the rectangular region 15b can emit light in a predetermined light emitting mode.

The second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a in the normal state (first aspect), and is stationary at the retracted position (home position). From the state, it can move downward toward the center of the display screen 7a and can stand still at the advance position (deployment position) (second aspect). The second movable accessory 15 covers a part of the image display device 7 when stopped at the advanced position. When the operation of the second movable accessory 15 starts from the retracted position to the advanced position, it can be suggested to the player that the expectation of hitting is high. When the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position or is advanced to the advanced position, the second movable accessory 15 can be easily visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 68 (A), when the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left The decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") are all stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C is displayed accordingly. It is in a state of disappearing from the display screen 7a. The second movable accessory 15 remains stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect), and the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed. Even in this state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. When the power to the gaming machine 1 which is a pachinko gaming machine is turned on, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow as a normal state, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is turned on. Is lit in white. In other words, in the second movable accessory 15, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is normally lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in white. ..

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state displayed on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in white. As shown in 68 (B), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (C), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the variation display effect C through the transparent area is started, and the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. It changes from a brightly displayed state to a gradually darkened state, and is colorless with a plane shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific area in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, a variable area of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C). The display mode is such that the transparent region HR, which is a transparent region, gradually appears. The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brilliance of a predetermined color at the boundary line HRc is clearly shining from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

When the variable display effect C through the transparent region is started, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is movable. While the character area 15a of the accessory 15 is maintained in the state of being lit in yellow, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in blue. .. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light.

Further, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the image is gradually darkened, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern as the background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. In other words, when the variable display effect C through the transparent region is started, the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a is darkened. ..

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (D), when the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is moved to the inside of the transparent region HR. In addition to being visible through the region HRa, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in front of the background image THG1 at high speed can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Further, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is blue, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which fluctuates at high speed, decelerates from the translucent state in this predetermined period. A part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be visually recognized (here, the central part and the upper part can be gradually visually recognized from the lower part of the number "2", and the number The lower part of the number "3" following "2" can be visually recognized).

Even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes dark as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, there is no change in the display mode of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. It can be visually recognized without occurring, it can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the small decorative pattern, and the game ball to the first starting port 20 can be visually recognized. There is no change in the color of the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball (blue number) and the color of the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 (red number). It can be visually recognized without occurring, and it can be visually recognized without any change in the display mode of the image called "right-handed". As described above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "right-handed" is arranged so as to be on the foremost side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. Variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbol, number of first special figure hold based on entry of game ball into first start port 20, second This is because the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21, the image of "right-handed" is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (E), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is darkened as a background image as a background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the blue brilliance at the boundary line HRc becomes an indistinctly shining display mode from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The state is maintained, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in blue, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is such that the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. It is blue, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in blue and emits light is continued.

From the darkened state of the display screen 7a, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and at the same time, in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C) When the displayed transparent area HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative symbols 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1"), middle Decorative design 8C (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), right decorative design 8R (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") Has already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (F), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is returned to the state of being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "3", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "1", and then. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display). When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first aspect) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue from the state of being lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character region 15a and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (G), when the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is used as the background image. In the state where (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable accessory 15 character area 15a is maintained in the state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in the state of being lit in blue. , The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, the two hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (H), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is gradually displayed darker than the brightly displayed state. At the same time, it is transparently closed at the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which is the same position as the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E)). The display mode is such that the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, gradually appears as a specific region. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from that of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 68 (C). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brilliance of a predetermined color at the boundary line HRc is clearly shining from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in red. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light.

Further, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the image is gradually darkened, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern as the background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. In other words, the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a is darkened.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (I), when the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is moved to the inside of the transparent region HR. In addition to being visible through the region HRa, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in front of the background image THG1 at high speed is visible through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. Further, at this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a lit state, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a lit state, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is red, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which fluctuates at high speed, decelerates from the translucent state in this predetermined period. A part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be visually recognized (here, the central part and the upper part can be gradually recognized from the lower part of the number "9", and the number The lower part of the number "1" following "9" can be visually recognized).

Even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes dark as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, as described above, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. It is possible to visually recognize without any change to, and it is possible to visually recognize without any change to the display mode of the small decorative pattern. The color of the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 (blue number) and the color of the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 (red number) It is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the image, and it is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the display mode of the image called "right-handed". As described above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "right-handed" is arranged so as to be on the foremost side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. Variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbol, number of first special figure hold based on entry of game ball into first start port 20, second This is because the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21, the image of "right-handed" is arranged.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (J), the display screen 7a is darkened, and immediately before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses, the display screen 7a is darkened as a background image as a background image. The image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brightly and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the red brilliance at the boundary line HRc becomes an indistinctly shining display mode from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. The state is maintained, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in red, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is such that the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. It is red, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in red and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image from the state where the display screen 7a is darkened, and at the same time, it is a variable region of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C). , The same position as the position of the transparent area HR appearing in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E)), when the display mode in which the transparent area HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left Decorative design 8L (here, the number "2" and the number "3" following the number "2"), medium decorative design 8C (here, the number "9" and the number "1" following the number "9") , Right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1") has already slowed down and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative symbol 8L, middle on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (K), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is returned to the state of being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the transparent area HR is displayed from the display screen 7a. When it disappears, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "1", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "2", and then. The left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the variation icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a with the end of the variation effect (variation display). When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first aspect) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in red from the state of being lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character region 15a and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (L), when the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 is used as the background image. In the state where (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable accessory 15 character area 15a is maintained in the state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b is maintained in the state of being lit in blue. , The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started again. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the second hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, one hold icon is in stock.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (M), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state. When the display mode changes and fluctuates at high speed, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and is gradually displayed darker than the brightly displayed state. At the same time, the position is the same as the position of the transparent area HR appearing in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E) in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C), and further. Transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a quadrangular shape as a transparent closed specific region (the same position as the position of the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 68 (H) to 68 (J)). Will gradually appear in the display mode. The shape of the transparent region HR here is different from that of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape shown in FIG. 68 (C). The shape is different from the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape shown in H). The transparent region HR has a display mode in which the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR is colorless and transparent, and the boundary line HRc between the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR and the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR shines in a predetermined color and emits light. It has become. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the brilliance of a predetermined color at the boundary line HRc is clearly shining from a dark state to a gradually bright state.

The second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow. On the other hand, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in green. At this time, the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is green, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. That is, the display mode is such that the boundary line HRc shines in green and emits light.

Further, in the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually appears, the background image THG1 is brightly displayed as the background image in the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR (that is, in the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR). Although the image is gradually darkened, the background image THG1 is maintained at the same brightness as the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern as the background image in the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. In other words, the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image except for the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR, and then the display screen 7a is darkened.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 68 (N), when the background image THG1 is gradually darkened as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) is moved to the inside of the transparent region HR. In addition to being visible through the region HRa, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that fluctuates in front of the background image THG1 at high speed can be visually recognized through the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR. At this time, since the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR, which is the region excluding the inner region HRa and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, is darkened, the background image THG1 (underground image of the moving image) cannot be visually recognized. The left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed in front of the background image THG1, cannot be visually recognized. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is yellow. The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a lit state, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in green, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15. It is green, which is the same color as the lighting color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in green and emits light is continued.

When the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, which fluctuates at high speed, decelerates from the translucent state in this predetermined period. A part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that changes to an opaque state again and decelerates can be visually recognized (here, the central part and the upper part can be gradually visually recognized from the lower part of the number "8", and the number The lower part of the number "9" following the "8" can be visually recognized).

Even if the background image THG1 gradually becomes dark as the background image and the display screen 7a is darkened, as described above, the display modes of the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. It is possible to visually recognize without any change to, and it is possible to visually recognize without any change to the display mode of the small decorative pattern. The color of the number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 (blue number) and the color of the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 (red number) It is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the image, and it is possible to visually recognize the image without any change to the display mode of the image called "right-handed". As described above, this is the first special figure hold based on the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, the hold display position 9Bd, the small decorative symbol, and the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21, and the image "right-handed" is arranged so as to be on the foremost side, that is, the background image THG1 as the background image. Variable icon 9C, variable display position 9Cd, hold icon 9B, hold display position 9Bd, small decorative symbol, number of first special figure hold based on entry of game ball into first start port 20, second This is because the number of the second special figure pending based on the entry of the game ball into the starting port 21, the image of "right-handed" is arranged.

Subsequently, although not shown, the background image THG1 (here, here,) is used as a background image from the state in which the display screen 7a is darkened immediately before the display screen 7a is darkened and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second to 2 seconds) elapses. The underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears, and the transparent region HR displayed in the center of the display screen 7a gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state. In the display mode in which the transparent region HR gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, the green brilliance at the boundary line HRc becomes an indistinctly shining display mode from a bright state to a gradually dark state. At this time, the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first mode) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, and the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 lights up in yellow. The state is maintained, and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in green, and the predetermined color forming the boundary line HRc is such that the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit. It is green, which is the same color as the color. That is, the display mode in which the boundary line HRc shines in green and emits light is continued.

The background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is gradually displayed brighter and reappears as a background image from the state where the display screen 7a is darkened, and at the same time, it is a variable region of the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the intermediate decorative pattern 8C). , The position is the same as the position of the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E), and further is the same as the position of the transparent region HR appearing in FIGS. 68 (H) to 68 (J). When the transparent area HR displayed at (position) gradually changes from a bright state to a dark state, all the left decorative symbols 8L (here, the number "1" and the number "2" following the number "1" are displayed. ”), Medium decorative symbol 8C (here, number“ 8 ”and number“ 9 ”following number“ 8 ”), right decorative symbol 8R (here, number“ 9 ”and number following number“ 9 ”) “1”) has already decelerated and changed to an opaque state, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in the state immediately before the temporary stop display is displayed on the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, although not shown, when the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) returns to the state of being brightly displayed on the display screen 7a and the transparent area HR disappears from the display screen 7a, the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is temporarily stopped with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped with the number "9", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped with the number "1", and then the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped. The stop display is displayed at "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "9", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1". With the end of display), the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. When the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time, and the left decorative symbol 8L is further displayed. When the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at the same time. At the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The state (first aspect) is maintained, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in green from the state of being lit in white. It is designed to be changed to a state. In other words, at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (or almost at the same time), the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second Since the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit in white, the character region 15a and the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 return to the light emitting mode in the normal state. As a result, the variation display effect C through the transparent region, which is started from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays, ends.

When the variable display effect C through the transparent area ends, and then, although not shown, the holding icon 9B placed on the first reserved display position 9Bd is started to move toward the variable display position 9Cd. In a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image on the display screen 7a, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a state of being lit in yellow, and the rectangular area 15b is lit in white. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern is started while being maintained in the state of being. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B is placed on the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position accordingly. It will be in a state where it is not. As a result, none of the hold icons are in stock.

When the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is started, and then the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are temporarily stopped and displayed, they are removed and decorated. While the variation effect (variation display) of the symbol ends, when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and temporarily stopped and stopped, it becomes a hit. The variable effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern is completed, and then the big hit game (big hit effect) is started.

As described above, the variation display effect C through the transparent region starts from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays, and in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E), the transparent closing is performed. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. )-In FIG. 68 (J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red. The display mode is such that light is emitted, and in FIGS. 68 (M), 68 (N), etc., a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a quadrangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in green and emits light. This is expected in the variable display effect C through the transparent region, in which the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape as a transparent closed specific region, is in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because it is preset so that the degree is high. As a result, as the variable display effect C progresses through the transparent region, the shape of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR is changed in order from a circular shape to a triangular shape and then to a square shape, giving the player a sense of expectation for hitting. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Further, the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is hit in the order of white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color) and rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit rich)). The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is highly expected and preset and has the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, is also blue, red, green, purple, and yellow (gold color). ) And the rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit rich)), the hit expectation is high and preset. As a result, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can be changed from blue to red and green as the variable display effect C progresses through the transparent region, and the player can be given a sense of expectation for hitting. , It is possible to contribute to reducing the monotony caused by the fluctuation of the decorative pattern.

Further, the variation display effect C through the transparent region starts from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays, and in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E), the transparent closed identification is performed. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a region, and is maintained in a stationary state (first aspect) at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. 2 The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in blue, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b of the movable accessory 15 is lit. , A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and is stationary at a retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). The display mode is such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines and emits light in red, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b in the second movable accessory 15 maintained in) is lit. In N) and the like, a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a quadrangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and stands still at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a. The display mode was such that the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR was shining and emitting light in green, which is the same color as the color in which the rectangular region 15b in the second movable accessory 15 maintained in the state (first aspect) was lit. .. In other words, although the second movable accessory 15 is maintained in a stationary state (first aspect) at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a, the rectangular area in the second movable accessory 15 Since the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR can shine in the same color as the color in which 15b is lit, the second movable accessory 15 does not start moving even if the second movable accessory 15 has not started moving. It is possible to give the player a hit expectation degree corresponding to (corresponding to) the hit expectation degree given to the operation of the player, and it is possible to contribute to giving a sense of expectation to the variable display.

Further, when the power to the gaming machine 1 which is a pachinko gaming machine is turned on, as described above, as a normal state, the character area 15a of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow, and the second movable accessory 15 is lit in yellow. The rectangular region 15b of 15 is lit in white. In the variation display effect C through the transparent region, the second movable accessory is shown in FIGS. 68 (B) to 68 (F), although the variation display effect C starts from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays. The rectangular region 15b of the 15 is changed from the state of being lit in white to the state of being lit in blue, and then the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is changed from the state of being lit in blue to the state of being lit in white. In the next variation, FIGS. 68 (G) to 68 (K), the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from a state in which the rectangular region 15b is lit in white to a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is lit in red, and then the second movable accessory 15 is lit. The rectangular region 15b of 15 changes from the state of being lit in red to the state of being lit in white, and further, in the fluctuation starting from FIG. 68 (L), which is the next fluctuation, the second movable accessory 15 The rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the white lighting state to the green lighting state, and then the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15 changes from the green lighting state to the original white lighting state. .. The variable display effect C through the transparent area is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead effects, and whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect through the transparent area during the effect. It is decided by lottery. That is, in reality, the variation display effect C through the transparent area is started from FIG. 68 (B) by only one lottery, and is performed across the three variation displays, so that it is as if each variation of the decorative pattern. , The variable display effect C can be performed through the transparent area as if it was determined by a lottery by the effect control microcomputer 91. As a result, the player can be made to think that there are a plurality of variations for the variable display effect C through the transparent area.

In addition, in the variation display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E), first, as a transparent closed specific region, a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape. Although the transparent region HR has appeared, it may have a planar shape and a triangular shape, or it may have a planar shape and a quadrangular shape, and FIGS. 68 (B) to 68 (B) to FIG. At 68 (K), the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be changed while maintaining the planar shape and the circular shape.

Further, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIG. 68 (C), first, in FIG. 68 (C), the transparent region HR which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The color has changed from blue, but for example, it may change from one of red, green, and purple, and in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E). In the fluctuation, in the fluctuation in FIGS. 68 (H) to 68 (J), or in the fluctuation in FIGS. 68 (M), (N), etc., first, a transparent closed specific region having a planar shape and a circle. The color of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area with a shape, changes from blue to another color only multiple times (for example, blue → red, blue → red → green, blue → red → green → purple, etc.) ), Or starting from FIG. 68 (B), the color of the transparent area HR was maintained at yellow (gold) or rainbow (rainbow (big hit rich)) across the three fluctuations. In the state, the shape of the transparent area HR, which is a transparent closed specific area, can be changed (for example, the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape and star shape, circular shape, triangular shape and square shape, circular shape). Then maintain the shape of the transparent region HR, which is a transparent closed specific region (for example, a circular shape), such as a triangular shape, a triangular shape, a square shape, and a star shape, a triangular shape, and a square shape. It may be maintained (maintained in a triangular shape, maintained in a square shape, maintained in a star shape, etc.).

Further, in the variation display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, although it is started from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays, it is not performed as one effect of the so-called look-ahead effect. In addition, whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the variable display effect C through the transparent region during the effect is determined by lottery. However, the variable display effect C through the transparent area can be performed as one of the look-ahead effects. In this case, since the variation display effect C through the transparent region is started from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays, it is placed at the third hold display position 9Bd in FIG. 68 (A). The shape and color of the hold icon 9B as the look-ahead result for the hold icon 9B is actually set to the red spherical hold icon 9B as the look-ahead result. By performing the variation display effect C through the transparent area that starts from 68 (B) and straddles the three variation displays, the hold icon 9B placed on the third hold display position 9Bd is intentionally held in a white spherical shape. It can be icon 9B.

Further, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are placed in the sub-variable region provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. It was a variable production (variable display). However, the player misunderstands that the numbers by the small left decorative design, the small medium decorative design, and the small right decorative design are the countdown started by the variable display effect C through the transparent area, and the countdown hits the numbers. Since the player may expect that a highly expected effect is subsequently executed, the sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R to be compact. The left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be varied and produced (variable display).

Further, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number of the first special figure hold (blue number) and the second starting port 21 The number of second special figure reservations (red numbers) based on the entry of the game ball was arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and was always displayed. However, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. The player misunderstands that (red number) is a countdown started by the variable display effect C through the transparent area, and the player expects that the effect with high expectation is subsequently executed by this countdown. Because there is a risk, the number of 1st special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 and the 2nd special figure based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 The number of holds (red numbers) may be arranged on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R so as to always be displayed.

Further, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E), a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region. When the transparent region HR, which is the above, appears in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C), the transparent region HR is fixed at this position without moving or rotating. Further, in FIGS. 68 (H) to 68 (J), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is in the center (that is, in the middle) of the display screen 7a. When it appeared in the variable region of the decorative symbol 8C), the transparent region HR was fixed at this position without moving or rotating. Further, in FIGS. 68 (M) and 68 (N), the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a quadrangular shape as a transparent closed specific region, is the center (that is, the middle decoration) of the display screen 7a. When it appeared in the variable region of the symbol 8C), the transparent region HR was fixed at this position without moving or rotating. However, when the transparent region HR appears on the display screen 7a, the transparent region HR may be repeatedly moved up and down (up and down vibration) or repeatedly left and right (left and right vibration) around the position where the transparent region HR appears. ), A display mode in which the display mode is repeatedly rotated clockwise or counterclockwise (rotational vibration), or a display mode in which these are combined. By doing so, since the area that can be visually recognized through the transparent area HR changes, the variation of the effect by the transparent area HR can be increased, which contributes to reducing the monotony of the decorative pattern with respect to the variable effect (variable display). be able to.

Further, in the variation display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, for example, in FIGS. 68 (C) to 68 (E), colorless and transparent having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region. The transparent area HR, which is a large area, appeared in the center of the display screen 7a (that is, the variable area of the intermediate decorative pattern 8C). However, instead of the colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape as a transparent closed specific region, the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is set as a transparent region HR which is a planar shape and a colorless and transparent region. May be good. In other words, the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L and the variable region of the right decorative symbol 8R gradually change from a bright state to a dark state, the display screen 7a becomes dark, and finally only the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes bright. By maintaining the background image, the background image and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C that variablely displays the front of the background image may be visible only through the variable region of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. By doing so, since the variation of the transparent region HR can be increased, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the freshness of the variable display effect C through the transparent region.

Further, in the variation display effect C through the transparent area in the present embodiment, the variation display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays, FIG. 68 (C). In FIG. 68 (E), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. In FIGS. 68 (H) to 68 (J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red and emits light. In FIGS. 68 (M) and 68 (N), the transparent region has a planar shape and a quadrangular shape as a specific closed region. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in green and emits light. This is because in the variable display effect C through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent closed specific region, is expected to hit in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area appearing as a transparent closed specific area in the shape of a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, and a star, the silhouette of the character 1, the silhouette of the character 2, and the character 3 The silhouettes of different characters may appear one after another in the order of the silhouette of the character 4 and the silhouette of the character 4. The contour portion of the silhouette of each character is the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR described above, the inner region of the silhouette of each character is the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR described above, and the outer region of the contour portion of the silhouette of each character is described above. It becomes the outer region HRb of the transparent region HR. In this case, the silhouette of the character 1, the silhouette of the character 2, the silhouette of the character 3, and the silhouette of the character 4 are set in advance so that the hit expectation is high. Also, instead of the transparent area HR, which is a colorless and transparent area appearing as a transparent closed specific area in the shape of a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, and a star, the posture of the silhouette of a single specific character ( The pose) may appear so as to gradually change. For example, it is possible to make silhouettes of a series of movements until a specific character holds a sword appear in order. In this case, the silhouette of a series of movements until the specific character holds the sword is preset so that the degree of expectation increases as the character progresses.

Further, in the variation display effect C through the transparent area in the present embodiment, the variation display effect C through the transparent area starts from FIG. 68 (B) and is performed across the three variation displays, FIG. 68 (C). In FIG. 68 (E), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a circular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in blue and emits light. In FIGS. 68 (H) to 68 (J), a transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region having a planar shape and a triangular shape, appears as a transparent closed specific region. The boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in red and emits light. In FIGS. 68 (M) and 68 (N), the transparent region has a planar shape and a quadrangular shape as a specific closed region. A transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region, appears, and the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR shines in green and emits light. This is because in the variable display effect C through the transparent region, the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region as a transparent closed specific region, is expected to hit in the order of circular shape, triangular shape, square shape, and star shape. This is because it is set in advance. Instead of the transparent region HR, which is a colorless and transparent region appearing as a transparent closed specific region in the shape of a circle, a triangle, a quadrangle, and a star, the countdown may be performed by a numerical image. The contour portion of the numerical image becomes the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR described above, the inner region of the numerical image becomes the inner region HRa of the transparent region HR described above, and the outer region of the contour portion of the numerical image becomes the outer region of the transparent region HR described above. It becomes the region HRb. In this case, the number "3" image, the number "2" image, the number "1" image, and the number "0 (zero)" image are counted down in this order by the number image, and the number "3" image, When the countdown by the number image progresses in the order of the image of the number "2", the image of the number "1", and the image of the number "0 (zero)", the hit expectation is set in advance.

Further, in the variable display effect C through the transparent region in the present embodiment, in FIGS. 68 (D), 68 (I) and 68 (N), a background image that can be visually recognized through the transparent region HR when darkened. Was a background image THG1 (here, an underground image of a moving image) which is a background image before being darkened. However, in FIGS. 68 (D), 68 (I) and 68 (N), when the background image is darkened, the background image visible through the transparent region HR is changed from the background image to another background image before being darkened. It may be switched (changed). By doing so, the background image can be switched before and after FIG. 68 (D), FIG. 68 (I), and FIG. 68 (N), that is, by switching the background image in the fluctuation, the background switched due to the fluctuation. It is possible to discover the relationship (rule) between the image and the winning result by the player himself and contribute to suppressing the deterioration of the interest. The background image may be switched (changed) to any of the above-mentioned city image, forest image, sea image, seabed image, and underground image, or in the variable display effect C through the transparent area. It is also possible to switch (change) to one image from a plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3 .... In this case, the plurality of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3 ... May be set in advance with high expectation of hitting in the order of dedicated background images C1, C2, C3 ... ..

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the variable display effect through the transparent area is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of types of images are used in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C of the transparent area of FIG. When displaying an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR with an image display device 7 (display means) capable of displaying the image, a background image THG1 and a symbol image are displayed outside the image forming the specific area HR. A production that makes it difficult to visually recognize the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol, and makes it possible to visually recognize a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the symbol image through the inside of the image forming the specific area HR. (Variable display effect A through the transparent area is shown in FIGS. 66 (D) and (I), variable display effect B through the transparent area is shown in FIGS. 67 (D) and (I), and variable display effect C through the transparent area is shown in FIG. 68. (D), (I), (N)) can be executed. According to this configuration, when displaying an image forming a transparent closed specific region HR, outside the image forming the specific region HR, there is a background image THG1 and a symbol image capable of notifying the winning result. Although the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are difficult to see, inside the image forming the specific region HR, the background image THG1 is passed through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR. A part and a part of the symbol image (for example, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 66 (D), a part of the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 66 (I), and the transparent region. In the variable display effect B through, a part of the left decorative symbol 8L and a part of the middle decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 67 (D), a part of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C and a part of the right decorative symbol 8R in FIG. 67 (I). In the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the middle decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 68 (D) can be visually recognized, so that the left decorative symbol is a novel symbol image that has never existed before. It is possible to perform variable display with 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol, which contributes to reducing monotony due to fluctuation of left decorative symbol 8L, medium decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol, which are symbol images. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest by performing variable display with the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol, which are novel symbol images.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. When the image 7a is darkened to form the specific region HR, the outside of the image forming the specific region HR is darkened, and the inside of the image forming the specific region HR is not darkened and the transparent state is maintained. You can do it. According to this configuration, on the outside of the image forming the specific region HR, the display screen 7a is darkened, so that the background image THG1 and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are the symbol images, are displayed. Is difficult to see, and the inside of the image forming the specific area HR remains transparent regardless of whether the display screen 7a is darkened or not. Therefore, before the display screen 7a is darkened, The background image THG1 and the symbol image (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L in FIG. 66 (I) in the variable display effect A through the transparent area, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 67 (I) in the variable display effect B through the transparent area, and so on. In the right decorative symbol 8R and the variable display effect C through the transparent area, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 68 (D), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 68 (I), and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C in FIG. 68 (N) are displayed. It is possible to maintain a state in which it is easy to see.

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. The variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B are displayed outside the image forming the HR, and even if the display screen 7a is dimmed, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B can be maintained in the displayed state without being hidden. You can do it. According to this configuration, when the display screen 7a is darkened, the outside of the image forming the specific area HR is darkened, but the variable icon 9C arranged outside the image forming the specific area HR is held. Since the icon 9B can be maintained in the displayed state without being hidden, the variation that continues to be displayed to the player during the variation display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It is possible to suggest that the icon 9C may change to another shape or another color to increase the expectation of hitting, and it is displayed during the variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It is also possible to suggest that the hold icon 9B, which continues to be held, may change to another shape or another color to increase the degree of expectation.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. 68 is a background image. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are the symbol images, are arranged in front of the THG1, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are the symbol images, are changed from the opaque state. When started, an image forming a specific area HR was displayed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are the symbol images, were changed from an opaque state to a translucent state and displayed in a high-speed variable manner. Also, the variable display of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are the symbol images, is decelerated to change from a translucent state to an opaque state. According to this configuration, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are the symbol images, are displayed in a semi-transparent state at high speed, but the left is a semi-transparent symbol image. The decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R can be visually recognized through the specific area HR, and the left decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R are semi-transparent design images. The background image THG1 behind the image can also be visually recognized through the design image and the specific area HR.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the effect in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. The boundary line HRc between the outside and the inside of the image forming the HR can be displayed in a predetermined color. According to this configuration, since the specific region HR is an image forming a transparent closed region, the boundary line HRc representing the outer shape of the specific region HR is displayed in a predetermined color to make the specific region HR easy to see. It is possible to contribute to guiding the player's line of sight to the specific area HR and drawing attention when the specific area HR is displayed.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, a plurality of first full-color LEDs and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (plurality of light emitting means) that can move between the retracted position and the advanced position and are capable of multicolor light emission are provided. 2 The effect in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. 68 having the movable accessory 15 (movable body). Is a plurality of a predetermined color for displaying the boundary line HRc, a plurality of first full-color LEDs, and a plurality of second full-color LEDs (plurality of light emitting means) in a state where the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position. The emission color of the light emitted by the second full-color LED (specific light emitting means) can be the same color. When the operation of the second movable accessory 15 is started from the retracted position to the advanced position, it is possible to suggest to the player that the hit expectation is high, but the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the retracted position. In the retracted state, the boundary line HRc can be displayed so as to be the same color as the emission color of the light emitted by the plurality of second full-color LEDs (specific light emitting means) provided in the second movable accessory 15. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player that the second movable accessory 15 and the transparent area HR (that is, the boundary line HRc) are interlocked with each other, and the second movable accessory 15 is moved to the evacuation position. It is possible to suggest to the player that the hit expectation is high even in the retracted state by using the transparent region HR (that is, the boundary line HRc). Further, as described above, in the state where the second movable accessory 15 is retracted at the retracted position, the emission color of the light emitted by the plurality of second full-color LEDs (specific light emitting means) provided in the second movable accessory 15 is used. Since the boundary line HRc can be displayed so as to have the same color, the player can point out that the second movable accessory 15 and the transparent region HR (that is, the boundary line HRc) are interlocked with each other. With this, it is also possible to inspire the player with the expectation that the second movable accessory 15 may start operating from now on.

[Effect 7]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C of the transparent area of FIG. The formed image is a flat image (planar image), and the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display through the transparent area of FIG. 68. The effect in the effect C can be maintained without changing the posture and size of the planar image (plane image) from the display of the planar image (plane image) to the non-display. ing. According to this configuration, the posture and size of the planar image (planar image), which is an image formed in the specific region HR, do not change, so that the player's line of sight is not the specific region HR itself. It can contribute to maintaining a state toward a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the design image that can be visually recognized through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the variable display effect through the transparent area.
[Modification 1]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. 68, the game ball has entered the second starting port 21. It was based on. In other words, it was performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state. However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state.

[Modification 2]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. 68, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol are used. During the variable display by 8R, the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B did not change to another shape or another color for the player. However, it can be suggested that the variable icon 9 may change to another shape or another color during the variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the degree of expectation for hitting may increase. Alternatively, the hold icon 9B may change to another shape or another color during variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the degree of expectation for hitting may increase. It may be possible to suggest.

[Modification 3]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. 68, an image forming a transparent closed specific area HR is displayed. When this is done, the background image THG1 and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol, which are the symbol images, are made difficult to see outside the image forming the specific region HR, and the image forming the specific region HR. Through the inside, it has become possible to perform an effect of making a part of the background image THG1 and a part of the design image visible. However, as the symbol image, the variable icon 9 or the hold icon 9B may be used instead of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol. In this case, when the symbol image is the variable icon 9C, when the image forming the transparent closed specific region HR is displayed, the background image THG1 and the variable icon 9C are visually recognized outside the image forming the specific region HR. Although difficult, inside the image forming the specific region HR, part or all of the background image THG1 and part or all of the symbol image (part or variation of the variable icon 9C) through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR. It may be possible to visually recognize the entire icon 9C), or when the symbol image is the hold icon 9B and the image forming the transparent closed specific area HR is displayed, the specific area HR is formed. On the outside of the image, the background image THG1 and the hold icon 9B are difficult to see, but on the inside of the image forming the specific region HR, the background image THG1 is formed through the inside of the image forming the specific region HR. A part or all of the symbol image (a part of the hold icon 9B or all of the hold icon 9B) may be visible. By doing so, the player's line of sight can be directed to the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B, so that the variable icon 9C and the hold icon 9B change to another shape and another color, and the degree of hit expectation is high. It is possible to inform the player of the timing that suggests the possibility.

[Modification example 4]
In the variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. 68, the rectangular area 15b of the second movable accessory 15 is described. The second movable accessory is preset with high expectation of hitting in the order of white (normal lighting color), blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold color) and rainbow color (rainbow color (big hit rich)). The color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, which is the same color as the 15 rectangular regions 15b, is also in the order of blue, red, green, purple, yellow (gold) and rainbow (rainbow color (big hit rich)). The hit expectation was high and it was set in advance. However, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, followed by a color in which the degree of expectation is one higher. For example, when the rectangular region 15 of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue, red, which is a color in which the degree of expectation for hitting is one higher after blue, becomes the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, and the transparent region. The HR boundary line HRc lights up in red. Further, the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR may be the same color as the rectangular region 15b of the second movable accessory 15, followed by a color in which the degree of expectation of hitting is increased by two. For example, when the rectangular region 15 of the second movable accessory 15 is lit in blue, green, which is a color in which the degree of expectation for hitting is two higher after blue, becomes the color of the boundary line HRc of the transparent region HR, and the transparent region. The HR boundary line HRc lights up in green.

[Modification 5]
The variable display effect A through the transparent area of FIG. 66, the variable display effect B through the transparent area of FIG. 67, and the variable display effect C through the transparent area of FIG. 68 do not have to include a part of the described effects. However, other effects may be added.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A6-1]
A gaming machine having a display means for displaying a plurality of types of images on a screen.
When displaying an image forming a transparent closed specific area, it is difficult to see the background image and the pattern image outside the image forming the specific area, and the background image is passed through the inside of the image forming the specific area. It is possible to perform an effect that makes a part of the above pattern image visible.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-1.
In the effect, when the screen is darkened to display an image forming the specific area, the outside of the image forming the specific area is darkened, and the inside of the image forming the specific area is not darkened and is transparent. Maintain the state,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-2.
In the effect, the variable icon and the hold icon are displayed outside the image forming the specific area, and even if the screen is dimmed, the variable icon and the hold icon are not hidden and are displayed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-3.
In the effect, when the symbol image is arranged in front of the background image and the symbol image starts to fluctuate from an opaque state, an image forming the specific region is displayed and the symbol image is translucent from an opaque state. After changing to a normal state and displaying the fluctuation at high speed, the fluctuation display of the symbol image is decelerated to change from a translucent state to an opaque state.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-4.
In the effect, the boundary line between the outside and the inside of the image forming the specific area is displayed in a predetermined color.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A6-5.
It is possible to move between the retracted position and the advanced position, and the multicolored light emitting has a movable body provided with a plurality of light emitting means.
In the effect, when the movable body is retracted at the retracted position, the predetermined color for displaying the boundary line and the emission color of light emitted by a specific light emitting means among the plurality of light emitting means are displayed. Same color,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A6-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A6-1 to A6-6.
The image formed in the specific region is a planar image and
The effect maintains the posture and size of the plane image unchanged from the display to the non-display of the plane image.
A game machine characterized by that.

The rhythmic winning notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. In FIGS. 69 to 71, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewability of the drawings. There is. If the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are operated during the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of decorative symbols, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated. Compared to the time, the player is told that the hit expectation is high that the hit will occur after the variation effect (variation display) of the plurality of decorative symbols is completed (that is, after the multiple decorative symbols are stopped and displayed). Suggesting that, when the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are operated while a plurality of decorative symbols are aligned on the same symbol and the temporary stop display is displayed, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are activated. It is suggested to the player that, among the plurality of types of hits that exist, the degree of expectation that the hit will be more profitable to the player is higher than when 15 is not activated. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15.

This rhythmical winning notification effect starts the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) elapses, stops and displays them all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning result. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, it is possible to execute a variable display effect of rhythmically notifying the winning result by notifying the winning result after a lapse of a predetermined time (fixed time) for the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols. .. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a rhythmic winning notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of. Further, when the lamp control board 107 analyzes various commands received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a rhythmic winning notification effect, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 are provided. The position of the movable accessory 15 is changed. The rhythmic winning notification effect is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead effects, but whether or not the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the rhythmic winning notification effect during the effect is determined by lottery. There is.

Examples of various background images for the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative pattern include background images such as city images, forest images, sea images, seabed images, and underground images. These various background images may be still images or moving images.

Here, first, the rhythmic winning notification effect A will be described, and then the rhythmic winning notification effect B and the rhythmic winning notification effect C will be described in order.

[Rhythmic winning notification production A]
First, the rhythmical winning notification effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmical winning notification effect A. The rhythmical winning notification effect A starts the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of decorative symbols all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) elapses, stops and displays all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning result. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, the rhythmical winning notification effect A rhythmically notifies the winning result by notifying the winning result after a lapse of a predetermined time (fixed time) for the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols. Can be executed.

The rhythmic hit notification effect A in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. The image "right-handed" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the image of "right-handed" becomes annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (playing time) can be mentioned.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging it so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. The visibility is not impaired. Note that the background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region is opaque and small. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern, the opaque small medium-decorative pattern, and the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 69 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold, are described. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 69 (B)) corresponding to the variable icon 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) is displayed at the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is designed to (disappear).

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only four stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 thereafter, and the holding icon 9B placed on the first holding display position 9Bd is digested, and then the first holding icon 9B is digested. 2 When the game ball enters the starting port 21, the rhythmic winning notification effect A is started, that is, in the game state of right-handed hitting, the state in which 3 to 4 hold icons are always stocked is maintained. It is assumed that there is. As a result, the period of the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) from the start to the stop (decorative symbol stop display) of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is always a predetermined time (constant time: 3). Seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the rhythmic winning notification effect A.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the character A icon with a white aura and the hit expectation of the character B icon with a white aura are the same as the white spherical icon. However, the expectation that the icon of character A and the icon of character B will be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich) Is set high.

Next, the second movable accessory 15 provided in the game board 2 will be briefly described. The second movable accessory 15 has a three-dimensional rectangular shape and has a character figure (here, "ORGA") on the same horizontal line. ") Is formed three-dimensionally. The second movable accessory 15 can be stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the upper side of the display screen 7a (first aspect). The second movable accessory 15 can move downward from the state of being stationary at the retracted position (home position) toward the center of the display screen 7a and can be stationary at the advanced position (deployment position). (Second aspect). In other words, the second movable accessory 15 in the second aspect is stationary so that the character figure is in the horizontal state, and the second movable accessory 15 that has been stationary at the retracted position (home position) remains as it is. It simply moves downward in the posture of, and becomes stationary at the advance position (deployment position). Further, the second movable accessory 15 can rotate clockwise or counterclockwise at the advance position (deployment position), and can be stopped at an arbitrary angle (third aspect). ..

The second movable accessory 15 has a retracted position (home position) and an advanced position (deployment position) by a vertical movement motor (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor) (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor) which is an electric drive source provided in the game board 2. It is possible to reciprocate with and from, and further, clockwise or counterclockwise by a rotation motor (for example, a stepping motor or DC motor) (not shown) which is an electric drive source provided in the second movable accessory 15. It is designed to be able to rotate around.

In the right-handed game state, the rhythmic winning notification effect A may be started. In the state where the rhythmic winning notification effect A is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3"). ) Are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time), and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. When the display mode varies, as shown in FIG. 69C, a predetermined time (constant time: 3) is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and a total of four hold icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1", that is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69 (D), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. In the fluctuating display mode, as shown in FIG. 69 (E), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a predetermined time (constant time: 3) By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and a total of four hold icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2", that is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 69 (F), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. When the display mode varies, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), a predetermined time (constant time: 3) is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Immediately before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the hit is notified. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time) with the same number "1" without forming a reach and developing into a super reach. To. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 69 (B) and (C) are not aligned with the same symbol and the deviation is notified, and FIGS. 69 (D) and (E). ), The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, and the timing at which the deviation is notified, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C according to FIGS. 69 (F) and (G) are notified. , The timing at which the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified matches.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 69 (H), the first premier background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as the background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as the background image THG1 (here, here). , The underground image of the video), and with this as an opportunity, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol "1". Is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and the image "right-handed" that was placed and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and further, the display screen 7a The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd arranged on the lower side are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the winning is confirmed.

After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the second movable accessory 15 subsequently changes to the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 69 (I). From the stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, the image display device 7 is advanced (moved) toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a, and is predetermined. Stop for a period of time (eg, 15 seconds).

After that, when the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 69 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same. It reappears with the number "1", which is a symbol, and is temporarily stopped. Furthermore, it is below the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and is an indicator from the center of the lower side of the display screen 7a. A specific image composed of the image TB and the character CRC is displayed. A part of the left side of the character CRC is arranged and displayed so as to cover a part of the right side of the indicator image TB, and further, the visibility of a specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC is enhanced. The background image THG4 for a specific image is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the first rainbow background image THG3 which is the first premier image THG3. When the indicator image TB and the character CRC are represented by a bright color, the background image THG4 for a specific image has a dark color (for example, in addition to gray or black, a color close to gray or black). It is mainly composed of (close colors), and may be a single color, a combination of a plurality of dark colors, or an effect image arranged so as not to impair the visibility of a specific image. You may. Further, in the background image THG4 for a specific image, when the indicator image TB and the character CRC are represented by a dark color, a bright color (for example, a color close to white in addition to white) is mainly used. It may be configured and may be a single color, may be a combination of a plurality of bright colors, or may be configured by arranging effect images so as not to impair the visibility of a specific image.

The indicator image TB constituting the specific image visually and intuitively displays the remaining time by shortening the length of the horizontal bar image. In the present embodiment, the maximum remaining time is 40 seconds. That is, the state in which the length of the bar image is displayed for the longest time (the state shown in FIG. 69 (J)) is the maximum remaining time (40 seconds), and the specific image (indicator image TB) is displayed. When the countdown is started (timekeeping starts), the length of the bar image becomes shorter from right to left. The color of the bar image of the indicator image has a bright color tone when the remaining time is the maximum (40 seconds), a dark color tone when the remaining time is the minimum (zero seconds), and the remaining time is the maximum (40 seconds). It is a display mode (display mode by gradation) in which the color tone changes gradually (or continuously) from to the minimum (zero seconds). When the color of the bar image of the indicator image is changed stepwise, the display mode is such that the color tone changes darkly every second (display mode by gradation). Further, when the color of the bar image of the indicator image is continuously changed, the color tone is dark and smoothly changed (display mode by gradation).

The character CRC that constitutes the specific image is the character B that may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC constituting the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are obtained until the remaining time is minimized (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image. Is maintained in the state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1"). Of course, the character CRC that constitutes the specific image is also displayed.

Based on the fact that the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image minimizes the remaining time (zero seconds) (in other words, the bar image of the indicator image TB constituting the specific image minimizes the remaining time (zero seconds). ), And after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) has passed for the purpose of distracting the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 69 (L), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation. Is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the background image THG4 for the specific image, and the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the numbers " The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed in "1", are also hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and the second movable accessory 15 is the image display device 7. From a stationary state at the upper retracted position (home position), the image display device 7 moves forward (moves) again toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. It rotates clockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

When a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advance position to the retracted position (home position) again, as shown in FIG. 69 (M), the first premier image (as a background image) The second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the promotion background image THG6, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), then stopped and confirmed, and the rhythmic winning notification effect A ends. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premier background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the hit is confirmed, like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, the promoted pattern (here, the number "7") can be emphasized.

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that becomes the above-mentioned "16RV scheduled jackpot") is started and ended, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, The fourth hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, when the movement of the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd is started to move toward the change display position 9Cd, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. ..

In FIG. 69 (L), as the background image, the dedicated promotion background image THG6 for transmitting the promotion confirmation is not switched from the background image THG4 for the specific image, and the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is the specific image again. The background image THG4 was switched and displayed, and the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image were hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol number "1". The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are also hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a again, and as shown in FIG. 69 (I), the second movable accessory 15 is an image display device. From the stationary state at the retracted position (home position) above 7, the image display device 7 advances (moves) again toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a. , It may stop for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed and the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, in FIG. 69 (M), the first premier image (as a background image) The first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), and then stopped and confirmed. Then, the rhythmical winning notification effect A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot") is started and ended, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, when the movement of the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd is started to move toward the change display position 9Cd, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. ..

In this way, in the rhythmical winning notification effect A, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. That is, the variation time according to FIGS. 69 (B) and 69 (C)), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 69 (D) and (E) are not aligned with the same symbol, and the deviation is notified. (That is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 69 (D) and (E)), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 69 (F) and (G) are aligned in the same symbol. The timing at which the hit is notified (that is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 69 (F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined time (constant time: 3) after the fluctuation production (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. The winning result is notified in seconds (3000 milliseconds). The timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 69 (F) and 69 (G) are aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified varies according to FIGS. 69 (B) and (C). Although the time is the same as the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 69 (D) and (E), and is a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the fluctuation production (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. Actually, the fluctuation time from FIG. 69 (F) to FIG. 69 (M) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds).

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect A, when a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses from the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol, the winning result is displayed without forming a reach. Since it is possible to be notified without fail, if the second special figure hold is digested one after another in the game state of right-handed, as a result of winning, a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) ), The loss will be continuously notified. However, when the loss is continuously notified in such a rhythmic manner, the player is suddenly notified of the hit while making him think that the fluctuation is also a deviation, so what is happening to the player? You can instantly lose track of what happened (that is, when something unexpected happens), and you can be surprised and pleased.

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect A, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are assumed to be the same symbol in addition to the number "1". When the number "2", the number "3", the number "4", the number "5", the number "6", the number "8" or the number "9" is stopped and confirmed, the above-mentioned "16R (substantially)" 13R) V-passing jackpot "or" 16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot ". As described above, the "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed. Further, as described above, the "16R (substantial 15R) V planned passage jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In the 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 69 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "7" as the same symbol, as described above. It will be a "16RV passing jackpot". As described above, the actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In the 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 69 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" as the same symbol, then, FIG. 69 As shown in (I), when the second movable accessory 15 is operated, the image display device is moved from a state in which the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7. By advancing (moving) toward the center position (advancing position) of the display screen 7a on the front side (front) of the display screen 7a of 7 and stopping, the player can expect a "16RV passing jackpot". Can be given to. At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16RV passing jackpot", the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbols as shown in FIG. 69 (M). As shown in FIG. 69 (L), the image is displayed from the state where the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 before the stop display is performed by the number "7". It is the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the device 7, and has advanced (moved) again toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a and rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees). By stopping in the state, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the "16RV passing jackpot" will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 69 (M), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol with the number "7", and then stopped and confirmed. , Tells the player "Big hit scheduled to pass 16RV".

That is, in the rhythmical winning notification effect A, the second movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 as the first stage, and is in front of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (front). ), And the second movable accessory 15 advances (moves) toward the center position (advancement position) of the display screen 7a and stops, and the second movable accessory 15 is the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7 as the second stage. From the stationary state at, the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 is advanced (moved) again toward the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a and counterclockwise at a predetermined angle (for example, for example). Since the second movable accessory 15 can operate in the first stage and the second stage by stopping in a state of being rotated by about 30 degrees), the player is in the first place. 2 There is a high interest in the operation of the movable accessory 15, and due to the operation of the second movable accessory 15, the "16R (substantial 13R) V planned jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot" to "16RV scheduled to pass" It is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that it will be a "big hit".

In the rhythmic winning notification effect A of the present embodiment, a reach is formed when a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses from the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. Since the winning result is always notified, the fluctuation time from FIG. 69 (F) to FIG. 69 (M) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), but FIGS. 69 (F) and (G). The timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified is the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 69 (B) and (C) and the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 69 (D), (D), ( It is the same as the fluctuation time according to E), and it is not possible to fluctuate a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the fluctuation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. Therefore, the remaining time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) obtained by subtracting this time can be freely allocated to FIGS. 69 (H) to 69 (M) without being fixed to the above-mentioned time. It is possible to increase the variation of the production after the hit is notified. Specifically, while the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 is producing, the time for performing each of FIGS. 69 (H) to 69 (M) is allocated.

Further, in the rhythmic winning notification effect A in the present embodiment, in FIG. 69 (L), as the background image, the dedicated promotion background image THG6 for transmitting the promotion confirmation is not switched from the background image THG4 for the specific image, and the first premier image is again. (1st rainbow background image THG3) is switched from the background image THG4 for the specific image and displayed, and the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a and have the same symbol. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "1", are also hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a again, and further, as shown in FIG. 69 (I). , The second movable accessory 15 is at the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 from the state where it is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and is at the center position (advancement) of the display screen 7a. Instead of advancing (moving) toward the position), the image display device 7 may be kept stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, and a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) may elapse.

In this case, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, and in FIG. 69 (M), the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, After the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), the stop is displayed and the confirmation is displayed, and the rhythmic winning notification effect A ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot") is started and ended, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, when the movement of the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd is started to move toward the change display position 9Cd, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. ..

Further, in the rhythmic winning notification effect A, before the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, after the winning game state occurs. It has become possible to execute an effect (a specific image composed of an indicator image TB and a character CRC in FIGS. 69 (J) and 69 (K)) for displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state. There is. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are not fixedly displayed in the winning mode, the specific game is performed after the winning game state occurs. Since a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV scheduled jackpot") is displayed, a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) are tentatively displayed. As a result of the definite display in the winning mode, when a specific game state does not occur (a jackpot game that becomes a "16RV passing jackpot" occurs), even if a plurality of decorative symbols are not definitely displayed in the winning mode. By displaying a specific image (that is, a state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a hit mode), a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that becomes a "16RV scheduled jackpot") is generated. It is possible to perform a promotion effect of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the effect (FIGS. 69 (J), (K)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect A, the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3 suggesting a hit in FIGS. 69 (H) and (I). It is designed to be performed after the effect of displaying. According to this configuration, the production of FIGS. 69 (H) and (I) first suggests that the player is a hit and gives the player a sense of security, and further, the production of FIGS. 69 (H) and (I). The promotion effect by the effects shown in FIGS. 69 (J) and 69 (K) can fuel the expectation for the occurrence of a specific game state (the occurrence of a big hit game that is a "16 RV scheduled big hit").

Further, in the effect (FIGS. 69 (J), (K)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect A, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning manner. Even in this state, it is possible to continue displaying a specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC. According to this configuration, since the display of the specific image is continued even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning manner, a plurality of them are displayed. It is possible to give the player the feeling that the display mode of the decorative symbol of the above may change to another display mode, and it is possible to fuel the expectation of the player for the change of the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols. ..

Further, after the effect (FIGS. 69 (J), (K)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect A, the indicator image TB and the character CRC constituting the specific image are hidden from the display screen 7a in FIG. 69 (L). (Disappeared), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol number "1", are also hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a, and further, the second 2 From the state where the movable accessory 15 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) above the image display device 7, it is the front (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the center position (advanced position) of the display screen 7a. It advances (moves) again toward, rotates counterclockwise by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees), stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). When the second movable accessory 15 returns from the advanced position to the retracted position (home position) again, the number "7" in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are specific symbols. It is possible to notify the occurrence of a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is "16RV scheduled jackpot"). According to this configuration, when the specific image and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) displayed in the hit mode disappear, the movable body suddenly evacuates. Since it moves from the position to the advance position and appears, it can be produced with an impact by the movable body, and when the movable body returns to the evacuation position again, the occurrence of a specific gaming state is notified. Since all of the multiple decorative symbols are fixedly displayed on the number "7", which is the symbol, the promotion effect is successful due to the appearance of the movable body (the occurrence of the specific game state is confirmed ("16RV passing jackpot"). It is possible to emphasize and convey to the player the occurrence of the jackpot game)).

Further, in the rhythmic winning notification effect A, in FIGS. 69 (J) and 69 (K), the specific images composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural). This is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the decorative pattern) is confirmed and displayed in a winning manner. According to this configuration, since the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until a plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, in other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time until the promotion effect (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), the time when the promotion effect starts (approximate guideline for the promotion effect to start) is suitable. Can be displayed on.

[Rhythmic winning notification production B]
Next, the rhythmical winning notification effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 70. FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmical winning notification effect B. The rhythmical winning notification effect B starts the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of decorative symbols all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) elapses, stops and displays all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning result. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, the rhythmical winning notification effect B rhythmically notifies the winning result by notifying the winning result after a lapse of a predetermined time (fixed time) for the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols. Can be executed.

The rhythmic hit notification effect B in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed game state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. The image "right-handed" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the image of "right-handed" becomes annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (playing time) can be mentioned.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging it so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. The visibility is not impaired. Note that the background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region is opaque and small. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern, the opaque small medium-decorative pattern, and the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, to briefly explain the variable icon and the hold icon, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold, are described. The variation icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 70B) corresponding to is the variation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is designed to (disappear).

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only four stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 thereafter, and the holding icon 9B placed on the first holding display position 9Bd is digested, and then the first holding icon 9B is digested. 2 When the game ball enters the starting port 21, the rhythmic winning notification effect B is started, that is, in the game state of right-handed hitting, the state in which 3 to 4 hold icons are always stocked is maintained. It is assumed that there is. As a result, the period of the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) from the start to the stop (decorative symbol stop display) of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is always a predetermined time (constant time: 3). Seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the rhythmic winning notification effect B.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the character A icon with a white aura and the hit expectation of the character B icon with a white aura are the same as the white spherical icon. However, the expectation that the icon of character A and the icon of character B will be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich) Is set high.

Next, the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 will be briefly described. In the first movable accessory 14, a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front (front) of the image display device 7. It is configured. The first movable accessory 14 can normally be stationary at the retracted position (home position, see FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first aspect). The first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and stands still at an arbitrary advance position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a (second). (Aspect), or the evacuation position (home position) can be moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and then stopped (the third aspect). Further, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position (home position) and stands still at an arbitrary advance position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a (the first movable accessory 14). (Fourth aspect), or it is possible to move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the evacuation position (home position) and then stand still (fifth aspect). The first movable accessory 14 may be operated to be the third aspect after being operated to be the second aspect, or may be directly operated to the third aspect without going through the second aspect. May be done. Further, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to be the fourth aspect after being operated to be the third aspect, or may be directly operated to the fifth aspect without going through the fourth aspect. May be done. Further, when the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a (that is, the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), another decorative member provided on the game board 2 is provided. The first movable accessory 14 may be partially covered by the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see a part of the first movable accessory 14, or the first movable accessory 14 may be provided with another decorative member provided in the game board 2. Almost the entire object 14 may be covered so that almost the entire first movable accessory 14 is difficult to see, or the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (home position). As described above, almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be made easy to see.

The first movable accessory 14 has a retracted position (home position) and a right side (home position) of the display screen 7a (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor), which is an electric drive source provided in the game board 2 and is not shown. It is possible to move back and forth with (the right end).

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, so that a part of the image display device 7 can be covered from above to below at the advanced position (deployment position). It has become.

In the right-handed game state, the rhythmic winning notification effect B may be started. In the state where the rhythmic winning notification effect B is started, as shown in FIG. 70 (A), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3"). ) Are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time), and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. When the display mode varies, as shown in FIG. 70 (C), a predetermined time (constant time: 3) is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and a total of four hold icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1", that is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70 (D), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. In the fluctuating display mode, as shown in FIG. 70 (E), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a predetermined time (constant time: 3) By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and a total of four hold icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2", that is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70 (F), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. When the display mode varies, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), a predetermined time (constant time: 3) is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the hit is notified. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time) with the same number "1" without forming a reach and developing into a super reach. To. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 70 (B) and 70 (C) are not aligned with the same symbol and the deviation is notified, and FIGS. 70 (D) and (E). ), The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, and the timing at which the deviation is notified, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C according to FIGS. 70 (F) and (G) are notified. , The timing at which the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified matches.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 70 (H), the first premier background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as the background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as the background image THG1 (here, here). , The underground image of the video), and with this as an opportunity, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol "1". Is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and the image "right-handed" that was placed and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and further, the display screen 7a The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd arranged on the lower side are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the winning is confirmed.

After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 subsequently changes to the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 70 (I). From the stationary state at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a is moved toward the right side (right end) over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

After that, when the first movable accessory 14 is completely moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 70 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbols. It reappears with the number "1" and is displayed as a temporary stop, and in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, a specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin is left-decorated. A background image THG4 for a specific image, which is arranged and displayed on the front side of the symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R and can enhance the visibility of the specific image, is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a as the first premiere. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the image THG3, is switched and displayed. The background image THG4 for a specific image is a dark color (for example, gray or black) when the specific image formed by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin is expressed in a bright color. In addition to the above, it is mainly composed of a color close to gray or a color close to black), and it may be a single color, a combination of multiple dark colors, or an effect so as not to impair the visibility of a specific image. The image may be arranged and configured. Further, the background image THG4 for a specific image is a bright color (for example, white) when the specific image formed by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front surface) of the coin is expressed in a dark color. In addition to the above, it is mainly composed of a color close to white), and may be a single color, a combination of a plurality of bright colors, or an effect image arranged so as not to impair the visibility of a specific image. It may be configured.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image starts from the lower right corner of the display screen 7a and is displayed along the lower side of the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 70 (K). When it rolls counterclockwise toward the lower left corner of 7a and reaches the left side, this time it rolls counterclockwise toward the upper left corner of the display screen 7a and reaches the upper side, this time the upper side. When it rolls counterclockwise toward the upper right corner of the display screen 7a and reaches the right side, it rolls counterclockwise toward the start point, which is the lower right corner of the display screen 7a, along the right side. When it reaches the bottom, it stops rolling. That is, the character CRC attached to the surface (front surface) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls around the display screen 7a and goes around.

This embodiment is defined as the time (hereinafter, referred to as "rolling time") in which the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and goes around. Then, it is 40 seconds. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image starts rolling clockwise around the display screen 7a, the countdown will start (timekeeping will start). , The position where the coin is displayed indicates the remaining time.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image is the character B that may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (L), the time (rolling time) in which the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and goes around. ) Is the minimum remaining (zero seconds), in other words, until the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and completes one round. , The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are maintained in a state of being temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1").

Based on the fact that the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coins that make up the specific image rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and finishes making a round (in other words, the coins that make up the specific image). The character CRC attached to the front surface (front) rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a to complete a round, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) is used for the purpose of distracting the display of the final promotion result. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (M), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the background image THG4 for the specific image, and the coins constituting the specific image are displayed. The character CRC attached to the front surface (front) disappears from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which have been temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and further, FIG. 70 (I). ), The first movable accessory 14 that has already been stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 takes a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) to retract the left side of the image display device 7. Move toward the position (home position).

When the first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in FIG. 70 (N). A second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly promoted to the display screen 7a as a background image. It is displayed by switching from THG6, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), then stopped and confirmed, and rhythmically. The winning notification effect B ends. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premier background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the hit is confirmed, like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, the promoted pattern (here, the number "7") can be emphasized.

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that becomes the above-mentioned "16RV scheduled jackpot") is started and ended, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, The fourth hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, when the movement of the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd is started to move toward the change display position 9Cd, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. ..

In FIG. 70 (M), as the background image, the dedicated promotion background image THG6 for transmitting the promotion confirmation is not switched from the background image THG4 for the specific image, and the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is the specific image again. The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that is displayed by switching from the background image THG4 for the purpose disappears from the display screen 7a, and further, in FIG. 70 (I), the display screen of the image display device 7 has already been displayed. The first movable accessory 14 that is stationary on the right side (right end) of 7a does not move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 remains as it is. It may be in a stationary state on the right side (right end) of the image display device 7 and may not move at all toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, and in FIG. 70 (N), the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, After the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), the stop is displayed and the confirmation is displayed, and the rhythmic winning notification effect B ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot") is started and ended, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, when the movement of the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd is started to move toward the change display position 9Cd, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. ..

In this way, in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 70 (B) and (C) are not aligned with the same symbol and the deviation is notified ( That is, the variation time according to FIGS. 70 (B) and 70 (C)), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 70 (D) and (E) are not aligned with the same symbol, and the deviation is notified. (That is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 70 (D) and (E)), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 70 (F) and (G) are aligned in the same symbol. The timing at which the hit is notified (that is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 70 (F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined time (constant time: 3) has been obtained since the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol was started. The winning result is notified in seconds (3000 milliseconds). The timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 70 (F) and 70 (G) are aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified varies according to FIGS. 70 (B) and 70 (C). Although the time is the same as the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 70 (D) and 70 (E), and is a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the fluctuation production (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. Actually, the fluctuation time from FIG. 70 (F) to FIG. 70 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds).

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses from the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol, the winning result is displayed without forming a reach. Since it is possible to be notified without fail, if the second special figure hold is digested one after another in the game state of right-handed, as a result of winning, a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) ), The loss will be continuously notified. However, when the loss is continuously notified in such a rhythmic manner, the player is suddenly notified of the hit while making him think that the fluctuation is also a deviation, so what is happening to the player? You can instantly lose track of what happened (that is, when something unexpected happens), and you can be surprised and pleased.

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are assumed to be the same symbol in addition to the number "1". When the number "2", the number "3", the number "4", the number "5", the number "6", the number "8" or the number "9" is stopped and confirmed, the above-mentioned "16R (substantially)" 13R) V-passing jackpot "or" 16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot ". As described above, the "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed. Further, as described above, the "16R (substantial 15R) V planned passage jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In the 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 70 (N), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "7" as the same symbol, as described above. It will be a "16RV passing jackpot". As described above, the actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In the 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 70 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" as the same symbol, then FIG. 70 As shown in (I), when the first movable accessory 14 is operated, the display screen 7a is moved from a state in which the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. By moving toward the right side (right end) of the player, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the "16RV passing jackpot" will be obtained. At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16RV passing jackpot", the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbols as shown in FIG. 70 (N). As shown in FIG. 70 (M), the first movable accessory 14 is moved from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the left side of the image display device 7 before the stop display is performed by the number “7”. By moving toward the evacuation position (home position) of the player, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the "16RV passing jackpot" will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 70 (N), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol with the number "7", and then stopped and confirmed. , Tells the player "Big hit scheduled to pass 16RV".

That is, in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the stationary state at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a as the first step. Then, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as the second step. Since the first movable accessory 14 can operate in the first stage and the second stage, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 in the first place. 1 The operation of the movable accessory 14 gives the player a feeling of expectation that the "16R (substantial 13R) V planned jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot" will change to "16RV scheduled jackpot". be able to.

In the rhythmic winning notification effect B of the present embodiment, a reach is formed when a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses from the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. Since the winning result is always notified, the fluctuation time from FIG. 70 (F) to FIG. 70 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), but FIGS. 70 (F) and 70 (G). The timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified is the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 70 (B) and (C) and the fluctuation time according to FIGS. It is the same as the fluctuation time according to E), and it is not possible to fluctuate a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the fluctuation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. Therefore, the remaining time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) obtained by subtracting this time can be freely allocated to FIGS. 70 (H) to 70 (N) without being fixed to the above-mentioned time. It is possible to increase the variation of the production after the hit is notified. Specifically, while the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 is producing, the time for performing FIGS. 70 (H) to 70 (N) is allocated.

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, before the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, after the winning game state occurs. In the first effect (FIGS. 70 (J) to (L)) of displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin to execute the specific image. You can do it. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are not fixedly displayed in the winning mode, the specific game is performed after the winning game state occurs. Since a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV scheduled jackpot") is displayed, a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) are tentatively displayed. As a result of the definite display in the winning mode, when a specific game state does not occur (a jackpot game that becomes a "16RV passing jackpot" occurs), even if a plurality of decorative symbols are not definitely displayed in the winning mode. By displaying a specific image (that is, a state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a hit mode), a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that becomes a "16RV scheduled jackpot") is generated. It is possible to perform a promotion effect of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the effect (FIGS. 70 (J) to (L)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3 suggesting a hit in FIGS. 70 (H) and 70 (I). It is designed to be performed after the effect of displaying. According to this configuration, first, the production of FIGS. 70 (H) and 70 (I) suggests that the player is a hit, and the player is given a sense of security, and further, the production of FIGS. 70 (H) and 70 (I) is performed. By the promotion effect by the effect of FIGS. 70 (J) to 70 (L), the expectation for the occurrence of the specific game state (the occurrence of the big hit game that becomes the "16 RV passing big hit") can be fueled.

Further, in the effect (FIGS. 70 (J) to (L)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning manner. Even in this state, it is possible to continue displaying a specific image formed by attaching a character CRC to the surface (front surface) of the coin. According to this configuration, since the display of the specific image is continued even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning manner, a plurality of them are displayed. It is possible to give the player the feeling that the display mode of the decorative symbol of the above may change to another display mode, and it is possible to fuel the expectation of the player for the change of the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols. ..

Further, after the effect (FIGS. 70 (J) to (L)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect B, in FIG. 70 (M), the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image is displayed on the display screen. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which disappeared from 7a and were temporarily stopped, also disappeared from the display screen 7a, and further, in FIG. 70 (I), the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 has already been displayed. The first movable accessory 14 which is stationary at the (right end) moves toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), and takes a predetermined time. When the first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over (for example, 15 seconds), a specific gaming state occurs (“16RV passing schedule”). Since all of the multiple decorative symbols are fixedly displayed on the number "7", which is a specific symbol that conveys the occurrence of the jackpot game that becomes a "big hit", the promotion effect due to the appearance of the movable body is successful (specific). It is possible to emphasize and convey to the player the confirmation of the occurrence of the game state (the confirmation of the occurrence of the jackpot game that is the "16RV scheduled jackpot").

Further, in the rhythmic winning notification effect B, the specific images configured by attaching the character CRC to the surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. 70 (J) to 70 (L) are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right. It is an image which conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the decorative symbol 8R (a plurality of decorative symbols) is confirmed and displayed in a winning manner. According to this configuration, since the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until a plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, in other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time until the promotion effect (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), the time when the promotion effect starts (approximate guideline for the promotion effect to start) is suitable. Can be displayed on.

[Rhythmic winning notification production C]
Next, the rhythmical winning notification effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram for explaining the rhythmical winning notification effect C. The rhythmical winning notification effect C starts the variation effect (variation display) of a plurality of decorative symbols all at once (simultaneously), and when a predetermined time (certain time) elapses, stops and displays all at once (simultaneously) to notify the winning result. It is possible to execute a variable display effect of doing. In other words, the rhythmical winning notification effect C rhythmically notifies the winning result by notifying the winning result after a lapse of a predetermined time (fixed time) for the variable effect (variable display) of a plurality of decorative symbols. Can be executed.

The rhythmic hit notification effect C in the present embodiment is performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the second starting port 21, and is performed in the so-called right-handed game state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. The image "right-handed" is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a special background image, which will be described later, is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the image of "right-handed" becomes annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (playing time) can be mentioned.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging it so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. The visibility is not impaired. Note that the background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region is opaque and small. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern, the opaque small medium-decorative pattern, and the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 71 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold, are described. The variable icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 71 (B)) corresponding to is the variable display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are hidden from the display screen 7a when a special background image described later is displayed on the display screen 7a. It is designed to (disappear).

Here, a white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only four stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game ball does not enter the first starting port 20 thereafter, and the holding icon 9B placed on the first holding display position 9Bd is digested, and then the first holding icon 9B is digested. 2 When the game ball enters the starting port 21, the rhythmic winning notification effect C is started, that is, in the game state of right-handed hitting, the state in which 3 to 4 hold icons are always stocked is maintained. It is assumed that there is. As a result, the period of the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) from the start to the stop (decorative symbol stop display) of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is always a predetermined time (constant time: 3). Seconds (3000 milliseconds)).

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the rhythmic winning notification effect C.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons: yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, smiling sphere icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, the yellow (gold) star The shape icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. Expectations are high, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

Other icons include a character A icon and a character B icon. The icon of character A and the icon of character B each have a white aura from the entire icon. The hit expectation of the character A icon with a white aura and the hit expectation of the character B icon with a white aura are the same as the white spherical icon. However, the expectation that the icon of character A and the icon of character B will be hit in the order of white aura → green aura → red aura → gold (yellow) aura → seven colors (rainbow) aura (big hit rich) Is set high.

Next, the first movable accessory 14 provided in the game board 2 will be briefly described. In the first movable accessory 14, a vertically long rod-shaped member can move in the left-right direction in front (front) of the image display device 7. It is configured. The first movable accessory 14 can normally be stationary at the retracted position (home position, see FIG. 1) on the left side of the image display device 7 (first aspect). The first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position (home position) toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and stands still at an arbitrary advance position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a (second). (Aspect), or the evacuation position (home position) can be moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a and then stopped (the third aspect). Further, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a toward the evacuation position (home position) and stands still at an arbitrary advance position (deployment position) in front of the display screen 7a (the first movable accessory 14). (Fourth aspect), or it is possible to move from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a to the evacuation position (home position) and then stand still (fifth aspect). The first movable accessory 14 may be operated to be the third aspect after being operated to be the second aspect, or may be directly operated to the third aspect without going through the second aspect. May be done. Further, the first movable accessory 14 may be operated to be the fourth aspect after being operated to be the third aspect, or may be directly operated to the fifth aspect without going through the fourth aspect. May be done. Further, when the first movable accessory 14 is moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a (that is, the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7), another decorative member provided on the game board 2 is provided. The first movable accessory 14 may be partially covered by the first movable accessory 14, making it difficult to see a part of the first movable accessory 14, or the first movable accessory 14 may be provided with another decorative member provided in the game board 2. Almost the entire object 14 may be covered so that almost the entire first movable accessory 14 is difficult to see, or the first movable accessory 14 is retracted at the retracted position (home position). As described above, almost the entire first movable accessory 14 may be made easy to see.

The first movable accessory 14 has a retracted position (home position) and a right side (home position) of the display screen 7a (for example, a stepping motor or a DC motor), which is an electric drive source provided in the game board 2 and is not shown. It is possible to move back and forth with (the right end).

The first movable accessory 14 is formed to have substantially the same length as the vertical direction of the image display device 7, so that a part of the image display device 7 can be covered from above to below at the advanced position (deployment position). It has become.

In the right-handed game state, the rhythmic winning notification effect C may be started. In the state where the rhythmic winning notification effect C is started, as shown in FIG. 71 (A), the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3"). ) Are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time), and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. When the display mode varies, as shown in FIG. 71 (C), a predetermined time (constant time: 3) is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and a total of four hold icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "1", that is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. In the fluctuating display mode, as shown in FIG. 71 (E), in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, a predetermined time (constant time: 3) By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Immediately before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, when the game ball enters the second starting port 21, a white spherical hold icon 9B is placed at the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and a total of four hold icons are stocked.

Subsequently, when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image, and the left decorative pattern is displayed. 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "3", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed with the number "2", that is, the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol are stopped and displayed. 8C and right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time). At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed as the background image. In the state of being displayed on the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71 (F), the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are simultaneously displayed. The display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B placed on the hold display position 9Bd is placed on the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed on the fourth hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the third hold display position 9Bd and is placed on the third hold display position 9Bd. The state is set, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the fourth hold display position. As a result, the three hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. When the display mode varies, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), a predetermined time (constant time: 3) is displayed in a state where the background image THG1 (here, the underground image of the moving image) is displayed on the display screen 7a as the background image. By the time seconds (3000 milliseconds) have passed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which fluctuate at high speed, decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again. Then, just before the predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". Then, the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1", and the hit is notified. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time) with the same number "1" without forming a reach and developing into a super reach. To. In other words, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 71 (B) and (C) are not aligned with the same symbol and the deviation is notified, and FIGS. 71 (D) and (E). ), The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol, and the timing at which the deviation is notified, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C according to FIGS. 71 (F) and (G) are notified. , The timing at which the right decorative symbol 8R is aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified matches.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 71 (H), the first premier background image THG3 (so-called "first rainbow background image THG3") having seven colors as the background image suddenly appears on the display screen 7a as the background image THG1 (here, here). , The underground image of the video), and with this as an opportunity, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol "1". Is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and the image "right-handed" that was placed and displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a is hidden (disappears) from the display screen 7a, and further, the display screen 7a The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd arranged on the lower side are hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. The first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the winning is confirmed.

After a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the first rainbow background image THG3 was displayed on the display screen 7a, the first movable accessory 14 subsequently changes to the image display device 7 as shown in FIG. 71 (I). From the stationary state at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the display screen 7a, the display screen 7a is moved toward the right side (right end) over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

After that, when the first movable accessory 14 is completely moved to the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a, as shown in FIG. 71 (J), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are the same symbols. It reappears with the number "1" and is temporarily stopped, and a character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin in the lower right corner of the display screen 7a and covers a part of the character CRC. A specific image composed by arranging the countdown image NJ is arranged and displayed on the front side of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the visibility of the specific image can be improved. The background image THG4 for a specific image that can be created is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the first rainbow background image THG3 which is the first premier image THG3. The background image THG4 for a specific image is composed of a specific image in which a character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of a coin and a countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC, and the specific image is composed of bright colors. When it is expressed, it is mainly composed of dark colors (for example, in addition to gray and black, colors close to gray and colors close to black), and may be a single color or a combination of a plurality of dark colors. The effect image may be arranged so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image. Further, in the background image THG4 for a specific image, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC, and the specific image is composed of a dark color. When it is expressed as being expressed, it is mainly composed of a bright color (for example, a color close to white in addition to white), and may be a single color or a combination of a plurality of bright colors. , The effect image may be arranged and configured so as not to impair the visibility of the specific image.

A specific image composed of a character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a countdown image NJ arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC specifically covers the entire surface (front) of the coin. A character CRC is attached, and a countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC on the lower side of the surface (front) of the coin.

Here, for the coins that make up the specific image, the vertical line that passes through the top and bottom points of the coin (hereinafter, simply referred to as the "vertical line of the coin that makes up the specific image") and the leftmost point of the coin. The point where the horizontal line passing through the rightmost point (hereinafter, simply referred to as "the horizontal line of the coin constituting the specific image") and the intersection intersects is defined as the center point (hereinafter, simply referred to as "center point").

As for the countdown image NJ, a numerical image that is counted down (timed) is displayed in the circular shape, and a vertical line passing through the highest point and the lowest point of the circular shape (hereinafter, simply "specific image" is displayed. The vertical line of the countdown image NJ that composes it ") and the vertical line of the coin that composes the specific image match. Regarding the countdown image NJ, a horizontal line passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circular shape (hereinafter, simply referred to as "the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image") and the coins constituting the specific image. The horizon does not match and is parallel, and the horizon passing through the leftmost and rightmost points of the circle is located below the horizon of the coins that make up the specific image.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that constitutes the specific image is designed to rotate counterclockwise or clockwise around the center point, and such rotation is repeated. The display mode is such that the character CRC also swings in conjunction with the swing of the coin to be performed. On the other hand, although the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC is arranged on the surface (front) of the coin, unlike the character CRC, it is linked to the swing of the coin. When the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image moves to the left of the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image. When the coin moves in parallel and rotates clockwise around the center point, the vertical line of the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image moves in parallel to the right of the vertical line of the coin constituting the specific image.

Even if the vertical line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image moves in parallel to the left or right of the vertical line of the coin that constitutes the specific image, the horizontal line of the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image and the specific image are composed. The distance dimension between the horizontal line of the coin and the image is not changed. That is, the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image simply moves horizontally to the left when the coin rotates counterclockwise around the center point, and simply moves to the right when the coin rotates clockwise around the center point. It is designed to move horizontally to.

The number image displayed in the circular shape in the countdown image NJ is a number image that is counted down (timed), and is 40 seconds in the present embodiment. In other words, when the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image and the countdown image NJ are displayed on the display screen 7a, the countdown will be started (timekeeping will be started). , Countdown image The remaining time is represented by a numerical image that is counted down (timed) by the NJ.

The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image is the character B that may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image.

After that, as shown in FIGS. 71 (K) and 71 (L), the left decorative symbol 8L and the middle decorative symbol 8C are used until the number image counted down (timed) by the countdown image NJ constituting the specific image reaches zero seconds. , The state in which the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1") is maintained.

A number image that is counted down (timed) by the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image Based on the fact that the number image that is counted down (timed) is zero seconds (in other words, the number image that is counted down (timed) by the countdown image NJ that constitutes the specific image). Is zero seconds, and after a predetermined waiting period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed for the purpose of distracting the display of the final promotion result), as shown in FIG. 71 (M), a dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation. Suddenly switches from the background image THG4 for the specific image and is displayed on the display screen 7a, and the character CRC and the countdown image NJ attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image disappear from the display screen 7a and temporarily stop. The displayed left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol 8R also disappeared from the display screen 7a, and in FIG. 71 (I), they were already stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The first movable accessory 14 in the state moves toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

When the first movable accessory 14 returns to the retracted position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), as shown in FIG. 71 (N). A second premier background image THG7 (so-called "second rainbow background image THG7") having seven colors different from the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is suddenly promoted to the display screen 7a as a background image. It is displayed by switching from THG6, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped with the same symbol (here, the number "7"), then stopped and confirmed, and rhythmically. The winning notification effect C ends. The second rainbow background image THG7, which is the second premier background image THG7, is a special background image that notifies (suggests) the player that the hit is confirmed, like the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3. However, by using an image different from the first rainbow background image THG3, the promoted pattern (here, the number "7") can be emphasized.

After that, when the jackpot game (the jackpot game that becomes the above-mentioned "16RV scheduled jackpot") is started and ended, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, The fourth hold display position 9Bd and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, when the movement of the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd is started to move toward the change display position 9Cd, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. ..

In FIG. 71 (M), as the background image, the dedicated promotion background image THG6 for transmitting the promotion confirmation is not switched from the background image THG4 for the specific image, and the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is the specific image again. The character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin that is displayed by switching from the background image THG4 for the purpose disappears from the display screen 7a, and further, in FIG. 71 (I), the display screen of the image display device 7 has already been displayed. The first movable accessory 14 that is stationary on the right side (right end) of 7a does not move toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7, and the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 remains as it is. It may be in a stationary state on the right side (right end) of the image display device 7 and may not move at all toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds).

In this case, a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed, and in FIG. 71 (N), the first premier image (first rainbow background image THG3) is displayed as the background image, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, After the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol (here, the number "1"), the stop is displayed and the confirmation is displayed, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C ends.

After that, when the jackpot game (the above-mentioned jackpot game that becomes "16R (substantial 13R) V scheduled jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot") is started and ended, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold The display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. Subsequently, when the movement of the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd is started to move toward the change display position 9Cd, the change effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. ..

In this way, in the rhythmic winning notification effect C, the timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 71 (B) and (C) are not aligned in the same symbol and the deviation is notified ( That is, the variation time according to FIGS. 71 (B) and 71 (C)), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 71 (D) and (E) are not aligned with the same symbol, and the deviation is notified. (That is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 71 (D) and (E)), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 71 (F) and (G) are aligned in the same symbol. The timing at which the hit is notified (that is, the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 71 (F) and (G)) matches, and a predetermined time (constant time: 3) has been obtained since the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol was started. The winning result is notified in seconds (3000 milliseconds). The timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R according to FIGS. 71 (F) and 71 (G) are aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified varies according to FIGS. 71 (B) and (C). Although the time is the same as the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 71 (D) and 71 (E), and is a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the fluctuation production (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. Actually, the fluctuation time from FIG. 71 (F) to FIG. 71 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds).

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect C, when a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses from the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol, the winning result is obtained without forming a reach. Since it is possible to be notified without fail, if the second special figure hold is digested one after another in the game state of right-handed, as a result of winning, a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) ), The loss will be continuously notified. However, when the loss is continuously notified in such a rhythmic manner, the player is suddenly notified of the hit while making him think that the fluctuation is also a deviation, so what is happening to the player? You can instantly lose track of what happened (that is, when something unexpected happens), and you can be surprised and pleased.

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect C, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are assumed to be the same symbol in addition to the number "1". When the number "2", the number "3", the number "4", the number "5", the number "6", the number "8" or the number "9" is stopped and confirmed, the above-mentioned "16R (substantially)" 13R) V-passing jackpot "or" 16R (substantially 15R) V-passing jackpot ". As described above, the "16R (substantial 13R) V-passing jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 13R. That is, from 1R to 13R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened only 0.1 seconds per 1R, and 14R. Even in 16R, the second big winning opening 35 is opened for only 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 22). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 13R) V passing jackpot", from 14R to 16R, the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short, and the round is such that the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (actual 13R) V passing jackpot" is a real 13R jackpot. In 2R and 6R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 33) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed. Further, as described above, the "16R (substantial 15R) V planned passage jackpot" has a total number of rounds of 16R, but the actual total number of rounds is 15R. That is, from 1R to 13R and 15R, the first prize opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, and in 16R, the second prize opening 35 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R, but in 14R. The second big winning opening 35 is opened only for 0.1 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 23). Therefore, in this "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot", 14R is a round in which the opening time of the big winning opening is extremely short and the prize ball cannot be expected. That is, the "16R (substantially 15R) V passing jackpot" is a real 15R jackpot. In the 8R and 10R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 32) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 71 (N), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed with the number "7" as the same symbol, as described above. It will be a "16RV passing jackpot". As described above, the actual total number of rounds of the "16RV passing jackpot" is 16R. From 1R to 13R and 15R, the first big winning opening 30 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R. 14R and 16R open the second prize opening 35 for a maximum of 29.5 seconds per 1R (FIG. 13: opening pattern 21). In the 10R and 12R, the V opening / closing member 71 is long-opened (FIG. 14: opening pattern 31) so that the V region 39 in the first large winning opening 30 can be easily passed.

In this way, as shown in FIG. 71 (G), when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1" as the same symbol, then, FIG. 71 As shown in (I), when the first movable accessory 14 is operated, the display screen 7a is moved from a state in which the first movable accessory 14 is stationary at the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. By moving toward the right side (right end) of the player, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the "16RV passing jackpot" will be obtained. At this point, even if the player is not informed of the "16RV passing jackpot", as shown in FIG. 71 (N), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are regarded as the same symbol. As shown in FIG. 71 (M), the first movable accessory 14 is moved from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the left side of the image display device 7 before the stop display is performed by the number “7”. By moving toward the evacuation position (home position) of the player, it is possible to give the player a feeling of expectation that the "16RV passing jackpot" will be obtained. After that, as shown in FIG. 71 (N), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed as the same symbol with the number "7", and then stopped and confirmed. , Tells the player "Big hit scheduled to pass 16RV".

That is, in the rhythmical winning notification effect C, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the stationary state at the left retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7 toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a as the first step. Then, the first movable accessory 14 moves from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 as the second step. Since the first movable accessory 14 can operate in the first stage and the second stage, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 in the first place. 1 The operation of the movable accessory 14 gives the player a feeling of expectation that "16R (substantial 13R) V planned jackpot" or "16R (substantially 15R) V scheduled jackpot" will change to "16RV scheduled jackpot". be able to.

In the rhythmic winning notification effect C of the present embodiment, a reach is formed when a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses from the start of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. Since the winning result is always notified, the fluctuation time from FIG. 71 (F) to FIG. 71 (N) is 80 seconds (80,000 milliseconds), but FIGS. 71 (F) and (G). The timing at which the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are aligned with the same symbol and the hit is notified is the fluctuation time according to FIGS. 71 (B) and (C) and the fluctuation time according to FIGS. It is the same as the fluctuation time according to E), and it is not possible to fluctuate a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) after the fluctuation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started. Therefore, the remaining time (77 seconds (77,000 milliseconds)) obtained by subtracting this time can be freely allocated to FIGS. 71 (H) to 71 (N) without being fixed to the above-mentioned time. It is possible to increase the variation of the production after the hit is notified. Specifically, while the effect control microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 is producing, the time for performing FIGS. 71 (H) to 71 (N) is allocated.

Further, in the rhythmic winning notification effect C, before the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed in the winning mode, after the winning game state occurs. In the first effect (FIGS. 71 (J) to (L)) of displaying a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a specific gaming state, a character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin and a part of the character CRC is covered. (Specific image) in which the countdown image NJ is arranged and configured as described above can be executed. According to this configuration, even if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are not fixedly displayed in the winning mode, the specific game is performed after the winning game state occurs. Since a specific image suggesting the occurrence of a state (occurrence of a jackpot game that is a "16RV scheduled jackpot") is displayed, a plurality of decorative symbols derived and displayed by a variable effect (variable display) are tentatively displayed. As a result of the definite display in the winning mode, when a specific game state does not occur (a jackpot game that becomes a "16RV passing jackpot" occurs), even if a plurality of decorative symbols are not definitely displayed in the winning mode. By displaying a specific image (that is, a state in which a plurality of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in a hit mode), a specific game state (occurrence of a jackpot game that becomes a "16RV scheduled jackpot") is generated. It is possible to perform a promotion effect of suggesting. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

Further, in the effect (FIGS. 71 (J) to (L)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect C, the first rainbow background image THG3, which is the first premier background image THG3 suggesting a hit in FIGS. 71 (H) and (I). It is designed to be performed after the effect of displaying. According to this configuration, first, the production of FIGS. 71 (H) and (I) suggests that the player is a hit, and the player is given a sense of security, and further, the production of FIGS. 71 (H) and (I) is performed. By the promotion effect by the effect of FIGS. 71 (J) to 71 (L), the expectation for the occurrence of the specific game state (the occurrence of the big hit game that becomes the "16 RV passing big hit") can be fueled.

Further, in the effect (FIGS. 71 (J) to (L)) in the rhythmical winning notification effect C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning manner. Even in this state, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin, and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC so that the display of the specific image configured can be continued. It has become. According to this configuration, since the display of the specific image is continued even when the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in a winning manner, a plurality of them are displayed. It is possible to give the player the feeling that the display mode of the decorative symbol of the above may change to another display mode, and it is possible to fuel the expectation of the player for the change of the display mode of the plurality of decorative symbols. ..

Further, after the effect in the rhythmical winning notification effect C (FIGS. 71 (J) to (L)), the character CRC and the countdown image attached to the surface (front) of the coin constituting the specific image in FIG. 71 (M). NJ disappeared from the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that had been temporarily stopped and displayed disappeared from the display screen 7a, and further, in FIG. 71 (I), the image display device 7 has already been displayed. The first movable accessory 14 that is stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a takes a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7. When the first movable accessory 14 moves and returns to the retracted position (home position) from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), a specific gaming state occurs. Since the number "7", which is a specific symbol that conveys (the occurrence of a jackpot game that is scheduled to pass 16RV), all of the multiple decorative symbols are displayed in a definite manner, promotion due to the appearance of a movable body It is possible to emphasize and convey to the player the success of the production (determination of the occurrence of a specific game state (confirmation of the occurrence of a jackpot game that is "16RV scheduled jackpot")).

Further, in the rhythmical winning notification effect C, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin in FIGS. 71 (J) to (L), and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC. The specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner. .. According to this configuration, since the specific image is an image that conveys the remaining time (approximate remaining time) until a plurality of decorative symbols are confirmed and displayed in a winning manner, in other words, the promotion effect is started. Since it is possible to tell the remaining time until the promotion effect (approximate remaining time until the promotion effect starts), the time when the promotion effect starts (approximate guideline for the promotion effect to start) is suitable. Can be displayed on.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of the rhythmical winning notification effect.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the winning result of "hit" or "missing" can be notified in the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. 71. Left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) can be displayed with an image display device 7 (display means), left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol. Variable display by 8R (a set of decorative symbols) The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time without forming a reach for each display, and the winning result is displayed. The first effect to be notified (FIGS. 69 (B) to (G) in the rhythmic winning notification effect A, FIGS. 70 (B) to (G) in the rhythmic winning notification effect B, and FIG. 71 (B) in the rhythmic winning notification effect C). ~ (G)) can be executed in a so-called right-handed game state (specific game state), which is different from the normal game state, without being executed in the so-called left-handed game state (normal game state). .. According to this configuration, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) do not form a reach for each variable display, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decoration are used. The symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) can be temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time to rhythmically notify the winning result. As a result, in such a rhythmically, for example, when the loss is continuously notified, the player is suddenly notified of the hit while making the fluctuation seem to be the deviation as a matter of course. On the other hand, it is possible to lose track of what happened for a moment (that is, when an unexpected event occurs), and to be surprised and pleased. It is possible to perform variable display by such a novel left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol, which is unprecedented, and reduces monotony due to fluctuation of left decorative symbol 8L, intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and right decorative symbol. It is possible to contribute to doing so. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the rhythmic winning notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C in FIG. 71 are the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C, right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) The time from the start of variable display to notifying the winning result of "hit" or "missing" is left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decoration It is not variable for each variable display by the symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) and is a fixed time. According to this configuration, the winning result of "hit" or "missing" is notified at regular intervals, so that the winning result can be known rhythmically.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effects in the rhythmic winning notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C in FIG. 71 are the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol. 8C, right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time to notify "missing" as a result of winning, and left decorative symbol 8L, middle decorative symbol 8C, right decorative symbol 8R ( It includes a production that temporarily stops and displays a set of decorative symbols) at the same time and notifies a "hit" as a result of winning. According to this configuration, for each variable display by the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right do not form a reach. When the decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) is temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time and the winning result is notified, either "hit" or "missing" is performed, so that the winning result is continuously notified rhythmically. At that time, the hit can be suddenly notified while making the fluctuation seem to be out of course. As a result, it is possible to realize a mode in which the hit is suddenly notified when the loss is continuously and rhythmically notified, so that the hit is suddenly notified when the fluctuation is naturally considered to be the deviation. By doing so, it is possible to lose track of what happened to the player for a moment (that is, when an unexpected event occurs), which can contribute to increasing the surprise of the hit.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the rhythmic winning notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C in FIG. 71 are operated by an electric drive source (stepping motor or DC motor). It has a movable body (the second movable accessory 15 in the rhythmic winning notification effect A, the first movable accessory 14 in the rhythmic winning notification effect B, and the first movable accessory 14 in the rhythmic winning notification effect C). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time to notify the hit as a result of the hit. The second effect that operates in the mode (the second mode in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the advanced position in FIG. 69 (I) in the rhythmic winning notification effect A, and FIG. 70 (I) in the rhythmic winning notification effect B. ), The first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In I), the first movable accessory 14 can execute the third mode in which the first movable accessory 14 moves from the retracted position toward the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). It has become. In the present embodiment, as described above, the movable first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols). ) Are aligned with the same symbol and are activated during the temporary stop display, as compared with the case where the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated, more games are played among the plurality of hit types. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that the player will be given a profit. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. As a result, in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) notify the hit as a result of the hit, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable body are movable. By having the player pay close attention to whether or not the movable accessory 15 is operated, it is possible to expect whether or not the player will be promoted to give more profit to the player.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the second effect in the rhythmic winning notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C in FIG. 71, the movable body is first hit. A third effect that operates in a second hit mode different from the mode (in the rhythmic winning notification effect A, in FIG. 69 (L), the second movable accessory 15 is at a predetermined angle counterclockwise (for example, about 30 degrees) at the advance position. In the third aspect, the rhythmic winning notification effect B, in which the first movable accessory 14 is rotated by) and stopped for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds), the first movable accessory 14 is on the right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (L). From the right end), it took a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) to move to the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (fifth aspect). 1 The movable accessory 14 has moved from the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 to the retracted position on the left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) (first). 5 modes)) can be executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the movable first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a plurality of sets of decorative symbols). ) Are aligned with the same symbol and are activated during the temporary stop display, as compared with the case where the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 are not activated, more games are played among the plurality of hit types. It is possible to suggest to the player that there is a high degree of expectation that the player will be given a profit. Therefore, the player is highly interested in the operation of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15. In the state of notifying the hit as a result of the hit, after the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 which are movable bodies are operated to become the first hit mode, the movable body is further operated again. By letting the player pay close attention to whether or not it is done, the player is provided with an unprecedented effect that the movable body can operate in two stages in a state where the hit is notified as a result of the hit. It is possible to expect the player to be promoted when giving a profit.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect in the rhythmic winning notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C in FIG. 71 has already been performed after the third effect. It includes an effect of simultaneously stopping and displaying the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) that are temporarily stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, after the third effect of operating the movable body in the second hitting mode different from the first hitting mode, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols 8R). The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, at the timing when the expectation that the movable body will be promoted to give more profit to the player is increased by the two-step operation of the movable body by stopping and displaying the decorative symbol) at the same time. The right decorative symbol 8R (a set of decorative symbols) can be stopped and displayed at the same time to notify whether or not to be promoted.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the rhythmical winning notification effect.
[Modification 1]
The rhythmic winning notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C in FIG. 71 are performed based on the fact that the game ball enters the second starting port 21. .. In other words, it is performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state (a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state). However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state (normal gaming state).

[Modification 2]
In the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. 71, the left decorative symbol 8L and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C are displayed on the image display device 7 (display means). The winning result of "hit" or "missing" by the right decorative symbol 8R (multiple sets of decorative symbols) was notified. However, as a result of winning, "small hit" may be included in addition to "hit" or "missing". By doing this, it is possible to increase the variation displayed as a winning result, and the left decorative symbol 8L, which is stopped and displayed, tells the player which of the "hits" and "small hits" is the hit. The middle decorative pattern 8C and the right decorative pattern 8R (a plurality of sets of decorative patterns) can be noticed.

[Modification 3]
In the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. 71, the appearance of the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 as the final promotion result. Due to the success of the promotion effect using, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed in the same symbol of the number "7", and then " He told the player that a jackpot game that would be "16RV scheduled jackpot" would occur. However, even if the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 appear, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) have the same number "7". Not promoted to match the symbols (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) do not switch from the number "1" to the number "7". ), Then, after a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are aligned with the same symbol of the number "7". It may be. In this way, the variation of the production can be increased.

[Modification example 4]
In the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. Remaining time until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol (that is, in a winning manner) displayed on (display screen 7a). I was telling (approximate remaining time). At this time, the remaining time (approximate time) may be set to flow from the speaker 67, for example, the voice "remaining 5 seconds". In this way, the remaining time (approximate remaining time) can be transmitted to the player by the specific image displayed on the image display device 7 (display screen 7a) and the sound flowing from the speaker 67, and the remaining time can be transmitted. (Approximate remaining time) can be easily grasped.

[Modification 5]
In the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. Remaining time until the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are confirmed and displayed on the same symbol (that is, in a winning manner) displayed on (display screen 7a). I was telling (approximate remaining time). However, a transparent light guide plate may be provided in front of the display screen 7a to display a specific image on the transparent light guide plate. In this case, since the number of images that can be displayed on the light guide plate is also limited, the light guide plate does not convey the remaining time (approximate remaining time) every time one second elapses. "5 seconds remaining" and "0 seconds remaining" are displayed. By arranging a plurality of full-color LEDs around the transparent light guide plate, the color is changed each time the remaining time (approximate remaining time) is shortened by the light emission of the full-color LEDs, for example, "15 seconds remaining" is brightened. It may be displayed in white, "5 seconds remaining" may be displayed in bright blue, and "0 seconds remaining" may be displayed in red. Even if the remaining time (approximate remaining time) appears in a predetermined color, various images displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 can be visually recognized through the transparent light guide plate.

[Modification 6]
In the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. 71, the left decorative symbol 8L, middle in FIGS. 69 (J) and (K) of the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. Display of a specific image composed of the indicator image TB and the character CRC even when the decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol (that is, in a hit manner). Is continued until the remaining time becomes the minimum (zero seconds) by the bar image of the indicator image TB, and in FIGS. 70 (J) to 70 (L) of the rhythmic winning notification effect B, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right Even when the decorative symbols 8R (plural decorative symbols) are displayed in the same symbol (that is, in a hit manner), the display of a specific image composed of the character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin is displayed. , The specific image (character CRC attached to the surface (front) of the coin) rolls clockwise around the display screen 7a and continues until the time (rolling time) to go around is the minimum (zero seconds) remaining. Then, in FIGS. 71 (J) to (L) of the rhythmical winning notification effect C, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R (plural decorative symbols) are aligned in the same symbol (that is, the winning symbol). Even in the displayed state, the character CRC is attached to the surface (front) of the coin, and the countdown image NJ is arranged so as to cover a part of the character CRC. The number image counted down at was continued until it reached zero seconds. However, the display of the specific image may be terminated before the time reaches zero seconds (arbitrary time from timekeeping to zero seconds). In this case, the dedicated promotion background image THG6 for notifying the promotion confirmation is suddenly displayed on the display screen 7a by switching from the background image THG4 for the specific image that can improve the visibility of the specific image, and the specific image disappears from the display screen 7a. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were temporarily stopped and displayed, also disappear from the display screen 7a, and in the rhythmic winning notification effect A, the second movable accessory 15 is above the image display device 7. From the stationary state at the retracted position (home position) of the image display device 7, the image display device 7 moves forward (moves) again toward the center position (advance position) of the display screen 7a on the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a and counterclockwise. It rotates around by a predetermined angle (for example, about 30 degrees) and stops for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). Further, in the rhythmic winning notification effect B and the rhythmic winning notification effect C, in FIGS. 70 (I) and 71 (I), the image display device 7 is already stationary on the right side (right end) of the display screen 7a. 1 The movable accessory 14 moves toward the retracted position (home position) on the left side of the image display device 7 over a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In this way, the second movable accessory 15 and the first movable accessory 14 suddenly advance before the zero second (arbitrary time from the timekeeping to the zero second), thereby promoting the promotion effect. The occurrence can be emphasized as an impactful production. The sub-control board 90 is determined for an arbitrary time from timekeeping to zero seconds.

[Modification 7]
The character CRC of the specific image in the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. It was. That is, the character B, which may appear as the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C, appears on the display screen 7a as the character CRC of the specific image. However, the character CRC of the specific image may be a promotion effect character that appears only in the rhythmic winning notification effects A to C, or the premier character that appears when the so-called premier image is displayed may be a rhythmic winning notification effect. It may also appear in A to C. In either case, since the character is rarely seen, it can contribute to further enhancing the effect of the rhythmic winning notification effects A to C.

[Modification 8]
The rhythmic winning notification effect A in FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B in FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C in FIG. It was assumed that the four hold icons were kept in stock. The right-handed game state was a state in which the game was shifted to the time-saving game after the jackpot game was completed, and a state in which the game was shifted to the so-called b-time reduction (play time). In this right-handed game state, in a state where 3 to 4 hold icons are always stocked, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are displayed. When the display mode changes from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) and fluctuates at high speed, the left fluctuates at high speed until a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses. The decorative design 8L, the middle decorative design 8C, and the right decorative design 8R decelerate all at once (simultaneously) and change from a translucent state to an opaque state again, and a predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) is reached. Immediately before the elapse, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time), and when a predetermined time (fixed time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) elapses, the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R were all (simultaneously) stopped and displayed. In this way, in the right-handed game state, with three to four hold icons always in stock, from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative symbol) of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display). The period of the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol was always the above-mentioned predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)). However, in the right-handed game state, the decorative symbol fluctuates from the start to the stop (stop display of the decorative symbol) of the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) regardless of the number of reserved icons in stock. The period of the effect (variable display) may always be the predetermined time (constant time: 3 seconds (3000 milliseconds)) described above.

[Modification 9]
In the rhythmic winning notification effect A of FIG. 69, the rhythmic winning notification effect B of FIG. 70, and the rhythmic winning notification effect C of FIG. 71, a part of the described effects may not be provided, and other effects are added. You may.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect A7-1]
It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the winning result.
The first effect of temporarily stopping and displaying the set of decorative symbols at the same time without forming a reach for each variation display by the set of decorative symbols and notifying the winning result is not executed in the normal game state. It can be executed in a specific game state different from the state,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-1.
In the first effect, the time from the start of the variable display by the set of decorative symbols to the notification of the winning result is not variable for each variable display by the set of decorative symbols and is a fixed time. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A7-1 or the aspect A7-2.
The first effect is to temporarily stop and display the set of decorative symbols at the same time to notify the loss as a result of winning, and to temporarily stop and display the set of decorative symbols at the same time to notify the winning as a result of winning. Directing and including,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A7-1 to A7-3.
It has a movable body that is actuated by an electrical drive source and
In the state where the set of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time by the first effect and the hit is notified as a result of the hit, it is possible to execute the second effect of operating the movable body in the first hit mode. Is,
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-4.
After the second effect, it is possible to execute a third effect in which the movable body is operated in a second hit mode different from the first hit mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect A7-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A7-5.
In the first effect, after the third effect, the set of decorative symbols that have already been temporarily stopped and displayed are stopped and displayed at the same time.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the decorative design competition effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74. This decorative symbol competition effect is executed during a variable effect of a special symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the decorative symbol competition effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Decorative design competition production A]
FIG. 72 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol competition effect A. This decorative symbol competition effect A is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol competition effect A, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of a plurality of decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R here are a group of decorative symbols, respectively. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big hit or a miss. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the decorative symbols having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which the decorative symbol with the same identifier is stopped and displayed is also called a doublet symbol. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet symbol, it becomes an outlier symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), the jackpot symbol display effect A is performed. In the jackpot symbol display effect A, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first jackpot symbol XC1 is a doublet symbol in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are even numbers, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot. The ally character CRA is stopped and displayed at a position to the left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (C), the jackpot symbol display effect B is performed. In the jackpot symbol display effect B, the display of the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 is continued on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed under the first jackpot symbol XC1. The second jackpot symbol XC2 has odd-numbered doublet symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot. That is, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect C, the effect that the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA is performed. In other words, the effect that the first jackpot symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second jackpot symbol XC2 is performed. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side surface portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (E), the jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect D, the first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position before approaching the ally character CRA, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA so as to be replaced. In other words, the effect that the second jackpot symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first jackpot symbol XC1 is performed. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side surface portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 72 (F), the jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect E, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is ejected outside the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed on the display screen. It is stopped and displayed at the center of 7a.

[Decorative design competition production B]
FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol competition effect B. This decorative symbol competition effect B is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol competition effect B, as shown in FIG. 73 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of a plurality of decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R here are a group of decorative symbols, respectively. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big hit or a miss. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the decorative symbols having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which the decorative symbol with the same identifier is stopped and displayed is also called a doublet symbol. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet symbol, it becomes an outlier symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (B), the jackpot symbol display effect A is performed. In the jackpot symbol display effect A, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first jackpot symbol XC1 is a doublet symbol in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are even numbers, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot. The ally character CRA is stopped and displayed at a position to the left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (C), the jackpot symbol display effect B is performed. In the jackpot symbol display effect B, the display of the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 is continued on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed under the first jackpot symbol XC1. The second jackpot symbol XC2 has odd-numbered doublet symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot. That is, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (D), the jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect C, the effect that the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA is performed. In other words, the effect that the first jackpot symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second jackpot symbol XC2 is performed. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side surface portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (E), the jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect D, the first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position before approaching the ally character CRA, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA so as to be replaced. In other words, the effect that the second jackpot symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first jackpot symbol XC1 is performed. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side surface portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect E, the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other. Specifically, the lower side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the upper side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other, or the positions of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are exchanged, so that the first jackpot symbol XC1 is replaced. The upper side of the jackpot symbol XC1 and the lower side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 and the right side of the first jackpot symbol XC1. Collides with the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the right side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, and the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 It collides with the right side of. When the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide as shown in FIG. 73 (F), the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 The three decorative symbols in the above collide with each other. For example, the decorative symbol on the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the decorative symbol on the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (G), the jackpot symbol display effect F is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect F, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is ejected outside the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed on the display screen. An effect that expands so that it protrudes from 7a is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 73 (H), the jackpot symbol display effect G is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect G, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is reduced and stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

[Decorative design competition production C]
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining the decorative symbol competition effect C. This decorative symbol competition effect C is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the decorative symbol competition effect C, as shown in FIG. 74 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are each composed of a plurality of decorative symbols. That is, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R here are a group of decorative symbols, respectively. Each of the decorative symbols included in the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R has a number as an identifier for identifying whether it is a big hit or a miss. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when the decorative symbols having the same identifier (number) are stopped and displayed, it becomes a jackpot symbol. The state in which the decorative symbol with the same identifier is stopped and displayed is also called a doublet symbol. In the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, when each decorative symbol is stopped and displayed so as to be different from the doublet symbol, it becomes an outlier symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (B), the jackpot symbol display effect A is performed. In the jackpot symbol display effect A, the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 are displayed on the display screen 7a. The first jackpot symbol XC1 is a doublet symbol in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are even numbers, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a time-saving gaming state after the jackpot. The ally character CRA is stopped and displayed at a position to the left of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (C), the jackpot symbol display effect B is performed. In the jackpot symbol display effect B, the display of the ally character CRA and the first jackpot symbol XC1 is continued on the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed under the first jackpot symbol XC1. The second jackpot symbol XC2 has odd-numbered doublet symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, and is a jackpot symbol that suggests entering a probabilistic gaming state after the jackpot. That is, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is a jackpot symbol that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (D), the jackpot symbol display effect C is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect C, the effect that the first jackpot symbol XC1 approaches the ally character CRA is performed. In other words, the effect that the first jackpot symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second jackpot symbol XC2 is performed. At this time, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side surface portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (E), the jackpot symbol display effect D is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect D, the first jackpot symbol XC1 returns to the position before approaching the ally character CRA, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 approaches the ally character CRA so as to be replaced. In other words, the effect that the second jackpot symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first jackpot symbol XC1 is performed. At this time, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is approaching the ally character CRA while showing the side surface portion.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (F), the jackpot symbol display effect E is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect E, the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are rotated to direct the side surface portion to the front so that the front portion cannot be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the jackpot symbol display effect F is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect F, the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other with the side surface facing the front so that the front portion cannot be seen. Specifically, the lower side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the upper side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other, or the positions of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are exchanged, so that the first jackpot symbol XC1 is replaced. The upper side of the jackpot symbol XC1 and the lower side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide with each other, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2 and the right side of the first jackpot symbol XC1. Collides with the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, or the first jackpot symbol XC1 moves to the right side of the second jackpot symbol XC2, and the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 It collides with the right side of. When the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide as shown in FIG. 74 (G), the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 The three decorative symbols of No. 3 collide with each other. For example, the decorative symbol on the left side of the first jackpot symbol XC1 collides with the decorative symbol on the left side of the second jackpot symbol XC2.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (H), the jackpot symbol display effect G is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect G, of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is ejected outside the display screen 7a, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is in front. The display is stopped at substantially the center of the display screen 7a with the side surface facing the front so that the portion cannot be seen.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (I), the jackpot symbol display effect H is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect H, an effect is performed in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is enlarged so as to protrude from the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 74 (J), the jackpot symbol display effect I is performed. In this jackpot symbol display effect I, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is reduced and stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the display screen 7a.

[Modification example]
In the decorative symbol competition effect C, in the jackpot symbol display effect G, the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2 are displayed, respectively, and the front portion thereof is displayed. The collision occurred with the side surface facing the front so that it would not be visible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the following configuration may be used. The three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 are arranged toward the back so as to be hidden by one decorative symbol, and the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2 are hidden by one decorative symbol. Arranged toward the back side, that is, when viewed from the player, one of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and one of the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2. One decorative symbol is arranged so as to be mainly visible, and from that state, the decorative symbol of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the decorative symbol of the second jackpot symbol XC2 correspond to each other. You may make it collide. In this case, the player displays one decorative symbol in front of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and one displayed in front of the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2. It is visible that the two decorative symbols collide with each other, but the two decorative symbols on the back side of the decorative symbol displayed in the foreground in the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the two decorative symbols displayed in the foreground in the second jackpot symbol XC2 are displayed. The structure is such that it is not possible to visually recognize how the two decorative symbols on the back side of the decorative symbol collide with each other. Not limited to this, the player can see one decorative symbol displayed in the foreground of the three decorative symbols of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the player in front of the three decorative symbols of the second jackpot symbol XC2. Along with the appearance of the one displayed decorative symbol colliding, the two decorative symbols on the back side of the decorative symbol displayed in the foreground in the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the two decorative symbols displayed in the foreground in the second jackpot symbol XC2 are displayed. The appearance of the two decorative symbols on the back side of the decorative symbol colliding with each other may be visually recognized from an oblique direction.

In the decorative symbol competition effects A to C, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second jackpot symbol XC2. In this case, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is the first. It may be displayed so as to be located in front of the jackpot symbol XC2 of 2. On the contrary, the second jackpot symbol XC2 may be displayed so as to be located in front of the first jackpot symbol XC1.
Further, in the decorative symbol competition effects A to C, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first jackpot symbol XC1. In this case, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is performed. May be displayed so as to be located in front of the first jackpot symbol XC1. On the contrary, the first jackpot symbol XC1 may be displayed so as to be located in front of the second jackpot symbol XC2.

[Effect example]
In the decorative symbol competition effect A of the game machine 1, in the jackpot symbol display effect B, the first jackpot symbol XC1 formed by the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are formed. The second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed, and then, in the jackpot symbol display effect C, the first jackpot symbol XC1 is closer to the ally character CRA than the second jackpot symbol XC2, and then the effect is performed. In the jackpot symbol display effect D, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is closer to the ally character CRA than the first jackpot symbol XC1. After that, in the jackpot symbol display effect E, the first jackpot is displayed. Of the symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2, the second jackpot symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed. According to this configuration, after the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 are produced to approach the ally character CRA, that is, the two jackpot symbols are produced like a competition toward the ally character CRA. After that, one jackpot symbol (second jackpot symbol) is decided, so the player can be thrilled by the time the final jackpot symbol is decided, and the interest of the production when the jackpot is decided. Can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition effect B of the game machine 1, the jackpot symbol display effect E in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide is performed. According to this configuration, the player can be further thrilled by the time the final jackpot symbol is determined, and the interest of the production at the time of determining the jackpot can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition effect B of the game machine 1, the jackpot symbol display effect E in which the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 collide is displayed, and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is displayed against the ally character CRA. A jackpot symbol display effect D that is closer than the first jackpot symbol XC1 and a jackpot symbol display effect G in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed among the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2. It is done during. According to this configuration, the player can be further thrilled by the time the final jackpot symbol is determined, and the interest of the production at the time of determining the jackpot can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition production of the game machine 1, the second jackpot symbol XC2 becomes a jackpot symbol (for example, a jackpot symbol with a certain probability change) that is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol XC1. There is. According to this configuration, after the two jackpot symbols are produced like a competition toward the ally character CRA, the second jackpot symbol that is highly profitable for the player is displayed, so that the player can see it. It is possible to give great joy after the throbbing, and it is possible to improve the interest of the production when the jackpot is decided. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the decorative symbol competition effect B of the game machine 1, the jackpot symbol display effect F in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 expands so as to protrude from the display screen 7a is the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2. It is performed after the collision jackpot symbol display effect E and before the jackpot symbol display effect G in which the second jackpot symbol XC2 of the first jackpot symbol XC1 and the second jackpot symbol XC2 is stopped and displayed. Is done. According to this configuration, the player can be further thrilled by the time the final jackpot symbol is determined, and the interest of the production at the time of determining the jackpot can be improved. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XC-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fourth display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is an effect of displaying a first jackpot symbol including a plurality of decorative symbols and a second jackpot symbol including a plurality of decorative symbols.
The second display effect is an effect in which the first jackpot symbol is closer to a predetermined place than the second jackpot symbol.
The third display effect is an effect in which the second jackpot symbol is closer to a predetermined location than the first jackpot symbol.
The fourth display effect is an effect in which the second jackpot symbol of the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed.
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, the third display effect, and the fourth display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, then the second display effect is performed, then the third display effect is performed, and then the fourth display effect is performed. ,
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a fifth display effect may be performed.
The fifth display effect is an effect in which the first jackpot symbol and the second jackpot symbol collide with each other.
The combination effect may include the fifth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-2.
In the combination effect, the fifth display effect is performed between the third display effect and the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-3.
The second jackpot symbol is more profitable for the player than the first jackpot symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XC-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XC-4.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a sixth display effect may be performed.
The sixth display effect is an effect in which the second jackpot symbol is enlarged so as to protrude from the display means.
The combination effect may include the sixth display effect, and may include the sixth display effect.
In the combination effect, the sixth display effect is performed after the fifth display effect and before the fourth display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.

The logo movement contact effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 75 to 77. This logo movement contact effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the logo movement contact effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to obtain an image. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The logo movement contact effects A to C are executed in the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state. It should be noted that the same execution can be performed even in the low accuracy and low base state.

[Logo movement contact effect A]
FIG. 75 is a diagram for explaining the logo movement contact effect A. The logo movement contact effect A is an effect of a pattern that becomes a big hit.
First, as shown in FIG. 75 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. The left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect symbol 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol. In addition, the hold icon 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (C), the logo movement effect A is executed. The logo movement effect A is an effect related to the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO", and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The advance position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the central portion of the display screen 7a and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The logo movement effect A is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position as indicated by an arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (D), the logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact effect is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" symbol and "2" symbol. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying the image in accordance with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, it is as if the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. Make it appear as if the "1" and "2" symbols are in contact. Here, an image in which the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are vertically crushed is displayed. In addition, the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position may be moved up and down with a small width to incite that the second movable accessory 15 is not easily crushed. At this time, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol may be moved up and down according to the movement of the second movable accessory 15. Further, here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed. This is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 63. Here, when the player operates the effect button 63, the next effect is executed. Even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect is executed when the valid period of the input of the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (E), the logo movement effect B is executed. The logo movement effect B is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position. This indicates that the "1" and "2" symbols were successfully crushed. Specifically, while the second movable accessory 15 is moving from the intermediate position to the lower position, an image in which the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol explode and disappear is displayed. Then, as the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to come below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front. In addition, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "3" symbols. Moreover, only the upper part of the "3" symbol is displayed, and the remaining part is framed out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (F), the symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving the effect symbol upward. Specifically, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are in the jackpot mode, are slowly moved upward and displayed as indicated by the arrows Z. At this time, the portion covered with the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. Here, the upper part of the "3" symbol is covered with the second movable accessory 15, making it difficult to see. The "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (G), the logo movement effect C is executed. The logo movement effect C is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position. As the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow X, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. Here, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper part of the "3" symbol when viewed from the front, and the "3" symbol is easy to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 75 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Logo movement contact effect B]
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining the logo movement contact effect B. The logo movement contact effect B is an effect of a pattern that is lost to the logo movement contact effect A, which is a big hit.
First, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. The left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time, or the right effect symbol 8R may be temporarily stopped first, and then the left effect symbol 8L may be temporarily stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol. In addition, the hold icon 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (C), the logo movement effect A is executed. The logo movement effect A is an effect related to the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO", and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The advance position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the central portion of the display screen 7a and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The logo movement effect A is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position as indicated by an arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (D), the logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact effect is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "1" symbol and "2" symbol. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying the image in accordance with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, it is as if the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. Make it appear as if the "1" and "2" symbols are in contact. Here, an image in which the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are vertically crushed is displayed. In addition, the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position may be moved up and down with a small width to incite that the second movable accessory 15 is not easily crushed. At this time, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol may be moved up and down according to the movement of the second movable accessory 15. Further, here, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed. This is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 63. Here, when the player operates the effect button 63, the next effect is executed. Even if the effect button 63 is not operated, the next effect is executed when the valid period of the input of the effect button 63 ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (E), the logo movement effect D is executed. The logo movement effect D is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the retracted position. This indicates that the "1" and "2" symbols failed to be crushed. Specifically, in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 from the intermediate position to the retracted position, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol that have been crushed in the vertical direction are displayed to return to the original mode.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (F), the medium symbol low speed fluctuation effect is executed. In the medium-design low-speed fluctuation effect, the movement speed (fluctuation speed) of the medium-effect symbol 8C that moves downward as indicated by the arrow Y is slowed down so that it can be visually recognized. Here, the moving speed of the "5" symbol is slow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (G), the temporary stop effect is executed. The temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped by temporarily stopping the middle effect symbol 8C. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is temporarily stopped at the "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is temporarily stopped at the "5" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 76 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “5” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Logo movement contact effect C]
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining the logo movement contact effect C. The logo movement contact effect C is an effect of promoting the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R after being notified that the jackpot has been achieved. The promotion of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is a notification of the transition to a more advantageous jackpot game. Specifically, it pretends to have won the 16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot, and is notified that the 16RV passing jackpot is due to the promotion of the production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R.

First, as shown in FIG. 77 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. At this time, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped in any order. Further, in that order, two or more of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol) 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "2" symbols. The "2" symbol (even symbol) is a symbol indicating that the 16R (substantially 13R) V non-passing jackpot. The hold icon 9B and the fluctuation icon 9C that were displayed at the start of the fluctuation are hidden.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (C), the logo movement effect A is executed. The logo movement effect A is an effect related to the second movable accessory 15. The second movable accessory 15 is a rectangular member (decorative portion) described as "OARO", and is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second movable accessory 15 is normally stationary at the retracted position (FIG. 1) above the image display device 7, and moves (advances) downward from the retracted position toward the center of the display screen 7a to be displayed. It is possible to stand still at the advance position in front of the screen 7a. The advance position includes an intermediate position that covers the vicinity of the central portion of the display screen 7a and a lower position that covers the vicinity of the lower portion of the display screen 7a. The logo movement effect A is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position as indicated by an arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (D), the logo contact effect is executed. The logo contact effect is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped "2" symbol. Specifically, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying the image in accordance with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, it is as if the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 is displayed. "2" Make it appear as if the symbols are in contact. Here, an image in which the "2" symbol is crushed in the vertical direction is displayed. In addition, the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position may be moved up and down with a small width to incite that the second movable accessory 15 is not easily crushed. At this time, the "2" symbol may be moved up and down according to the movement of the second movable accessory 15.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (E), the logo movement effect B is executed. The logo movement effect B is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position. This indicates that the "2" symbol was successfully crushed. Specifically, while the second movable accessory 15 is moving from the intermediate position to the lower position, an image in which the "2" symbol explodes and disappears is displayed. Then, as the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed so as to come below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front. In addition, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed in a jackpot mode. Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all "3" symbols. The "3" symbol (odd number symbol) is a symbol indicating that it is a jackpot scheduled to pass through 16RV. That is, at this stage, the "2" symbol displayed in the jackpot mode has been promoted to the "3" symbol. Here, only the upper part of the "3" symbol is displayed, and the rest is framed out.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (F), the symbol movement effect is executed. The symbol movement effect is an effect of moving the effect symbol upward. Specifically, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, which are in the jackpot mode, are slowly moved upward and displayed as indicated by the arrows Z. At this time, the portion covered with the second movable accessory 15 becomes difficult to see. Here, the upper part of the "3" symbol is covered with the second movable accessory 15, making it difficult to see. The "3" symbol moves upward and stops near the center of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (G), the logo movement effect C is executed. The logo movement effect C is an effect in which the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position. As the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as indicated by the arrow X, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. Here, the second movable accessory 15 moves to the upper part of the "3" symbol when viewed from the front, and the "3" symbol is easy to see.

Next, as shown in FIG. 77 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

The logo movement contact effect C is a case where the promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is successful, but when the promotion of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fails, the same configuration as the logo movement contact effect B is configured. It is conceivable to do. That is, the logo contact effect of FIG. 77 (D) is common, and then the logo movement effect D shown in FIG. 76 (E) is executed, and the symbol “2” remains as shown in FIG. 77 (H). Execute the fixed stop effect (hit).

Further, in the logo contact effect (FIGS. 75 (D), 76 (D), 77 (D)), an effect is performed to encourage the operation of the operation unit such as the effect button 63, and when the operation unit is operated, the next (FIG. 75 (E), FIG. 76 (E), FIG. 77 (E)) may be configured.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the logo movement contact effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the retracted position to the intermediate position to fuel the winning in a predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75 (C) (D), 76 (C) (D). ), FIGS. 77 (C) (D)). Then, the second movable accessory 15 moves from the intermediate position to the lower position to notify the winning in the predetermined lottery (FIGS. 75 (E) and 77 (E)). According to this configuration, since the second movable accessory 15 performs the fanning effect and the winning notification effect, the effect is more powerful than the simple notification effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second movable accessory 15 corresponds to the "movable member", the retracted position corresponds to the "first position", the intermediate position corresponds to the "second position", and the lower position corresponds to the "third position". Equivalent to. Further, the logo movement effect A and the logo contact effect (FIGS. 75 (C) (D), FIG. 76 (C) (D), FIG. 77 (C) (D)) correspond to the "first effect", and the logo movement. The effect B, the pattern movement effect, and the logo movement effect C correspond to the "second effect". The jackpot lottery and the jackpot type lottery correspond to the "predetermined lottery".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the logo contact effect is executed, and the second movable accessory 15 stops at an intermediate position and crushes the temporarily stopped effect symbol. That is, when viewed from the front side (player), by displaying the image in accordance with the lower end of the second movable accessory 15 stopped at the intermediate position, the effect symbol is displayed at the lower end of the second movable accessory 15. Pretend to be in contact. According to this configuration, since the movement of the effect symbol is linked to the movement of the second movable accessory 15, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The temporarily stopped production symbol corresponds to the "design".

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as the second movable accessory 15 stops at the lower position, the left middle right effect symbol 8L, so as to come below the second movable accessory 15 when viewed from the front, 8C and 8R are displayed (FIGS. 75 (E) and 77 (E)). According to this configuration, it seems that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are pressed by the second movable accessory 15 that has moved to the lower position, so that the movement of the second movable accessory 15 to the lower position stands out, and the game Can improve the interest of.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the symbol movement effect is executed (FIGS. 75 (F), 77 (F)). Specifically, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are slowly moved upward and displayed as indicated by the arrow Z, and move to the back side of the second movable accessory 15. According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that move so as to overlap the second movable accessory 15 will be watched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the logo movement effect C is executed (FIGS. 75 (G) and 77 (G)). Specifically, as the second movable accessory 15 moves from the lower position to the retracted position as shown by the arrow X, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state. Become. According to this configuration, since the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are changed from a difficult-to-see state to an easy-to-see state, there is a high possibility that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R will be watched, and the interest of the game will be improved. be able to.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, the logo movement effect D is executed (FIG. 76 (E)), and a loss in a predetermined lottery can be notified. Specifically, in accordance with the movement of the second movable accessory 15 from the intermediate position to the retracted position, the effect symbol that has been crushed in the vertical direction is displayed to return to the original mode. According to this configuration, since the second movable accessory 15 performs the fanning effect and the notification effect of the defeat, the effect is more powerful than the simple notification effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The logo movement effect D (FIG. 76 (E)) corresponds to the "third effect".

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the logo contact effect, a button image BG imitating the effect button 63 is displayed to prompt the operation of the effect button 63 (FIGS. 75 (D), 76 (D), and the effect. When the button 63 is pressed, the next effect (logo movement effect B, logo movement effect D) is executed (FIGS. 75 (E) and 76 (E)). According to this configuration, the effect button 63 Since winning or losing is notified by pressing, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The effect button 63 corresponds to the "operation unit", and the logo contact effect (FIGS. 75 (D) and 76 (D)) displaying the button image BG corresponds to the "promotion effect".

[Modification example]
A modified example of the logo movement contact effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the "1" symbol and the "2" symbol are temporarily stopped, and after the logo contact effect, the mode is a big hit (FIGS. 75 (B) to (H)). On the other hand, the symbol that is temporarily stopped may be in the reach mode. In general, the reach mode is a mode in which the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information of the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R is the same).

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the temporarily stopped effect symbol is crushed by the second movable accessory 15, so that a jackpot or a jackpot type is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to these, and the lottery result as to whether or not to execute the effect may be notified. For example, by crushing the temporarily stopped symbol, the confirmation of the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is notified. In this case, it is conceivable that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated on the back side of the second movable accessory 15 in accordance with the execution of the logo movement effect B (FIGS. 75 (E) and 77 (E)). ..

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A9-1]
A display screen that displays images and
It is movable between the first position, the second position different from the first position, the first position and the third position different from the second position, and the first position, the second position, and A gaming machine including a movable member that can be stopped at the third position.
The first effect in which the movable member moves from the first position to the second position to fuel the winning in a predetermined lottery.
After the first effect, the movable member moves from the second position to the third position to notify the winning in the predetermined lottery, and the second effect can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A9-1.
In the first effect, by displaying a symbol on the display screen in accordance with the movable member moved to the second position, an effect in which the movable member apparently contacts the symbol displayed on the display screen is executed. Be done,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-3]
A game machine according to aspect A9-1 or aspect A9-2.
In the second effect, the symbol is displayed on the display screen so that the symbol can be visually recognized below the movable member in accordance with the movable member that has moved to the third position.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A9-3.
In the second effect, the pattern displayed on the display screen is moved and displayed in a direction overlapping the movable member, and the effect of moving to the back side of the movable member is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-4.
In the second effect, the effect of moving the movable member from the third position to the first position is executed in accordance with the effect of the symbol moving to the back side of the movable member.
A game machine characterized by that.
It should be noted that the phrase "according to the effect of the symbol moving to the back side of the movable member" is intended to include a configuration in which the movable member is moved in parallel with the movement display of the symbol. That is, it includes not only a configuration in which the movable member moves after the symbol movement effect is completed, but also a configuration in which the movable member moves before the symbol movement effect is completed. For example, a configuration is included in which the movable member is moved so as to cover the symbol to be moved and displayed.

[Aspect A9-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-5.
After the first effect, the movable member can move from the second position to the first position to perform a third effect of notifying the loss in the predetermined lottery.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect A9-6.
It also has an operation unit that can be operated by the player.
In the first effect, a promotion effect that promotes the operation of the operation unit is executed, and the second effect or the third effect is executed with the effect as an opportunity.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A9-8]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A9-1 to A9-6.
It also has an operation unit that can be operated by the player.
In the first effect, a promotion effect that promotes the operation of the operation unit is executed, and the second effect is executed with the effect as an opportunity.
A game machine characterized by that.

The symbol count continuous effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 78 to 80. This symbol count continuous effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. Specifically, the effect executed during the variation effect is continuously performed over a plurality of variations. When the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the symbol count continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device is used. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of 7. The symbol count continuous effects A to C are executed in the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state. It should be noted that the same execution can be performed even in the low accuracy and low base state.

[Symbol count continuous production A]
FIG. 78 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect A.
The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed after the determination of the previous fluctuation is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (A), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which two of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbol is the same). In a normal game, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach mode, but in the symbol count continuous effect A, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R form a reach mode. To do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which has a different fluctuation region from the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol in the normal state. The same applies to the following. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively. It should be noted that the explanation will be continued assuming that the hold will not increase in the middle of the production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (B), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “5” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “8” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B are displayed. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (D), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “8” symbol. Two hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. One hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (F), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “7” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “8” symbol. One hold icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (G), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. The variable icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 78 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "8" symbol. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

The symbol count continuous effect A is a continuous effect that spans four fluctuations. In the symbol count continuous effect A, a reach is formed with the “8” symbol each time the reach formation effect is executed. Then, the final stop symbol in the fixed stop effect is counted up as "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol → "8" symbol. Further, after the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the same time, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a big hit or a loss is notified at the second timing. Furthermore, in the normal state, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol.

The symbol count continuous effect A was a pattern that was a big hit in the final variation of the four variations, but it is also possible to produce a pattern that is a loss. In that case, instead of the fixed stop effect (hit) in FIG. 78 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable that the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is a “7” symbol or a “9” symbol.

[Symbol count continuous production B]
FIG. 79 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect B.
The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed after the determination of the previous fluctuation is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (A), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which two of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbol is the same). In a normal game, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach mode, but in the symbol count continuous effect B, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R form a reach mode. To do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which has a different fluctuation region from the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol in the normal state. The same applies to the following. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively. It should be noted that the explanation will be continued assuming that the hold will not increase in the middle of the production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (B), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "9" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "8" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "8" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B are displayed. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "7" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (D), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “8” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “7” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “7” symbol. Two hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “6” symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. One hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (F), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "7" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "6" symbol. One hold icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (G), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "5" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. The variable icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 79 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "5" symbol. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

The symbol count continuous effect B is a continuous effect that spans four fluctuations. In the symbol count continuous effect B, the reach is formed in the order of "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "6" symbol → "5" symbol each time the reach formation effect is executed. The final stop symbol in the fixed stop effect is "9" symbol → "8" symbol → "7" symbol → "5" symbol. It can be said that the final stop symbol is counting down, except for the "5" symbol of the final final stop effect (hit). Further, after the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the same time, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a big hit or a loss is notified at the second timing. Furthermore, in the normal state, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol.

The symbol count continuous effect B was a pattern that was a big hit in the final variation of the four variations, but it is also possible to produce a pattern that is a loss. In that case, instead of the fixed stop effect (hit) in FIG. 79 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable that the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is set as the “6” symbol.

[Symbol count continuous production C]
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining the symbol count continuous effect C.
The effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed after the determination of the previous fluctuation is stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (A), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which two of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbol is the same). In a normal game, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stop to form a reach mode, but in the symbol count continuous effect C, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R form a reach mode. To do. That is, the final stop symbol is the left effect symbol 8L, which has a different fluctuation region from the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the final stop symbol in the normal state. The same applies to the following. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "8" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively. It should be noted that the explanation will be continued assuming that the hold will not increase in the middle of the production.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (B), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “4” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “8” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “8” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B are displayed. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (C), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "2" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The two hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area and the second storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (D), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "5" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "2" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Two hold icons 9B are displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “0” symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, one hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. One hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold corresponds to the first storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (F), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a “6” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “0” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “0” symbol. One hold icon 9B is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

After the confirmation of the previous fluctuation is stopped, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (G), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. Here, both the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the "7" symbol. The middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the same timing. The variable icon 9C is displayed at the bottom of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 80 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which all of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are all fixed and stopped at the "7" symbol. The variable icon 9C at the bottom of the display screen 7a disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

The symbol count continuous effect C is a continuous effect that spans four fluctuations. In the symbol count continuous effect C, the reach is formed in the order of "8" symbol → "2" symbol → "0" symbol → "7" symbol each time the reach formation effect is executed. This is an example in which reach symbols are randomly selected. However, the last "7" symbol is selected based on the count-up of the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol. The final stop symbol in the fixed stop effect counts up as "4" symbol → "5" symbol → "6" symbol → "7" symbol. Further, after the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the same time, the left effect symbol 8L is stopped. That is, reach formation is performed at the first timing, and a big hit or a loss is notified at the second timing. Furthermore, in the normal state, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol, while the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol.

The symbol count continuous effect C was a pattern that was a big hit in the final variation of the four variations, but it is also possible to produce a pattern that is a loss. In that case, instead of the fixed stop effect (hit) in FIG. 80 (H), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. For example, it is conceivable that the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is a “6” symbol or a “8” symbol.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the continuous effect of symbol count is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, by repeating the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect of the reach loss mode, the effect symbol is stopped in the jackpot mode indicating the transition to the jackpot game (FIG. 78 (A). )-(F), FIGS. 79 (A)-(F), FIGS. 80 (A)-(F)). According to this configuration, by repeating the reach loss mode, the player can have a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) correspond to the "reach loss effect", the left effect symbol 8L corresponds to the "final stop symbol", and the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R become the "reach symbol". Equivalent to. Further, the jackpot mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the symbols is the same) corresponds to the "special mode".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) are repeated in continuous fluctuations (FIGS. 78 (A) to (F), FIGS. 79 (A) to (F), FIG. 80 (FIG. 80). A) to (F)). According to this configuration, since the fixed stop effect (loss) of the reach loss mode is executed in each continuous variation, the player can be expected to expect the next variation, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at the same time in the reach formation effect, and the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is stopped in the final stop effect (loss). According to this configuration, a rhythm is created in a series of productions consisting of a reach formation production and a fixed stop production (loss), and the interest of the game can be improved.

The stop timing of the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R corresponds to the "first timing", and the stop timing of the left effect symbol 8L corresponds to the "second timing".

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C is the final stop symbol in the normal state, whereas the left effect symbol 8L is the final stop symbol in the normal state, and the fluctuation region of the final stop symbol is different from the normal time. ing. According to this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by making the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) stand out.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L is changed each time the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) are repeated. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the next big hit may be made by changing the final stop symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, each time the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) are repeated, the left effect symbol 8L is counted up or down (FIGS. 78 (A) to (F), FIG. 79 (FIG. 79). A) to (F), FIGS. 80 (A) to (F)). According to this configuration, it is possible to further give the player the expectation that the next stop symbol may be a big hit by counting up or down, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, in the reach forming effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) that are repeatedly executed, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R that form the reach mode are each "8" symbol ("8" symbol. 78 (A) to (F)). Then, the left effect symbol 8L, which is the final stop symbol, is counted up. According to this configuration, the count-up of the left effect symbol 8L stands out, and the count-up of the left effect symbol 8L makes the player feel as if he / she is approaching the jackpot, and the interest of the game can be improved. ..

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the symbol count continuous effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the left effect symbol 8L is set as the final stop symbol on the premise that the left effect symbol 8L → the right effect symbol 8R → the middle effect symbol 8C is normally stopped. On the other hand, the right effect symbol 8R may be used as the final stop symbol. Further, the middle effect symbol 8C, which is the same as the normal one, may be used as the final stop symbol. By determining the final stop symbol, the remaining effect symbols become reach symbols that form the reach mode.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the middle effect symbol 8C and the right effect symbol 8R, which are the reach symbols, are stopped at the same time. On the other hand, the effect symbol, which is the reach symbol, may be stopped at another timing. Further, any of the effect symbols may be stopped first. In this case, if the three effect symbols are stopped at the same intervals, including the stop timing of the final stop symbol, a rhythm is created in the stop of the effect symbols, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) are repeated in continuous fluctuations. On the other hand, the reach formation effect and the fixed stop effect (loss) may be repeated in one variation. Alternatively, both may be repeated. For example, the first fluctuation is repeated twice, the next fluctuation is repeated three times, and so on.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect A10-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display screen that displays images.
On the display screen, the symbol is repeatedly executed to stop the symbol displayed in a plurality of rows so that the final stop symbol that is stopped last has a reach loss mode different from the reach symbol that forms the reach mode. Incites to stop in a special mode indicating the transition to a special game,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-1.
The reach loss effect is executed and repeated in continuous fluctuations.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-3]
A game machine according to the aspect A10-1 or the aspect A10-2.
In the reach loss effect, the reach symbol stops at the first timing, and then the final stop symbol stops at the second timing.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-3.
In the reach loss effect, the fluctuation region of the final stop symbol is different from the fluctuation region of the final stop symbol in the normal state on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects A10-1 to A10-4.
Each time the reach loss effect is repeatedly executed, the final stop symbol is changed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-6]
The gaming machine according to the aspect A10-5.
The change of the final stop symbol is a count-up or a count-down.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-7]
A game machine according to the aspect A10-5 or the aspect A10-6.
In the reach loss effect that is repeatedly executed, the reach symbol is common.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-8]
A game machine according to the aspect A10-5 or the aspect A10-6.
In the reach loss effect that is repeatedly executed, the reach symbol is changed by counting up or counting down.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect A10-9]
A game machine according to the aspect A10-5 or the aspect A10-6.
In the reach loss effect that is repeatedly executed, the reach symbol is randomly selected.
A game machine characterized by that.

The image inversion expectation degree suggestion effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 81 to 83. This image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect is executed during the variation effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the above and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Image inversion expectation suggestion effect A]
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A. The image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the hit expectation degree by reversing a specific image (holding icon) that suggests the hit expectation degree by changing the color. In the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. Is displayed.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, when the gaming state is the normal state (low accuracy and low base state), the variation display corresponding to the variation in Special Figure 1 is displayed.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have the shape of a flag. The shape of this flag includes a rattan portion whose right side is split in two, and a rod-shaped rod portion located on the left side of the flag portion. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can have arbitrary shapes representing a specific target. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the color of the four flag-shaped hold icons 9A is blue.

During this fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 81 (B), the color of the second hold icon 9A from the right among the four hold icons 9A changes from blue to green due to look-ahead. The hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon) 9C indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot at the time of change corresponding to the hold icon by the color. Here, the expectation of the jackpot is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, the expectation of blue is 2%, the expectation of green is 10%, the expectation of purple is 20%, and the expectation of red is red. The degree is 30% and the expectation of gold is 40%. This change in the color of the second hold icon 9A from the right suggests that the expectation of a jackpot during a change (next next change) corresponding to this hold icon 9A has increased from 2% to 10%. ..

FIG. 81 (C) shows the state at the time of the next special figure change of the special figure change of FIGS. 81 (A) and 81 (B). In FIG. 81 (B), the hold icon 9A whose color has changed from blue to green shifts by one to the right, and as shown in FIG. 81 (C), the rightmost of the three hold icons 9A. Is displayed in. During this fluctuation, the rightmost hold icon 9A whose color has changed is highlighted by pre-reading as shown in FIG. 81 (D). The inverted display here means that the target (flag) represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed in a horizontally inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the hold icon 9A is flipped horizontally, the rod portion is located on the right side of the rattan portion, and the portion split in two in the flag portion is displayed on the left side of the flag portion. When the hold icon 9A is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, when inverted, the expectation degree is added by 43%. In the present embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is inverted, the sum of the expected degree of color of the hold icon 9A plus the expected degree of inversion of 43% becomes the expected degree. For example, flipping the blue hold icon 9A suggests that expectations have risen from 2% to 45%. Here, it is suggested that the expectation level increased from 10% to 53% because the green hold icon 9A was reversed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the expectation of the jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the hold icon 9A but also by the inversion-non-inversion. In the present embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color is changed.

In FIG. 81 (E), the state at the time of the next special figure change of the special figure change of FIGS. 81 (C) and 81 (D) is shown. In FIG. 81 (D), the inverted green hold icon 9A shifts by one to the right and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C as shown in FIG. 81 (E). The change corresponding to the hold icon) 9C is performed. The expected degree of jackpot in this fluctuation is 53%, and when it hits, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of jackpot as shown in FIG. 81 (F).

FIGS. 81 (G) to 81 (L) show another example of the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A. In another example, first, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the hold icons 9A are arranged side by side below the display screen 7a in a state where the variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is displayed. Is displayed. The color of the four hold icons 9A is blue. During this fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 81 (G), the third hold icon 9A from the right among the four hold icons 9A is highlighted by look-ahead. The reverse display here is the same as the reverse display in FIG. 81 (D). That is, when the hold icon 9A is highlighted, the expectation level is added by 43%, which suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the hold icon 9A is not highlighted. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation increased from 2% to 45% because the blue hold icon 9A was reversed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold icon 9A may be highlighted not only after the color change but also before the color change.

FIG. 81 (H) shows the state at the time of the next special figure change after the special figure change of FIGS. 81 (A) and 81 (G). One hold icon 9A is added by winning. In FIG. 81 (G), the highlighted hold icon 9A shifts by two to the right and is displayed on the far right of the three hold icons 9A as shown in FIG. 81 (H). .. During this fluctuation, the color of the rightmost highlighted hold icon 9A changes from blue to green as shown in FIG. 81 (I) due to pre-reading. The color change here is the same as the color change in FIG. 81 (B). That is, the expectation of the jackpot is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, the expectation of blue is 2%, the expectation of green is 10%, the expectation of purple is 20%, and the expectation of red is red. Is 30%, and the expectation of gold is 40%. When the color of the hold icon 9A changes in the highlighted state, the expected degree of the color change is added. Here, the color expectation increases from 2% to 10%, and 43% of the reverse display is added to this, so that the overall expectation increases from 45% to 53%.

The highlighted display of the hold icon 9A highlighted in green may be further reversed and returned to the original orientation (non-reversed display) at a specific timing. There is a 20% chance that the reverse display will return to its original state, and when it returns, the timing may be during the same fluctuation, or it may be after the next fluctuation. Here, as shown in FIG. 81 (J), during the same fluctuation as in FIG. 91 (I), the effect of returning the highlighted hold icon 9A to the original orientation display (non-reversed display) is executed. .. As a result, the expectation of the jackpot at the time of fluctuation corresponding to the hold icon 9A is lowered to the expectation before the reverse display. Here, the degree of expectation drops from 53% (43 + 10) to 10% (0 + 10).

In FIG. 81 (K), the state at the time of the next special figure change of the special figure change of FIGS. 81 (H) to (J) is shown. In FIG. 81 (J), the green hold icon 9A that has returned to the original orientation (non-end point display) shifts by one to the right, and as shown in FIG. 81 (K), the variable icon (the hold icon). ) 9C, and the variation corresponding to this variation icon (the hold icon) 9C is performed. The expected degree of jackpot in this fluctuation is 10%, and when a loss occurs, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of loss as shown in FIG. 81 (L).

[Image inversion expectation suggestion effect B]
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect B. The image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the hit expectation degree by reversing a specific image (holding icon) that suggests the hit expectation degree by changing the color. FIG. 82 (A) shows the same state as FIG. 81 (B) of the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A. That is, in the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect B, first, the same effect as in FIGS. 81 (A) and 81 (B) of the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the variation display corresponding to the special diagram 1 variation is displayed.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The color of the second hold icon 9A from the right among the four hold icons 9A is changed from blue to green by look-ahead. The hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon) 9C indicate the degree of expectation of the jackpot at the time of change corresponding to the hold icon by the color. Here, the expectation of the jackpot is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, the expectation of blue is 2%, the expectation of green is 10%, the expectation of purple is 20%, and the expectation of red is red. The degree is 30% and the expectation of gold is 40%. It is suggested that the color change of the second hold icon 9A from the right increased the expectation of the jackpot at the time of the change (next next change) corresponding to this hold icon 9A from 2% to 10%. There is.

During this fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 82 (B), the green hold icon 9A, which is the second from the right, is rotated by pre-reading. Here, the second hold icon 9A from the right rotates counterclockwise with the normal of the display screen 7a as the rotation axis. After that, the rotation speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 82 (C), the second hold icon 9A from the right becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (D), the vortex image disappears and the highlighted hold icon 9A is displayed at the display position of the second hold icon 9A from the right. The inverted display here means that the target (flag) represented by the hold icon 9A is displayed in a horizontally inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the hold icon 9A is flipped horizontally, the rod portion is located on the right side of the rattan portion, and the portion split in two in the flag portion is displayed on the left side of the flag portion. When the hold icon 9A is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, when inverted, the expectation degree is added by 43%. In the present embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is inverted, the sum of the expected degree of color of the hold icon 9A plus the expected degree of inversion of 43% becomes the expected degree. For example, flipping the blue hold icon 9A suggests that expectations have risen from 2% to 45%. Here, it is suggested that the expectation level increased from 10% to 53% because the green hold icon 9A was reversed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the expectation of the jackpot is expressed not only by the color of the hold icon 9A but also by the inversion-non-inversion. In the present embodiment, when the hold icon 9A is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color is changed.

In FIG. 82 (E), the state at the time of the next next special figure change after the special figure change in FIGS. 82 (A) to 82 (D) is shown. In FIG. 82 (D), the inverted green hold icon 9A shifts by two to the right and becomes a variable icon (the pending icon) 9C as shown in FIG. 82 (E). The change corresponding to the hold icon) 9C is performed. The expected degree of jackpot in this fluctuation is 53%, and when it hits, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of jackpot as shown in FIG. 82 (F).

82 (G) to 82 (L) show another example of the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect B. In another example, first, as shown in FIG. 82 (G), the hold icon 9A and the change icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a in a state where the change display corresponding to the change in the special figure 1 is displayed. It is displayed below. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (hold icon) 9C have a blue flag shape. During this variation, as shown in FIG. 82 (H), the variation icon (the hold icon) 9C is enlarged and displayed while moving toward the upper side of the display screen 7a by pre-reading, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. A rotation effect that rotates at the first position that overlaps with the variation display of is executed. Here, the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C rotates counterclockwise with the normal line of the display screen 7a as the rotation axis at the first position of the display screen 7a. After that, the rotation speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 82 (I), the variable icon (holding icon) 9C becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 82 (J), the inverted variable icon (the holding icon) 9C appears from the vortex image at the first position of the display screen 7a, and while rotating, the lower right of the display screen 7a appears. Move towards the second position. The reverse display here means that the target represented by the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C is displayed in a reversed state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is flipped horizontally, the rod part is located on the right side of the rattan part, and the part split in two in the flag part is displayed on the left side of the flag part. Will be done. In addition, the number displayed on the flag portion (here, "3") is also highlighted. When the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, when inverted, the expectation degree is added by 43%. In the present embodiment, when the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is inverted, the sum of the expected degree of the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C plus the expected degree of inversion of 43% becomes the expected degree. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation increased from 2% to 45% because the blue variable icon (the pending icon) 9C was reversed. As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the color of the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C but also the inversion-non-inversion indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color is changed. After that, a countdown effect is executed by the inverted number displayed on the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C displayed at the second position.

When the countdown effect is started, as shown in FIG. 82 (K), one number highlighted on the flag portion of the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C displayed at the second position of the display screen 7a is displayed. It will be decremented. Here, the highlighted "3" is switched to the highlighted "2". After that, the highlighted numbers continue to be decremented, and when the highlighted "0" is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. FIG. 82 (L) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Image inversion expectation suggestion effect C]
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect C. The image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the hit expectation degree by reversing a specific image (holding icon) that suggests the hit expectation degree by changing the color. In the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect C, first, the same effect as in FIG. 81 (A) of the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 81 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the hold icon 9A, and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are displayed on the display screen 7a. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the variation display corresponding to the special diagram 1 variation is displayed. Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a.

Four hold icons 9A are displayed side by side below the display screen 7a. The variable icon (holding icon) 9C is displayed in the variable icon display area at the lower center of the display screen 7a. Here, the pedestal image is displayed below the variable icon display area. Both the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C have the shape of a flag. The shape of this flag includes a rattan portion whose right side is split in two, and a rod-shaped rod portion located on the left side of the flag portion. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C can have arbitrary shapes representing a specific target. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. Here, the colors of the four flag-shaped hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are blue.

During this fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 83 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at "2" and "4", and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in a variable manner. .. After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (B), by pre-reading, the hold icon 9A and the image (design) having the same flag shape as the hold icon 9C are stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C at the stop position. The color of this image (design) is blue, which is larger than the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (C), a rotation effect is executed in which the image (design) stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated. Here, the image (design) stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is rotated counterclockwise with the normal line of the display screen 7a as the rotation axis. After that, the rotation speed of this rotation increases, and as shown in FIG. 83 (D), the image (symbol) stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C becomes a vortex image representing high-speed rotation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (E), an inverted flag-shaped image appears from the vortex image at the stop position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and while rotating, the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C is displayed at the display position. Move towards. The inverted display here means that the object (flag) represented by the image (design) stopped and displayed at the stop position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is displayed in an inverted state. Specifically, the shape of the flag represented by the image (design) stopped and displayed at the stop position of the intermediate decorative symbol 8C was reversed left and right, the rod portion was located on the right side of the wicker portion, and the flag portion was split in two. The part is displayed on the left side of the flag part. The highlighted flag-shaped image is the same as the highlighted image of the variable icon (holding icon) 9C in FIG. 83 (A).

As shown in FIG. 83 (F), the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is highlighted by the effect of FIG. 83 (E). When the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is highlighted, it suggests that the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is not highlighted. Here, when inverted, the expectation degree is added by 43%. In the present embodiment, when the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is inverted, the sum of the expected degree of the color of the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C plus the expected degree of inversion of 43% becomes the expected degree. Here, it is suggested that the degree of expectation increased from 2% to 45% because the blue variable icon (the pending icon) 9C was reversed. As described above, in the present embodiment, not only the color of the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C but also the inversion-non-inversion indicates the degree of expectation of the jackpot. In the present embodiment, when the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C is inverted, the degree of expectation is higher than when the color is changed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were stopped and displayed at "2" and "4", are re-variably displayed. Here, nothing is displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. After the number symbol is stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, a pseudo-continuous effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are revariated may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (H), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed again at "2" and "4", and the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is variablely displayed by pre-reading. , The inverted flag-shaped image (design) is stopped and displayed at the stop position. The inverted flag-shaped image (design) is green and has the same shape as the blue variable icon (holding icon) 9C but different in color. The inverted flag-shaped image (design) is larger in size than the variable icon (holding icon) 9C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (I), the green flag-shaped image (design) stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C moves toward the display position of the variable icon (holding icon) 9C. At this time, the image (design) may or may not be rotated. By this effect, the variable icon (the pending icon) 9C turns green, and the number (here, "3") is also highlighted on the flag portion. Also, the size becomes large. Specifically, the image has the same size as the image (design) stopped and displayed as the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. As for the color change here, the expectation of the jackpot is high in the order of blue, green, purple, red, and gold, the expectation of blue is 2%, the expectation of green is 10%, and the expectation of purple is 20. %, Red expectation is 30%, and gold expectation is 40%. When the color of the variable icon (the holding icon) 9C changes in the highlighted state, the expected degree of the color change is added. Here, the color expectation increases from 2% to 10%, and 43% of the reverse display is added to this, so that the overall expectation increases from 45% to 53%. After that, a countdown effect is executed by the highlighted numbers displayed on the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C.

When the countdown effect is started, as shown in FIG. 83 (J), one number highlighted on the flag portion of the variable icon (holding icon) 9C is decremented. Here, the highlighted "3" is switched to the highlighted "2". After that, as shown in FIG. 83 (K), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R, which were stopped and displayed at "2" and "4", are re-variably displayed. Here, nothing is displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C. After the number symbol is stopped and displayed on the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, a pseudo-continuous effect in which the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are revariated may be executed. The numbers highlighted on the flag of the variable icon (holding icon) 9C continue to be decremented, and when the highlighted "0" is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed. FIG. 83 (L) shows an example in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the image inversion expectation suggestion effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the expected degree of hit is also suggested by reversing the hold icon 9A which suggests the expected degree of hit by changing the color. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 82 and 83.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the first effect in which the hold icon 9A is reversed after the hold icon 9A is displayed in a non-reversed state is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 82 and 83.
[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the first effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed in a non-inverted state, and then the hold icon 9A is rotated and held after rotation. The icon 9A is displayed in an inverted state. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the hold icon 9A includes characters (including numbers), and is included in the hold icon 9A after the first effect. It is possible to execute a second effect of changing to another character in a state where the character is inverted. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 to 83, the first effect is executed during the special figure change, and after the hold icon 9A is displayed in a non-inverted state, the change. There are cases where the hold icon 9A is inverted and cases where it is not inverted, and the hold icon 9A suggests the degree of expectation of a hit in the fluctuation. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, in the first effect, the hold icon 9A is displayed in a state where it is not inverted at the first position of the display screen 7a, and the display screen is displayed. It is displayed in an inverted state at the second position of 7a. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the image inversion expectation suggestion effect.
[Modification 1]
In the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effects A to C, when the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C are highlighted, the images are flipped horizontally. However, the inversion method is not limited to left-right inversion, and may be, for example, up-down inversion.

[Modification 2]
In the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effects B and C, the characters highlighted on the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C were numbers, but characters other than the numbers may be highlighted.

[Modification 3]
The configurations of the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effects A to C may be combined as appropriate. Further, the specific image that suggests the degree of expectation of hit by changing the color and suggests the degree of expectation of hit by reversing may be an image other than the hold icon.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect B1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a specific image that suggests the degree of expectation of winning by changing the color.
The inversion of the specific image also suggests the degree of expectation of winning.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-1.
After the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state, the first effect in which the specific image is inverted can be executed.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2.
In the first effect, after the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state, the specific image is rotated, and after the rotation, the specific image is displayed in an inverted state.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B1-2 or aspect B1-3.
The specific image contains characters and
After the first effect, it is possible to execute a second effect in which the characters included in the specific image are inverted and changed to other characters.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-2 to B1-4.
The first effect is executed during the special figure fluctuation, and after the specific image is displayed in a non-inverted state, the specific image may or may not be inverted during the fluctuation. The specific image suggests the degree of expectation of a hit in the fluctuation.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect B1-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B1-2 to B1-5.
In the first effect, the specific image is displayed in a state where it is not inverted at the first position of the display means, and is displayed in a state where it is inverted at the second position of the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, specific modes pseudo-continuous effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 to 86. This specific mode pseudo continuous effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 to read the corresponding image data. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. The specific mode pseudo-continuous effect C will be described assuming that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Specific mode pseudo-continuous production A]
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining the specific mode pseudo-continuous effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 84 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (C), the image display effect A is executed. The image display effect A is an effect of moving and displaying the first image G1 indicating the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the first image G1 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The first image G1 may be framed out from the display screen 7a, or may be bounced off at the end of the display screen 7a. Here, along with displaying the first image G1, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R clearly start to fluctuate, or may display only the first image G1. In the first image G1, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "second time" are written. "NEXT" indicates the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and "second time" indicates that it is the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (D), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is the "8" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is the "4" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is the "NEXT" symbol. When the "NEXT" symbol is stopped, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (E), the image display effect B is executed. The image display effect B is an effect of moving and displaying the second image G2 indicating the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the second image G2 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The second image G2 may be framed out from the display screen 7a, or may be bounced off at the end of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R clearly start to fluctuate, or may display only the second image G2. In the second image G2, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "third time" are written. "NEXT" indicates the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and "third time" indicates that it is the third variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that make up the effect design (the same applies below). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icons 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 84 (G), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Specific mode pseudo-continuous production B]
FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a "SPECIAL" symbol. The "SPECIAL" symbol is a symbol in which the character image "SPECIAL" is added to the "NEXT" symbol. When the "SPECIAL" symbol is stopped, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (C), the image display effect A is executed. The image display effect A is an effect of moving and displaying the first image G1 indicating the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the first image G1 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The first image G1 may be framed out from the display screen 7a, or may be bounced off at the end of the display screen 7a. Here, along with displaying the first image G1, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R clearly start to fluctuate, or may display only the first image G1. In the first image G1, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "second time" are written. "NEXT" indicates the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and "second time" indicates that it is the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (D), the image display effect B is executed. The image display effect B is an effect of moving and displaying the second image G2 indicating the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the second image G2 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The second image G2 may be framed out from the display screen 7a, or may be bounced off at the end of the display screen 7a. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R clearly start to fluctuate, or may display only the second image G2. In the second image G2, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "third time" are written. "NEXT" indicates the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and "third time" indicates that it is the third variation including the first variation. However, since the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not temporarily stopped after the image display effect A, it indicates that this is the third variation in the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the image display effect C is executed. The image display effect C is an effect of moving and displaying the third image G3, which suggests the effect to be executed next. Here, the third image G3 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The third image G3 may be framed out from the display screen 7a, or may be bounced off at the end of the display screen 7a. The characters "battle" are written on the third image G3. "Battle" indicates the execution of a battle effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other. Further, the fluctuating effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode and displayed at the corner portion of the display screen 7a. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "3" symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow color to notify the victory of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Specific mode pseudo-continuous production C]
FIG. 86 is a diagram for explaining a specific mode pseudo-continuous effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 86 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, on the display screen 7a, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 7b below the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a “SPECIAL” symbol. The "SPECIAL" symbol is a symbol in which the character image "SPECIAL" is added to the "NEXT" symbol. When the "SPECIAL" symbol is stopped, the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (C), the image display effect A is executed. The image display effect A is an effect of moving and displaying the first image G1 indicating the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the first image G1 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The first image G1 is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Here, along with displaying the first image G1, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R clearly start to fluctuate, or may display only the first image G1. In the first image G1, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "second time" are written. "NEXT" indicates the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and "second time" indicates that it is the second variation including the first variation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (D), the image display effect B is executed. The image display effect B is an effect of moving and displaying the second image G2 indicating the execution of the pseudo continuous effect. Here, the second image G2 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The second image G2 is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. Here, along with the display of the second image G2, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may be a display in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R clearly start to fluctuate, or may display only the second image G2. In the second image G2, the characters "NEXT" and the characters "third time" are written. "NEXT" indicates the execution of the pseudo-continuous production, and "third time" indicates that it is the third variation including the first variation. However, since the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are not temporarily stopped after the image display effect A, it indicates that this is the third variation in the effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (E), the image display effect C is executed. The image display effect C is an effect of moving and displaying the third image G3, which suggests the effect to be executed next. Here, the third image G3 is moved and displayed in the lower right direction on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. The third image G3 is framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in the display screen 7b. The characters "battle" are written on the third image G3. "Battle" indicates the execution of a battle effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other. Further, the fluctuating effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode and displayed at the corner portion of the display screen 7a. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are both "3" symbols. Further, the ally character CRA is displayed straddling the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (G), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow color to notify the victory of the ally character CRA. Further, the ally character CRA and the background image RB are displayed so as to straddle the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 86 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, on the display screen 7a, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed on the display screen 7b below the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the specific mode pseudo-continuous production is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol after the start of fluctuation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first image G1 indicating the first execution of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed. Then, the pseudo-continuous production is executed (FIGS. 84 (A) to (C)). Further, when the middle effect symbol 8C is stopped at the "NEXT" symbol, the second image G2 indicating the second execution of the pseudo continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo continuous effect is executed (FIGS. 84 (D) and (E)). On the other hand, when the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops at the "SPECIAL" symbol after the start of fluctuation of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the first image G1 and the second image G2 are continuously displayed to execute the pseudo continuous effect. (FIGS. 85 (A) to (D), FIGS. 86 (A) to (D)). According to this configuration, since the pseudo-continuous production is continuously performed by stopping the "SPECIAL" symbol, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

The mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "first aspect of the specific aspect", and the mode in which the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "SPECIAL" symbol corresponds to the "second aspect of the specific aspect". Equivalent to. Further, the first image G1 corresponds to the "first image", and the second image G2 corresponds to the "second image".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the middle effect symbol 8C stops at the "SPECIAL" image, the display of the first image G1 and the second image G2 is followed by the display of the third image G3 suggesting the execution of the battle effect. After that, the battle production is executed. According to this configuration, the pseudo-continuous production is continuously performed by stopping the "SPECIAL" symbol, and the third image G3 subsequently suggests the execution of the battle production, which further surprises the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The battle effect corresponds to the "special effect", and the third image G3 corresponds to the "third image".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are moved and displayed on the display screens 7a (7a and 7b) (FIGS. 84 (C) (E), 85 (FIG. 85)). C) to (E), FIGS. 86 (C) to (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out as compared with the case where the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are simply displayed. You can improve your interest.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are moved and displayed, the frame is out from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 86 (C) to 86 (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, after the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 are moved and displayed, they are framed out from the display screen 7a and framed in to the display screen 7b (FIG. 86 (FIG. 86). C) to (E)). According to this configuration, the first image G1, the second image G2, and the third image G3 stand out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The display screen 7a corresponds to the "display screen", and the display screen 7b corresponds to the "another display screen".

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "first aspect" is the case where the medium effect symbol 8C among the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is the "NEXT" symbol. According to this configuration, the first aspect in which the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is determined becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved. The "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "special symbol".

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the "second aspect" is the "SPECIAL" symbol in which the character image "SPECIAL" is added to the "NEXT" symbol in the medium effect symbol 8C among the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. It has become a case. According to this configuration, the second mode in which the execution of the pseudo continuous effect and the execution of the special effect are determined becomes easy to understand, and the interest of the game can be improved. The character image "SPECIAL" corresponds to the "predetermined image".

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the specific mode pseudo-continuous production.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (FIGS. 84 (B) (D), FIG. 85 (B), and FIG. 86 (B), the left effect symbol 8L → the right effect symbol 8R → the middle effect symbol 8C are stopped in this order. On the other hand, the left, right, and left effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped at the same time, or the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be stopped at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, in the temporary stop effect of symbols (FIGS. 84 (B) (D), 85 (B), 86 (B), the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are stopped at different symbols. On the other hand, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be stopped at the same symbol (stopped in a reach mode).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the temporary stop effect of symbols (FIGS. 84 (B) (D), 85 (B), 86 (B), the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol are stopped at the middle effect symbol 8C. On the other hand, the left effect symbol 8L may be configured to stop the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol, or the right effect symbol 8R may be configured to stop the "NEXT" symbol and the "SPECIAL" symbol. Further, the “NEXT” symbol and the “SPECIAL” symbol may be stopped at two or more of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (FIGS. 84 (B) (D), FIG. 85 (B), and FIG. 86 (B), all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. On the other hand, at least one of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped. In this case, at least one of the temporarily stopped effect symbols is the "NEXT" symbol. , "SPECIAL" symbol may be used.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart from each other.

[Modification 6]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has been described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the same effect may be performed using the sub display screen 64.

[Modification 7]
In the above embodiment, the third image G3 suggesting the execution of the battle effect is displayed, and then the battle effect is executed (FIGS. 85 (E) to (G), FIGS. 86 (E) to (G). )). On the other hand, it may be configured so that effects other than battle effects can be selectively executed.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B2-1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images
On the display screen, when the fluctuating symbol is stopped in a specific mode, the gaming machine is capable of executing a pseudo continuous effect, which is a pseudo continuous effect.
When the symbol stops in the first aspect of the specific aspect after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, the first image showing the first execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and then the pseudo-continuous effect is executed. When the symbol is stopped in the first aspect, the second image showing the second execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is displayed and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.
When the symbol stops in the second aspect of the specific aspect after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, the first image and the second image are continuously displayed, and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-1.
When the symbol stops in the second aspect after the start of the fluctuation of the symbol, the display of the first image and the second image is followed by a third image suggesting a special effect to be executed next. After that, the special effect is executed.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-2.
At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is moved and displayed on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-3.
At least one of the first image, the second image, and the third image is framed out from the display screen after being moved and displayed on the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-4.
Of the first image, the second image, and the third image, the image framed out from the display screen is framed in to a display screen different from the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B2-1 to B2-5.
The first aspect is an aspect in which at least one of the stopped symbols is a special symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B2-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect B2-6.
In the second aspect, at least one of the stopped symbols is a symbol in which a predetermined image is added to the special symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, fluctuation straddling continuous effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 89. This variable straddling continuous effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the variation effect continuous effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Continuous production A across fluctuations]
FIG. 87 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation straddling continuous effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (C), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. Here, the NEXT image G is moved and displayed to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, along with displaying the NEXT image G, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may clearly indicate that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, or may display only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (D), the symbol determination stop effect is executed. The symbol confirmation stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is the "8" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is the "4" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is the "NEXT" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A are displayed. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

Next, when the next variation is started, the image display effect is executed as shown in FIG. 87 (E). The image display effect is an effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. Here, the NEXT image G is moved and displayed to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that make up the effect design (the same applies below). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 87 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Continuous production B across fluctuations]
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation straddling continuous effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. In the following, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is the "first hold icon 9A", the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the "second hold icon 9A", and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is the hold icon. 9A is called "third hold icon 9A". Further, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88C, the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. Here, the NEXT image G is moved and displayed to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, along with displaying the NEXT image G, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may clearly indicate that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, or may display only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9A are displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changed here. Specifically, it changes from white to green. The color of the hold icon is set stepwise according to the expectation of the jackpot. For example, the expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the symbol determination stop effect is executed. The symbol confirmation stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is the "8" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is the "4" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is the "5" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon 9C remains without disappearing. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A in the hold area moves to the change area as shown by the arrow Y3 and becomes the change icon 9C. Also in the hold area, the second hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y2 to become the first hold icon 9C. The third hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y1 to become the second hold icon 9C. Here, in particular, the green fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the previous fluctuation remains in the fluctuation region, and the effect that the first hold icon 9A collides with the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the previous fluctuation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (E), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. Here, in particular, due to the collision of the first hold icon 9A with the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change, the change icon 9C corresponding to the current change is held and changed to red. When the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the previous fluctuation is green, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the current fluctuation is green or a display color indicating an expectation degree higher than that.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the variable icon 9C that has changed to red are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 88 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Continuous production C across fluctuations]
FIG. 89 is a diagram for explaining the fluctuation straddling continuous effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 89A, the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. In the following, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is the "first hold icon 9A", the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the "second hold icon 9A", and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is the hold icon. 9A is called "third hold icon 9A". Further, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (B), the symbol temporary stop effect is executed. The symbol temporary stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is a "NEXT" symbol.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. Here, the NEXT image G is moved and displayed to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. Here, along with displaying the NEXT image G, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are re-variated. This re-variation may clearly indicate that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R start to change, or may display only the NEXT image G. The NEXT image G is an enlarged image of the "NEXT" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9A are displayed, and the display color of the variable icon 9C is changed here. Specifically, it changes from white to green. The color of the hold icon is set stepwise according to the expectation of the jackpot. For example, the expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. Further, the hold icon 9A and the change icon 9C are displayed enlarged from the time when the change starts.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (D), the symbol determination stop effect is executed. The symbol confirmation stop effect is an effect in which the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are fixedly stopped. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. After that, the left, middle, and right production symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is the "8" symbol, the right effect symbol 8R is the "4" symbol, and the middle effect symbol 8C is the "NEXT" symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are displayed. Here, the variable icon 9C remains without disappearing. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, the hold icon 9A shifts. Specifically, the first hold icon 9A in the hold area moves to the change area as shown by the arrow Y3 and becomes the change icon 9C. Also in the hold area, the second hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y2 to become the first hold icon 9C. The third hold icon 9A moves as indicated by the arrow Y1 to become the second hold icon 9C. Here, in particular, the green fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the previous fluctuation remains in the fluctuation region, and the effect that the first hold icon 9A collides with the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the previous fluctuation is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (E), the image display effect is executed. The image display effect is an effect of moving and displaying the NEXT image G. Here, the NEXT image G is moved and displayed to the right on the display screen 7a as indicated by the arrow Y. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. Here, in particular, due to the collision of the first hold icon 9A with the change icon 9C corresponding to the previous change, the change icon 9C corresponding to the current change is held and changed to green. When the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the previous fluctuation is green, the fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the current fluctuation is green or a display color indicating an expectation degree higher than that.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (F), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold and the change icon 9C that has changed to green are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (G), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 89 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop. The hold icon 9A has returned to its original size.

[Effect example]
The following is an example of the effect of continuous production across fluctuations.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the medium effect symbol 8C among the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R is fixedly stopped at the "NEXT" symbol, the image display effect of displaying the NEXT image G at the beginning of the next variation is executed. (FIGS. 87 (D) (E), FIGS. 89 (D) (E)). Further, in the game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, if the change icon 9C is on hold and remains, the effect of taking over the hold change is performed. (FIGS. 88 (D) (E), 89 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, since the effect performed in one variation can be performed across a plurality of variations, the range of the effect can be widened and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the shift movement of the hold icon 9A after the confirmation stop in the symbol confirmation stop effect, the subsequent image display effect, and the variation start effect correspond to the "variation straddle effect".

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol is fixedly stopped in the middle effect symbol 8C, the image display effect is executed in the next variation (FIGS. 87 (D) (E), 89 (D) (E). )). According to this configuration, since the stop of the "NEXT" symbol and the image display effect are executed over a plurality of fluctuations, the range of the effect can be widened and the interest of the game can be improved.

Of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, the mode in which the medium effect symbol 8C is the "NEXT" symbol corresponds to the "specific mode", and the image display effect corresponds to the "specific effect".

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the "NEXT" symbol is temporarily stopped at the middle effect symbol 8C, the image display effect is executed in the fluctuation following the temporary stop (FIGS. 87 (B) and (C)). ), FIG. 88 (B) (C), FIG. 89 (B) (C)). According to this configuration, since the stop of the "NEXT" symbol and the image display effect are executed in one variation, it is difficult to distinguish the case where the "NEXT" symbol is executed in one variation, and the effect is produced without giving a sense of discomfort. It is possible to widen the range of games and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped, if the change icon 9C is on hold and remains, the effect of taking over the hold change is performed (FIG. 88 (D) (E), FIGS. 89 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the pending change is inherited across the fluctuation, so that the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the shift movement of the hold icon 9A after the final stop in the symbol final stop effect, and the subsequent image display effect and variable start effect (FIGS. 88 (D) (E) and 89 (D) (E)) are shown. Corresponds to "holding continuation production".

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are fixedly stopped and the change icon 9C is changed to green, the first hold icon 9A in the hold area moves to the change area. Then, the variable icon 9C is green or red, which has a higher expectation than green (FIGS. 88 (D) (E) and 89 (D) (E)). According to this configuration, the holding change is the same as the holding change or the holding change with a higher degree of expectation is obtained across the fluctuation, so that the interest of the game can be improved. The green variable icon 9C corresponds to the "first holding mode", and the red variable icon 9C corresponds to the "second holding mode".

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the symbol determination stop effect, the green fluctuation icon 9C corresponding to the previous fluctuation remains in the fluctuation region, and the first hold icon 9A corresponds to the previous fluctuation. An effect of colliding with the icon 9C is performed (FIGS. 88 (D) and 89 (D)). According to this configuration, the effect of taking over the pending changes across fluctuations stands out, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the continuous effect across fluctuations.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the symbol temporary stop effect (FIG. 87 (B), FIG. 88 (B), FIG. 89 (B)) and the symbol final stop effect (FIG. 87 (D), FIG. 88 (D), FIG. 89 (D)). )), The left effect symbol 8L → the right effect symbol 8R → the middle effect symbol 8C were stopped in this order. On the other hand, the left and right effect symbols 8L and 8R may be stopped at the same time, or the left, middle and right effect symbols 8L, 8C and 8R may be stopped at the same time.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the symbol temporary stop effect (FIG. 87 (B), FIG. 88 (B), FIG. 89 (B)) and the symbol final stop effect (FIG. 87 (D), FIG. 88 (D), FIG. 89 (D)). )), The left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are configured to stop at different symbols. On the other hand, the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R may be stopped at the same symbol (stop in the reach mode).

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, in the temporary stop effect of the symbol (FIG. 87 (B), 88 (B), 89 (B)) and the final stop effect of the symbol (FIG. 87 (D), 89 (D)), the medium effect is produced. The "NEXT" symbol was stopped at the symbol 8C. On the other hand, the "NEXT" symbol may be stopped at the left effect symbol 8L, or the "NEXT" symbol may be stopped at the right effect symbol 8R. Further, the "NEXT" symbol may be stopped at two or more of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are temporarily stopped.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, in the symbol temporary stop effect (FIGS. 87 (B), 88 (B), 89 (B)), all of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are temporarily stopped. It was. On the other hand, at least one of the left, middle, and right effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped. In this case, at least one of the temporarily stopped effect symbols may be a "NEXT" symbol.

[Modification 5]
In the above embodiment, the variable icon 9C and the reserved icon 9A are enlarged and displayed with the pending change of the variable icon 9C (FIGS. 89 (C) to (F)). On the other hand, instead of the enlarged display, for example, the character icon related to the theme of the game machine 1 may be changed. At this time, it is conceivable that at least one of the variable icon 9C and the three hold icons 9C is a character icon.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect B3-1]
Equipped with a display screen that displays images
When the fluctuating symbol is fixedly stopped on the display screen, it is possible to execute a fluctuation straddling effect which is an effect having continuity from the end of the current variation to the beginning of the next variation in the next variation.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-1.
The variable straddling effect includes an effect of executing a specific effect in the next variation so as to be continuous with the fixed stop when the fluctuating symbol on the display screen is fixedly stopped in a specific mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-2.
When the fluctuating symbol on the display screen is temporarily stopped in the specific mode, the specific effect can be executed in the fluctuation so as to be continuous with the temporary stop.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects B3-1 to B3-3.
The fluctuation straddling effect includes a hold continuation effect that takes over the hold change of the change icon in the next change when the change icon displayed in the change area is on hold.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-4.
In the hold continuation effect, when the change icon is held and changed to the first hold mode, the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area in the next change, and the change icon is moved to the change area. When becomes, the first holding mode is set, or the second holding mode is expected to shift to an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first holding mode.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect B3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect B3-5.
When the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area, the change icon of the previous change remains in the change area, and the hold icon becomes the change icon of the previous change. Perform a colliding effect,
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the hold icon interlocking effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 92. This hold icon interlocking effect is executed during a variable effect of a special symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold icon interlocking effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and displayed by the image display device 7. The image is displayed on the screen 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Hold icon interlocking effect A]
FIG. 90 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect A. This hold icon interlocking effect A is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the hold icon interlocking effect A, as shown in FIG. 90 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the appearance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuating is shown, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holding unit 9CC, the four hold icons 9A, and the four hold holding units 9AA Is displayed. The variable icon holding unit 9CC is arranged below the variable icon 9C and is a holding unit for supporting the variable icon 9C. Each of the four hold holding portions 9AA is a holding portion for supporting the hold icon 9A. The hold icons 9A are arranged on the hold holding unit 9AA from the left in the order of winning in the first starting port 20, up to four. In the hold icon 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the winning of the first start port 20 is the oldest) is also called the first hold icon, and in the hold icon 9A, the second hold icon from the left (first start). The second oldest winning icon on the mouth 20) is also called the second holding icon, and the third holding icon from the left (the third oldest winning on the first starting port 20) is also called the third holding icon. , The fourth hold icon from the left (the winning of the first starting port 20 is the newest) is also called the fourth hold icon. Further, in the hold holding unit 9AA, the hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon is also referred to as a first hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon is also referred to as a second hold holding unit. The hold holding unit that holds the third hold icon is also referred to as a third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the fourth hold icon is also referred to as a fourth hold holding unit.
The four hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are formed by a white circle.
Further, among the hold icons 9A, the fourth hold icon is a hold icon that triggers the hold icon movement effect described later, and is therefore also referred to as a target hold. In other words, the hold icon movement effect, which will be described later, is performed based on the fact that the fourth hold icon is displayed (specifically, the game ball wins the first start port 20 in the three hold states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (B), the hold icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding unit 9AA both move (ascend) upward. In this case, the moving speeds of the fourth hold icon and the fourth hold holding unit are the same. Also in the following hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, the moving speed is the same. Not limited to this, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold icon, and the hold icon may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move fast. The movement direction of the hold icon (hold hold unit) is different from the shift direction (left direction) of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (C), the hold icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding part 9AA move (rise) further upward. At the same time, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold / hold part of the hold / hold portion 9AA both move (rise) upward. In this case, the moving speeds of the third hold icon (third hold and hold unit) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the third hold icon (third hold holding part) than for the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding part). The hold icon 4 (fourth hold hold) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (D), the hold icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding unit 9AA change direction from the upper direction and move downward. The third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold icon of the hold icon 9AA move (down) to, and the third hold icon 9A of the hold icon 9A further moves (rises) upward to the hold icon 9A. The second hold icon and the second hold / hold portion 9AA of the hold / hold portion 9AA both move (rise) upward. In this case, the moving speeds of the second hold icon (second hold and hold unit) and the third hold icon (third hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the second hold icon (second hold holding part) than for the third hold icon (third hold holding part). The hold icon 3 (third hold hold) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (E), the hold icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding unit 9AA return to the position before the movement and stop. The third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold icon of the hold holding unit 9AA change direction from the upper direction to the lower side, move downward (downward), and hold the hold icon. The second hold icon of 9A and the second hold icon of 9AA are further moved (raised) upward, and the first hold icon and hold of the hold icon 9A are held. The first holding holding portion of the holding portion 9AA moves (rises) upward together with the holding holding portion. In this case, the moving speeds of the first hold icon (first hold and hold unit) and the second hold icon (second hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the first hold icon (first hold holding part) than for the second hold icon (second hold holding part). The 2 hold icon (second hold hold) may be faster than the first hold icon (1 hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (F), the hold icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold / hold part of the hold / hold unit 9AA return to the position before the movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A The second hold icon and the second hold icon 9AA of the hold icon 9A change the direction from the upper direction to the lower direction and move (lower) downward, and the hold icon 9A is used. The first hold icon and the first hold / hold portion of the hold / hold portion 9AA further move (rise) upward, and the variable icon 9C moves (rise) upward. In this case, the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9CC may move upward together with the variable icon holding unit 9CC. Further, the movement speed amount of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding unit), and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) is the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed amount may be faster for the first hold icon (first hold holding part) than for the second hold icon (second hold holding part). The second hold icon (second hold hold) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (G), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed with the outliers of "2", "3", and "4", and the second hold icon and the hold holding portion 9AA of the hold icons 9A are displayed. The second hold icon, the first hold icon of the hold icon 9A, the first hold icon of the hold icon 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are located at the positions before movement. Go back and stop.
In this way, in the hold icon movement effect, a wave-like effect can be performed by the movements of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding unit 9AA, and the variable icon 9C.
In the hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon 9A moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Further, when the holding holding portion 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, the hold icon 9A may be moved up or down while moving up and down (for example, like bouncing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 90 (H), the hold icon shift effect is performed. In this hold icon shift effect, among the hold icons 9A, the first hold icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC to become the variable icon, and the second hold icon moves to the first hold holding section. It becomes the first hold icon, the third hold icon moves to the second hold holding part and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding part. It becomes the third hold icon.

After that, the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold hold section, the new second hold icon, the second hold hold section, and the new third hold section. Using the icon (target hold) and the third hold holding unit, the hold icon movement effect as described above is performed. After that, every time the hold icon shift effect is performed, the hold icon movement effect as described above is performed after the hold shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, an effect of moving the variable icon 9C upward as in the hold icon movement effect E is performed, and a series of these effects is completed.

[Hold icon interlocking effect B]
FIG. 91 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect B. This hold icon interlocking effect B is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the hold icon interlocking effect B, as shown in FIG. 91 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the appearance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuating is shown, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holding unit 9CC, the four hold icons 9A, and the four hold holding units 9AA Is displayed. The variable icon holding unit 9CC is arranged below the variable icon 9C and is a holding unit for supporting the variable icon 9C. Each of the four hold holding portions 9AA is a holding portion for supporting the hold icon 9A. The hold icons 9A are arranged on the hold holding unit 9AA from the left in the order of winning in the first starting port 20, up to four. In the hold icon 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the winning of the first start port 20 is the oldest) is also called the first hold icon, and in the hold icon 9A, the second hold icon from the left (first start). The second oldest winning icon on the mouth 20) is also called the second holding icon, and the third holding icon from the left (the third oldest winning on the first starting port 20) is also called the third holding icon. , The fourth hold icon from the left (the winning of the first starting port 20 is the newest) is also called the fourth hold icon. Further, in the hold holding unit 9AA, the hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon is also referred to as a first hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon is also referred to as a second hold holding unit. The hold holding unit that holds the third hold icon is also referred to as a third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the fourth hold icon is also referred to as a fourth hold holding unit.
The four hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are formed by a white circle.
Further, among the hold icons 9A, the fourth hold icon is a hold icon that triggers the hold icon movement effect described later, and is therefore also referred to as a target hold. In other words, the hold icon movement effect, which will be described later, is performed based on the fact that the fourth hold icon is displayed (specifically, the game ball wins the first start port 20 in the three hold states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (B), the hold icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding unit 9AA both move (rise) upward. The fourth hold icon (target hold) changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91 (B), the change to red is indicated by cross-hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the fourth hold icon and the fourth hold holding unit are the same. Also in the following hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, the moving speed is the same. Not limited to this, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold icon, and the hold icon may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move fast. The movement direction of the hold icon (hold hold unit) is different from the shift direction (left direction) of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (C), the hold icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding part 9AA move (rise) further upward. At the same time, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold / hold part of the hold / hold part 9AA both move (rise) upward, and the third hold icon changes from white to red. (In the example of FIG. 91 (C), the appearance of the change to red is shown by cross-hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the third hold icon (third hold and hold unit) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the third hold icon (third hold holding part) than for the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding part). The hold icon 4 (fourth hold hold) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (D), the hold icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding part 9AA change direction from the upper direction and move downward. The third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold icon of the hold icon 9AA move (down) to, and the third hold icon 9A of the hold icon 9A further moves (rises) upward to the hold icon 9A. Both the second hold icon and the second hold holder 9AA move (rise) upward, and the second hold icon changes from white to red (FIG. 91). In the example of (D), the state of changing to red is shown by cross-hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the second hold icon (second hold and hold unit) and the third hold icon (third hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the second hold icon (second hold holding part) than for the third hold icon (third hold holding part). The hold icon 3 (third hold hold) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (E), the hold icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding unit 9AA return to the position before the movement and stop. The third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold icon of the hold holding unit 9AA change direction from the upper direction to the lower side, move downward (downward), and hold the hold icon. The second hold icon of 9A and the second hold icon of 9AA are further moved (raised) upward, and the first hold icon and hold of the hold icon 9A are held. The first hold holding part of the holding part 9AA moves (rises) upward together, and the first holding icon changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91 (E), it turns red. The changed state is shown by cross-hatching). In this case, the moving speeds of the first hold icon (first hold and hold unit) and the second hold icon (second hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the first hold icon (first hold holding part) than for the second hold icon (second hold holding part). The 2 hold icon (second hold hold) may be faster than the first hold icon (1 hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (F), the hold icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold / hold part of the hold / hold part 9AA return to the position before the movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A The second hold icon and the second hold icon 9AA of the hold icon 9A change direction from the upper direction to the lower side and move (lower) downward, and the hold icon 9A is used. The first hold icon and the first hold / hold part of the hold / hold part 9AA further move (rise) upward, and the change icon 9C moves (rises) upward and the change. The icon 9C changes from white to red (in the example of FIG. 91 (F), the appearance of the change to red is shown by cross-hatching). In this case, the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9CC may move upward together with the variable icon holding unit 9CC. Further, the movement speed amount of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding unit), and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) is the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed amount may be faster for the first hold icon (first hold holding part) than for the second hold icon (second hold holding part). The second hold icon (second hold hold) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (G), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed with the outliers of "2", "3", and "4", and the second hold icon and the hold holding portion 9AA of the hold icons 9A are displayed. The second hold icon, the first hold icon of the hold icon 9A, the first hold icon of the hold icon 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are located at the positions before movement. Go back and stop. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to red hold.
In this way, in the hold icon movement effect, each time the hold icon 9A moves, it changes to red hold, and the movement of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding unit 9AA, and the variable icon 9C creates a wave-like effect. be able to.
In the hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon 9A moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Further, when the holding holding portion 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, the hold icon 9A may be moved up or down while moving up and down (for example, like bouncing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 91 (H), the hold icon shift effect is performed. In this hold icon shift effect, among the hold icons 9A, the first hold icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC to become the variable icon, and the second hold icon moves to the first hold holding section. It becomes the first hold icon, the third hold icon moves to the second hold holding part and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding part. It becomes the third hold icon.

After that, the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold hold section, the new second hold icon, the second hold hold section, and the new third hold section. Using the icon (target hold) and the third hold holding unit, the hold icon movement effect as described above is performed. At this time, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain as smiling characters. After that, every time the hold icon shift effect is performed, the hold icon movement effect as described above is performed after the hold shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, the variable icon 9C is moved upward as in the hold icon movement effect E in the state where the variable icon is held in red, and a series of these effects is performed. Is finished.

[Hold icon interlocking effect C]
FIG. 92 is a diagram for explaining the hold icon interlocking effect C. This hold icon interlocking effect C is an effect performed during one change of the special symbol. In the hold icon interlocking effect C, as shown in FIG. 92 (A), first, the decorative symbol variation effect is performed. In this decorative symbol variation effect, the appearance of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R fluctuating is shown, and the variation icon 9C, the variation icon holding unit 9CC, the four hold icons 9A, and the four hold holding units 9AA Is displayed. The variable icon holding unit 9CC is arranged below the variable icon 9C and is a holding unit for supporting the variable icon 9C. Each of the four hold holding portions 9AA is a holding portion for supporting the hold icon 9A. The hold icons 9A are arranged on the hold holding unit 9AA from the left in the order of winning in the first starting port 20, up to four. In the hold icon 9A, the leftmost hold icon (the winning of the first start port 20 is the oldest) is also called the first hold icon, and in the hold icon 9A, the second hold icon from the left (first start). The second oldest winning icon on the mouth 20) is also called the second holding icon, and the third holding icon from the left (the third oldest winning on the first starting port 20) is also called the third holding icon. , The fourth hold icon from the left (the winning of the first starting port 20 is the newest) is also called the fourth hold icon. Further, in the hold holding unit 9AA, the hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon is also referred to as a first hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon is also referred to as a second hold holding unit. The hold holding unit that holds the third hold icon is also referred to as a third hold holding unit, and the hold holding unit that holds the fourth hold icon is also referred to as a fourth hold holding unit.
The four hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C are formed by a white circle.
Further, among the hold icons 9A, the fourth hold icon is a hold icon that triggers the hold icon movement effect described later, and is therefore also referred to as a target hold. In other words, the hold icon movement effect, which will be described later, is performed based on the fact that the fourth hold icon is displayed (specifically, the game ball wins the first start port 20 in the three hold states).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (B), the hold icon movement effect A is performed. In this hold icon movement effect A, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding unit 9AA both move (rise) upward. The fourth hold icon (target hold) changes from a circular shape to a smiling character (hereinafter, also referred to as a smiling character). In this case, the moving speeds of the fourth hold icon and the fourth hold holding unit are the same. Also in the following hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, the moving speed is the same. Not limited to this, when the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together, the hold icon may move faster than the hold icon, and the hold icon may move faster than the hold icon. You can also move fast. The movement direction of the hold icon (hold hold unit) is different from the shift direction (left direction) of the hold icon.

Next, as shown in FIG. 92C, the hold icon movement effect B is performed. In this hold icon movement effect B, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding part 9AA move (rise) further upward. At the same time, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold / hold part of the hold / hold part 9AA both move (rise) upward, and the third hold icon changes from a circular shape. It changes into a smiling character. In this case, the moving speeds of the third hold icon (third hold and hold unit) and the fourth hold icon (fourth hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the third hold icon (third hold holding part) than for the fourth hold icon (fourth hold holding part). The hold icon 4 (fourth hold hold) may be faster than the third hold icon (third hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (D), the hold icon movement effect C is performed. In this hold icon movement effect C, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding part 9AA change direction from the upper direction and move downward. The third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold icon of the hold icon 9AA move (down) to, and the third hold icon 9A of the hold icon 9A further moves (rises) upward to the hold icon 9A. Both the second hold icon and the second hold hold part 9AA move (rise) upward, and the second hold icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. .. In this case, the moving speeds of the second hold icon (second hold and hold unit) and the third hold icon (third hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the second hold icon (second hold holding part) than for the third hold icon (third hold holding part). The hold icon 3 (third hold hold) may be faster than the second hold icon (second hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (E), the hold icon movement effect D is performed. In this hold icon movement effect D, the fourth hold icon (target hold) of the hold icon 9A and the fourth hold holding part of the hold holding unit 9AA return to the position before the movement and stop. The third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold icon of the hold holding unit 9AA change direction from the upper direction to the lower side, move downward (downward), and hold the hold icon. The second hold icon of 9A and the second hold icon of 9AA are further moved (raised) upward, and the first hold icon and hold of the hold icon 9A are held. The first holding holding portion of the holding portion 9AA moves (rises) upward together, and the first holding icon changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the moving speeds of the first hold icon (first hold and hold unit) and the second hold icon (second hold and hold part) are the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed may be faster for the first hold icon (first hold holding part) than for the second hold icon (second hold holding part). The 2 hold icon (second hold hold) may be faster than the first hold icon (1 hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (F), the hold icon movement effect E is performed. In this hold icon movement effect E, the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A and the third hold / hold part of the hold / hold part 9AA return to the position before the movement and stop, and the hold icon 9A The second hold icon and the second hold icon 9AA of the hold icon 9A change direction from the upper direction to the lower side and move (lower) downward, and the hold icon 9A is used. The first hold icon and the first hold / hold part of the hold / hold part 9AA further move (rise) upward, and the change icon 9C moves (rises) upward and the change. Icon 9C changes from a circular shape to a smiling character. In this case, the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not move together with the variable icon 9C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable icon 9CC may move upward together with the variable icon holding unit 9CC. Further, the movement speed amount of the variable icon 9C, the first hold icon (first hold holding unit), and the second hold icon (second hold holding unit) is the same. However, the movement speed is not limited to this, and the movement speed amount may be faster for the first hold icon (first hold holding part) than for the second hold icon (second hold holding part). The second hold icon (second hold hold) may be faster than the first hold icon (first hold hold).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (G), the decorative symbol stop effect is performed. In this decorative symbol stop effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed with the outliers of "2", "3", and "4", and the second hold icon and the hold holding portion 9AA of the hold icons 9A are displayed. The second hold icon, the first hold icon of the hold icon 9A, the first hold icon of the hold icon 9AA, and the variable icon 9C are located at the positions before movement. Go back and stop. In this case, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain changed to a smiling character.
In this way, in the hold icon movement effect, each time the hold icon 9A moves, it changes to a smiling character, and the movement of the hold icon 9A, the hold holding unit 9AA, and the variable icon 9C creates a wave-like effect. be able to.
In the hold icon movement effect, when the hold icon 9A moves upward or downward, the movement speed may be changed. Further, when the holding holding portion 9AA moves upward or downward, the moving speed may be changed. Further, the hold icon 9A may be moved up or down while moving up and down (for example, like bouncing).

Next, as shown in FIG. 92 (H), the hold icon shift effect is performed. In this hold icon shift effect, among the hold icons 9A, the first hold icon moves to the variable icon holding section 9CC to become the variable icon, and the second hold icon moves to the first hold holding section. It becomes the first hold icon, the third hold icon moves to the second hold holding part and becomes the second hold icon, and the fourth hold icon (target hold) moves to the third hold holding part. It becomes the third hold icon.

After that, the new variable icon 9C, the new first hold icon, the first hold hold section, the new second hold icon, the second hold hold section, and the new third hold section. Using the icon (target hold) and the third hold holding unit, the hold icon movement effect as described above is performed. At this time, the hold icon 9A and the variable icon 9C remain as smiling characters. After that, every time the hold icon shift effect is performed, the hold icon movement effect as described above is performed after the hold shift. Then, when the target hold becomes the variable icon, the variable icon 9C is moved upward as in the hold icon movement effect E while the variable icon is a smiling character, and a series of these effects is performed. Is finished.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned hold icon interlocking effect C, when the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C moves in the hold icon movement effect, all the characters are changed to smiling characters, but the present invention is not limited to this, and each icon has a different character. It may be changed to. For example, in the hold icon movement effect B, the character changes from a circle to a character AA different from the smiling character when the third hold icon moves, and in the hold icon movement effect C, the circle changes when the second hold icon moves. Changes to a character BB different from the smiling character, and in the hold icon movement effect D, the character changes from a circle to a character CC different from the smile character when the first hold icon moves. When the variable icon moves, it may change from a circular character to a character DD different from the smiling character. In this way, it is possible to produce an impactful effect.

In the above-mentioned hold icon interlocking effect C, when the hold icon movement effect is performed again after the hold icon is shifted in the hold icon shift effect, the smile character is used as it is, but the hold is not limited to this. After the icon shift effect, the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C may be changed to a character different from the smiling character when the movement is started by the hold icon movement effect. For example, after the hold icon is shifted in the hold icon shift effect (for example, after FIG. 92 (H)), when the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts moving in the hold icon move effect, a smile is obtained. It changes to a character XX different from the character. Then, when the hold icon shifts again in the hold icon shift effect and the hold icon 9A or the variable icon 9C starts moving in the hold icon move effect, the character YY changes to a character YY different from the character XX. .. In this way, it is possible to produce an impactful effect.

In the above-mentioned hold icon interlocking effects A to C, the hold icon movement effect is performed based on the display of the fourth hold icon among the hold icons 9A, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the hold icon 9A is not limited to this. Of these, the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the fact that a hold icon different from the fourth hold icon is displayed. For example, the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of the third hold icon of the hold icon 9A, or based on the display of the second hold icon of the hold icon 9A. The hold icon movement effect may be performed, or the hold icon movement effect may be performed based on the display of the first hold icon of the hold icon 9A.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned hold icon interlocking effects A to C, a decorative symbol variation effect for displaying the hold icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA for holding the hold icon 9A is performed, and then the hold icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA are displayed. Hold icon movement effect that moves together is performed. According to this configuration, the hold icon 9A moves and the hold holding unit 9AA moves, so that the expectation for the jackpot for the target hold can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the hold icon interlocking effects B and C, the hold icon 9A changes from the first mode (white hold) to the second mode (green hold or first character hold) while moving together with the hold icon 9AA. To do. According to this configuration, in addition to the effect that the hold icon 9A moves and the hold holding unit 9AA moves, the hold icon 9A moves from the first mode (white hold) to the second mode (green hold or second mode). Since it changes to (1 character hold), the expectation for the jackpot for the target hold can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the hold icon interlocking effects A to C, the hold icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA are displayed, and the variable icon 9C and the variable icon holding unit 9CC for holding the variable icon 9C are displayed, and then the variable icon 9C is displayed. The variable icon 9C moves according to the movement of the hold icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA. According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C also moves according to the movement of the hold icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA, so that the expectation for the jackpot for the target hold can be further improved, and the game can be played. You can improve your interest.

In the hold icon interlocking effects A to C, the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not move even though the variable icon 9C moves. According to this configuration, the variable icon 9C also moves according to the movement of the hold icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA, whereas the variable icon holding unit 9CC does not move together. The variable icon 9C can be emphasized by losing the sensation, and as a result, the expectation for the jackpot for the target hold can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the hold icon interlocking effects A to C, the hold icon 9A includes a first hold icon (for example, the leftmost hold icon) and a second hold icon (for example, the second hold icon from the left). The hold holding unit 9AA includes a first hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon and a second hold holding unit that holds the second hold icon, and includes a first hold icon and a first hold icon. The hold holding part is displayed, the second hold icon and the second hold holding part are displayed, and then the first hold icon and the first hold holding part move together and the second hold part is displayed. The hold icon and the second hold holding unit move together, and the moving direction of the first holding holding part and the moving direction of the second holding holding part may be different. According to this configuration, the movements of the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit and the movements of the second hold icon and the second hold holding part are relative to each other or pass each other, and are held. The movements of the icon 9A and the hold holding unit 9AA can be impressed, and as a result, the expectation for the jackpot for the target hold can be further improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XD-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect for displaying the hold icon and the hold holding unit for holding the hold icon.
The second display effect is a display effect in which the hold icon and the hold holding unit move together.
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-1.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the hold icon changes from the first aspect to the second aspect while moving together with the hold holding portion.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-2.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the hold icon and the hold holding unit are displayed, and the variable icon and the variable icon holding unit for holding the variable icon are displayed, and then the variable icon holding unit is displayed. In the second display effect, the variable icon moves according to the movement of the hold icon and the hold holding unit.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-3.
In the combination effect, in the second display effect, the variable icon holding portion does not move even though the variable icon moves.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XD-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XD-4.
The hold icon includes a first hold icon and a second hold icon.
The hold icon holding unit includes a first hold holding unit that holds the first hold icon and a second hold icon holding unit that holds the second hold icon.
In the combination effect, in the first display effect, the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit are displayed, and the second hold icon and the second hold holding unit are displayed. Is displayed, and then, in the second display effect, the first hold icon and the first hold holding unit move together, and the second hold icon and the second hold holding unit are displayed. May move together, and the moving direction of the first holding portion and the moving direction of the second holding portion may be different.
A game machine characterized by that.

The special hold change effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 93 to 95. This special hold change effect can be executed during the change effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the special hold change effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the device 7.

[Special hold change production A]
FIG. 93 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 93 (A), the effect during fluctuation is executed. The effect during fluctuation is an effect in which the effect symbol fluctuates at high speed. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. In the following, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is the "first hold icon 9A", the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the "second hold icon 9A", and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is the hold icon. 9A is called "third hold icon 9A". Further, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area". In addition, an information image IG "more 544 rotations" is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a. This indicates the number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until the so-called ceiling is reached.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (B), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop. Further, in the lower right part of the display screen 7a, an information image IG saying "more 544 rotations" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (C), the fluctuation start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start effect (first half) is an effect performed before the effect symbol starts to change. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area is held and changed from "white" to "green". The color of the hold icon is set stepwise according to the expectation of the jackpot. For example, the expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. In addition, the information image at the lower right of the display screen 7a has been updated to "543 more rotations". Here, in particular, the mode of the information image IG has changed. Specifically, the characters of the information image IG displayed in black are outlined characters. The mode of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (D), the fluctuation start effect (second half) is executed. The fluctuation start effect (second half) is an effect in which the first hold icon 9A, which has become “green” in the hold area, moves to the change area to become the change icon 9C, and the effect symbol starts to change. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. An information image IG in outline characters is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). The identification information refers to the numbers that make up the effect design (the same applies below). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The variable icon 9C is "green". An information image IG is displayed at the lower right of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the confirmation of the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 93 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Special hold change production B]
FIG. 94 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect B.
First, as shown in FIG. 94 (A), the effect during fluctuation is executed. The effect during fluctuation is an effect in which the effect symbol fluctuates at high speed. Here, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. In the following, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is the "first hold icon 9A", the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the "second hold icon 9A", and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is the hold icon. 9A is called "third hold icon 9A". Further, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area". Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG "more 544 rotations" is displayed. This indicates the number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until the so-called ceiling is reached. It is assumed that the display screen 7b is arranged so as to overlap the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (B), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “6” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop. Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG "more 544 rotations" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (C), the fluctuation start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start effect (first half) is an effect performed before the effect symbol starts to change. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area is held and changed from "white" to "green". The color of the hold icon is set stepwise according to the expectation of the jackpot. For example, the expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. In addition, the information image on the display screen 7b has been updated to "543 more rotations". Here, in particular, the mode of the information image IG has changed. Specifically, the characters of the information image IG displayed in black are outlined characters. The mode of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (D), the fluctuation start effect (second half) is executed. The fluctuation start effect (second half) is an effect in which the first hold icon 9A, which has become “green” in the hold area, moves to the change area to become the change icon 9C, and the effect symbol starts to change. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. The information image IG in outline characters is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The variable icon 9C is "green". Further, the information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other. In the battle effect, the information image IG on the display screen 7b is hidden, and the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. That is, the display screen 7b displays an image of a portion that covers the display screen 7a. Such display of the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the battle effect, and the enemy character CRB may be displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the confirmation of the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow. At this time, the ally character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. That is, even in the jackpot confirmation effect, the display screen 7b displays an image of a portion covering the display screen 7a. Such a display of the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the jackpot confirmation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 94 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b. This is because the information image GI showing the ceiling becomes unnecessary information in the case of a big hit.

[Special hold change production C]
FIG. 95 is a diagram for explaining the special hold change effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 95 (A), the effect during fluctuation is executed. The effect during fluctuation is an effect in which the effect symbol fluctuates at high speed. Here, on the display screen 7a, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9A corresponding to the first special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the first special figure hold storage area 85a, respectively. In the following, the hold icon 9A corresponding to the first storage area is the "first hold icon 9A", the hold icon 9A corresponding to the second storage area is the "second hold icon 9A", and the hold icon 9A corresponding to the third storage area is the hold icon. 9A is called "third hold icon 9A". Further, on the display screen 7a, the area where the hold icon 9A is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area". Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG "more 544 rotations" is displayed. This indicates the number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until the so-called ceiling is reached. It is assumed that the display screen 7b is arranged so as to overlap the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (B), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of loss. Here, on the display screen 7a, the left effect symbol 8L is a “1” symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a “6” symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a “2” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop. Further, on the display screen 7b, an information image IG "more 544 rotations" is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (C), the fluctuation start effect (first half) is executed. The fluctuation start effect (first half) is an effect performed before the effect symbol starts to change. Here, the first hold icon 9A displayed in the hold area is held and changed from "white" to "green". The color of the hold icon is set stepwise according to the expectation of the jackpot. For example, the expectation of the jackpot increases in the order of white → blue → green → purple → red → gold. In addition, the information image on the display screen 7b has been updated to show "Congratulations". That is, the mode of the information image IG has changed. The mode of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation for the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (D), the fluctuation start effect (second half) is executed. The fluctuation start effect (second half) is an effect in which the first hold icon 9A, which has become “green” in the hold area, moves to the change area to become the change icon 9C, and the effect symbol starts to change. Of course, the second hold icon 9A becomes the first hold icon 9A, and the third hold icon 9A becomes the second hold icon 9A. Here, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate at high speed. An information image IG "Congratulations" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (E), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the first special figure hold are displayed. The variable icon 9C is "green". Further, the information image IG is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (F), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other. In the battle effect, the information image IG on the display screen 7b is hidden, and the ally character CRA is displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. That is, the display screen 7b displays an image of a portion that covers the display screen 7a. Such display of the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the battle effect, and the enemy character CRB may be displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (G), the jackpot confirmation effect is executed. The jackpot confirmation effect is an effect of notifying the confirmation of the jackpot. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow. At this time, the ally character CRA and the background image RB are displayed across the display screen 7a and the display screen 7b. That is, even in the jackpot confirmation effect, the display screen 7b displays an image of a portion covering the display screen 7a. Such a display of the display screen 7b is continuously performed in the jackpot confirmation effect.

Next, as shown in FIG. 95 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, two hold icons 9A are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop. Nothing is displayed on the display screen 7b.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the special hold change effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the hold change (mode change) of the change icon 9C at the start of the change of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is held after the first hold icon 9A is held and changed in the hold area. This is performed by moving the changed first hold icon 9A to the variable region (FIGS. 93 (C) (D), 94 (C) (D), 95 (C) (D)). According to this configuration, the hold change of the hold icon becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved. The variable icon 9C corresponds to the “variable icon”, and the first hold icon 9A corresponds to the “hold icon”.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode of the information image IG is changed according to the hold change of the first hold icon 9A (FIGS. 93 (C), 94 (C), 95 (C)). According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The information image IG corresponds to the "information image".

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode is changed by changing the information image IG of black characters to outline characters (FIGS. 93 (C) and 94 (C)). According to this configuration, the change in the mode of the information image IG becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the so-called number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling is used as the information image IG (FIGS. 93 (A) to (E), FIGS. 94 (A) to (E), FIG. 95 (Fig. 95). A) (B)). According to this configuration, since the information image IG is useful information, the change in the mode of the information image IG becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the information image IG is displayed on a display screen 7b different from the display screen 7a (FIGS. 94 (A) to (E), FIGS. 95 (A) to (E)). According to this configuration, the change in the mode of the information image IG becomes conspicuous, and the interest of the game can be improved. The display screen 7a corresponds to the "display screen", and the display screen 7b corresponds to the "another display screen".

[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the mode of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation for the jackpot. According to this configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation by changing the mode of the information image IG, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the special hold change effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the information image IG indicates the number of rotations (number of fluctuations) until reaching the ceiling, but the information image IG is not particularly limited. For example, it may be information that the player may visually recognize during the game, such as the number of fluctuations from the jackpot (number of games), the number of jackpots, and the number of consecutive villas.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the display color of the variable icon 9C (first hold icon 9A) is changed. On the other hand, the shape of the variable icon 9C (first hold icon 9A) may be changed. For example, it is conceivable to change the variable icon 9C (first hold icon 9A) to the character icon of the theme of the game machine 1.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, as a change in the mode of the information image IG, black characters are outlined characters (FIGS. 93 (C) and 94 (C)). However, it may be changed to any display color. For example, it may be changed to blue, green, purple, red, gold, or the like.

[Modification example 4]
In the above embodiment, the mode of the information image IG is changed based on the degree of expectation of the transition to the jackpot game. On the other hand, the mode of the information image IG may be changed based on the degree of expectation of the transition to the small hit game and the degree of expectation for the big hit type in the case of a big hit.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C2-1]
It is possible to display the fluctuation of the symbol on the display screen, and before the symbol starts to fluctuate, the hold icon displayed in the hold area of the display screen moves to the fluctuation area of the display screen and the fluctuation is performed. It is a game machine that becomes an icon and the symbol starts to change.
The mode change of the change icon accompanying the start of the change of the symbol is performed by changing the mode of the hold icon in the hold area and then moving the hold icon whose mode has been changed to the change area.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-1.
The mode of the information image displaying predetermined information is changed according to the timing of the mode change of the hold icon.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2.
The mode of the information image is changed by changing the display color of the information image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C2-2 or aspect C2-3.
The information image is an image that displays information related to the variation of the symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-4.
The information image is an image displayed on a display screen different from the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-5.
The change in the aspect of the information image is performed based on the degree of expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C2-7]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects C2-2 to C2-6.
The change in the aspect of the information image changes the predetermined information displayed by the information image, and can notify the player of the determination of the transition to the advantageous gaming state, which is advantageous to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

The hold expectation degree effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 96 to 98. This hold expectation effect can be executed during the variable effect of the effect symbol. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the variation effect start command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the hold expectation degree effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image is displayed. An image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the display device 7. The hold expectation degree effects A to C are executed in the high accuracy high base state and the low accuracy high base state. It should be noted that the same execution can be performed even in the low accuracy and low base state. Further, in the hold expectation degree effect B, it is assumed that the image display device 7 has two display screens 7a and 7b.

[Holding Expectation Production A]
FIG. 96 is a diagram for explaining the hold expectation degree effect A.
First, as shown in FIG. 96 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is "first hold icon 9B", the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is "second hold icon 9B", and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area is. Is called the "third hold icon 9B". Further, the area where the hold icon 9B is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (B), the hold change effect A is executed. The hold change effect A is an effect in which the hold icon 9B changes to an expectation icon imitating an expectation image. Here, the mode of the third hold icon 9B is changed to the expectation degree icon of "hot?". The expectation degree icon "hot?" Means that it is unknown whether or not it is hot, and is the first aspect icon that withholds the suggestion of the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. The order of temporary stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not limited to this. Further, two or more of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Further, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. One of them is an expectation icon (first mode icon) of "hot?". The variable icon 9C is hidden at the same time as the confirmation stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (D), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. One of the hold icons 9B is an expectation icon (first mode icon) of "hot?".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (E), the hold change effect B is executed. The pending change effect B is an effect in which the expectation degree icon (first aspect icon) of the first aspect changes to the expectation degree icon (second aspect icon) of the second aspect. Here, the expectation icon (first aspect icon) of "hot?" Is changed to the expectation icon (second aspect icon) of "hot". With the change to the second aspect icon, the “hot” expectation image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The expectation icon is configured to include an image obtained by reducing the expectation image MG. Specifically, it is configured to include a reduced image of the character images of "hot", "heat", and "i".

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (F), the image movement effect is executed. The image movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to the lower left of the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y. At this time, the expected degree image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its mode can be changed. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" has changed to the vertical writing "hot".

After that, after a plurality of fluctuations, the expectation degree icon (second aspect icon) moves to the fluctuation region, and the fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 96 (G). The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an expectation degree icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the fluctuation area.

Next, as shown in FIG. 96 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the three effect symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). The identification information indicates a number constituting the effect symbol (the same applies hereinafter). Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. The expectation degree icon (second aspect icon) of the fluctuation area disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Holding Expectation Production B]
FIG. 97 is a diagram for explaining the hold expectation degree effect B. In the hold expectation degree effect B, the screen display device 7 has a display screen 7a and a display screen 7b arranged so as to be adjacent to the lower right portion of the display screen 7a.
First, as shown in FIG. 97A, the fluctuation start effect is executed on the display screen 7a. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is "first hold icon 9B", the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is "second hold icon 9B", and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area is. Is called the "third hold icon 9B". Further, the area where the hold icon 9B is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 97B, the hold change effect A is executed on the display screen 7a. The hold change effect A is an effect in which the hold icon 9B changes to an expectation icon imitating an expectation image. Here, the mode of the third hold icon 9B is changed to the expectation degree icon of "hot?". The expectation degree icon "hot?" Means that it is unknown whether or not it is hot, and is the first aspect icon that withholds the suggestion of the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (C), the fixed stop effect (loss) is executed. The fixed stop effect (loss) is an effect in which the effect symbol is fixedly stopped in the form of loss. First, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the left effect symbol 8L becomes slow, and the left effect symbol 8L temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the right effect symbol 8R becomes slow, and the right effect symbol 8R temporarily stops. Next, the moving speed (fluctuation speed) of the middle effect symbol 8C becomes slow, and the middle effect symbol 8C temporarily stops. Then, the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped. The order of temporary stop of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is not limited to this. Further, two or more of the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R may be temporarily stopped at the same time. Here, the left effect symbol 8L is a "1" symbol, the middle effect symbol 8C is a "6" symbol, and the right effect symbol 8R is a "2" symbol. Further, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. One of them is an expectation icon (first mode icon) of "hot?". The variable icon 9C is hidden at the same time as the confirmation stop.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (D), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, two hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. One of the hold icons 9B is an expectation icon (first mode icon) of "hot?".

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (E), the hold change effect B is executed. The pending change effect B is an effect in which the expectation degree icon (first aspect icon) of the first aspect changes to the expectation degree icon (second aspect icon) of the second aspect. Here, the expectation icon (first aspect icon) of "hot?" Is changed to the expectation icon (second aspect icon) of "hot". With the change to the second aspect icon, the “hot” expectation image MG is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. The expectation icon is configured to include an image obtained by reducing the expectation image MG. Specifically, it is configured to include a reduced image of the character images of "hot", "heat", and "i".

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (F), the image movement effect is executed. The image movement effect is an effect in which the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed on the lower right of the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y, and then displayed on the display device 7b. At this time, the expected degree image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its mode can be changed. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" has changed to the vertical writing "hot".

After that, after a plurality of fluctuations, the expectation degree icon (second aspect icon) moves to the fluctuation region, and the fluctuation start effect is executed as shown in FIG. 97 (G). The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, an expectation degree icon (second mode icon) is displayed in the fluctuation area. Further, the expected degree image MG of "hot" is displayed on the display screen 7b.

Next, as shown in FIG. 97 (H), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the three effect symbols are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols is the same). Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. The expectation degree icon (second aspect icon) of the fluctuation area disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop. Further, the expected degree image MG of "hot" is displayed on the display screen 7b. Of course, the expected degree image MG of the display screen 7b may be hidden when the confirmation is stopped.

[Hold Expectation Production C]
FIG. 98 is a diagram for explaining the hold expectation degree effect C.
First, as shown in FIG. 98 (A), the fluctuation start effect is executed. The fluctuation start effect is an effect in which the effect symbol starts to change. Here, it is shown that the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to fluctuate and fluctuate at high speed. At the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed. The three hold icons 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold correspond to the first storage area, the second storage area, and the third storage area of the second special figure hold storage area 85b, respectively. The hold icon 9B corresponding to the first storage area is "first hold icon 9B", the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second storage area is "second hold icon 9B", and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the third storage area is. Is called the "third hold icon 9B". Further, the area where the hold icon 9B is displayed is called a "hold area", and the area where the change icon 9C is displayed is called a "change area".

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (B), the expectation degree image display effect is executed. The expectation degree image display effect is an effect of displaying the expectation degree image in a predetermined area of the display screen 7a. Here, the expectation image MG of "hot" is displayed in the center of the display screen 7a. Further, at the lower part of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9B and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (C), the image movement effect is executed. The image movement effect is an effect of moving and displaying the expectation image MG displayed in the center of the display screen 7a to the lower left of the display screen 7a as indicated by an arrow Y. At this time, the expected degree image MG is displayed in a reduced size and its mode can be changed. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" has changed to the vertical writing "hot".

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (D), the reach formation effect is executed. The reach formation effect is an effect in which the effect symbol is temporarily stopped in the reach mode. The reach mode is generally a mode in which the left effect symbol and the right effect symbol are the same (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbol is the same). Here, both the left effect symbol 8L and the right effect symbol 8R are temporarily stopped at the “3” symbol. At the bottom of the display screen 7a, three hold icons 9A and the variable icon 9C corresponding to the second special figure hold are displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (E), the battle effect is executed. The battle production is a production in which the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. If the ally character CRA wins in this battle production, the jackpot will be confirmed. Here, the friendly character CRA and the enemy character CRB are facing each other.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (F), the winning / losing notification effect is executed. The victory / defeat notification effect is an effect of notifying the victory or defeat of the ally character CRA. Here, the ally character CRA is displayed, and the background image RB becomes a rainbow color to notify the victory of the ally character CRA.

Next, as shown in FIG. 98 (G), the fixed stop effect (hit) is executed. The fixed stop effect (hit) is an effect in which the effect symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are fixedly stopped in the form of a big hit. The jackpot mode is generally a mode in which the left, middle, and right effect symbols (specifically, the identification information constituting the effect symbols) are the same. Here, it is shown that all of the left effect symbol 8L, the middle effect symbol 8C, and the right effect symbol 8R are confirmed and stopped at the “3” symbol. Further, three hold icons 9B are displayed at the lower part of the display screen 7a. The variable icon 9C disappears at the same time as the confirmation stop.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the hold expectation effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation degree image MG suggesting the expectation degree of the transition to the jackpot game is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a (FIG. 98 (B)). Then, under this configuration, in order to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the mode of the hold icon 9B displayed in the hold area of the display screen 7a, the mode of the hold icon 9B is changed to the expectation icon imitating the expectation image MG. Change (FIGS. 96 (B) (E), 97 (B) (E)). According to this configuration, since the hold icon changes to the expectation icon that imitates the expectation image, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

The jackpot game corresponds to the "advantageous game state", the expected degree image MG corresponds to the "expected degree image", and the central region of the display screen 7a on which the expected degree image MG is displayed becomes the "predetermined area". Equivalent to.

[Effect 2]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation degree icon includes a reduced image of the character images of the expectation degree image MG "heat" and "i" (FIGS. 96 (B) (E), 97 (FIG. 97). B) (E)). According to this configuration, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree icon indicates the expectation degree as well as the expectation degree image, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 3]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, there are an expectation icon of the first aspect of "hot?" Which holds the suggestion of the expectation degree and an expectation degree icon of the second aspect of "hot" which suggests the expectation degree (" 96 (B) (E), 97 (B) (E)). According to this configuration, the player expects that the expectation icon of the first aspect changes to the expectation icon of the second aspect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the expectation icon of the first aspect changes to the expectation icon of the second aspect, the expectation image MG is displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a (FIG. 96 (E), FIG. 97 (E). According to this configuration, it is highly possible that the player's expectation is raised by displaying the expectation image MG in addition to the change of the icon, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expectation image MG displayed in the central portion of the display screen 7a is moved and displayed in another area (FIGS. 96 (F), 97 (F), 98 (C)). .. According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player gazes at the expectation image MG as compared with the case where only the expectation image MG is displayed, and the expectation image MG stands out, which further enhances the player. It is possible to have a sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

[Effect 6]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, the expected degree image MG is moved and displayed on a display screen 7b different from the display screen 7a (FIG. 97 (F)). According to this configuration, there is a high possibility that the player pays close attention to the expectation image MG, and by making the expectation image MG stand out, it is possible to give the player a further sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game. be able to. Further, by displaying the display on another display screen 7b, it is possible to improve the interest of the game without disturbing the production of the display screen 7a. The display screen 7a corresponds to the "display screen", and the display screen 7b corresponds to the "another display screen".

[Effect 7]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the expected degree image MG is displayed in another area, it is changed to a mode different from the case of displaying it in the central portion of the display screen 7a. Specifically, the horizontal writing "hot" is changed to the vertical writing "hot". According to this configuration, it is possible to realize an effect that effectively utilizes the area of the display screen 7a (7b), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the hold expectation effect.
[Modification 1]
In the above embodiment, the expected degree image MG that is moved and displayed in the image movement effect is not displayed in the subsequent effect (FIGS. 96 (F) to (H), FIGS. 98 (C) to (G)). On the other hand, the movement-displayed expectation image MG may be continuously displayed until the end of the fluctuation of the corresponding hold storage. Of course, it may be temporarily hidden during the fluctuation of the corresponding hold memory.

[Modification 2]
In the above embodiment, the display screens 7a and 7b are arranged so as to be adjacent to each other, but the display screens 7a and 7b may be arranged apart from each other. Further, the display screen 7b may be arranged so as to overlap the display screen 7a.

[Modification 3]
In the above embodiment, the image display device 7 has been described as having two display screens 7a and 7b, but the same effect may be performed using the sub display screen 64.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect C3-1]
It is a gaming machine capable of displaying an expectation image suggesting the expectation of transition to an advantageous gaming state that is advantageous to the player in a predetermined area of the display screen.
In suggesting the expectation by changing the mode of the hold icon displayed in the hold area of the display screen, it is possible to change the mode of the hold icon to an expectation icon imitating the expectation image. ,
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1.
The expectation icon includes a reduced image obtained by reducing at least a part of the expectation image.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-1 or aspect C3-2.
The expectation degree icon includes a first aspect icon that holds the suggestion of the expectation degree and a second aspect icon that suggests the expectation degree.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-3.
When the hold icon changes to the first aspect icon and then the first aspect icon changes to the second aspect icon, the expectation image is displayed in the predetermined area of the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-5]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-4.
The expected degree image displayed in the predetermined area of the display screen is then moved and displayed in a region different from the predetermined area.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5.
The other area is set to a display screen different from the display screen.
A game machine characterized by that.

[Aspect C3-7]
The gaming machine according to aspect C3-5 or aspect C3-6.
When the expectation image is displayed in the other area, it is changed in a manner different from that when it is displayed in the predetermined area.
A game machine characterized by that.

The operation means operation state notification effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 99 to 101. This operation means operation state notification effect is executed during a variation effect of the decorative symbol or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the operation means operation state notification effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 The image is displayed on the display screen 7a of the above and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). Further, the corresponding acoustic data is read from the ROM 103 and the sound is output from the speaker 67.

[Operating means Operation status notification effect A]
FIG. 99 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect A. FIG. 99 shows the state of the display screen 7a and the effect button 63. The operation means operation state notification effect is an effect of giving a predetermined notification to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses while the effect button 63 is operated. The effect button 63 has a first state (popped out state) when it is not operated (pressed) by the player and a second state (populated state or not popped out) when it is operated (pressed). The state can be changed to (state), and when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 99 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 is in a state (OFF) that is not operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 99 (A), in a state where the display screen 7a does not prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period), FIG. 99 (B) ), When the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 99 (C). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed, and a character image of "Oioioi" is also displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (D), the enlarged character image and the character image of "How long have you pressed the button?" Are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the effect button 63 is operated (pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses the effect button 63, the player can be notified to that effect.

In FIG. 99 (E), the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification in FIG. 99 (D) is shown. When the player stops pressing (applying force) the effect button 63, the character image and the character image of "How long have you pressed the button?" Disappear. The timing at which the display of the character image and the character image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the detection. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that were variablely displayed on the display screen 7a are stopped and displayed. Here, the stop is displayed in the form of a loss of "567".

When the next special figure change after the special figure change ended in FIG. 99 (F) is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and displayed again on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 99 (G). To. When the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) again by the player in a state where the display screen 7a is not prompting the player to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period), a counter (not shown) counts again. To start.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 99 (H). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed on 7a, and a character image of "Oioioi" is also displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (I), the enlarged character image and the character image of "hold down again?" Are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the effect button 63 is in a state of being operated (pressed) again. This is because the pressing of the effect button 63 for a predetermined period was repeated twice in a state where the player was not urged to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period). Here, since the effect button 63 was operated twice in succession, the previous change and the current change, the character image of "Oioioi" is not followed by the character image of "How long have you pressed the button?" In FIG. 99 (D). , The character image of "Hold it down again?" In FIG. 99 (I) is displayed. When the effect button 63 is operated again within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the character image of "How long have you pressed the button?" Is displayed for the first time, "Hold it again?" Character image is displayed.

Even after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed since the character image of "Hold and hold again?" Is displayed, the player is still operating (pressing) the effect button 63 (maintaining the pressed state). In that case, as shown in FIG. 99 (J), the content of the character image changes. Here, the text image switches (changes) from "Hold it down again?" To "Release your hand from the button!". Here, since it is highly possible that the player intentionally presses the effect button 63, the character image is switched to a stronger expression for stopping the press of the effect button 63.

In FIG. 99 (K), the display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification in FIG. 99 (J) is shown. When the player stops pressing (applying force) the effect button 63, the content of the character image changes while the display of the character image continues. Here, the text image switches from "Release your hand from the button!" To "Yes, well done." Then, when a predetermined period of time elapses after displaying the character image of "Yes, well done", the display of both the character image and the character image disappears.

On the other hand, when the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 again in the state of FIG. 99 (K), the character image and the character image of "Oioioi" are displayed immediately after the operation. Here, there is a high possibility that the player intentionally presses the effect button 63, and a tsukkomi is inserted.

[Operating means Operation status notification effect B]
FIG. 100 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect B. FIG. 100 shows the state of the display screen 7a and the effect button 63. The operation means operation state notification effect is an effect of giving a predetermined notification to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses while the effect button 63 is operated. The effect button 63 has a first state (popped out state) when it is not operated (pressed) by the player and a second state (populated state or not popped out) when it is operated (pressed). The state can be changed to (state), and when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 100 (A), decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a. The effect button 63 is in a state (OFF) that is not operated (pressed) by the player.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 100 (A), in a state where the display screen 7a does not prompt the player to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period), FIG. 100 (B). ), When the effect button 63 is operated (pressed, turned on) by the player, a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

As shown in FIG. 100 (B), the player presses the effect button 63 before a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (before the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the effect button 63 is operated (pressed). When the hand is released from 63 (pressing is stopped), the counter stops counting and the counter value is reset. After that, in a state where the player is not urged to operate the effect button 63 (outside the operation valid period), as shown in FIG. 100 (D), the effect button 63 is again operated (pressed, turned ON) by the player. ), The counter starts counting again.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display screen 7a is displayed as shown in FIG. 100 (E). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed, and a character image of "Oioioi" is also displayed. As a result, when the player unintentionally presses the effect button 63, the player can be notified to that effect. Here, the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at "2".

FIG. 100 (F) shows a display screen 7a when the player stops pressing the effect button 63 after the notification of FIG. 100 (E). When the player stops pressing (applying force) the effect button 63, the display of the character image and the character image of "Oioioi" disappears. The timing at which the display of the character image and the character image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the detection. You may. If the player continues to press the effect button 63 without stopping, the character image and the character image of FIG. 99 (D) of the image inversion expectation suggestion effect A are displayed. In FIG. 100 (F), the right decorative symbol 8R is also stopped and displayed at "2" and is in the reach state.

In FIG. 100 (G), in the reach state of "2 ↓ 2", the button image BTN, the operation promotion image RND composed of the characters "press !!", and the timer bar image TBI indicating the operation valid period are displayed. Has been done. Here, the player is urged to operate the effect button 63 (operation valid period). At this time, when the effect button 63 is operated (pressed) by the player, the counter does not start counting. This is because the operation of the effect button 63 is executed at an appropriate timing, so that it is not necessary to call attention to an unintended operation.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (H), after the effect is advanced by the operation of the effect button 63 during the operation valid period, that is, after the operation is out of the effective period, the player moves his / her hand from the effect button 63. If the pressing is continued without releasing the counter, a counter (not shown) starts counting again.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (presses) the effect button 63, the display screen is displayed again as shown in FIG. 100 (I). A character image of a black human silhouette is displayed on 7a, and a character image of "Oioioi" is also displayed. Here, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "3", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of "232".

When the next special figure change after the special figure change ended in FIG. 100 (I) is started, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are changed and displayed again on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 100 (J). To. At this time, if the player continues to press the effect button 63 without stopping, the character image and the character image of "Oioioi" are continuously displayed, and then the image inversion expectation degree suggestion effect A is shown in FIG. 99. The character image and the character image of (D) are displayed. On the other hand, when the player stops pressing the effect button 63, the display of the character image and the character image of "Oioioi" disappears as shown in FIG. 100 (J). The timing at which the display of the character image and the character image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pressing the effect button 63, or after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the detection. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (K), the button image BTN is displayed on the display screen 7a during the fluctuation of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and the player presses the effect button 63 immediately before the operation valid period starts. When the operation (pressing) of is started, the counter starts counting. This is because even immediately before the operation validity period, it is still outside the operation validity period. After that, as shown in FIG. 100 (L), in addition to the button image BTN, the timer bar image TBI is displayed, and when the operation valid period is reached, even if the player continues to operate (press) the effect button 63. The counter of the counter is stopped and the count value is reset.

[Operating means Operation status notification effect C]
FIG. 101 is a diagram for explaining the operation means operation state notification effect C. (A) to (F) of FIGS. 101 show the states of the left sub display screen 64L and the sword member 65. (G) to (L) of FIG. 101 show the states of the left sub display screen 64L and the select button 68. The operation means operation state notification effect is an effect of giving a predetermined notification to the player when a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) elapses while the operation unit such as the sword member 65 or the select button 68 is operated. The state of the sword member 65 can be changed between a first state in which the sword member 65 is not pushed downward (a state in which it pops out) and a second state in which the sword member 65 is pushed downward (a state in which the amount of popping out is reduced). When not pushed downward by a person, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring. The select button 68 has a first state (popped out state) when it is not operated (pressed) by the player and a second state (populated state or not popped out) when it is operated (pressed). The state can be changed to (state), and when it is not operated (pressed) by the player, it is maintained in the first state by the force of the internal spring.

In the image inversion expectation suggestion effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 101 (A), the sword member 65 is operated (pushed downward) by the player in a state where nothing is displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. It is in a state where it has not been operated (OFF). , At least a part of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L, the function display image of the game machine 1, the hold icon 9A, the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C, etc. May be displayed. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state).

From the state shown in FIG. 101 (A) to the state in which the player is not urged to operate the sword member 65 (outside the operation valid period), as shown in FIG. 101 (B), the sword member 65 is operated by the player. Is operated (pushed downward, turned on), a counter (not shown) mounted on the sub-control board 90 starts counting. This counter is for calling attention to unintended operations.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65, as shown in FIG. 101 (C), the left On the sub display screen 64L, a text image of "The sword is pushed in" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword member 65 is arranged are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the sword member 65 is in a state of being operated (pushed downward). As a result, when the player unintentionally pushes in the sword member 65 or the like, the player can be notified to that effect.

FIG. 101 (D) shows the left sub display screen 64L when the player stops pushing the sword member 65 after the notification of FIG. 101 (C). When the player stops pushing (applying force) the sword member 65, the text image "The sword is pushed in" and the arrow image disappear. The timing at which the display of the character image and the arrow image disappears may be immediately after detecting that the player has stopped pushing the sword member 65, or after a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed from the detection. You may.

After that, as shown in FIG. 101 (E), the sword member 65 is operated (pushed downward) again by the player in a state where the player is not urged to operate the sword member 65 (outside the operation valid period). ), A counter (not shown) starts counting again.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (pushes downward) the sword member 65, as shown in FIG. 101 (F), again. , The character image of "So-don't push the sword-" and the arrow image pointing in the direction in which the sword member 65 is arranged are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. That is, the character image shows that the sword member 65 is in a state of being operated (pushed downward) again. This is because the pressing of the sword member 65 for a predetermined period was repeated twice in a state where the player was not urged to operate the sword member 65 (outside the operation valid period). Here, since the sword member 65 was operated twice in succession in the same fluctuation, the character image of "The sword is pushed in" in FIG. 101 (C) is not used, but the "So-sword" in FIG. 101 (F). The text image of "Don't push in" is displayed. In addition, when the sword member 65 is operated again within a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) after the first text image of "The sword is pushed in" is displayed, "So-the sword is pushed." The text image of "Don't push in" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 101 (G), after FIG. 101 (F), when the player stops the operation of the sword member 65 and presses the right of the select button 68, "So-don't push the sword-". The display of the character image and the arrow image disappears, while the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the sword member 65 is operated.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (holds down) the right side of the select button 68, the left side is shown in FIG. 101 (H). On the sub display screen 64L, a character image of "The right side of the select button is pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the right side of the select button 68 is operated (long-pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses and holds the right side of the select button 68, the player can be notified to that effect.

As shown in FIG. 101 (I), after FIG. 101 (H), when the player stops the operation to the right of the select button 68, while pressing the left and the bottom of the select button 68, "the right of the select button is pressed. While the text image of "It's done" and the arrow image disappear, the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the right side of the select button 68 is operated.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (holds down) the left and bottom of the select button 68, as shown in FIG. 101 (J). , The character image of "The left and bottom of the select button are pressed" and the arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged are displayed on the left sub display screen 64L. That is, the character image shows that the left and bottom of the select button 68 are operated (long-pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses and holds the left and the bottom of the select button 68, the player can be notified to that effect.

As shown in FIG. 101 (K), after FIG. 101 (J), the player stops the operation of the left and the bottom of the select button 68, while pressing the top of the select button 68 causes "the left and the bottom of the select button". The text image of "is being pressed" and the arrow image disappear, while the counter starts counting. This counter is different from the counter that counts the period during which the left and bottom of the select button 68 are operated.

When a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds) elapses (when the counter reaches a predetermined value) while the player operates (holds down) the select button 68, as shown in FIG. 101 (L), the left On the sub display screen 64L, a character image of "The top of the select button is pressed" and an arrow image pointing in the direction in which the select button 68 is arranged are displayed. That is, the character image shows that the upper part of the select button 68 is operated (long-pressed). As a result, when the player unintentionally presses and holds the select button 68 for a long time, the player can be notified to that effect.

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the operation means operation state notification effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
As shown in FIG. 99, the game machine 1 of the above embodiment is a game machine provided with an effect button 63 capable of changing the state from the first state (protruding state) to the second state (non-protruding state) by the player. The effect button 63 is in the first state when no force is applied by the player, and when the player maintains the effect button 63 in the second state and a predetermined period elapses, the player is in the first state. Make a predetermined notification. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect performed by the game machine from becoming unintended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest. For example, if the operation is unintentionally performed outside the operation validity period, the production will proceed in a blink of an eye when the operation validity period is reached, and the player will not know what happened. Sometimes. According to this configuration, the occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the player maintains the effect button 63 in the second state and a predetermined period elapses, a predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect performed by the game machine from becoming unintended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, when the player returns the effect button 63 to the first state after the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, the predetermined image is displayed from the display screen 7a. Disappears. According to this configuration, after the unintended operation or operation state by the player is resolved, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems such as the original effect being invisible due to the predetermined image, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, after the predetermined image is displayed on the display screen 7a, when the player continues to maintain the effect button 63 in the second state, the content of the predetermined image is displayed. Changes. According to this configuration, when there is a high possibility that the player intentionally operates the effect button 63 outside the operation valid period of the effect button 63, a message according to the state can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect performed by the game machine from becoming unintended, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 99, it is suggested that the effect button 63 is in the second state in the predetermined image. According to this configuration, an operation not intended by the player is performed. It can be easily noticed by the player when he / she is doing it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the effect performed by the game machine from becoming unintended, and it is possible to improve the interest. The same applies to FIGS. 100 and 101.
[Effect 6]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, when the player maintains the effect button 63 in the second state and a predetermined period elapses, a predetermined sound is output from the speaker 67. According to this configuration, it is possible to prevent the effect performed by the game machine from becoming unintended due to an unintended operation or operation state by the player, and it is possible to improve the interest.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the operation means operation state notification effect.
[Modification 1]
In the operation means operation state notification effect A, the variation of FIGS. 99 (G) to 99 (L) is described as the next variation of the variation of FIGS. 99 (A) to 99 (F). However, the fluctuations in FIGS. 99 (G) to (L) are not the fluctuations following the fluctuations in FIGS. 99 (A) to 99 (F), but the fluctuations within a predetermined number of times in the fluctuations in FIGS. May be.

[Modification 2]
In the operation means operation state notification effects A to C, the portion displayed as a character image may be output by voice from the speaker 67. For example, “Oioioi” in FIG. 99 (C) and “How long have you pressed the button?” In FIG. 99 (D) may be output by voice from the speaker 67. Even in this case, the player can be notified to that effect. Further, the same content may be output by voice from the speaker 67 in accordance with displaying the character image on the display screen 7a or the left sub display screen 64L.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D1-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a movable part that can change the state from the first state to the second state by the player.
The movable portion is in the first state when no force is applied by the player.
When the player maintains the movable portion in the second state and a predetermined period elapses, a predetermined notification is given to the player.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further
It is equipped with a display means that can display multiple types of images.
When the player maintains the movable portion in the second state and a predetermined period elapses, a predetermined image is displayed on the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2.
After the predetermined image is displayed on the display means, when the player returns the movable portion to the first state, the display of the predetermined image disappears from the display means.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-4]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-2 or aspect D1-3.
A gaming machine characterized in that the content of the predetermined image changes when the player continues to maintain the movable portion in the second state after the predetermined image is displayed on the display means.
◇ [Aspect D1-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D1-2 to D1-4.
The predetermined image suggests that the movable portion is in the second state.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect D1-6]
The gaming machine according to aspect D1-1, further
Equipped with sound output means,
When the player maintains the movable portion in the second state and a predetermined period elapses, the sound output means outputs a predetermined sound.
A game machine characterized by that.

The load applying effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 102 to 104. In FIGS. 102 to 104, the first movable accessory 14 and the second movable accessory 15 arranged around the front surface (front) of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are omitted from the viewpoint of easy viewing of the drawings.

In this load applying effect, in the so-called left-handed game state and right-handed game state, by applying a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63, the vibration of the effect button 63 is used as a load to touch the upper surface of the effect button 63. It is possible to perform the effect of giving (transmitting) to the palm of the player who is playing. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute a load applying effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a. Further, when the relay board 108 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the load applying effect, a signal is sent to the vibration motor arranged inside the effect button 63. It outputs and drives to generate a predetermined vibration in the effect button 63, and outputs a signal to a plurality of decorative boards on which a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors are mounted, which are arranged inside the effect button 63. The full-color LED is driven to set the effect button 63 to a predetermined light emitting mode. The load applying effect is not performed as one of the so-called look-ahead effects, and whether or not the effect controlling microcomputer 91 on the sub-control board 90 executes the load applying effect during the effect is determined by lottery.

The various background images of the fluctuating effect (variable display) of the decorative pattern correspond to the effect mode described later, for example, a background image imitating the "sun", a background image imitating the "cloud", and "rain". A background image imitating "" and a background image imitating "snow" can be mentioned. These various background images may be still images or moving images. Here, it is a moving image as a background image.

Here, first, the load applying effect A will be described, and then the load applying effect B and the load applying effect C will be described in order.

[Load application effect A]
First, the load applying effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 102. FIG. 102 is a diagram for explaining the load applying effect A. In the game state of right-handed striking, the load applying effect A applies a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63, thereby applying the vibration of the effect button 63 to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load. It is possible to carry out the effect of (telling). In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (play time) can be mentioned.

The load applying effect A in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. If the image of "right-handed" is annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of time or until the number of fluctuations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), after the image "right-handed" is continuously displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is called "right-handed". The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging it so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. The visibility is not impaired. Note that the background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region is opaque and small. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern, the opaque small medium-decorative pattern, and the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 102 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold, are described. The variation icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 102 (B)) corresponding to is the variation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. It is hidden (disappears) from 7a.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the third hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon does not exist at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game balls do not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 respectively.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the load applying effect A.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons, yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the red spherical icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The expectation of hitting is high, the blue spherical icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. In addition, the icon of a smiling sphere may be used instead of the green spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second starting port 21. The effect mode selection unit SEL that can select the effect mode is arranged above the number of the second special figure hold (red number) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball and the arrangement of these numerical values. Is displayed. In the effect mode selection unit SEL, an effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is displayed. The effect mode that has reached the specific area SELa by rotating is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in the specific area SELa is selected. In the present embodiment, the B mode is selected, and the theme image of the B mode (here, a model of a "cloud") is not shown, but is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It has become.

In addition to the period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect mode can be selected by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation) as the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. A message "change mode with the effect button" is arranged at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, above the effect mode selection unit SEL) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is the period displayed as. The load applying effect A is performed after a period during which the effect mode can be selected has elapsed. That is, when the load applying effect A is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected, but the effect mode selected before the load applying effect A is performed is continued in the load applying effect A. There is.

Further, although the effect mode selection unit SEL overlaps with the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( That is, since it is arranged and displayed behind the front surface), the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, the effect mode selection unit SEL is displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and others are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image of the above, it can be visually recognized even in the load applying effect A. The effect mode selection unit SEL is designed to be hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. .. Further, when the effect mode selection unit SEL becomes annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the background image and various production images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The D mode, which is arranged below the A mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is arranged above the A mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the B mode, the effect of the theme of "cloud" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating the "cloud". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The A mode, which is arranged below the B mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode, which is arranged above the B mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the C mode, the effect of "rain" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating "rain". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The B mode, which is arranged below the C mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode, which is arranged above the C mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the D mode, the effect of "snow" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating "snow". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The C mode, which is arranged below the D mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is arranged above the D mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reel is displayed in a rotating manner, and the A mode is again located in the specific area SELa.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect mode, the three effect modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding the A mode, have different types of load application (load application mode). ) Exists only one (hereinafter, referred to as "single load applying mode"), and this single load applying mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one effect mode (single effect mode) called A mode, there are a plurality of load application types (load application modes) (hereinafter, referred to as "plural load application modes"). One of a plurality of load applying modes may be selected and performed. In the load applying effect A in the present embodiment, the B mode is selected, and a single load applying mode is performed.

Here, a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes will be briefly described. In the single load application mode, there is only a normal load application mode in which the effect button 63 is subjected to a tightening vibration such as "bu". On the other hand, in a plurality of load application modes, a first specific load application in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 such as "bububu", "bububu", "bububu", and "bu". Aspect, one-tightening vibration is applied three times. Three-tightening vibration is applied. Second specific load application mode, "bububu", "bububu", "bububububububu", and so on. The third specific load application mode, "bu", "bubu", "bububu", "bubububu", "bububububu", and so on, the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one). The fourth specific load application mode, "Boooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo" There is an aspect.

It should be noted that the hit expectation degree in the fluctuation is set in advance for a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes. In the single load application mode (one-chome tightening vibration), the hit expectation corresponding to the white spherical icon described above is preset. Of the plurality of load application modes, the hit expectation degree corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above in the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) is set in advance, and the fourth specification The hit expectation degree corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon in which the hourly load application mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one)) is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration) The hit expectation degree corresponding to the red spherical icon described above for the three-tightening vibration) is preset, and the hit expectation degree corresponding to the green spherical icon described above for the first specific load application mode (single tightening vibration) is set. It is set in advance, and the hit expectation degree corresponding to the white spherical icon described above in the fifth specific load applying mode (long vibration) is set in advance. For this reason, the third specific load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest expectation of hitting, and the fourth specific load application mode (vibration frequency gradually increases (vibration frequency increases by one)). ) Vibration) has the second highest expectation of hitting, the second specific load application mode (three-tightening vibration) has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the first specific load application mode (single-tightening vibration) has the highest expectation. The fourth highest degree of expectation for hitting is the highest, and the fifth degree of expectation for hitting is the lowest in the fifth specific load applying mode (long vibration) and the single load applying mode (one-chome tightening vibration).

Arrangement of a sub-variable region on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on which the above-mentioned small left decorative symbol, small medium decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display). Above, a load applying execution permission selection unit FG indicating whether or not the execution of the load applying effect A is permitted is displayed. When the execution of the load application effect A is permitted, the image "load application ON" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG, whereas the execution of the load application effect A is not permitted. The image "load application OFF" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG. In the present embodiment, the execution of the load application effect A is permitted, and the image "load application ON" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG. The period during which the execution of the load applying effect A can be selected is the same as the period during which the effect mode can be selected, in addition to the period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. , The message "mode change with the effect button" telling that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 described above with the start of the change of the decorative pattern is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3). It is a period in which the image display device 7 is arranged and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a for only (seconds). Each time the select button 68, which is a button different from the effect button 63, is operated during this period, the execution permission of the load application effect A and the execution disapproval of the load application effect A (execution prohibition of the load application effect A) are alternately performed. You can select to.

Although the load application execution permission selection unit FG overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R and other images are in the foreground of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the side (that is, the frontmost surface), the visibility is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other images. That is, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is displayed and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image and other images, it can be visually recognized even in the load applying effect A. When a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started, the load applying execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. ing. Further, when the load application execution permission selection unit FG becomes an obstacle in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R. ..

In the right-handed game state, the load applying effect A may be started. As shown in FIG. 102 (A), when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number “1”), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number “2”), and the right. The decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly. At this time, the effect button 63 is in a state in which no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state of being turned off.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. 102 (B), the decorative symbol variation effect ( (Variable display) is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B is placed at the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, the two hold icons are in stock.

Subsequently, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time) at high speed. When the display mode changes, as shown in FIG. 102 (C), the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R subsequently change at high speed, the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the intermediate decoration. It decelerates in the order of symbol 8C and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "1". , And the middle decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the number "3", then the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "2", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right The decorative symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time), and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol in FIGS. 102 (B) and 102 (C), the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is turned off. There is.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. 102 (D), the decorative symbol variation effect ( (Variable display) is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed in the second hold display position to the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, one hold icon is in stock. In the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol in FIG. 102 (D), the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is turned off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 102 (E), in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a semi-transparent state and change at high speed, the load applying effect A Is started. In this embodiment, as described above, the B mode is selected. Therefore, as the load applying effect A, a single load applying mode performed in the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode is performed. When the load applying effect A is started, a tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63, and when the effect button 63 starts to change from the non-vibration mode to the normal load applying mode, the effect button 63 becomes " It vibrates like "bu". The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load. In the load applying effect A, before applying the one-chome vibration to the effect button 63 (or immediately before or at the same time as applying the one-chome vibration to the effect button 63), the effect button 63 is set to emit light in a predetermined manner (here). Then, as a light emitting mode corresponding to the normal load applying mode, white blinking) is set, and this predetermined light emitting mode is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 is completed. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load applying effect A ends.

When the load applying effect A is completed, as shown in FIG. 102 (F), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R are the left decorative symbol 8L, the right decorative symbol 8R, and the middle decorative symbol. It decelerates in the order of 8C and changes from a translucent state to an opaque state again, the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "3", and the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed with the number "2". Then, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is temporarily stopped and displayed in the order of the number "1", then the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed at the number "3", the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at the number "1", and the right decoration is displayed. The symbol 8R is stopped and displayed at the number "2", and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. That is, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed all at once (at the same time), and the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol in FIG. 102 (F), the effect button 63 is in a state where no vibration is generated with the end of the load application effect A, and the effect button 63 is turned off. It is in a state of being.

Subsequently, when the movement to the variable display position 9Cd is started in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol is started. 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), resulting in a display mode that fluctuates at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B is placed on the first hold display position to the fourth hold display position accordingly. It will be in a non-existent state. As a result, the hold icon is not stocked at all.

Since some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the player presses the select button 68 during the demonstration effect for waiting for customers or during the game. As a result, it is possible to set the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 and to cancel the operation prohibition of the effect button 63.

Further, the load applying effect A is executed only when the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. That is, the load applying effect A is not executed at all when the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set. On the other hand, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors arranged inside the effect button 63 are driven according to the progress of the effect regardless of whether or not the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. The effect button 63 can be set to a predetermined light emitting mode that suggests the degree of expectation of hitting. For example, in FIG. 102 (E), the effect button 63 blinks white as a light emitting mode corresponding to the normal load application mode regardless of whether or not the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. .. As a result, although some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the effect button 63 has a predetermined light emitting mode, which suggests the degree of expectation of a hit. Therefore, even if the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set and the execution of the load applying effect A is prevented by the player, the effect button 63 is set to the predetermined light emitting mode. Can be done.

Predetermined light emission modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, and white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting. The expectation of winning is increasing in the order of → golden (yellow) lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In addition to lighting each color, there is also blinking of each color, blinking white, blinking blue, blinking green, blinking red, blinking purple, blinking golden (yellow), and blinking rainbow, blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → The expectation of winning is increasing in the order of red blinking → purple blinking → golden color (yellow) blinking → rainbow color blinking (hit rich). It should be noted that the degree of expectation is basically higher for each color blinking than for each color lighting. For example, white blinking has a higher hit expectation than white lighting, but has a lower hit expectation than blue lighting, which has the next highest hit expectation after white lighting, and rainbow color blinking is the same as rainbow color lighting. The same applies to blinking of other colors, except that it has a hit expectation degree (hit rich).

[Load application effect B]
Next, the load applying effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 103. FIG. 103 is a diagram for explaining the load applying effect B. The load applying effect B applies a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63 in the right-handed gaming state, so that the vibration of the effect button 63 is applied to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load. It is possible to carry out the effect of (telling). In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (play time) can be mentioned.

The load applying effect B in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. If the image of "right-handed" is annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of time or until the number of fluctuations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), after the image "right-handed" is continuously displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is called "right-handed". The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging it so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. The visibility is not impaired. Note that the background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region is opaque and small. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern, the opaque small medium-decorative pattern, and the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 103 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, which are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold. The variation icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 103 (B)) corresponding to is the variation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. It is hidden (disappears) from 7a.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the third hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon does not exist at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game balls do not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 respectively.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the load applying effect B.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons, yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the red spherical icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The expectation of hitting is high, the blue spherical icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. In addition, the icon of a smiling sphere may be used instead of the green spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second starting port 21. The effect mode selection unit SEL that can select the effect mode is arranged above the number of the second special figure hold (red number) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball and the arrangement of these numerical values. Is displayed. In the effect mode selection unit SEL, an effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is displayed. The effect mode that has reached the specific area SELa by rotating is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in the specific area SELa is selected. In the present embodiment, the A mode is selected, and the theme image of the A mode (here, the one imitating the "sun") is not shown, but is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It has become.

In addition to the period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect mode can be selected by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation) as the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. A message "change mode with the effect button" is arranged at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, above the effect mode selection unit SEL) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is the period displayed as. The load applying effect B is performed after a period during which the effect mode can be selected has elapsed. That is, when the load applying effect B is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected, but the effect mode selected before the load applying effect B is performed is continued in the load applying effect B. There is.

Further, although the effect mode selection unit SEL overlaps with the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( That is, since it is arranged and displayed behind the front surface), the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, the effect mode selection unit SEL is displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and others are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image of the above, it can be visually recognized even in the load applying effect B. The effect mode selection unit SEL is designed to be hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. .. Further, when the effect mode selection unit SEL becomes annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the background image and various production images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The D mode, which is arranged below the A mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is arranged above the A mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the B mode, the effect of the theme of "cloud" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating the "cloud". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The A mode, which is arranged below the B mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode, which is arranged above the B mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the C mode, the effect of "rain" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating "rain". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The B mode, which is arranged below the C mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode, which is arranged above the C mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the D mode, the effect of "snow" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating "snow". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The C mode, which is arranged below the D mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is arranged above the D mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reel is displayed in a rotating manner, and the A mode is again located in the specific area SELa.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect mode, the three effect modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding the A mode, have different types of load application (load application mode). ) Exists only one (hereinafter, referred to as "single load applying mode"), and this single load applying mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one effect mode (single effect mode) called A mode, there are a plurality of load application types (load application modes) (hereinafter, referred to as "plural load application modes"). One of a plurality of load applying modes may be selected and performed. In the load applying effect B in the present embodiment, the A mode is selected, and any one of the plurality of load applying modes is selected and performed.

Here, a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes will be briefly described. In the single load application mode, there is only a normal load application mode in which the effect button 63 is subjected to a tightening vibration such as "bu". On the other hand, in a plurality of load application modes, a first specific load application in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 such as "bububu", "bububu", "bububu", and "bu". Aspect, one-tightening vibration is applied three times. Three-tightening vibration is applied. Second specific load application mode, "bububu", "bububu", "bububububububu", and so on. The third specific load application mode, "bu", "bubu", "bububu", "bubububu", "bububububu", and so on, the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one). The fourth specific load application mode, "Boooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo" There is an aspect.

It should be noted that the hit expectation degree in the fluctuation is set in advance for a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes. In the single load application mode (one-chome tightening vibration), the hit expectation corresponding to the white spherical icon described above is preset. Of the plurality of load application modes, the hit expectation degree corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above in the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) is set in advance, and the fourth specification The hit expectation degree corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon in which the hourly load application mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one)) is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration) The hit expectation degree corresponding to the red spherical icon described above for the three-tightening vibration) is preset, and the hit expectation degree corresponding to the green spherical icon described above for the first specific load application mode (single tightening vibration) is set. It is set in advance, and the hit expectation degree corresponding to the white spherical icon described above in the fifth specific load applying mode (long vibration) is set in advance. For this reason, the third specific load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest expectation of hitting, and the fourth specific load application mode (vibration frequency gradually increases (vibration frequency increases by one)). ) Vibration) has the second highest expectation of hitting, the second specific load application mode (three-tightening vibration) has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the first specific load application mode (single-tightening vibration) has the highest expectation. The fourth highest degree of expectation for hitting is the highest, and the fifth degree of expectation for hitting is the lowest in the fifth specific load applying mode (long vibration) and the single load applying mode (one-chome tightening vibration).

Arrangement of a sub-variable region on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on which the above-mentioned small left decorative symbol, small medium decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display). Above, a load applying execution permission selection unit FG indicating whether or not the execution of the load applying effect B is permitted is displayed. When the execution of the load application effect B is permitted, the image "load application ON" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG, whereas the execution of the load application effect B is not permitted. The image "load application OFF" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG. In the present embodiment, the execution of the load application effect B is permitted, and the image "load application ON" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG. The period during which the execution of the load applying effect B can be selected is the same as the period during which the effect mode can be selected as described above, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. With the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern, the message "mode change with the effect button" indicating that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 described above is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3). It is a period in which the image display device 7 is arranged and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a for only (seconds). Each time the select button 68, which is a button different from the effect button 63, is operated during this period, the execution permission of the load application effect B and the execution disapproval of the load application effect B (execution prohibition of the load application effect B) are alternately performed. You can select to.

Although the load application execution permission selection unit FG overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R and other images are in the foreground of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the side (that is, the frontmost surface), the visibility is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other images. That is, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is displayed and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image and other images, the visibility can be visually recognized even in the load applying effect B. When a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started, the load applying execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. ing. Further, when the load application execution permission selection unit FG becomes an obstacle in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R. ..

In the right-handed game state, the load applying effect B may be started. As shown in FIG. 103 (A), when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right. The decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly. At this time, the effect button 63 is in a state in which no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state of being turned off.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the decorative symbol variation effect ( (Variable display) is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B is placed at the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, the two hold icons are in stock.

Here, the load applying effect B is started in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a semi-transparent state and change at high speed. In this embodiment, as described above, the A mode is selected. Therefore, as the load applying effect B, one of the plurality of load applying modes performed only in the A mode is selected and performed.

When the load applying effect B is started, as one of the plurality of load applying modes, here, 337 beat vibrations are applied, such as "bububu", "bububu", and "bububububububu". The third specific time load applying mode is selected. First, as shown in FIG. 103 (B), the effect button 63 is started to be subjected to the 337 beat vibration, and the effect button 63 is vibration-free. The change is started from the third to the third specific time load applying mode, and the effect button 63 vibrates only three times in succession, such as "bububu". The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load.

When this vibration is completed, the vibration is made non-vibration for a predetermined period (the time corresponding to the time of vibrating with "bu"), and then, as shown in FIG. 103 (C), the effect button 63 is "bububu". The "bu" vibrates only three times in a row. The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load.

When this vibration is completed, the vibration is made non-vibration for a predetermined period (the time corresponding to the time of vibrating with "bu"), and then, as shown in FIG. 103 (D), the effect button 63 is "bububububububu". The "bu" vibrates only 7 times in a row. The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load. In the load applying effect B, before applying the 337 beat vibration to the effect button 63 in FIGS. 103 (B) to 103 (D) (or immediately before or at the same time as applying the 337 beat vibration to the effect button 63). ), The effect button 63 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (here, yellow (gold) blinking as a light emitting mode corresponding to the third specific time load applying mode in which the 337 beat vibration is applied), and this predetermined light emitting mode. The aspect is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 is completed. The reason why the effect button 63 adopts yellow (gold) as the emission color of the predetermined emission mode in FIGS. 103 (B) to 103 (D) is that the third specific load application mode (337 beat vibration) is used. This is because the hit expectation corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above is preset, so that the color is the same as the yellow (gold) colored by this star-shaped icon. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load applying effect B ends.

When the load applying effect B is completed, as shown in FIG. 103 (E), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2", and the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (here, the number "2") to form a reach. At this time, in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the variable effect (variable display) is continued, the effect button 63 is in a state of no vibration, and the effect button 63 is extinguished.

Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 103 (F), a battle effect, which is a super reach, is started. When the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Unfold. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. , 4th hold display position 9Bd, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9B disappear (hide) from the display screen 7a. Further, the effect mode selection unit SEL and the load application execution permission selection unit FG disappear (hide) from the display screen 7a. In the battle effect, the effect button 63 is in a state of not generating vibration and the effect button 63 is turned off with the end of the load applying effect B.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and then hit. The hit game (hit production) is started. When the hit is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Further, the effect mode selection unit SEL and the load application execution permission selection unit FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) at the same timing. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are out of alignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further. The effect mode selection unit SEL and the load application execution permission selection unit FG are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Since some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the player presses the select button 68 during the demonstration effect for waiting for customers or during the game. As a result, it is possible to set the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 and to cancel the operation prohibition of the effect button 63.

Further, the load applying effect B is executed only when the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. That is, the load applying effect B is not executed at all when the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set. On the other hand, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors arranged inside the effect button 63 are driven according to the progress of the effect regardless of whether or not the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. The effect button 63 can be set to a predetermined light emitting mode that suggests the degree of expectation of hitting. For example, in FIGS. 103 (B) to 103 (D), regardless of whether or not the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released, the effect button 63 is subjected to the third specific time load to which the 337 beat vibration is applied. Yellow (gold) blinks as a light emitting mode corresponding to the imparting mode. As a result, although some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the effect button 63 has a predetermined light emitting mode, which suggests the degree of expectation of a hit. Therefore, even if the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set and the execution of the load applying effect B is blocked by the player, the effect button 63 is set to the predetermined light emitting mode. Can be done.

Predetermined light emission modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, and white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting. The expectation of winning is increasing in the order of → golden (yellow) lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In addition to lighting each color, there is also blinking of each color, blinking white, blinking blue, blinking green, blinking red, blinking purple, blinking golden (yellow), and blinking rainbow, blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → The expectation of winning is increasing in the order of red blinking → purple blinking → golden color (yellow) blinking → rainbow color blinking (hit rich). It should be noted that the degree of expectation is basically higher for each color blinking than for each color lighting. For example, white blinking has a higher hit expectation than white lighting, but has a lower hit expectation than blue lighting, which has the next highest hit expectation after white lighting, and rainbow color blinking is the same as rainbow color lighting. The same applies to blinking of other colors, except that it has a hit expectation degree (hit rich).

[Load application effect C]
Next, the load applying effect C will be described with reference to FIG. 104. FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining the load applying effect C. The load applying effect C applies a predetermined vibration to the effect button 63 in the game state of right-handed striking, thereby applying the vibration of the effect button 63 to the palm of the player touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load. It is possible to carry out the effect of (telling). In addition, as the game state of right-handed hitting, in addition to the state of shifting to the time-saving game after the jackpot game is completed, the state of shifting to the so-called b-time saving (play time) can be mentioned.

The load applying effect C in the present embodiment is performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21, and is performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state. In this right-handed gaming state, an image of "right-handed" (not shown) is displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. Since the image "right-handed" is arranged on the upper right side of the display screen 7a, although it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged so as to be the frontmost side, so that the right decorative symbol is arranged. The 8R and other production images are arranged behind the image of "right-handed", and the image of "right-handed" is not blocked by the right decorative symbol 8R and other production images. That is, the visibility of the "right-handed" image is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other production images. If the image of "right-handed" is annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the game state of right-handed is started until the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, 3 minutes). (Until the elapse of time or until the number of fluctuations of the decorative pattern reaches 10), after the image "right-handed" is continuously displayed on the upper right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it is called "right-handed". The image may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

Here, a plurality of decorative symbols will be briefly described. On the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, the left decorative symbol 8L of the stereoscopic image, the medium decorative symbol 8C of the stereoscopic image, and the right decorative symbol 8R of the stereoscopic image are displayed. The variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol (design: number "1" to number "9") is started in the display mode in which the reel is rotated from the upper side to the lower side of 7a. In the variation effect (variation display) of multiple decorative symbols, each decorative symbol is number "1"-> number "2"-> number "3"-> number "4"-> number "5"-> number "6"-> number "7" "→ Number" 8 "-> Number" 9 "-> Number" 1 "-> Number" 2 "-> ... The reel is rotated in this order.

When the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is started, the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed once moves slowly (at low speed) in a display mode in which the decorative symbol floats upward by a predetermined distance (for example, about 5 mm) (at a low speed). In other words, since the stop display of the decorative symbol is canceled, the decorative symbol is set to the display mode in which it is about to move), and then gradually increases from low speed to the lower side and becomes translucent from an opaque state. It becomes a display mode that changes to a state and fluctuates at high speed. As a result, the background image arranged behind the decorative symbol can be visually recognized via the translucent decorative symbol during high-speed fluctuation. Immediately before stopping, the decorative symbol decelerates and changes from a semi-transparent state to an opaque state again, and is temporarily stopped or displayed as a stop (temporary stop is displayed, and then the stop is displayed). In the state of the temporary stop display, the decorative design has a display mode in which it slowly moves in small steps in the vertical direction.

Further, on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, there are an opaque small left decorative symbol, an opaque small medium decorative symbol, and an opaque small opaque design corresponding to the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively. A sub-variable area (not shown) is provided in which the right decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner (variable display). The background image of the sub-variable region is fixed to a single color (for example, a dark color (dark dark color system)) or a color close to a dark color (for example, dark green) and does not change to another color. The sub-variable region has a sub-variable region. Since it is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen 7a, it overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, but by arranging it so that the sub fluctuation area is on the front side, the right decorative symbol 8R is sub. The sub-variable area is not obstructed by the right decorative symbol 8R, which is placed behind the variable area, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image is arranged behind the sub-variable area and is placed behind the sub-variable area by the other effect image. The sub-variable area is not obstructed. Further, the sub-variable area is arranged to the right of the fourth hold display position, which will be described later, and is placed on the fourth hold display position and the fourth hold display position. It is designed so that it does not overlap with the icon. That is, the content displayed in the sub-variable area is determined by the right decorative symbol 8R, other effect images, the 4th hold display position, and the hold icon placed in the 4th hold display position. The visibility is not impaired. Note that the background image may not be provided in the sub-variable region. In this case, the sub-variable region becomes a transparent region, so that the sub-variable region is opaque and small. Only the variation effect (variation display) of the left decorative pattern, the opaque small medium-decorative pattern, and the opaque small right decorative pattern can be visually recognized, and the outline of the sub-variable area cannot be visually recognized at all. Become.

The small decorative pattern is a number pattern, which is different from the typefaces of the left decorative pattern 8L, the middle decorative pattern 8C, and the right decorative pattern 8R (for example, Mincho typeface), and is a single color of the background image of the sub-variable area. On the other hand, it is unified to another single color with high contrast (for example, light color (yellow or white)) and does not change to another color. The small decorative pattern is placed in front of the background image in the sub-variable area and is always in an opaque state, and even if the fluctuation starts, it does not become semi-transparent and may disappear from the display screen 7a. Absent. The small decorative symbol is similar to the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, respectively, without making the typeface different from the typeface of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R. It may be a shape to be used.

Unlike the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, the small decorative symbol does not perform variable effect (variable display) in the display mode in which the reel is rotated, and has the same size at the same display position. The variation effect (variation display) is performed according to the display mode in which numerical symbols appear one after another in an opaque state.

When the variable effect (variable display) by the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R is started, in the sub-variable region, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small The variable effect (variable display) by the right decorative symbol is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and at the same time, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small size are displayed. All the right decorative patterns of are also stopped and displayed.

One or more of the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed (for example, the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are temporarily stopped and displayed with the same symbol to reach. Is formed), the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are all in a state in which the variable effect (variable display) is continued. Specifically, even if the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped, the variation effect (variation display) of the small left decorative symbol is continued, and even if the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped, the small right decorative symbol is displayed. The variable effect (variable display) of is continued, and at the same time that the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decoration All symbols are also stopped and displayed.

If the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are not aligned and are out of alignment, the small left decorative symbol and the small decorative symbol 8R are displayed. The intermediate decorative symbol and the small right decorative symbol may be the same as the left decorative symbol 8L, the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, or may be completely different symbols. Specifically, for example, when the left decorative symbol 8L is stopped and displayed with the number "1", the middle decorative symbol 8C is stopped with the number "2", and the right decorative symbol 8R is stopped with the number "3", the small left decorative symbol is displayed. The number "1", the small medium decoration design may be stopped and displayed with the number "2", the small right decoration design may be stopped with the number "3", the small left decoration design may be stopped with the number "5", and the small medium decoration. The symbol may be stopped and displayed with the number "6" and the small right decorative symbol with the number "7".

On the other hand, if the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are all stopped and displayed, and the same symbols are aligned and hit, the small left decorative symbol, The small medium-decorative symbol and the small right-decorative symbol are aligned with the same symbols as the left decorative symbol 8L, the medium-decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R.

The small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are variable-effect (variable display) in the sub-variable area provided on the lower right side of the display screen 7a. The sub-variable area is arranged on the lower right side of the left sub-display screen 64L or the lower left side of the right sub-display screen 64R, and the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied (variable display). ) May be done. In this case, the small left decorative symbol, the small medium decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same horizontal line in this order, or the small left from top to bottom. The decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol may be arranged and displayed on the same vertical line in this order.

Next, the variable icon and the hold icon will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 104 (A), the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R that are currently changing as the digestion of the second special figure hold The variation icon 9C (see, for example, FIG. 104 (B)) corresponding to is the variation display position 9Cd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)) displayed in the lower center of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It is displayed (placed) on. A second hold display area is provided as a second special figure hold in the area of the display screen 7a on the right side of the variable display position 9Cd. In this second hold display area, hold icons can be displayed (placed) at each of the four hold display positions 9Bd (above the rectangular image (pedestal image)), and a maximum of four hold icons can be stocked. You can do it. The four hold display positions 9Bd are the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, and the fourth hold from a position close to the variable display position 9Cd toward the right side of the display screen 7a. The display positions 9Bd are arranged and displayed in a straight line along the lower side of the display screen 7a.

Although the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, they may have the same size or different sizes. In the present embodiment, the variable display position 9Cd and the hold display position 9Bd both have a rectangular shape, and the size of the variable display position 9Cd (horizontal distance dimension) is the size of the hold display position 9Bd (horizontal distance). It is larger than (dimensions) (the distance dimensions in the vertical direction are the same). This is to make it possible to distinguish between the variable icon 9C displayed at the variable display position 9Cd and the hold icon 9B displayed at the hold display position 9Bd.

Further, although the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd overlap the variable area of the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, and the hold icon By arranging 9B and the hold display position 9Bd so as to be on the front side, the middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R are placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd. The arranged middle decorative symbol 8C and the right decorative symbol 8R do not block the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and even if another effect image appears, the other effect image Is placed behind the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd, and the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd may be blocked by other effect images. Absent. That is, the variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are not obstructed by the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the right decorative symbol 8R, and other effect images. The variable icon 9C, the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B, and the hold display position 9Bd are displayed on the display screen when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. It is hidden (disappears) from 7a.

Here, the white spherical hold icon 9B is displayed at the first hold display position 9Bd to the third hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon does not exist at the fourth hold display position 9Bd. In other words, the white spherical hold icon is not digested and there are only three stocked icons. In the following description, it is assumed that the game balls do not enter the first starting port 20 and the second starting port 21 respectively.

In addition, it corresponds to the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is displayed on the lower side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 in the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol. In addition to the hold icon 9A and the hold icon 9B corresponding to the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21, the first based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20. The special figure hold and the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21 are arranged and displayed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as numbers (not shown). The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 1st start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd start port 21 is red. The numbers are arranged on the lower left side of the display screen 7a in a state where they are separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizontal line so as to be separated from each other on the left and right) and are always displayed.

Since these numbers are displayed as numerical values of the number of reserved spheres, they can be difficult to distinguish between various background images and various decorative images displayed on the display screen 7a, and are intuitively easy to understand. Although these numbers overlap with the variable region of the left decorative symbol 8L, they are arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are on the foremost side (that is, the foreground) of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the image, the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, these numbers are always displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is being performed or when the decorative symbol variation effect (variable display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other numbers are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image, it can always be visually recognized even in the load applying effect C.

The number of first special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 (blue numbers) and the number of second special figure reservations based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. (Red number) is placed on the lower left side of the display screen 7a and always displayed, but instead of being placed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or on the lower left side of the right sub display screen 64R and always displayed. You may do so. In this case, the number of the first special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the first start port 20 is on the left side in blue numbers, and the number of the second special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the second start port 21 is on the left side. The numbers may be displayed as red numbers separated from each other on the right side (that is, these numbers are arranged on the same horizon separated from each other on the left and right), or the game to the first starting port 20 may be displayed. The number of 1st special figure hold based on the entry of the ball is indicated by the blue number on the upper side, and the number of the 2nd special figure hold based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21 is indicated by the red number on the lower side. It may be displayed in a state (that is, these numbers are vertically separated on the same vertical line). Further, the sub-variable area in which the small left decorative symbol, the small medium-decorative symbol, and the small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display) is displayed on the lower right side of the left sub display screen 64L or the lower left of the right sub display screen 64R. When placed on the side, the number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20 and the number based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 21. 2 These numbers are arranged above the sub-variable area so that the number of reserved special figures (red number), the arrangement of these numbers, and the arrangement of the sub-variable area do not overlap. ..

Here, the hold icon 9B and the variable icon 9C (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "icons") will be briefly described. The difference in the degree of expectation of winning at the time of lottery corresponding to the icon due to the difference in shape and color. Represents. For example, of the six icons, yellow (gold) star-shaped icon, purple spherical icon, green spherical icon, red spherical icon, blue spherical icon, and white spherical icon, yellow (gold) The star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, the red spherical icon has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the green spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting. The expectation of hitting is high, the blue spherical icon has the highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting. In addition, the icon of a smiling sphere may be used instead of the green spherical icon. In this case, the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon has the highest expectation of hitting, the purple spherical icon has the second highest expectation of hitting, and the smiling sphere icon has the third highest expectation of hitting. The red spherical icon has the fourth highest expectation of hitting, the blue spherical icon has the fifth highest expectation of hitting, and the white spherical icon has the lowest expectation of hitting.

The number of first special figure reservations (blue numbers) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 20, which is on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, and the second starting port 21. The effect mode selection unit SEL that can select the effect mode is arranged above the number of the second special figure hold (red number) based on the entry of the game ball into the ball and the arrangement of these numerical values. Is displayed. In the effect mode selection unit SEL, an effect mode composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode is displayed in a mode in which the reel is rotated, and each time the effect button 63 is operated (pressed operation), the reel is displayed. The effect mode that has reached the specific area SELa by rotating is displayed larger than the other effect modes. The effect mode located in the specific area SELa is selected. In the present embodiment, the A mode is selected, and the theme image of the A mode (here, the one imitating the "sun") is not shown, but is displayed in a large size on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7. It has become.

In addition to the period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the effect mode can be selected by operating the effect button 63 (pressing operation) as the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. A message "change mode with the effect button" is arranged at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 (for example, above the effect mode selection unit SEL) for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). It is the period displayed as. The load applying effect C is performed after a period during which the effect mode can be selected has elapsed. That is, when the load applying effect C is performed, the effect mode cannot be selected, but the effect mode selected before the load applying effect C is performed is continued in the load applying effect C. There is.

Further, although the effect mode selection unit SEL overlaps with the fluctuation area of the left decorative symbol 8L, it is arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a, and the left decorative symbol 8L and other images are arranged on the frontmost side of the display screen 7a ( That is, since it is arranged and displayed behind the front surface), the visibility is not hindered by the left decorative pattern 8L or other images. That is, the effect mode selection unit SEL is displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished, and the left decorative symbol 8L and others are displayed. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image of the above, it can be visually recognized even in the load applying effect C. The effect mode selection unit SEL is designed to be hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a when a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started. .. Further, when the effect mode selection unit SEL becomes annoying in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R.

Here, the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode that constitute the effect mode will be briefly described.

In the A mode, the production with the theme of "sun" is advanced, and the background image and various production images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating the "sun". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the A mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the A mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The D mode, which is arranged below the A mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the B mode, which is arranged above the A mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the B mode, the effect of the theme of "cloud" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating the "cloud". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the B mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the B mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The A mode, which is arranged below the B mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the C mode, which is arranged above the B mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the C mode, the effect of "rain" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating "rain". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the C mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the C mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The B mode, which is arranged below the C mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the D mode, which is arranged above the C mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. It is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates.

In the D mode, the effect of "snow" is advanced, and the background image and various effect images are displayed on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 as the theme image imitating "snow". When the player operates (presses) the effect button 63 while the D mode is located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL, the D mode located in the specific area SELa of the effect mode selection unit SEL is lowered. The C mode, which is arranged below the D mode, is displayed in such a manner that the reel rotates from the bottom to the top, and the A mode, which is arranged above the D mode, is displayed from above toward the specific area SELa. The reel is displayed in a rotating manner, and the A mode is again located in the specific area SELa.

Of the A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode that constitute the effect mode, the three effect modes, B mode, C mode, and D mode, excluding the A mode, have different types of load application (load application mode). ) Exists only one (hereinafter, referred to as "single load applying mode"), and this single load applying mode may be performed. On the other hand, in one effect mode (single effect mode) called A mode, there are a plurality of load application types (load application modes) (hereinafter, referred to as "plural load application modes"). One of a plurality of load applying modes may be selected and performed. In the load applying effect C in the present embodiment, the A mode is selected, and any one of the plurality of load applying modes is selected and performed.

Here, a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes will be briefly described. In the single load application mode, there is only a normal load application mode in which the effect button 63 is subjected to a tightening vibration such as "bu". On the other hand, in a plurality of load application modes, a first specific load application in which a single tightening vibration is applied to the effect button 63 such as "bububu", "bububu", "bububu", and "bu". Aspect, one-tightening vibration is applied three times. Three-tightening vibration is applied. Second specific load application mode, "bububu", "bububu", "bububububububu", and so on. The third specific load application mode, "bu", "bubu", "bububu", "bubububu", "bububububu", and so on, the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one). The fourth specific load application mode, "Boooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooooo" There is an aspect.

It should be noted that the hit expectation degree in the fluctuation is set in advance for a single load application mode and a plurality of load application modes. In the single load application mode (one-chome tightening vibration), the hit expectation corresponding to the white spherical icon described above is preset. Of the plurality of load application modes, the hit expectation degree corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above in the third specific time load application mode (337 beat vibration) is set in advance, and the fourth specification The hit expectation degree corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon in which the hourly load application mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one)) is set in advance, and the second specific time load application mode (vibration) The hit expectation degree corresponding to the red spherical icon described above for the three-tightening vibration) is preset, and the hit expectation degree corresponding to the green spherical icon described above for the first specific load application mode (single tightening vibration) is set. It is set in advance, and the hit expectation degree corresponding to the white spherical icon described above in the fifth specific load applying mode (long vibration) is set in advance. For this reason, the third specific load application mode (337 beat vibration) has the highest expectation of hitting, and the fourth specific load application mode (vibration frequency gradually increases (vibration frequency increases by one)). ) Vibration) has the second highest expectation of hitting, the second specific load application mode (three-tightening vibration) has the third highest expectation of hitting, and the first specific load application mode (single-tightening vibration) has the highest expectation. The fourth highest degree of expectation for hitting is the highest, and the fifth degree of expectation for hitting is the lowest in the fifth specific load applying mode (long vibration) and the single load applying mode (one-chome tightening vibration).

Arrangement of a sub-variable region on the lower right side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 on which the above-mentioned small left decorative symbol, small medium decorative symbol, and small right decorative symbol are varied and produced (variable display). Above, a load applying execution permission selection unit FG indicating whether or not the execution of the load applying effect C is permitted is displayed. When the execution of the load application effect C is permitted, the image "load application ON" is displayed in the load application execution permission selection unit FG, whereas the execution of the load application effect C is not permitted. The image "load application OFF" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG. In the present embodiment, the execution of the load application effect C is permitted, and the image "load application ON" is displayed on the load application execution permission selection unit FG. The period during which the execution of the load applying effect C can be selected is the same as the period during which the effect mode can be selected as described above, and in addition to the period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. With the start of fluctuation of the decorative pattern, the message "mode change with the effect button" indicating that the effect mode can be changed by operating (pressing operation) the effect button 63 described above is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 3). It is a period in which the image display device 7 is arranged and displayed at a predetermined position (for example, above the effect mode selection unit SEL) on the display screen 7a for only (seconds). Each time the select button 68, which is a button different from the effect button 63, is operated during this period, the execution permission of the load application effect C and the execution disapproval of the load application effect C (execution prohibition of the load application effect C) are alternately performed. You can select to.

Although the load application execution permission selection unit FG overlaps with the fluctuation area of the right decorative symbol 8R, it is arranged on the foremost side of the display screen 7a, and the right decorative symbol 8R and other images are in the foreground of the display screen 7a. Since it is arranged and displayed behind the side (that is, the frontmost surface), the visibility is not hindered by the right decorative symbol 8R or other images. That is, the load application execution permission selection unit FG is displayed and the right decorative symbol 8R is displayed even when the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is being performed or the decorative symbol variation effect (variation display) is finished. Since the visibility is not hindered by the image and other images, the visibility can be visually recognized even in the load applying effect C. When a specific effect called a battle effect, which is a super reach, is displayed on the display screen 7a and started, the load applying execution permission selection unit FG is hidden (disappeared) from the display screen 7a. ing. Further, when the load application execution permission selection unit FG becomes an obstacle in various effects unfolded on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7, it may be displayed on the left sub display screen 64L or the right sub display screen 64R. ..

In the right-handed game state, the load applying effect C may be started. As shown in FIG. 104 (A), when the variation effect (variation display) of the decorative symbol is completed, the left decorative symbol 8L (here, the number "1"), the middle decorative symbol 8C (here, the number "2"), and the right. The decorative symbol 8R (here, the number "3") is stopped and displayed, and the variable icon 9C disappears from the display screen 7a accordingly. At this time, the effect button 63 is in a state in which no vibration is generated, and the effect button 63 is in a state of being turned off.

Subsequently, when the movement is started toward the variable display position 9Cd in order to digest the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd, as shown in FIG. 104 (B), the decorative symbol variation effect ( (Variable display) is started, and the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R change from an opaque state to a translucent state all at once (at the same time), and the display mode changes at high speed. When the hold icon 9B placed on the first hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the variable display position 9Cd, the hold icon 9B placed on the second hold display position 9Bd moves to the first hold display position accordingly. It starts moving toward 9Bd and is placed in the first hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B placed in the third hold display position 9Bd starts moving toward the second hold display position 9Bd. 2 The hold icon 9B is placed at the hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B is not placed at the third hold display position 9Bd and the fourth hold display position, respectively. As a result, the two hold icons are in stock.

Here, the load applying effect C is started in a state where the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are in a semi-transparent state and change at high speed. In this embodiment, as described above, the A mode is selected. Therefore, as the load applying effect C, one of the plurality of load applying modes performed only in the A mode is selected and performed.

When the load applying effect C is started, as one of the plurality of load applying modes, here, vibrations such as "bu", "bubu", "bububu", "bubububu", and "bububububu". A fourth specific load application mode in which vibration is applied, in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) is selected. The application of vibration that gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) is started, and the effect button 63 starts to change from the non-vibration mode to the fourth specific load application mode, and the effect button 63 is "bu". The "bu" vibrates only once. The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load.

When this vibration is completed, the vibration is made non-vibration for a predetermined period (the time corresponding to the time of vibrating with "bu"), and then, as shown in FIG. 104 (C), the effect button 63 is "bubu". The "bu" vibrates only twice in a row. The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load.

When this vibration is completed, the vibration is made non-vibration for a predetermined period (the time corresponding to the time of vibrating with "bu"), and then, as shown in FIG. 104 (D), the effect button 63 is "bububu". The "bu" vibrates only three times in a row. The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load.

When this vibration is completed, the vibration is made non-vibration for a predetermined period (the time corresponding to the time of vibrating with "bu"), and then, as shown in FIG. 104 (E), the effect button 63 is "bubububu". The "bu" vibrates only four times in a row. The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load.

When this vibration is completed, the vibration is made non-vibration for a predetermined period (the time corresponding to the time of vibrating with "bu"), and then, as shown in FIG. 104 (F), the effect button 63 is "bububububu". The "bu" vibrates only 5 times in a row. The vibration of the effect button 63 can be applied (transmitted) to the palm of the player who is touching the upper surface of the effect button 63 as a load. In the load applying effect C, in FIGS. 104 (B) to 104 (F), the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) before the effect button 63 is vibrated (or the effect button 63 is vibrated). Immediately before or at the same time as applying vibration, the number of times gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one), and the effect button 63 is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (here, the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one). ) As a light emitting mode corresponding to the fourth specific load applying mode in which vibration is applied, purple blinking), and this predetermined light emitting mode is maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 is completed. The reason why the effect button 63 adopts purple as the emission color of the predetermined emission mode in FIGS. 104 (B) to (F) is that the fourth specific load applying mode (the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases). This is because the hit expectation degree corresponding to the above-mentioned purple spherical icon (which increases by one time) is preset, so that the color is the same as the purple colored by the spherical icon. When the vibration of the effect button 63 ends, the load applying effect C ends.

When the load applying effect C is completed, as shown in FIG. 104 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2", the right decorative symbol 8R is temporarily stopped and displayed by the number "2", and the left decoration is displayed. The symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R become the same symbol (here, the number "2") to form a reach. At this time, in the intermediate decorative symbol 8C, the variable effect (variable display) is continued, the effect button 63 is in a state of no vibration, and the effect button 63 is extinguished.

Subsequently, although not shown, a battle production that is a super reach is started. When the battle effect is started, the ally character CRA appears from the right side of the display screen 7a, the enemy character CRB appears from the left side of the display screen 7a, and the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight in the center of the display screen 7a. Unfold. The battle production is a production in which the expectation of a big hit is set high in advance. In the battle effect, the left decorative icon 8L, the middle decorative icon 8C, and the right decorative icon 8R disappear from the display screen 7a, and the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, and the third hold display position 9Bd. , 4th hold display position 9Bd, variable icon 9C and hold icon 9B disappear (hide) from the display screen 7a. Further, the effect mode selection unit SEL and the load application execution permission selection unit FG disappear (hide) from the display screen 7a.

In the battle production, when the ally character CRA wins and the enemy character CRB is defeated, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with the same symbol, and then hit. The hit game (hit production) is started. When the hit is confirmed, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a. Further, the effect mode selection unit SEL and the load application execution permission selection unit FG are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change. On the other hand, in the battle production, when the ally character CRA is defeated and the enemy character CRB wins, the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed (confirmed) at the same timing. The left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R are not aligned with the same symbol and are out of alignment. At this time, the variable display position 9Cd, the first hold display position 9Bd, the second hold display position 9Bd, the third hold display position 9Bd, the fourth hold display position 9Bd, and the hold icon 9B are displayed again on the display screen 7a, and further. The effect mode selection unit SEL and the load application execution permission selection unit FG are displayed on the display screen 7a, and the change icon 9C is not displayed due to the end of the change.

Since some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the player presses the select button 68 during the demonstration effect for waiting for customers or during the game. As a result, it is possible to set the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 and to cancel the operation prohibition of the effect button 63.

Further, the load applying effect C is executed only when the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. That is, the load applying effect C is not executed at all when the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set. On the other hand, a plurality of full-color LEDs capable of emitting multiple colors arranged inside the effect button 63 are driven according to the progress of the effect regardless of whether or not the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. The effect button 63 can be set to a predetermined light emitting mode that suggests the degree of expectation of hitting. For example, in FIGS. 104 (B) to 104 (F), the number of vibrations of the effect button 63 gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one) regardless of whether or not the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set to be released. It flashes purple as a light emitting mode corresponding to the fourth specific load applying mode in which vibration is applied. As a result, although some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63, the effect button 63 has a predetermined light emitting mode, which suggests the degree of expectation of a hit. Therefore, even if the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 is set and the execution of the load applying effect C is prevented by the player, the effect button 63 is set to the predetermined light emitting mode. Can be done.

Predetermined light emission modes include white lighting, blue lighting, green lighting, red lighting, purple lighting, golden (yellow) lighting, and rainbow color lighting, and white lighting → blue lighting → green lighting → red lighting → purple lighting. The expectation of winning is increasing in the order of → golden (yellow) lighting → rainbow color lighting (rich hit). In addition to lighting each color, there is also blinking of each color, blinking white, blinking blue, blinking green, blinking red, blinking purple, blinking golden (yellow), and blinking rainbow, blinking white → blinking blue → blinking green → The expectation of winning is increasing in the order of red blinking → purple blinking → golden color (yellow) blinking → rainbow color blinking (hit rich). It should be noted that the degree of expectation is basically higher for each color blinking than for each color lighting. For example, white blinking has a higher hit expectation than white lighting, but has a lower hit expectation than blue lighting, which has the next highest hit expectation after white lighting, and rainbow color blinking is the same as rainbow color lighting. The same applies to blinking of other colors, except that it has a hit expectation degree (hit rich).

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the load applying effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, a predetermined load is applied to the player based on the progress of the effect. B mode, which is provided with a possible effect button 63 (load means) and excludes A mode (specific effect mode) among the effect modes (plural effect modes) composed of A mode, B mode, C mode, and D mode. A single load (first load) composed of one-chome vibration for the player by operating the effect button 63 (load means) in three effect modes (other effect modes), C mode and D mode. ) Is given, and the effect button 63 (load means) is operated in the A mode (specific effect mode) to give the player a single load (first load), which is different from the single load (first load). , 337 beat vibration, the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one), the first effect (load application effect) that applies multiple loads (second load) consisting of vibrations and long vibrations. It is possible to execute FIGS. 102 (E) in A, FIGS. 103 (B) to (D) in the load applying effect B, and FIGS. 104 (B) to (F) in the load applying effect C. According to this configuration, among A mode, B mode, C mode and D mode, only A mode, unlike a single load (first load) applied in B mode, C mode and D mode, a plurality. The load (second load) is applied to the player by the operation of the effect button 63 (load means), so that the effect button 63 (load means) is operated in the B mode, C mode, and D mode. However, by giving variation to the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) only in the A mode, the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the A mode can be changed to the B mode. It can be an operation that does not exist at all in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the C mode and the D mode. In other words, the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the A mode is generated as a so-called "back mode" operation that does not exist at all in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the B mode, the C mode, and the D mode. This makes it possible for the player to lose track of what happened for a moment (that is, when something unexpected happens) and to be surprised and pleased. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest.

[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, the single load (first load) is a single tightening vibration. There is only one type, and multiple loads (second load) are single tightening vibration, triple tightening vibration, 337 beat vibration, vibration that gradually increases the number of vibrations (the number of vibrations increases by 1), long There are multiple types of vibration. According to this configuration, the plurality of loads (second load) can have variations in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) unlike the single load (first load). As a result, the player emphasizes the monotonousness of the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) in the B mode, C mode, and D mode in which only a single load (first load) exists, and a plurality of loads. In the A mode in which (second load) exists, it is possible to make it difficult to feel monotonous in the operation of the effect button 63 (load means). Further, since the A mode in which a plurality of loads (second load) exist is different from the B mode, C mode and D mode in which only a single load (first load) exists, the number of players is multiple. (Second load) can be enjoyed as a so-called "back mode".

[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, the effect button 63 (load means) is directed to the palm of the player. A single load (first load) or a plurality of loads (second load) can be applied. According to this configuration, when the effect button 63 (load means) is activated, the load from the effect button 63 (load means) is applied to the palm of the player, so that the fingertips of the player A single load (first load) or a plurality of loads (second load) by the effect button 63 (load means) is easily transmitted to the player as compared with the back of the hand or the back of the hand.

[Effect 4]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the first effect in the load application effect A in FIG. 102, the load application effect B in FIG. 103, and the load application effect C in FIG. 104 is performed by the player on the effect button 63 (load means). It can be executed in the state where the operation prohibition is set to be released. Since some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63 (load means), the player is set to prohibit the operation of the effect button 63 (load means). Or, when the player can be set to cancel the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 (load means), the first effect is to release the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 (load means). It can be executed only in the set state.

[Effect 5]
In the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, in the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, the full color capable of multicolor light emission provided on the effect button 63 (load means). A second method in which the LED (light emitting means) is used as a predetermined light emitting mode, and the light emitting decoration by the effect button 63 (load means) is performed regardless of whether or not the player has set the effect prohibition of the effect button 63 (load means) to be released. It is possible to execute the production. Although some players prefer the operation of the effect button 63 (load means) and some players dislike the operation of the effect button 63 (load means), the effect button 63 (load means) becomes a predetermined light emitting mode. Since it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of a hit, it is assumed that the operation prohibition of the effect button 63 (load means) is set and the execution of the first effect is blocked by the player. Also, the effect button 63 (load means) can be set to a predetermined light emitting mode.

[Modification example]
A modified example of the load applying effect is shown below.
[Modification 1]
The load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104 are performed based on the game ball entering the second starting port 21. In other words, it is performed in a so-called right-handed gaming state (a specific gaming state different from the normal gaming state). However, it may be performed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the first starting port 20. In other words, it may be performed in a so-called left-handed gaming state (normal gaming state).

[Modification 2]
In the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, the effect button 63 is used as a load means capable of applying a predetermined load to the player based on the progress of the effect. It was adopted. However, the frame movable body 69 may be used. As described above, the frame movable body 69 is normally stationary on the left side and the right side of the handle 60 at the retracted positions (FIG. 1) away from the handle 60, and approaches each other from the retracted position toward the handle 60. It can move (advance) and stand still at a position where it touches the handle 60. Since the frame movable body 69 touches the handle 60 or the right hand of the player who is operating the handle 60 when in the advanced position, the player's right hand can be provided by providing a plurality of operating modes of the frame movable body 69. The mode of touching can be varied. Therefore, an effect equivalent to the effect of the operation of the effect button 63 can be obtained by the operation of the frame movable body 69.

[Modification 3]
In the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, the effect button 63 is used as a load means capable of applying a predetermined load to the player based on the progress of the effect. It was adopted. However, the wind may be sent forward from the handle 60. For example, a speaker may be provided inside the handle 60, and the cone paper of the speaker may be vibrated to send wind to the front of the handle 60 so that the player touches the right hand (palm) of the player who operates the handle 60. Then, by providing a plurality of modes for vibrating the cone paper of the speaker, it is possible to make the mode of touching the player's right hand (palm) rich in variety. Therefore, the same effect as the effect of the operation of the effect button 63 can be obtained by the wind (blower) due to the vibration of the cone paper of the speaker inside the handle 60. The cone paper of the speaker is driven by the voice control board 106 under the control of the sub control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91).

[Modification example 4]
In the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, the effect button 63 is used as a load means capable of applying a predetermined load to the player based on the progress of the effect. It was adopted. However, a blower may be provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53 (for example, any of the upper side, the right side, and the left side) to blow the wind toward the player's face. By providing a plurality of modes of the wind blown from the blower, the mode of the wind that hits the player's face can be made rich in variety. Therefore, the same effect as the effect of the operation of the effect button 63 can be obtained by the wind (blower) by the blower provided at a predetermined position inside the front frame 53. The blower may be one in which the propeller fan is rotated to blow air forward, or one in which the cone paper of the speaker is vibrated to blow wind forward. Further, the blower is driven by the voice control board 106 under the control of the sub control board 90 (effect control microcomputer 91).

[Modification 5]
In the load applying effect B in FIGS. 103 (B) to 103 (D), before the effect button 63 is applied with the 337 beat vibration, the effect button 63 is given a predetermined light emitting mode (here, the 337 beat vibration is applied). As a light emitting mode corresponding to the third specific load applying mode, yellow (gold) blinking) was maintained until the vibration of the effect button 63 was completed. This is because the hit expectation degree corresponding to the yellow (gold) star-shaped icon described above in the third specific load application mode (337 beat vibration) is preset, so this star-shaped icon is used. This was because it had the same color as the colored yellow (gold). However, in order to finally make the effect button 63 yellow (gold) in FIG. 103 (D), for example, the effect button 63 is blinking white in FIG. 103 (B) and the effect button 63 is red in FIG. 103 (C). The color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction in which the degree of expectation is high so that the effect button 63 blinks in yellow (gold) in FIG. 103 (D). The effect button 63 is blinking white in 103 (B), the effect button 63 is blinking white in FIG. 103 (C), and the effect button 63 is blinking yellow (gold) in FIG. 103 (D). The color of the light emitting mode may be changed in the direction in which the degree of expectation is high, or the effect button 63 is blinked in red in FIG. 103 (B) and the effect button 63 is blinked in red in FIG. 103 (C). In FIG. 103 (D), the color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the degree of expectation so that the effect button 63 blinks yellow (gold), or in FIG. 103 (D). The effect button 63 is blinking white in B), the effect button 63 is blinking yellow (gold) in FIG. 103 (C), and the effect button 63 is blinking yellow (gold) in FIG. 103 (D). The color of the light emitting mode of 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the degree of expectation.

[Modification 6]
In the load applying effect C in FIGS. 104 (B) to 104 (F), the effect button 63 is subjected to a predetermined light emitting mode before the effect button 63 is subjected to vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one). (Here, the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one). The vibration of the effect button 63 ends as a light emitting mode corresponding to the fourth specific load applying mode in which the vibration is applied). I kept it until I did. This is because the fourth specific load application mode (vibration in which the number of vibrations gradually increases (the number of vibrations increases by one)) corresponds to the purple spherical icon described above, and the expected degree of hit is preset. This is because the color is the same as the purple color of this spherical icon. However, finally, the effect button 63 is blinked in purple in FIG. 104 (F), for example, the effect button 63 is blinked in white in FIG. 104 (B), and the effect button 63 is blinked in blue in FIG. 104 (C). , The effect button 63 is blinking green in FIG. 104 (D), the effect button 63 is blinking red in FIG. 104 (E), and the effect button 63 is blinking purple in FIG. 104 (F). The color of the light emitting mode may be changed in the direction of increasing the degree of expectation. In FIG. 104 (B), the effect button 63 is blinking in white, in FIG. 104 (C), the effect button 63 is blinking in white, in FIG. 104 (D), the effect button 63 is blinking in green, and in FIG. 104 (E), the effect button is blinking in green. The color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction in which the degree of expectation is high so that the effect button 63 blinks in purple in FIG. 104 (F). In 104 (B), the effect button 63 is blinking in blue, in FIG. 104 (C), the effect button 63 is blinking in blue, in FIG. 104 (D), the effect button 63 is blinking in green, and in FIG. 104 (E), the effect button 63 is blinking in green. Is blinking in red, and the color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in the direction of increasing the degree of expectation so that the effect button 63 blinks in purple in FIG. 104 (F). In FIG. 104 (B), the effect button 63 is blinking in white, in FIG. 104 (C), the effect button 63 is blinking in blue, in FIG. 104 (D), the effect button 63 is blinking in green, and in FIG. 104 (E), the effect button 63 is blinking in green. The color of the light emitting mode of the effect button 63 may be changed in a direction in which the degree of expectation is high so that the effect button 63 blinks in purple in FIG. 104 (F).

[Modification 7]
In the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, the game ball on the lower left side of the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and to the first starting port 20. Arrangement of these numerical values by the number of 1st special figure hold (blue number) based on the entry of the ball and the number of the 2nd special figure hold (red number) based on the entry of the game ball into the 2nd starting port 21. An effect mode selection unit SEL capable of selecting an effect mode was arranged and displayed above. However, the effect mode selection unit SEL is displayed on the display screen 7a only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state to the end, and the A mode, B mode, and C mode are displayed only during this predetermined period. The player may operate (press) the effect button 63 to select one of the effect modes composed of the D mode and the D mode. In other words, the effect mode may be changed only in a predetermined period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state to the end. As described above, the period during which the effect mode can be selected is the period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the effect mode is set by operating (pressing) the effect button 63 as the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate. The message "change mode with the effect button" indicating that the image can be changed is displayed at a predetermined position on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) (for example, above the effect mode selection unit SEL). It was the period that was placed and displayed in. Therefore, as a period during which the effect mode can be selected, the effect mode selection unit SEL can perform the effect only during a predetermined period from the occurrence of the jackpot game state to the end of the jackpot game state. In addition to the display screen 7a, the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R are not displayed at all. Therefore, in addition to the display screen 7a, the left sub display screen 64L and the right sub display screen 64R are used to select the effect mode. Various effects can be developed without the SEL being annoying at all.

[Modification 8]
In the load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104, it was performed in the right-handed gaming state, but it may be performed in the left-handed gaming state. .. In this way, the variation of the production can be increased.

[Modification 9]
The load applying effect A of FIG. 102, the load applying effect B of FIG. 103, and the load applying effect C of FIG. 104 may not include a part of the described effects, or may have other effects added. ..

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect D2-1]
A gaming machine provided with a load means capable of applying a predetermined load to a player based on the progress of the production.
The load means is operated in the other effect modes other than the specific effect mode among the plurality of effect modes to apply the first load to the player, and the load means is operated in the specific effect mode. It is possible to execute the first effect of giving the player a second load different from the first load.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-2]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1.
There is only one type of the first load,
There are a plurality of types of the second load.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-3]
The gaming machine according to aspect D2-1 or aspect D2-2.
The load means applies the first load or the second load to the palm of the player.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-3.
The first effect can be executed in a state where the player has set the release prohibition of the operation of the load means.
A game machine characterized by that.

◇ [Aspect D2-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of aspects D2-1 to D2-4.
It is possible to execute a second effect in which the light emitting means provided in the load means is set as a predetermined light emitting mode and the light emitting decoration by the load means is performed regardless of whether or not the operation prohibition of the load means is released by the player. is there,
A game machine characterized by that.

Hereinafter, the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 105 to 107. This game state continuation suggestion effect is executed during a change effect of a special symbol or the like. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub-control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the game state continuation suggestion effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the image display device 7 is used. The image is displayed on the display screen 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).
In the game states in the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C shown below, the "probability change state" means the "high accuracy high base state", and the "time saving state" means the "low accuracy high base state". The "normal state" is a "low probability low base state".

[Game state continuation suggestion production A]
FIG. 105 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect A. The game state continuation suggestion effect A is an effect performed when the game state changes from the probabilistic state to the normal state, and is performed over a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, the probabilistic game state effect and the result effect A, which will be described later, are performed in the probabilistic state, and these effects are performed during one change of the special symbol. Further, the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed in the normal state, and these effects are performed during one change of the special symbol.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, as shown in FIG. 105 (A), first, the probabilistic game state effect is performed. In this probabilistic game state effect, the probabilistic change background image XEA is used as the background image, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, and the probabilistic state suggestion display XE1 and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 end. Suggestion display XE3A is performed. The probability change state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the game state is a probability change state, and is indicated by the characters “probability change mode” in the figure. The right-handed suggestion display XE2 is a display for encouraging the player to hit right. The probability change state end suggestion display XE3A is a display suggesting that the probability change state ends, and the character "LAST" is shown in the figure. The probabilistic background image XEA is shown as a crosshatch in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (B), the result effect A is performed. In this result effect A, the background image XEB for the result with the door as a motif is used as the background image, and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 and the game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display showing the game result information, and includes the number of consecutive chans in the consecutive chans (the number of big hits in the consecutive chans) in the time saving state and the probability change state, and the winning balls acquired during the consecutive chans. Information representing is displayed. In the example of the figure, in the game result information display XE4, it is shown that the number of consecutive chans is 10 consecutive chans and the number of acquired balls is 15,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (C), the result effect B is performed. In this result effect B, the background image XEB for the result and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. The advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display suggesting that the game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player continues, and specifically, a button image representing the effect button 63 and a button image shown therein. Includes the words "Continue!" The background image XEB for the result is shown by hatching including a square pattern in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 105 (D), a normal game state effect is performed. In this normal game state effect, the normal background image XEC is used as the background image, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, and the normal state suggestion display XE6 is performed. Further, in the normal game state production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. The normal state suggestion display XE6 is a display indicating that the gaming state is a normal state, and is indicated by the characters “normal mode” in the figure. The background image XEC for normal use is shown by a predetermined hatch in the figure.

[Game state continuation suggestion production B]
FIG. 106 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect B. The game state continuation suggestion effect B is an effect performed when the game state changes from the time-saving game state to the normal game state, and is performed over a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, the time-saving game state effect and the result effect A, which will be described later, are performed in the time-saving state, and these effects are performed during one change of the special symbol. Further, the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed in the normal state, and these effects are performed during one change of the special symbol.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect B, as shown in FIG. 106 (A), first, the time-saving game state effect is performed. In this time-saving game state effect, the time-saving background image XED is used as the background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are varied, and the time-saving state suggestion display XE7, the right-handed suggestion display XE2, and the time-saving state end. Suggestion display XE3B is performed. The time saving state suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state, and is indicated by the characters "time saving mode" in the figure. The right-handed suggestion display XE2 is a display for encouraging the player to hit right. The time saving state end suggestion display XE3B is a display suggesting that the time saving state ends, and the character "LAST" is shown in the figure. The time-saving background image XED is shown by a predetermined hatch in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (B), the result effect A is performed. In this result effect A, the background image XEB for the result with the door as a motif is used as the background image, and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 and the game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display showing the game result information, and includes the number of consecutive chans in the consecutive chans (the number of big hits in the consecutive chans) in the time saving state and the probability change state, and the winning balls acquired during the consecutive chans. Information representing is displayed. In the example of the figure, in the game result information display XE4, it is shown that the number of consecutive chans is 10 consecutive chans and the number of acquired balls is 15,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (C), the result effect B is performed. In this result effect B, the background image XEB for the result and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. The advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display suggesting that the game state (time saving state) advantageous to the player continues, and specifically, a button image representing the effect button 63 and a button image shown therein. Includes the words "Continue!" The background image XEB for the result is shown by hatching including a square pattern in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 106 (D), a normal game state effect is performed. In this normal game state effect, the normal background image XEC is used as the background image, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, and the normal state suggestion display XE6 is performed. Further, in the normal game state production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other. The normal state suggestion display XE6 is a display indicating that the gaming state is a normal state, and is indicated by the characters “normal mode” in the figure. The background image XEC for normal use is shown by a predetermined hatch in the figure.

[Game state continuation suggestion production C]
FIG. 107 is a diagram for explaining the game state continuation suggestion effect C. The game state continuation suggestion effect C is an effect performed when the game state changes from the probabilistic game state to the time-saving game state, and is performed over a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, the probabilistic game state effect and the result effect A, which will be described later, are performed in the probabilistic state, and these effects are performed during one change of the special symbol. Further, the result effect B and the time-saving game state effect are performed in the time-saving state, and these effects are performed during one change of the special symbol.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect C, as shown in FIG. 107 (A), first, the probabilistic game state effect is performed. In this probabilistic game state effect, the probabilistic change background image XEA is used as the background image, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, and the probabilistic state suggestion display XE1 and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 end. Suggestion display XE3A is performed. The probability change state suggestion display XE1 is a display indicating that the game state is a probability change state, and is indicated by the characters “probability change mode” in the figure. The right-handed suggestion display XE2 is a display for encouraging the player to hit right. The probability change state end suggestion display XE3A is a display suggesting that the probability change state ends, and the character "LAST" is shown in the figure. The probabilistic background image XEA is shown as a crosshatch in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (B), the result effect A is performed. In this result effect A, the background image XEB for the result with the door as a motif is used as the background image, and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 and the game result information display XE4 are performed. The game result information display XE4 is a display showing the game result information, and includes the number of consecutive chans in the consecutive chans (the number of big hits in the consecutive chans) in the time saving state and the probability change state, and the winning balls acquired during the consecutive chans. Information representing is displayed. In the example of the figure, in the game result information display XE4, it is shown that the number of consecutive chans is 10 consecutive chans and the number of acquired balls is 15,000.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (C), the result effect B is performed. In this result effect B, the background image XEB for the result and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 are continuously displayed, and further, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. The advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is a display suggesting that the game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player continues, and specifically, a button image representing the effect button 63 and a button image shown therein. Includes the words "Continue!" The background image XEB for the result is shown by hatching including a square pattern in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 107 (D), the time saving game state effect is performed. In this time-saving game state effect, the time-saving background image XED is used as the background image, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are varied, and the time-saving state suggestion display XE7 is performed. Further, in the time-saving game state production, the ally character CRA and the enemy character CRB fight each other, and the right-handed suggestion display XE2 is continuously displayed. The time saving state suggestion display XE7 is a display indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state, and is indicated by the characters "time saving mode" in the figure. The time-saving background image XED is shown by a predetermined hatch in the figure.

In the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C, the probability change state suggestion display XE1, the right-handed suggestion display XE2, the probability change state end suggestion display XE3A, the time saving state end suggestion display XE3B, the game result information display XE4, and the advantageous game state continuation suggestion Display XE5, normal state suggestion display XE6, time saving state suggestion display XE7, ally character CRA, and enemy character CRB are background images (probability variation background image XEA, result background image XEB, normal background image XEC, time saving, respectively. It is displayed on the front side of the background image XED).
Further, when the game state continuation suggestion effects A and B shift from the result effect B to the normal game state effect, the door of the result background image XEB of the result effect B is opened, and the normal background image XEC is displayed. , Decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, normal state suggestion display XE6, ally character CRA, enemy character CRB, etc. are displayed on the front side thereof.
In the above game state continuation suggestion effect C, when shifting from the result effect B to the normal game state effect, the door of the result background image XEB of the result effect B is opened, the time saving background image XED is displayed, and the front side thereof. The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, the time saving state suggestion display XE7, the ally character CRA, the enemy character CRB, the right-handed suggestion display XE2, and the like are displayed.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect A, the probabilistic game state effect and the result effect A are performed when the probabilistic state, and the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed when the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic game state effect, the result effect A, and the result effect B may be performed when the probabilistic state, and the normal game state effect may be performed when the normal state.
Further, in the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect B, the time-saving game state effect and the result effect A are performed when the time-saving state, and the result effect B and the normal game state effect are performed when the normal state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving game state effect, the result effect A, and the result effect B may be performed when the time-saving state is in the normal state, and the normal game state effect may be performed in the normal state.
Further, in the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect C, the probabilistic game state effect and the result effect A are performed when the probabilistic state, and the result effect B and the time-saving game state effect are performed when the time-saving state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probabilistic game state effect, the result effect A, and the result effect B may be performed when the probabilistic state is in the probabilistic state, and the time-saving game state effect may be performed when the time-saving game state is produced.

In the game state continuation suggestion effects A to C, the game result information display XE4 is not displayed at the time of the result effect B in which the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is displayed. At the time of the result effect B in which the display XE5 is displayed, the game result information display XE4 may be displayed.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect A, when the probabilistic state is relatively advantageous to the player, the probabilistic game state effect is performed by performing the probabilistic state suggestion display XE1 indicating that the probabilistic state is in the probabilistic state, and then from the probabilistic state. , Despite shifting to the normal state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the probabilistic state, the result effect of performing the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 that suggests that the game state that is advantageous to the player (probability change state) continues. B is done. According to this configuration, despite the transition from the probabilistic state to the normal state, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is intentionally performed, so that even if the player enters the normal state, the player can move to the next probabilistic state. It is possible to give a feeling of expectation and prevent the player from losing the motivation to continue the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned game state continuation suggestion effect A, when the player is in a probabilistic state that is relatively advantageous to the player, the probabilistic game state effect that performs the probabilistic state suggestion display XE1 indicating that the probabilistic state is in the probabilistic state is performed, and then the game result information. The result effect A for displaying the game result information XE4 representing the above is performed. According to this configuration, it is possible to notify the player of the game result information in the probabilistic state, and it is possible to improve the player's motivation to aim for the probabilistic state. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, the result effect A for performing the game result information display XE4 representing the game result information is performed in the probabilistic state, and the game state (probability change state) advantageous to the player continues. The result effect B for performing the suggestion advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 is performed in the normal state. According to this configuration, the player can improve the motivation for aiming at the probabilistic state by performing the result effect A for performing the game result information display XE4 representing the game result information in the probabilistic state. Advantageous game state continuation suggestion display that suggests that the advantageous game state (probability change state) will continue By performing the result effect B that performs XE5 in the normal state, the player has a feeling of expectation for the next probabilistic state. Can be given, and it is possible to prevent the player from impairing the motivation to continue the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 in the result effect B is performed after the game result information display XE4 in the result effect A disappears. According to this configuration, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 can be emphasized, and even in the normal state, the player can be given a feeling of expectation for the next probabilistic state, and the player can continue the game. It is possible to suppress the loss of motivation. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game state continuation suggestion effect A, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display XE5 in the result effect B includes a button image representing the effect button 63. According to this configuration, it is possible to emphasize the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display XE5 for the player, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the next probable change state even in the normal state, and the player. Can be suppressed from impairing the motivation to continue the game. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XE-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect that performs a first game state suggestion display indicating that the player is in the first game state when the first game state is relatively advantageous to the player.
There is the second display effect, and the gaming state that is advantageous to the player despite the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first gaming state. It is a display effect that displays the advantageous game state continuation suggestion that suggests that
A combination effect including the first display effect and the second display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect is performed, and then the second display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-1.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The third display effect is a display effect for displaying game result information representing game result information.
The combination effect may include the third display effect, and may include the third display effect.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed after the first display effect.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-2.
In the combination effect, the third display effect is performed in the first gaming state, and the second display effect is performed in the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-3.
In the combination effect, the advantageous game state continuation suggestion display in the second display effect is performed after the game result information display in the third display effect disappears.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XE-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XE-4.
In the combination effect, the advantageous gaming state continuation suggestion display in the second display effect includes an operation means image.
A game machine characterized by that.

In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the game state management process of FIG. 28, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500 times in the low probability state (including the low probability low base state and the normal state). (When the ceiling counter becomes 0), the play time (low accuracy high base state, time saving state) shifts. In other words, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500 times after the low probability state is reached after the previous jackpot, the play time (low probability high base state, time reduction state) is entered. This play time is continued until the special symbol fluctuates 700 times. In the game states in the mode change effects A to C during the game shown below, the "probability change state" means the "high accuracy high base state", and the "time saving state" means the "low accuracy high base state". The "normal state" is a "low probability low base state".

Hereinafter, the in-game mode change effects A to C will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 to 110. This in-game mode change effect is an effect performed when the game state is the normal state and the time saving state. When the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the mode change effect during the game, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen of the image display device 7 is included. An image for changing the mode during the game is displayed on 7a and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Mode change effect A during game]
FIG. 108 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect A during the game. In the in-game mode change effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 108 (A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as the background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate and are stopped and displayed. The normal background image XF is a background image suggesting that the gaming state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500, the ceiling reaching effect is performed as shown in FIG. 108 (B). In the ceiling arrival effect, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and the ceiling arrival suggestion display XF1, the time saving state rush suggestion display XF2, the right-handed start suggestion display XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling arrival suggestion display XF1 is a display suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached 500 times (ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is described as "ceiling reached !!" in the figure. The time saving state rush suggestion display XF2 is a display suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times (ceiling counter is 0) and shifts to the play time (time saving state). Is written. The right-handed start suggestion display XF3 is a display for urging the player to start right-handed, and is described as "right-handed start" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (C), the time saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display effect, the background image is changed to the time-saving background image XFA, and the time-saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, and the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 are displayed. The time saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is the time saving state, and is expressed as "time saving medium" in the figure. The right-handed suggestion display XF5 is a display for urging the player to right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed" in the figure. The time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 is a display indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving state (play time) (corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), and is described as "350 more times" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA is continued, and the mode suggestion display XF7 Is added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among the plurality of game modes (display modes) during the play time (during the time saving state). In this in-game mode change effect, when the play time (time reduction state) is entered by reaching the ceiling, mode A among a plurality of game modes is automatically selected at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (E), the player mode change image display effect is performed. This player mode change image display effect is an effect performed after the special symbol has changed 50 times from the mode suggestion display effect shown in FIG. 108 (D). In this player mode change image display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA continues. Then, the mode change display XF8 is displayed. Since the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 fluctuated by 50 from the time of the mode suggestion display effect, it is described as "300 more times" in the figure.
The mode change display XF8 is displayed on the display screen 7a by the player operating the effect button 63 and the select button 68 while the special symbol is changing or waiting for a customer (the special symbol is stopped changing). It will pop up. The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection promotion display XF8B. The mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the characters "Select a mode with" adjacent to the button image, that is, prompts the player to select a mode with the button. It is displayed.
By operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63, the player can select one mode display XF8A from the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects the mode display XF8A representing the mode B from the three mode display XF8A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (F), a mode change completion display effect is performed. In this mode change completion display effect, the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B". Further, in the mode change completion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA is continued, and the mode change display XF8 Is erased.

[Mode change effect B during game]
FIG. 109 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect B during the game. In the in-game mode change effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 109 (A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as the background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate and are stopped and displayed. The normal background image XF is a background image suggesting that the gaming state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500, the ceiling reaching effect is performed as shown in FIG. 109 (B). In the ceiling arrival effect, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and the ceiling arrival suggestion display XF1, the time saving state rush suggestion display XF2, the right-handed start suggestion display XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling arrival suggestion display XF1 is a display suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached 500 times (ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is described as "ceiling reached !!" in the figure. The time saving state rush suggestion display XF2 is a display suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times (ceiling counter is 0) and shifts to the play time (time saving state). Is written. The right-handed start suggestion display XF3 is a display for urging the player to start right-handed, and is described as "right-handed start" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (C), the time saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display effect, the background image is changed to the time-saving background image XFA, and the time-saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, and the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 are displayed. The time saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is the time saving state, and is expressed as "time saving medium" in the figure. The right-handed suggestion display XF5 is a display for urging the player to right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed" in the figure. The time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 is a display indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving state (play time) (corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), and is described as "350 more times" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA is continued, and the mode suggestion display XF7 Is added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among the plurality of game modes (display modes) during the play time (during the time saving state). In this in-game mode change effect, when the play time (time reduction state) is entered by reaching the ceiling, mode A among a plurality of game modes is automatically selected at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA are continued. , Mode change display XF8 is automatically popped up. Since the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 fluctuated by 50 from the time of the mode suggestion display effect, it is described as "300 more times" in the figure.
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A and a mode selection promotion display XF8B. The mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the characters "Select a mode with" adjacent to the button image. That is, by combining these, a mode can be selected with a button. It is a display that encourages the player.
By operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63, the player can select one mode display XF8A from the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects the mode display XF8A representing the mode B from the three mode display XF8A.

In this automatic mode change image display effect, the special symbol fluctuates 500 times from the previous jackpot to enter the play time (time saving state), and the special symbol fluctuates 50 times (mode shown in FIG. 109 (D)). This is an effect performed based on the fact that the special symbol changes 50 times from the suggestion display effect). In other words, this automatic mode change image display effect is an effect performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 550 times since the previous jackpot. Further, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed during one change of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol.
That is, this automatic mode change image display effect is a game on the condition that the special symbol fluctuates 550 times counting from the previous jackpot during one fluctuation of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. It is done automatically without any human operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 109 (F), a mode change completion display effect is performed. In this mode change completion display effect, the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B". Further, in the mode change completion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA is continued, and the mode change display XF8 Is erased.

[Mode change effect C during game]
FIG. 110 is a diagram for explaining the mode change effect C during the game. In the in-game mode change effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 110 (A), a normal game state display effect is performed. In this normal game state display effect, the normal background image XF is used as the background image, and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R fluctuate and are stopped and displayed. The normal background image XF is a background image suggesting that the gaming state is the normal state.

Next, in the normal state, when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches 500, the ceiling reaching effect is performed as shown in FIG. 110 (B). In the ceiling arrival effect, the normal background image XF is continuously displayed, and the ceiling arrival suggestion display XF1, the time saving state rush suggestion display XF2, the right-handed start suggestion display XF3, and the ally character CRA are displayed. The ceiling arrival suggestion display XF1 is a display suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached 500 times (ceiling counter is 0) in the normal state, and is described as "ceiling reached !!" in the figure. The time saving state rush suggestion display XF2 is a display suggesting that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes 500 times (ceiling counter is 0) and shifts to the play time (time saving state). Is written. The right-handed start suggestion display XF3 is a display for urging the player to start right-handed, and is described as "right-handed start" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (C), the time saving game state display effect is performed. In this time-saving game state display effect, the background image is changed to the time-saving background image XFA, and the time-saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, and the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 are displayed. The time saving state suggestion display XF4 is a display suggesting that the gaming state is the time saving state, and is expressed as "time saving medium" in the figure. The right-handed suggestion display XF5 is a display for urging the player to right-handed, and is displayed as "right-handed" in the figure. The time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 is a display indicating the remaining number of times of the time-saving state (play time) (corresponding to the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), and is described as "350 more times" in the figure.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (D), a mode suggestion display effect is performed. In this mode suggestion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA is continued, and the mode suggestion display XF7 Is added. The mode suggestion display XF7 suggests the currently selected mode among the plurality of game modes (display modes) during the play time (during the time saving state). In this in-game mode change effect, when the play time (time reduction state) is entered by reaching the ceiling, mode A among a plurality of game modes is automatically selected at first.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (E), an automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In this automatic mode change image display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, the mode suggestion display XF7, and the ally character CRA are continued. , Mode change display XF8 is automatically popped up. Since the time-saving state duration suggestion display XF6 fluctuated by 50 from the time of the mode suggestion display effect, it is described as "300 more times" in the figure.
The mode change display XF8 includes three mode displays XF8A, a mode selection promotion display XF8B, and a mode selection time suggestion display XF8C. The mode display XF8A represents mode A, mode B, and mode C. The mode selection promotion display XF8B is represented by a button image representing the effect button 63 and the characters "Select a mode with" adjacent to the button image. That is, by combining these, a mode can be selected with a button. It is a display that encourages the player. The mode selection time suggestion display XF8C is a display suggesting the time during which the mode can be changed, and is described as "5 seconds left" in the figure. In this example, the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C performs a countdown display and represents the remaining time during which the mode can be changed. Not limited to this, the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C performs a count-up display from the display of the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C until a predetermined number of seconds is reached to indicate the time during which the mode can be changed. May be good. The button image of the mode selection promotion display XF8B and the countdown display (timer display) of the mode selection time suggestion display XF8C are displayed in association with each other.
By operating the select button 68 and the effect button 63, the player can select one mode display XF8A from the three mode displays XF8A in the mode change display XF8. In the following, it is assumed that the player selects the mode display XF8A representing the mode B from the three mode display XF8A.

In this automatic mode change image display effect, the special symbol fluctuates 500 times from the previous jackpot to enter the play time (time saving state), and the special symbol fluctuates 50 times (mode shown in FIG. 110 (D)). This is an effect performed based on the fact that the special symbol changes 50 times from the suggestion display effect). In other words, this automatic mode change image display effect is an effect performed based on the fact that the special symbol has changed 550 times since the previous jackpot. Further, this automatic mode change image display effect is performed during one change of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol.
That is, this automatic mode change image display effect is a game on the condition that the special symbol fluctuates 550 times counting from the previous jackpot during one fluctuation of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. It is done automatically without any human operation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 110 (F), a mode change completion display effect is performed. In this mode change completion display effect, the mode suggestion display XF7 is changed from "mode A" to "mode B". Further, in the mode change completion display effect, the display of the time saving background image XFA, the time saving state suggestion display XF4, the right-handed suggestion display XF5, the time saving state duration suggestion display XF6, and the ally character CRA is continued, and the mode change display XF8 Is erased.

In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the mode change display XF8 is displayed on the display screen 7a in the immediately preceding change or in the change area where the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R have changed due to the change. It has become.
Further, in the above-mentioned mode change effects B and C during the game, after the mode is changed by the automatic mode change image display effect, the mode cannot be changed again until the play time (time reduction state) ends or a big hit is made. ing. Not limited to this, even after the mode is changed by the automatic mode change image display effect, the above-mentioned predetermined conditions (for example, the special symbol has changed 700 times counting from the previous jackpot) are satisfied. In that case, the automatic mode change image display effect may be performed again.
Further, in the above-mentioned in-game mode change effects B and C, the automatic mode change image display effect is performed by one variation of the special symbol, but the variation time of the special symbol in the variation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is The length is configured to be longer than the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the fluctuation before the fluctuation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed. In addition, the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the fluctuation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed is longer than the length of the fluctuation time of the special symbol in the fluctuation after the fluctuation in which the automatic mode change image display effect is performed. It is configured.

[Modification example]
In the above-mentioned mode change effects B and C during the game, the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed on condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached 550 times since the last big hit. Not limited to this, the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed on condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number since the last big hit. Further, the mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on other conditions even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol does not reach a predetermined number after the previous jackpot. For example, even if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol does not reach the predetermined number since the last big hit, a predetermined point has been accumulated, or a predetermined production (premier production, etc.) has appeared in the fluctuation, or The mode change display XF8 may be automatically displayed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery has been won.

In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the mode display XF8A is displayed and the mode can be selected while the special symbol is changing, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the customer waiting screen (demonstration screen) is displayed. The mode display XF8A may be displayed so that the mode can be selected.

In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the mode display XF8A is displayed during one change of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol, and the mode can be selected. Not limited to this, the mode display XF8A may be displayed across a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol so that the mode can be selected.

[Effect example]
In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the display of the time saving state suggestion display XF4 indicating that the time saving state is relatively advantageous to the player and the game mode of one of the plurality of game modes performed in the time saving state. The mode A display indicating the mode A is performed, and then the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached 50 times after entering the ceiling, and the special symbol has changed 550 times counting from the previous jackpot. Based on what has been done), the mode change display XF8 for changing from the mode A to one of the plurality of modes (for example, mode B) is performed. According to this configuration, the mode can be changed by satisfying a predetermined condition in the time saving state which is advantageous for the player, so that the player can enjoy the time saving state in a plurality of modes and improve the interest in the time saving state. Can be made to. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the mode change display XF8 for changing from the mode A to one game mode (for example, mode B) among the plurality of modes has a special symbol counting from the previous big hit. This is performed on condition that the number of fluctuations has reached a predetermined number (550 times).
According to this configuration, even if the jackpot does not come easily from the previous jackpot, the mode change display XF8 can be displayed when the number of fluctuations of the special symbol reaches a predetermined number, so that the mode can be displayed to the player. It is possible to give an opportunity to change the mood by changing. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the mode change display XF8 for changing from the mode A to one of the plurality of modes (for example, mode B) while the special symbol is changing is the previous jackpot. This is performed on the condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes THX a predetermined number of times, counting later.
According to this configuration, even if the jackpot does not come easily from the previous jackpot, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes THX a predetermined number of times, the mode change display XF8 is displayed even during the fluctuation of the special symbol. Since it can be displayed, it is possible to appropriately give the player an opportunity to change his / her mood by changing the mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the mode A is changed to one of the plurality of modes (for example, mode B) during one change of the special symbol without straddling the plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. The mode change display XF8 for changing is performed on the condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes THX a predetermined number of times counting from the previous big hit.
According to this configuration, even if the jackpot does not come easily from the previous jackpot, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes THX a predetermined number of times, the player does not straddle a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol, and one special symbol. Since the mode change display XF8 can be displayed during the fluctuation of, the player can be smoothly given an opportunity to change his / her mood by changing the mode. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

In the above-mentioned mode change effects A to C during the game, the mode A is changed to one of the plurality of modes (for example, mode B) during one change of the special symbol without straddling the plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. The mode change display XF8 for changing is automatically performed without any operation of the player, provided that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached THX a predetermined number of times since the last big hit.
According to this configuration, even if the jackpot does not come easily from the previous jackpot, if the number of fluctuations of the special symbol becomes THX a predetermined number of times, the player does not straddle a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol, and one special symbol. Since the mode change display XF8 is automatically displayed on the display screen 7a during the fluctuation of, the player can be smoothly given an opportunity to change the mood by changing the mode, and the player can change the mode at the same time. Can be suppressed from missing. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
[Aspect XF-1]
It is a game machine equipped with a display means capable of executing a plurality of display effects.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a first display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a second display effect may be performed.
As one of the plurality of display effects, a third display effect may be performed.
The first display effect is a display effect for displaying a first game state suggestion image indicating that the player is in a relatively advantageous first game state.
The second display effect is a display effect for displaying the first game mode representing the first game mode, which is one of the plurality of game modes performed in the first game state.
The third display effect is a mode change display for changing from the first game mode to a second game mode, which is one of a plurality of game modes, based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. It is a display production to be performed,
A combination effect including the first display effect, the second display effect, and the third display effect may be performed.
In the combination effect, the first display effect and the second display effect are performed, and then a third display effect is performed.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-2]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-1.
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is performed on condition that the number of fluctuations of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number since the previous big hit.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-3]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-2.
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the mode change display is performed on condition that the number of changes of the special symbol has reached a predetermined number of times counting from the previous big hit during the change of the special symbol.
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-4]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-3.
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the number of changes of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times counted from the previous big hit during one change of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. The mode change display is performed on the condition that
A game machine characterized by that.
[Aspect XF-5]
The gaming machine according to the aspect XF-4.
In the third display effect of the combination effect, the number of changes of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times counted from the previous big hit during one change of the special symbol without straddling a plurality of fluctuations of the special symbol. On condition that, the mode change display is automatically performed without the player's operation.
A game machine characterized by that.

The group notice effects A to C will be described below with reference to FIGS. 111 to 113. This group notice effect is executed during the variable effect of the decorative pattern. That is, when the image control microcomputer 101 analyzes the command received from the sub control board 90 and includes an instruction to execute the group notice effect, the corresponding image data is read from the ROM 103 and the display screen of the image display device 7 is included. The image is displayed on 7a or the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U).

[Group notice production A]
FIG. 111 is a diagram for explaining the group notice effect A. In the group notice effect of the present embodiment, there are cases where a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image is framed in and out together with the plurality of specific images. In the group notice effect A, first, as shown in FIG. 111 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 111A, as shown in FIG. The moving effect is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smile (smiley mark), but can be any shape representing a specific target. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific image TGs (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), the special image SG may be framed in by being mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 (C), a case where the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) and a case where the special image SG is not mixed and a plurality of specific image TGs (smiles) are mixed. Only the mark) may be framed in. When the special image SG is framed in by mixing with a plurality of specific image TGs, the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the special image SG is not framed in. For example, the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs is 50%, and the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is not framed in is 30%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and can improve the interest as compared with the monotonous group notice. Even when the special image SG is not mixed and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in, the jackpot in the fluctuation is compared with the case where a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are not framed in. Expectations are high.

FIG. 111 (D) shows another embodiment different from FIG. 111 (C). In the above, the special image SG has been described as an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may represent the same object as the specific image TG as long as it is an image different from the specific image TG. In FIG. 111 (D), the special image SG has the same smiley mark as the specific image TG, but the color is different from that of the specific image TG. Even in this case, the player can identify the presence or absence of the special image SG from the plurality of specific image TGs.

FIG. 111 (E) shows a state in which a plurality of specific image TGs and a special image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific image TGs and the special image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R covered by the plurality of specific image TGs can be visually recognized in a stopped display state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot of "333".

FIGS. 111 (G) to 111 (L) are different effects from those in FIGS. 111 (A) to (F) during the change of the special figure. In FIG. 111 (G), the left decorative symbol 8L and the right decorative symbol 8R are stopped and displayed at “3” during the special symbol change, and are in the reach state. After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (H), the intermediate decorative symbol 8C is stopped and displayed at "2", and the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are lost at "323". After that, as shown in FIG. 111 (I), an effect is executed in which a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved downward. The plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the front side of the stop display of "323" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and cover the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific image TGs (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 111 (J), the special image SG may be framed in by being mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111 (J), a case where the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) and a case where the special image SG is not mixed and a plurality of specific image TGs (smiles) are mixed. Only the mark) may be framed in. When the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs, the expectation that the revival effect is executed is higher than in the case where the special image SG is not framed in. That is, the expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation becomes high. For example, the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs is 70%, and the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is not framed in is 50%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and can improve the interest as compared with the monotonous group notice. Even when the special image SG is not mixed and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in, the revival effect is executed as compared with the case where a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are not framed in. The degree of expectation is high.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the jackpot differs depending on the difference in the start timing of the group notice production. That is, when the group notice effect is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R as shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (F), and when the decorative symbols are displayed as shown in FIGS. 111 (G) to (L). Expectations for big hits differ depending on whether the group notice effect is executed while the 8L, 8C, and 8R are lost and the stop display is displayed.

FIG. 111 (K) shows a state in which a plurality of specific image TGs and a special image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When a plurality of specific image TGs and a special image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R covered with the plurality of specific image TGs are changed from the stop display of the lost mode of "323" to "333". The effect displayed in the state of being switched to the stop display of the jackpot mode is executed. In some cases, the stop display in the lost mode may be displayed without switching to the stop display in the hit mode.

[Group notice production B]
FIG. 112 is a diagram for explaining the group notice effect B. In the group notice effect of the present embodiment, there are cases where a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image is framed in and out together with the plurality of specific images. In the group notice effect B, first, as shown in FIG. 112 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 112 (A), as shown in FIG. 112 (B), a plurality of specific image TGs representing smiles are framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a to the left. The effect of moving to is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smile (smiley mark), but can be any shape representing a specific target. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a and moved toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is the specific image TG as shown in FIG. 112 (C). Covered by (smiley marks).

FIG. 112 (D) shows a state in which a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a. When a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, a special image SG may be framed in after the plurality of specific image TGs. Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 (D), a case where a special image SG is framed in after a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) and a case where a special image SG (smiley mark) is followed by a special image Image SG may not continue, and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) may be framed in. When the special image SG is framed in after the plurality of specific image TGs, the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than the case where the special image SG is not framed in. For example, the expectation of a jackpot when a special image SG is framed in after a plurality of specific image TGs is 60%, and the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is not framed in is 40%. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the special image SG follows the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and the interest can be improved as compared with the monotonous group notice. Even if the special image SG does not continue and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in, the jackpot in the fluctuation is compared with the case where a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are not framed in. Expectations are high.

When a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R covered with the plurality of specific image TGs can be visually recognized in a stopped display state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot of "333". The special image SG has a slower moving speed to the left than the plurality of specific image TGs, and moves slowly to frame out. Therefore, a plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the display screen 7a for a predetermined period even after the frame is out from the display screen 7a. After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (F), the special image SG is framed out from the left side of the display screen 7a, and only the stopped and displayed decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are displayed.

FIGS. 112 (G) to 112 (L) are different effects from FIGS. 112 (A) to 112 (F) during the special figure change. In FIG. 112 (G), the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R is displayed. During this variable display, as shown in FIG. 112 (H), an effect is executed in which a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved downward. The plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific image TGs (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 112 (I), the special image SG may be framed in by being mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks). Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 112 (I), a case where the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) and a case where the special image SG is not mixed and a plurality of specific image TGs (smiles) are mixed. Only the mark) may be framed in. When the special image SG is framed in by mixing with a plurality of specific image TGs, the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the special image SG is not framed in. For example, the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs is 50%, and the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is not framed in is 30%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and can improve the interest as compared with the monotonous group notice. Even when the special image SG is not mixed and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in, the jackpot in the fluctuation is compared with the case where a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are not framed in. Expectations are high.

In the present embodiment, the degree of expectation of the jackpot differs depending on the difference in the moving direction of the group notice effect. That is, there are cases where a plurality of specific image TGs and special image SGs move to the left as shown in FIGS. 112 (A) to (F), and cases where a plurality of specific image TGs and special image SGs move to the left as shown in FIGS. 112 (G) to (L). The degree of expectation of a big hit differs depending on the case where the special image SG moves downward.

FIG. 112 (J) shows a state in which a plurality of specific image TGs and a special image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a. When the plurality of specific image TGs and the special image SG are framed out from the display screen 7a, nothing is displayed on the display screen 7a as shown in FIG. 112 (K). After that, when a predetermined period elapses, as shown in FIG. 112 (L), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a stopped display state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R suddenly appear in the form of a jackpot of "333".

[Group notice production C]
FIG. 113 is a diagram for explaining the group notice effect C. In the group notice effect of the present embodiment, there are cases where a plurality of specific images frame in and out of the display screen 7a, and cases where a special image is framed in and out together with the plurality of specific images. In the group notice effect C, first, as shown in FIG. 113 (A), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variably displayed on the display screen 7a.

The decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are a set of symbols including the left decorative symbol 8L, the middle decorative symbol 8C, and the right decorative symbol 8R, and the special symbol is variably displayed by the variable display of the set of symbols (special symbol). (Fluctuation) is indicated, and the result of the special drawing lottery is notified by the stop display of a set of symbols. The special symbol may be either a first special symbol or a second special symbol. Here, it is assumed that the special figure 1 variation is executed when the gaming state is the normal state (low probability low base state). Further, here, the display of the hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C is omitted. The hold icon 9A and the variable icon (the hold icon) 9C may or may not be displayed.

During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R shown in FIG. 113 (A), as shown in FIG. 113 (B), a plurality of specific image TGs representing smiles are framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a to the left. The effect of moving to is executed. Here, the specific image TG represents a smile (smiley mark), but can be any shape representing a specific target. The specific object here is not limited to characters, living things, and objects, but also includes abstract objects such as characters, figures, and symbols, and conceptual objects whose representation is unknown. That is, the specific object here includes all aspects in which the number of specific objects can be specified when a plurality of specific objects exist. The plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R. When a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a and moved toward the left side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific image TGs (smiley marks).

FIG. 113C shows a state in which a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a. When a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, or when a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, a special image SG may be framed in after the plurality of specific image TGs. Here, the special image SG represents a face image wearing sunglasses (sunglasses face). The special image SG can have an arbitrary shape representing a specific object different from the specific image TG. The specific target is as described above.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (C), a case where a special image SG is framed in after a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) and a case where a special image SG is framed in after a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are special. Image SG may not continue, and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) may be framed in. When the special image SG is framed in after the plurality of specific image TGs, the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than the case where the special image SG is not framed in. For example, the expectation of a jackpot when a special image SG is framed in after a plurality of specific image TGs is 60%, and the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is not framed in is 40%. As a result, the player pays attention to whether or not the special image SG follows the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and the interest can be improved as compared with the monotonous group notice. Even if the special image SG does not continue and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in, the jackpot in the fluctuation is compared with the case where a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are not framed in. Expectations are high.

When a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R covered with the plurality of specific image TGs can be visually recognized in a stopped display state. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of a loss of "323". The special image SG is framed out after the plurality of specific image TGs. After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (D), a plurality of specific image TGs and special image SGs are framed out, and only the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed on the display screen 7a are displayed. After that, a pseudo-ream suggestion image consisting of the character image of "one more time !!" is displayed. By displaying this pseudo-continuous suggestion image, it is notified that the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R that are stopped and displayed as the lost symbols are re-variated. In this way, when a plurality of specific image TGs frame in to the display screen 7a, the degree of expectation rises, and when the plurality of specific image TGs frame out from the display screen 7a, as shown in FIGS. 112 (D) to (F). When the symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 113 (D), the lost symbol may be stopped and displayed and then terminated when the pseudo-continuous revariation occurs after the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 113 (D).

After the pseudo-continuous suggestion image is displayed, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R start to re-variate as shown in FIG. 113 (E). During the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R, as shown in FIG. 113 (F), a plurality of specific image TGs are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved downward. That is, in one fluctuation, the second group notice effect is executed. This further increases the jackpot probability. Here, the expectation level is 60% due to the first group notice effect (with special image SG) in FIGS. 113 (B) to (C), and the second group notice effect in FIGS. 113 (F) to (G) (with special image SG). With special image SG), the degree of expectation rises to 80%. The plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the front side of the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and cover the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific image TGs (smiley marks). At this time, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), the special image SG may be framed in by being mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks). The special image SG here is the same image as the special image SG displayed in the first group notice effect of FIG. 113 (C), but may be an image having different contents.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 113 (G), in the second group notice effect, the special image SG is mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) and the special image SG is framed in, and the special image SG is mixed. In some cases, only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in. When the special image SG is framed in by mixing with a plurality of specific image TGs, the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than in the case where the special image SG is not framed in. For example, the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is framed in by mixing with a plurality of specific image TGs is 80%, and the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is not framed in is 70%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and can improve the interest as compared with the monotonous group notice. Even if the special image SG is not mixed and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in, the expectation of the jackpot in the fluctuation is higher than that in the case where the second group notice effect is not executed. It gets higher.

As shown in FIG. 113 (H), when a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R covered with the plurality of specific image TGs can be visually recognized in a stopped display state. become. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of "565" being lost. When the second plurality of specific image TGs frame in to the display screen 7a, the degree of expectation rises, and when the plurality of specific image TGs frame out from the display screen 7a, they hit as shown in FIGS. 112 (D) to 112 (F). When the symbol is stopped and displayed, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 113 (D) and then the pseudo-continuous revariation occurs, the lost symbol is stopped as shown in FIGS. 113 (H) to (L) described later. When the revival effect is executed after being displayed, the lost symbol may be stopped and displayed and ended.

After that, as shown in FIG. 113 (I), an effect is executed in which a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved downward. That is, in one fluctuation, the third group notice effect is executed. This further increases the jackpot probability. Here, the expectation level is 60% due to the first group notice effect (with special image SG) in FIGS. 113 (B) to (C), and the second group notice effect in FIGS. 113 (F) to (G) (with special image SG). With the special image SG), the expectation level rises to 80%, and with the third group notice effect (without the special image SG) shown in FIGS. 113 (I) to (K), the expectation level rises to 90%. If the third group notice effect has a special image SG, the expectation level rises to 99%. The plurality of specific image TGs are displayed on the front side of the stop display of "565" of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R, and cover the stop display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R.

When a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in from above the display screen 7a and moved toward the lower side of the display screen 7a, the entire display screen 7a is covered with the specific image TGs (smiley marks). At this time, the special image SG may be framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), but here, the special image SG is not mixed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 113 (I) to 113 (K), in the third group notice effect, the special image SG is not mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and the plurality of specific image TGs (smiles) are not mixed. There are cases where only the mark) is framed in, and there are cases where the special image SG is framed in by mixing with a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks). When the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with the plurality of specific image TGs, the expectation that the revival effect is executed is higher than in the case where the special image SG is not framed in. That is, the expectation of a big hit in the fluctuation becomes high. For example, the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is framed in by being mixed with a plurality of specific image TGs is 99%, and the expectation of a jackpot when the special image SG is not framed in is 90%. As a result, the player searches for the special image SG from the plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks), and can improve the interest as compared with the monotonous group notice. Even if the special image SG is not mixed and only a plurality of specific image TGs (smiley marks) are framed in, the degree of expectation that the revival effect will be executed as compared with the case where the third group notice effect is not executed. Will be higher.

As shown in FIGS. 113 (K) and 113 (K), when a plurality of specific image TGs are framed out from the display screen 7a, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R covered with the plurality of specific image TGs are stopped and displayed. It becomes visible at. Here, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are stopped and displayed in the form of a jackpot of "555".

[Effect example]
An example of the effect of the group notice effect is shown below.
[Effect 1]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the first effect of frame-out after the special image SG does not frame-in and a plurality of specific image TGs frame-in during the special figure fluctuation. And, during the special figure fluctuation, it is possible to execute a second effect of frame-in and then frame-out after the special image SG in addition to the plurality of specific image TGs is framed in. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113.
[Effect 2]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 111, the second effect (special image SG is not mixed) is higher than the case where the first effect (effect in which the special image SG is not mixed) is executed during the special figure fluctuation. The expectation of winning is higher when the mixed production) is executed. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113.
[Effect 3]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the second effect (the effect in which the special image SG is mixed), the special image SG is framed in after a plurality of specific image TGs are framed in. Then, after the plurality of specific image TGs are framed out, the frame is out. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 4]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (F), the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R are variablely displayed in the second effect (the effect in which the special image SG is mixed). Sometimes it is executed, and as shown in FIGS. 111 (G) to 111 (L), it may be executed after the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are stopped and displayed in a lost manner, and the second effect is If the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R are executed after the stop display in the lost mode, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may change to the stop display in the hit mode. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113.
[Effect 5]
In the gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 112 and 113, in the second effect (the effect in which the special image SG is mixed), the plurality of specific image TGs and the special image SG are in the first direction. There are cases where the frame is moved in from one side and framed out from the other side, and there are cases where the frame is moved in from one side in the second direction and framed out from the other side. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.
[Effect 6]
The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment includes a display screen 7a of the image display device 7, a right sub display screen 64R, and a left sub display screen 64L. After being displayed on one of the display screens, it is displayed on the display screen 7a, and after being displayed on the display screen 7a, it is displayed on the other side of the sub display screen. According to this configuration, the player can be visually entertained by a novel production that has never existed before, and the interest can be improved.

[Modification example]
The following is a modified example of the group notice effect.
[Modification 1]
In the group notice effects A to C, only one special image SG was produced in the plurality of specific image TGs. However, a plurality of special image SGs may be mixed in a plurality of specific image TGs. Further, in the group notice effects A to C, the special image SG is assumed to be one type of image. However, in the special image SG, the image may be different for each group advance notice effect, or the degree of expectation may be different depending on the content of the image. In the group notice effects A to C, the special image SG was represented as an image having the same size as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may be different in size from the specific image TG. For example, the special image SG may be an image larger than the specific image TG, or may be a smaller image. The special image SG may have the same speed as the moving speed of the plurality of specific image TGs, or may have different speeds. That is, the moving speed of the special image SG may be slower or faster than that of the plurality of specific image TGs. In the group notice effects A to C, the special image SG is set to move in the same direction as the specific image TG. However, the special image SG may move in a different direction from the specific image TG. The special image SG may be stopped during the movement of the specific image TG after frame-in. The special image SG may be framed in later with a timing shift when a plurality of specific image TGs are framed in and moved.

[Modification 2]
Group notice effect In the group notice effect shown in A to C, the effect in which the special image SG is mixed in the plurality of specific image TGs is as an effect in which the special image SG is not mixed in the plurality of specific image TGs. It may be executed. Whether or not to execute the group notice effect and whether or not to mix the special image SG in the plurality of specific image TGs are assigned so that they appear with a predetermined probability.

[Modification 3]
In the group notice effects A to C, the effects in which the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, and 8R appear in a stopped display state after the group notice effects may be other effects. For example, after the group notice effect, the variable display of the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may be displayed, and then the display may be stopped. Alternatively, after the group notice effect, the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R may not be displayed, and then the decorative symbols 8L, 8C, 8R that have been stopped and displayed may appear.

[Modification example 4]
It is assumed that the expected degree of jackpot in FIGS. 111 (A) to 111 (F) and the expected degree of jackpot in FIGS. 111 (G) to 111 (L) are different. That is, it is assumed that the degree of expectation of the jackpot changes depending on the appearance timing of the group notice production. However, the degree of expectation due to the appearance of the group notice effect may be constant regardless of the timing.

[Modification 5]
Group notice effects A to C group notice effects may be combined as appropriate. For example, after the effects of FIGS. 111 (G) to (L), the effects of FIGS. 112 (G) to (L) may be executed.

[Modification 6]
In the group notice effects A to C, only the effects on the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 are shown. However, the group notice effects A to C include the display screen 7a of the image display device 7 and the sub display screen 64 (right sub display screen 64R, left sub display screen 64L, and upper sub display screen 64U). May also be displayed. For example, in the effects of FIGS. 111 (B) to (D) and (I) to (K), a plurality of specific image TGs are framed in to the upper sub display screen 64U before being framed in from above the display screen 7a. After frame-out from the upper sub-display screen 64U, frame-in may be performed from above the display screen 7a. Further, when a plurality of specific image TGs are framed in from above the display screen 7a, the right sub display screen 64R and the left sub display screen 64L may also be framed in from above. The same applies to FIGS. 112 and 113. Further, in the effects of FIGS. 112 (B) to (D) and 113 (B) to (C), a plurality of specific image TGs are framed in from the right side of the right sub display screen 64R and then framed out from the left side. After that, the frame may be framed in from the right side of the display screen 7a and framed out from the left side, and then framed in from the right side of the left sub display screen 64L and framed out from the left side. Further, the plurality of specific image TGs may be moved from the right sub display screen 64R to the upper sub display screen 64U and then to the left sub display screen 64L.

[Example]
In the game machine of this embodiment, the following aspects can be realized.
◇ [Aspect E3-1]
A gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of images.
One of the plurality of types of images is a first image.
One of the plurality of types of images is a second image.
During the special figure fluctuation, the first effect of frame-in and then frame-out of the plurality of first images, and
During the variation of the special figure, it is possible to execute a second effect of frame-in and then frame-out after the plurality of the first images and the second image are framed in.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-2]
The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The expectation of winning is higher when the second effect is executed than when the first effect is executed during the special figure fluctuation.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-3]
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2.
In the second effect, the second image is framed in after the plurality of the first images are framed in, and framed out after the plurality of the first images are framed out.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-4]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
One of the plurality of types of images is a set of decorative symbols capable of notifying the result.
The second effect may be executed when the set of decorative symbols is displayed in a variable manner, or may be executed after the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a lost manner.
If the second effect is executed after the set of decorative symbols is stopped and displayed in a lost manner, the set of decorative symbols may be changed to a stop display in a winning mode.
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-5]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4.
The second effect includes a case where the plurality of the first images and the second image are framed in from one side in the first direction and framed out from the other side, and a second direction. It may move to frame in from one side and frame out from the other side,
A game machine characterized by that.
◇ [Aspect E3-6]
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
The display means includes a main display means and two sub-display means.
In the second effect, the plurality of first images are displayed on one of the sub-display means, then displayed on the main display means, displayed on the main display means, and then displayed on the sub-display means. Displayed on the other side of
A game machine characterized by that.

[Other variants]
In the various display effects described above, a configuration that does not include a part of the effects or an effect other than the above may be included.

The gaming machine 1 of the above embodiment has been described by taking a pachinko gaming machine as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the pachinko gaming machine, the present invention may be applied to a spinning machine such as a slot machine, an arrange ball gaming machine, or a sparrow ball gaming machine. When the game machine 1 is used as a slot machine, the game medium may be changed from a game ball to a game medal.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment includes an effect button 63, a sword member 65, and a select button 68 as an operation unit to be operated by the player, but the operation unit is not limited to these, and a lever or an operation unit to be operated by the player is not limited to these. , Triggers and the like may be used. Further, in the display effect of the game machine 1 of the above embodiment, the display effect may be executed by using the button image representing the effect button 63, but instead of this, the display effect is performed by using the image representing the sword member 65. It may be executed, or the display effect may be executed using an image representing a lever or a trigger.

The game machine 1 of the above-described embodiment is a game machine equipped with a payout device for paying out balls, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, instead of the game machine 1, the present invention may be applied to a game machine that is not equipped with a payout device, such as a so-called enclosed game machine.

The game machine 1 of the above embodiment uses a display device (main display screen 7a, sub display screen 64, etc.) to execute various effects. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, these effects may be combined with each other to form one display effect. That is, two or more production examples and / or modification examples may be combined among the plurality of production examples and / or modification examples described above.
Further, although the game machine 1 includes a sub display screen 64 in addition to the image display device 7 (main display screen 7a), the display effect performed on the main display screen 7a may be performed on the sub display screen 64. The display effect performed on the sub display screen 64 may be performed on the main display screen 7a.

Although the present embodiment has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the above-described embodiments are for facilitating the understanding of the present embodiment and do not limit the present embodiment. This aspect may be modified or improved without departing from its spirit and claims, and this aspect includes its equivalents.

1 ... Game machine 3 ... Game area 5 ... Board lamp 7 ... Image display device 9A, 9B ... Hold image (hold icon)
9C ... The hold image (hold icon)
14 ... 1st movable accessory 15 ... 2nd movable accessory 17 ... Large winning opening opening opening 20 ... 1st starting opening (1st entry opening)
21 ... 2nd start port (2nd ball entry port)
64 ... Sub-display screen 69 ... Frame movable accessory 66 ... Frame lamp 81 ... Game control microcomputer 91 ... Production control microcomputer 101 ... Image control microcomputer

Claims (6)

Equipped with a display screen that displays images
When the fluctuating symbol is fixedly stopped on the display screen, it is possible to execute a fluctuation straddling effect which is an effect having continuity from the end of the current variation to the beginning of the next variation in the next variation.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 1.
The variable straddling effect includes an effect of executing a specific effect in the next variation so as to be continuous with the fixed stop when the fluctuating symbol on the display screen is fixedly stopped in a specific mode.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 2.
When the fluctuating symbol on the display screen is temporarily stopped in the specific mode, the specific effect can be executed in the fluctuation so as to be continuous with the temporary stop.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3.
The fluctuation straddling effect includes a hold continuation effect that takes over the hold change of the change icon in the next change when the change icon displayed in the change area is on hold.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 4.
In the hold continuation effect, when the change icon is held and changed to the first hold mode, the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area in the next change, and the change icon is moved to the change area. When becomes, the first holding mode is set, or the second holding mode is expected to shift to an advantageous game that is more advantageous to the player than the first holding mode.
A game machine characterized by that. The gaming machine according to claim 5.
When the hold icon displayed in the hold area moves to the change area, the change icon of the previous change remains in the change area, and the hold icon becomes the change icon of the previous change. Perform a colliding effect,
A game machine characterized by that.

Images